JP7362173B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not it is a win based on the game ball entering the starting slot, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner according to the lottery result. A gaming machine is known in which, when the result is a jackpot, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device to generate a winning game state.

Furthermore, as such winning games, many gaming machines including a plurality of winning games in which the expected number of acquired game media differs have been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-220861

However, there is still room for further innovation regarding the effects associated with each of the plurality of winning games . Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest by devising the performance for each of a plurality of winning games .

Means 1: a lottery means that performs a lottery based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions;
A benefit granting means capable of granting any one of a plurality of benefits including at least a first benefit and a second benefit, based on the result of the winning lottery by the lottery means;
performance execution means for performing a performance based on the result of the winning/losing lottery;
a performance display means for displaying a performance executed by the performance execution means;
A gaming machine comprising an operation section that can be operated by a player,
The expected number of game media that can be awarded to the player when the second benefit is awarded is configured to be smaller than when the first benefit is awarded,
The blessing image is not displayed on the performance display means when the first benefit is awarded, and the blessing image can be displayed on the performance display means when the second benefit is awarded,
As a precursor to the display of the blessing image, it is possible to execute a sense of anticipation effect, and when the anticipation effect is executed and a specific effect result is obtained instead of a predetermined effect result, the blessing image is always displayed. is configured to display
After the blessing image is displayed, a blessing continuation image different from the blessing image can be displayed, and when the second benefit is granted again, both the anticipation effect and the blessing image are displayed. He made sure that nothing happened;
In a situation where the blessing continuation image is displayed, when a performance suggesting the granting of the first benefit is performed, the blessing continuation image is hidden in the progress of the performance based on the result of the winning lottery. is possible,
Before the performance result is shown in the expectation performance, the degree of expectation for the specific performance result can be suggested by a predetermined performance image,
In a situation where the blessing continuation image is displayed, it is possible to display a prompting image that prompts an operation on the operation unit and a predetermined effect display that can be hidden based on the operation on the operation unit,
In a situation where the blessing continuation image is being displayed, if a performance suggesting the granting of the first benefit is performed, the performance based on the result of the winning lottery may be performed even if the operation section is not operated. In the progress process, the predetermined effect display is hidden together with the prompting image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the lock seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) as seen from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from behind. FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a) and showing the main parts. FIG. 12(c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray of the product of this example and the conventional product. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front and lower. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation unit in a state where the production operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upward moving end position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where it has moved to the raised position. It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downward moving end position. It is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship of the production operation part outer periphery decorative board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected in (a). It is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching part is provided between them, and (c) is an illustration in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can be moved back and forth in the front and back direction, and the production operation unit FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact sensing bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the device. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. 62(a) is a sectional view taken along the line U--U in FIG. 62(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front. (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). 66A is a cross-sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the door frame as it is and the outer layer is transparent. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the closed state. It is a front view showing each decorative board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the part of a production operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 100(a) is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail and the like according to a second embodiment when viewed from the back and showing a portion of the tank rail in an enlarged manner. (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is a ( It is a perspective view of tank rail etc. of a) seen from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carcar line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. It is a perspective view which shows the main body frame provided with the tank rail etc. of 3rd embodiment seen from the right back, and showing the part of the tank rail in an enlarged manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main body frame provided with the tank rail etc. of 3rd embodiment seen from the left back, and showing the tank rail part enlarged. (a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of an external terminal board, and (b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged top part. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 114B is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the upper right back, and (c) is a perspective view of (a) ) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. 116; FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. 116, viewed from behind. (a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the lower right back. 119(a) is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front; FIG. FIG. 119(a) is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along the K-ke line. 119(a) is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 119(a). FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit omitted, as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit in (a) seen from the lower right rear. (a) is a plan view of the board unit in FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Koko line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sasa line in (a). FIG. FIG. 129(a) is a sectional view taken along the line C--C in FIG. 129(a). 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit in FIG. 127 seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 seen from the back. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how the ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 127 is resolved. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of intrusion of a linear unauthorized tool into the board unit of FIG. 127; 128 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 137 viewed from the front right. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 137 when viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 145 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged left side of FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged right side of FIG. 145. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit seen from the back. (a) is a front view of a side unit in the front unit, and (b) is a perspective view of the side unit in the front unit seen from behind. (a) is a front view of the center accessory in the front unit, (b) is an enlarged view of a section A in the direction of arrows in (a), and (c) is a sectional view of (b). It is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the lower left rear. (a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with a panel board and an obstacle nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate disassembled and viewed from the front in FIG. 152, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate disassembled and viewed from the rear in FIG. 152. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of only the center right front plate in FIG. 152 as seen from the front and disassembled as seen from the rear. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. FIG. 3 is a front view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box. (a) is a perspective view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box seen from the back. 157 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box shown in FIG. 157, broken down into main components and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 158 seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the back. (a) is a side view showing a state where the back unit is placed face down using the functional surface part, and (b) is a side view showing a state where the back unit is placed face down using the functional surface part. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front presentation unit and the back lower rear decoration body of the back lower front presentation unit in the back unit have respectively moved to the raised position. The back lower front decoration of the back lower front presentation unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the gaming area, and the back upper and rear decoration of the back upper and rear presentation unit has moved to the upper side of the back lower front decoration. , is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear effect unit is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body. In the state of FIG. 162, the front left side of the game board and the front right side of the back and front decoration of the back and front presentation unit have moved to the open position, and the central decoration has appeared. It is a diagram. A state in which the back top and rear decoration of the back top and rear presentation unit in the back unit has moved to the lowered position, and the back bottom and rear decoration of the back and bottom rear presentation unit has risen and is in contact with the back top and rear decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing. The front of the game board showing the state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back lower front decoration of the back lower front presentation unit have moved to the open position and the central decoration has appeared in the state of FIG. 164 It is a diagram. The back top front decoration of the back top front production unit in the back unit has moved to the lowered position, and the back top and rear decoration of the back top and rear production unit has moved to the rear of the back top front decoration, and the back bottom The back lower front decoration of the front direction unit rises and moves below the back upper front decoration, and at the same time the back lower rear decoration of the back lower rear direction unit rises and moves behind the back lower front decoration. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which it is in contact with the upper and lower back decorations. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment, showing the inside of the game area where game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and ball guiding unit in the right half of the center accessory shown in FIG. 169, seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the back. It is a diagram. (a) is a front view of the ball guidance unit in the center accessory of FIG. 169, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guidance unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sous line in FIG. 171, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the so-so line in FIG. 171, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the so-so line in FIG. 171. 171, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the tartar line in FIG. 171. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 171 as seen from the front right, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 171 as seen from the front left. It is a front view of the game board of a third embodiment. (a) is a perspective view of the assembled front component, game panel, and panel decoration board of the game board in FIG. 174, as seen from the front; FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the assembled panel and panel decorative board seen from behind. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 174, with the front constituent members, game panel, and panel decoration board disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 174, with the front constituent members, game panel, and panel decoration board disassembled and viewed from behind. It schematically shows the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration board, and (a1) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration board turned off, and (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing (a1) in cross section, (b1) of (b) is an explanatory diagram seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration board turned on, and (b2) is an explanatory diagram showing (b1). It is an explanatory view shown in a cross section. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the game panel in a perspective view in which a specifying part having a different form from that of the specifying part in FIG. (c) is an explanatory diagram showing, in a perspective view, a part of the game panel in which the game panel is provided; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel provided with specific parts with different thicknesses together with a panel decoration board, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a game panel provided with specific parts having a conical rear surface. It is an explanatory view showing a panel in cross section together with a panel decoration board, and (c) shows a game panel in which a specific part is provided with a light-shielding coating on the side surface of a blind hole-shaped recessed part in a cross section together with a panel decoration board. It is an explanatory view, and (d) is an explanatory view showing a game panel in which a specific part in which a light-shielding sleeve is provided in a blind hole-like recess is provided in a cross section together with a panel decoration board. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel provided with a specific part formed by a groove-shaped recess along with a panel decoration board, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a game panel provided with a board accommodation recess for accommodating a panel decoration board. It is an explanatory view showing a panel together with a panel decoration board in cross section, and (c) is a game panel in which a specific part filled with a transparent material is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess from the rear surface of the game panel together with a panel decoration board. It is an explanatory view showing a cross section, and (d) is an explanatory view showing a game panel in a cross section together with a panel decoration board in which a specific part filled with a transparent material is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess from the front side of the game panel. be. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a game panel and a panel decoration board whose board thicknesses are changing, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a different relationship from (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a panel board, a back sheet, and a panel decoration board in a game board of a fourth embodiment, and seen from the front. (a) is a plan view showing the configuration of the winning opening in the game board, and (b) is a side sectional view of (a). (a) is a side sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the winning opening of this embodiment, and (b) is a side sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the conventional winning opening. (a) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning hole in which guide pieces of different embodiments are provided in the winning hole where the ball entry direction is inclined. (a) and (b) are perspective views showing a prize opening in which a guiding piece portion of a further different embodiment is provided. (a) and (b) are perspective views showing a prize opening in which a guiding piece portion of a further different embodiment is provided. It is a perspective view showing a conventional winning a prize opening in which the direction of ball entry is inclined. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the starting port unit and the center accessory in the front unit of another embodiment from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the positioning pin and the mounting hole in (a) and the game panel. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged cross-section of the relationship. It is an explanatory view showing a section of a positioning pin in a table unit of a further different embodiment. (a) is an explanatory view showing the location of the positioning pin in the front unit of a different embodiment from the front, (b) is an explanatory view showing (a) in cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view of (b). It is an explanatory diagram showing a state where a part is brought into contact with a game panel in cross section. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing one embodiment of a distribution passage in which the passage is cranked downstream of a detection sensor, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of the distribution passage different from (a). , (c) are explanatory diagrams showing a circulation path having a conventional detection sensor. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of the stop prevention part of the game ball on the rolling surface, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the stop prevention part of a different embodiment from (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of the stop prevention part of the game ball on the rolling surface. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention part of a further different embodiment, and FIG. 1D is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional rolling surface without a stop prevention part. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 196 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 195. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 200 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 198. 200 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on following FIG. 199. It is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first starting port passing process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding performance advance judgment processing (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second starting port passing process (step S234). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a jackpot symbol determination table (B), and a small hit symbol determination table (C). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). This is an example of a table showing the winning probability of a pachinko machine and the distribution of winning symbols of special symbols 1 and 2. This is an example of a table showing the winning probability of a pachinko machine and the distribution of winning symbols of special symbols 1 and 2. It is a transition diagram showing an example of game state transition of a pachinko machine. This is an example of a time saving number table in a low probability non-time saving gaming state. This is an example of a time saving number table in a high probability time saving game state. This is an example of a time saving number table in a low probability time saving game state. This is an example of a time saving number table in a high probability non-time saving gaming state. This is an example of a variation pattern auxiliary table. This is an example of a variation pattern auxiliary table. This is an example of a winning time table. This is an example of a grand prize opening opening time table. This is an example of a big winning opening opening pattern table. This is an example of a big winning opening opening pattern table. This is an example of a big winning opening opening pattern table. This is an example of a simultaneous variation rule table. This is an example of a simultaneous variation rule table. 5 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 4. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 5. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 6. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance from a low probability non-time saving game state to a high probability non-time saving gaming state via a high probability time saving gaming state (with a ceiling). It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance from a low probability non-time saving game state to a high probability non-time saving gaming state via a high probability time saving gaming state (with a ceiling). It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance from a low probability non-time saving game state to a high probability non-time saving gaming state via a high probability time saving gaming state (with a ceiling). It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance in a high probability non-time saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the production of a high probability non-time saving game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance performed when transitioning from a high probability non-time saving gaming state to a low probability time saving gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of comment selection performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection performance.

This embodiment includes the means described below.
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
``A flat game panel in which a game area where games are played is provided in front;
A gaming machine comprising: a decorative body that is visible through the gaming panel; and a rear unit that holds the decorative body and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel. There it is,
The holding body is
A specific surface portion is formed behind the front surface of the decorative body,
The specific surface portion is
The rear unit is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit when viewed from the front.

Here, the "gaming area" refers to the "accepting opening (e.g., starting opening, variable starting opening, etc.) where a special lottery is held to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting gaming media." ``An area where a prize winning hole, a starting prize opening, a big winning opening, a prize winning opening, a V winning opening, etc., where a privilege including a payout of the gaming medium is given by accepting the gaming medium'' is provided. , etc.).

In addition, "gaming panels" are "composed of one member", "composed of a flat panel board and a frame-shaped panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel board", etc.

Furthermore, the "gaming panel" may be transparent, opaque and translucent, or non-translucent. In addition, the materials for the "gaming panel" include "polystyrene," "acrylic resin," "polycarbonate," "acetal resin," "vinyl chloride," "polyethylene terephthalate," "polyethylene," "polypropylene," Examples include "plywood".

In addition, configurations that are "visible" through the game panel include "the game panel is transparent and can be seen through the transparent part of the game panel", "the game panel has openings that penetrate from the front and back," "Those that are visible through the openings of the gaming panels."

Furthermore, the "decoration object" may be immovable or may be movable as the game progresses. In addition, the "decoration body" may be capable of emitting decoration or may not be capable of emitting decoration. Furthermore, the "decoration" of the decorative body may be three-dimensional decoration with unevenness such as a 3D model or relief, printing or display (liquid crystal display device, organic EL display device, light guide plate, etc.), etc. It may be a two-dimensional decoration.

In addition, the "decoration" of the decorative body includes "decoration imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the gaming machine," "decoration imitating a predetermined item in line with the concept of the gaming machine," and "decoration imitating a predetermined item in line with the concept of the gaming machine." Examples include "decoration that imitates a predetermined background or scene in accordance with the concept of the game machine," "decoration with a predetermined logo or serifs, etc. in accordance with the concept of the game machine," "decoration with a geometric pattern," and the like.

In addition, "holding body" refers to "a box-shaped thing that holds the decorative body at the front end or inside and is open at the front," "a frame-like thing that holds the decorative body at the front end or inside," and "a box-like thing that holds the decorative body at the front end or inside." A box frame-shaped device that is held at the front end or inside and holds an effect display device that can display an effect image at the rear. Furthermore, the "holding body" may be one that holds the decorative body so that the front side of the decorative body protrudes forward beyond the front end of the holding body, or it may be one that holds the decorative body so that the front side of the decorative body projects further forward than the front end of the holding body. The decoration may be held so that it does not protrude forward.

Furthermore, the "specific surface part" includes "a plane part parallel to the front surface of the game panel", "a curved part concave to the rear in a conical or truncated conical shape", and "a polygonal pyramidal or truncated polygonal conical part to the rear". Examples include a concave multifaceted part, a curved part protruding forward in a conical or truncated conical shape, and a multifaceted part protruding forward in a polygonal pyramidal or truncated conical shape.

Furthermore, the "specific surface section" may be provided at the front end of the holder, or may be provided at a position rearward of the front end of the holder. Further, the "specific surface section" may be composed of a plurality of island-shaped surface sections separated from each other, or may be composed of a plurality of band-shaped surface sections along each edge of the holder. The holding body may have a frame-like surface portion along the periphery of the holding body, or it may be formed by a single band frame-like or frame-like surface portion along the periphery of the holding body.

In addition, "predetermined parts" include "a mounting table such as a workbench used during assembly, transportation, storage, etc.", "tools used in assembly work", "other parts before assembly", etc.

By the way, it is conceivable to make the decoration closer to the game area and make it easier to see the decoration by having the holding body hold the decoration at a position as far forward as possible. However, if the decoration is held as far forward as possible with respect to the holder, the workbench, tools, other members (components), etc. will be placed in front of the decoration when assembling the game machine. By making contact easier, the decorative body is more likely to be damaged. If the decoration is damaged, it must be replaced with a new one, which increases the cost of the gaming machine. Furthermore, if the decorative body is assembled into a gaming machine without noticing that it has scratches, the presence of the scratches will make the gaming machine look bad, which will reduce the player's interest.

According to the configuration of means 1, there is a flat game panel in which a game area where games are played is provided in the front, a decoration that is visible through the game panel, and a decoration that holds the decoration and is attached to the rear side of the game panel. a rear unit having a holding body; and a holding body of a gaming machine having a holding body having a specific surface portion formed at a rear side of the front surface of the decorative body; It is arranged so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit. (see description).

As a result, since the specific surface part is provided at the rear of the front surface of the decorative body, it is possible to make the decorative body more noticeable than the specific surface part, and it is also possible to relatively provide the decorative body further forward. The distance from the player to the decoration can be made shorter than before, and the decoration of the decoration can be more easily seen. In addition, since the decoration can be placed further forward, the front of the decoration can be brought closer to the front and back position of the play area, so when the focus is on the play area, the decoration is also focused. As a result, the decoration of the decoration body can be clearly seen while viewing the inside of the game area. For this reason, it is possible to sufficiently and reliably exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body, and it is possible to entertain the players and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since the holder that holds the decoration is provided with a specific surface part, for example, when assembling a game machine, the holder holds the decoration and the holder is placed on a mounting table such as a workbench. When the predetermined member is placed face down with its front end facing downward, a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member is interposed between the predetermined member and the specific surface portion, the height being higher than the distance from the front surface of the decorative body to the specific surface portion. This makes it possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member with the front surface of the decoration. At this time, since the specific surface part is provided to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit, when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the holder will not tilt or swing, and the holder will remain stable. Can be placed face down. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the front surface of the decorative body due to contact with specified members, maintain the decorative body in good condition, and prevent defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the decorative body. This can be prevented, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Note that the columnar or block-shaped intermediate member may protrude from the predetermined member.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the specific surface part can avoid contact between the decorative body and the predetermined member, when the holding body holding the decorative body is placed face down, the rear side of the holding body Can perform installation work of other parts and wiring work.

Furthermore, since the specific surface portion is provided on the holder, the holder can be placed face down even when no decoration is being held, compared to the case where the specific surface portion is provided on the decorative body. Therefore, the holder can be placed face down even during assembly, making it possible to cope with various working conditions.

In addition, when the specific surface part provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit is constituted by a plurality of surface parts separated from each other, it is desirable to provide each specific surface part at the same position in the front-rear direction. As a result, when the intermediate member is placed face down on the predetermined member, the length (height) of the intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion of the holder and the predetermined member can be made the same, and the above-mentioned effect can be achieved. Not only can the effects be reliably achieved, but also the effort required for assembly work can be reduced. To be more specific, when the positions of the respective specific surfaces are different in the front-rear direction, the length of the intermediate member interposed between the specific surface of the holder and the predetermined member when the holder or rear unit is placed face down. (height) will be different for each. As a result, when placing the holder or rear unit face down, there is a risk of using an intermediate member with a length that does not correspond to the specific surface part. There is a risk that the rear unit will tilt and the front surface of the decorative body will come into contact with the predetermined member. On the other hand, as mentioned above, by making the positions of the respective specific surfaces the same in the front-rear direction, the lengths (heights) of the intermediate members can all be made the same. When placing the back unit face down, it is sufficient to prepare intermediate members of the same length, and it is possible to prevent the use of intermediate members with different lengths that do not correspond to the specific surface part. It is possible to avoid problems caused by contact between predetermined members of the game machine, and also to reduce the labor involved in assembly work, etc., and to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

Further, the functional surface portion may have a shape other than a flat surface, such as a shape that is concave toward the rear or a shape that projects forward. As a result, the intermediate member that comes into contact with the functional surface when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down is shaped to fit (engage) with the shape of the functional surface, so that the holder or the rear unit can be placed face down. When placed, movement of the predetermined member in the direction along the surface can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional surface part from falling off the intermediate member and the holding body or the rear unit from tilting or falling, so that the front side of the decorative body will come into contact with the specified member when it tilts or falls. This can be avoided, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, the specific surface portion may be provided so as to face the rear of the rear unit (visibly recognized when viewed from the rear). As a result, when performing assembly work such as holding a decorative object etc. on the holder from the front, with the front end of the holder facing upward (lying on the back), there is a space between the specific surface part and the prescribed member. By interposing a pillar-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member that is longer than the distance from the specific surface part to the rear surface of the rear unit, contact of the predetermined member with the rear surface of the rear unit can be avoided. The unit can be stabilized in a supine state, and assembly work from the front end side of the holder can be facilitated.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the specific surface portion be provided at the rear of the front surface of the holder. Thereby, when attaching the holding body to the rear side of the game panel, the specific surface portion does not come into contact with the game panel, and the holding body (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problem.

Further, the holding body further includes a regulating part capable of regulating the relative movement of a member that is in contact with the specific surface part (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface part and a predetermined member). It's okay. As a result, during assembly work, etc., when the intermediate member is interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and the specific surface part and the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the intermediate member comes into contact with the regulating part. Movement of the holder (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be restricted. Therefore, the regulating part of the holder can prevent the specific surface part from falling off the intermediate member and the holder or the rear unit from tilting or falling. can be prevented from coming into contact with the predetermined member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, when the above-described restriction section is provided on the holder, the restriction section can restrict the movement of the holder or the rear unit in the direction along the predetermined member. Since the unit can be made difficult to move, assembly work can be easily performed in a face down state, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the front surface of the decorative body protrudes further forward than the holder. As a result, the front surface of the decoration protrudes further forward than the front surface of the holding body, so the distance from the player to the decoration can be made shorter than before, and the decoration on the decoration can be more easily seen. It is possible to provide a game machine that can make the decorations stand out and strongly attract the attention of the players. In addition, when the front surface of the decoration body protrudes further forward than the front surface of the holding body, the front-back position of the decoration body (decoration) can be brought as close as possible to the front-rear position of the play area. Therefore, when the game area is focused, the decorations are also brought into focus, making it possible to clearly see the decorations on the decorations while viewing the inside of the game area, and ensuring that the decorations on the decorations are visible to the player. be able to. For this reason, it is possible to sufficiently and reliably exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body, and it is possible to entertain the players and suppress a drop in interest.

Further, the decoration may be made to be able to perform a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. As a result, when the decoration performs a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game, the decoration can be made to stand out due to the performance, so it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, and the player can It is possible to entertain the players with the presentation, and also to make the players think that something good is going to happen, to increase the players' expectations for the game and to suppress a decline in interest. can.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
“The specific surface portion is
It is characterized in that it is provided at a rear side of the front surface of the holding body.

According to the configuration of means 2, the specific surface portion is provided at the rear of the front surface of the holder (see the description regarding the functional surface portion 3011 in the back box 3010 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]). .

Thereby, when attaching the holding body to the rear side of the game panel, the specific surface portion does not come into contact with the game panel, and the holding body (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problem.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
“The holder is
It is characterized in that it further includes a regulating part capable of regulating relative movement of the member in contact with the specific surface part.

Here, the restriction part is defined as "a thing that extends forward in a flat plate shape from the periphery of the specific surface part", "a thing that protrudes forward from the periphery of the specific surface part", "a hole-shaped thing", and "a groove-like thing". Examples include "things of", etc.

According to the configuration of means 3, the holding body is provided with a regulating portion capable of regulating the relative movement of the member that is in contact with the specific surface portion (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member). , (see the description regarding the back box 3010 and the functional surface portion 3011 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, during assembly work, etc., when the intermediate member is interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and the specific surface part and the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the intermediate member comes into contact with the regulating part. Movement of the holder (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be restricted. Therefore, the regulating part of the holder can prevent the specific surface part from falling off the intermediate member and the holder or the rear unit from tilting or falling. can be prevented from coming into contact with the predetermined member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the movement of the holding body or the rear unit in the direction along the predetermined member can be restricted by the regulating part, it is possible to make it difficult for the holding body or the rear unit to move when placed face down. This makes it easier to assemble the game machine, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“The decorative body is
The front surface projects further forward than the holding body.

Here, the "decorative body" whose front surface protrudes forward beyond the holding body is defined as "the rear surface of the part of the game panel where the game area is provided at least in front is recessed forward, and the recessed part Examples include "a decorative body into which the front end is inserted" and "a decorative body which has an opening penetrating the game panel in the front-rear direction and whose front end is inserted into the opening".

According to the configuration of means 4, the front surface of the decorative body is made to protrude forward beyond the holding body (in the [Detailed Description] (See description regarding body 3201).

As a result, the front surface of the decoration protrudes further forward than the front surface of the holding body, so the distance from the player to the decoration can be made shorter than before, and the decoration on the decoration can be more easily seen. It is possible to provide a game machine that can make the decorations stand out and strongly attract the attention of the players. In addition, since the front surface of the decoration body protrudes further forward than the front surface of the holding body, the front-back position of the front surface (decoration) of the decoration body is brought as close as possible to the front-rear position of the play area. Therefore, when you focus on the game area, the decorations will also come into focus, making it possible to clearly see the decorations on the decorations while viewing the inside of the game area, and making it easier for players to see the decorations on the decorations. You can definitely show it. For this reason, it is possible to sufficiently and reliably exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body, and it is possible to entertain the players and suppress a drop in interest.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The decorative body is
The game is characterized by being able to perform a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game.

Here, "according to the progress of the game" means that "the game media inserted into the game area by the player is In response to the acceptance of gaming media into the winning slot, accessory winning slot, V winning slot, etc.), the gaming media entered into the gaming area by the player is placed in a specific area provided within the gaming area. In response to passing through a receiving opening (e.g., a gate, warp passage, stage, etc.) provided within the gaming area (e.g., a gate, warp passage, stage, etc.), the gaming media inserted into the gaming area by the player may be "According to the special lottery result drawn by acceptance into the gaming area", "gaming media inserted into the gaming area by the player is accepted into the receiving opening (for example, starting opening) provided in the gaming area". Depending on the type of performance (for example, reach performance, jackpot performance, loss performance, etc.) to suggest the special lottery result drawn by "depending on the length of the driving blank of the gaming medium driven into the gaming area", and the like.

In addition, examples of the predetermined "effects" include a "light-emitting effect," a "movable effect," a "display effect of an effect image," and the like.

According to the structure of the means 5, the decoration is made to be able to perform a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the decoration unit 3200 (See the description regarding the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201).

As a result, when the decoration performs a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game, the decoration can be made to stand out due to the performance, so it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, and the player can It is possible to entertain the players with the presentation, and also to make the players think that something good is going to happen, to increase the players' expectations for the game and to suppress a decline in interest. can.

Means 6: In a gaming machine,
``A flat game panel in which a game area where games are played is provided in front;
A gaming machine comprising: a decorative body that is visible through the gaming panel; and a rear unit that holds the decorative body and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel. There it is,
The decorative body is
The front surface projects further forward than the holding body, and is capable of performing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game,
The holding body is
a specific surface portion provided behind the front surface of the holding body so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit when viewed from the front;
and a regulating section capable of regulating relative movement of the member in contact with the specific surface section.

According to the configuration of the means 6, a flat game panel in which a game area where games are played is provided in the front, a decoration body that is visible through the game panel, and a decoration body that holds the decoration body and is attached to the rear side of the game panel. A gaming machine comprising a rear unit having a holding body, the decorative body having a front surface protruding forward beyond the holding body, and a rear unit having a holding body, the decorative body having a front surface protruding forward from the holding body, and a predetermined The holding body has a specific surface section provided behind the front surface of the holding body so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit when viewed from the front, and a relative position between a member in contact with the specific surface section. and a regulating section capable of regulating the movement of objects.

As a result, the decoration, which is visible through the game panel where the game area is provided in the front, is held by the holder attached to the back of the game panel, and the front of the decoration is moved forward of the holder. Since the decoration is protruded, the distance from the player to the decoration can be made shorter than before, and the decoration of the decoration can be more easily seen. At this time, since the specific surface part is provided behind the front of the holder, the specific surface part will not come into contact with the game panel, and the holder (rear unit) can be installed on the back side of the game panel without any problems. At the same time, it is possible to make the decoration stand out more than the specific surface portion. In addition, since the front surface of the decoration body protrudes further forward than the front surface of the holding body, the front-back position of the front surface (decoration) of the decoration body is brought as close as possible to the front-rear position of the play area. Therefore, when you focus on the game area, the decorations will also come into focus, making it possible to clearly see the decorations on the decorations while viewing the inside of the game area, and making it easier for players to see the decorations on the decorations. You can definitely show it. For this reason, the decorations can stand out and strongly attract the attention of the players, and the decorative effects of the decorations can be fully and reliably exhibited, making the players entertained. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the decoration is capable of performing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, when the decoration performs a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, the decoration can be made to stand out by the effect. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the player can enjoy the performance by the decoration, and the player can feel that something good is going to happen. , it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the holder that holds the decoration is provided with a specific surface part, for example, when assembling a game machine, the holder holds the decoration and can be used on a mounting table such as a workbench. When the predetermined member is placed face down with its front end facing downward, a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member is interposed between the predetermined member and the specific surface portion, the height being higher than the distance from the front surface of the decorative body to the specific surface portion. This makes it possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member with the front surface of the decoration. At this time, since the specific surface part is provided to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit, when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the holder will not tilt or swing, and the holder will remain stable. Can be placed face down. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the front surface of the decorative body due to contact with specified members, maintain the decorative body in good condition, and prevent defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the decorative body. This can be prevented, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Note that the columnar or block-shaped intermediate member may protrude from the predetermined member.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the specific surface part can avoid contact between the decorative body and the predetermined member, when the holding body holding the decorative body is placed face down, the rear side of the holding body Can perform installation work of other parts and wiring work.

Furthermore, since the holding body is provided with a specific surface portion, the holding body can be placed face down even in the middle of assembly without holding the decoration body, compared to a case where the decoration body is provided with a specific surface portion. , can correspond to various working conditions.

In addition, since the holding body has a regulating part that can regulate the relative movement of a member that is in contact with the specific surface part (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface part and a predetermined member). , During assembly work, etc., when the intermediate member is interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and a specific surface part and the holder or rear unit is placed face down, the intermediate member comes into contact with the regulating part, causing the holder to Movement of the (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be restricted. Therefore, the regulating part of the holder can prevent the specific surface part from falling off the intermediate member and the holder or the rear unit from tilting or falling. can be prevented from coming into contact with the predetermined member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, as described above, since the movement of the holder or the rear unit in the direction along the predetermined member can be restricted by the regulating portion of the holder, it is difficult to move the holder or the rear unit when it is placed face down. Therefore, it is possible to easily assemble the gaming machine while it is placed face down, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Note that the specific surface portion may have a shape other than a plane, such as a shape that is concave toward the rear or a shape that projects forward. As a result, when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the intermediate member that comes into contact with the specific surface part has a shape that fits (engages) with the shape of the specific surface part, so that the holder or the rear unit can be placed face down. When placed, movement of the predetermined member in the direction along the surface can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding body or the rear unit from tilting or falling due to the specific surface falling off the intermediate member, so that the front side of the decorative body comes into contact with the specified member when it tilts or falls. This can be avoided, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, the specific surface portion may be provided so as to face the rear of the rear unit (visibly recognized when viewed from the rear). As a result, when performing assembly work such as holding a decorative object etc. on the holder from the front, with the front end of the holder facing upward (lying on the back), there is a space between the specific surface part and the prescribed member. By interposing a pillar-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member that is longer than the distance from the specific surface part to the rear surface of the rear unit, contact of the predetermined member with the rear surface of the rear unit can be avoided. The unit can be stabilized in a supine state, and assembly work from the front end side of the holder can be facilitated.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
The gaming machine is
a plurality of receiving ports provided in the gaming area so as to be able to receive gaming media;
The pachinko machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of the game media into the receiving port.

Here, the "acceptance opening" includes "a general winning opening that is always open in the gaming area" and "an advantageous gaming state that is always open in the gaming area and gives the player an advantage by accepting gaming media." ``Starting prize opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate ``Variable winning openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.)'', ``regular symbols that are drawn when gaming media passes through a specific area within the gaming area (gate, through chucker, etc.) Depending on the lottery result, a variable winning hole (variable starting hole, accessory prize hole, etc.) that can accept gaming media, or a specific area within the gaming area (e.g. gate, chucker, etc.) According to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the medium passes, it becomes possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery is held to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium will generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. "Variable starting winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game media accepted into the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the distribution means" ``The advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous is a grand winning opening or a prize winning opening that can open and close in a predetermined pattern to accept game media,'' and the like.

In addition, as a "pachinko machine", "a lottery means that performs a special lottery to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by receiving gaming media into the starting hole, and a special symbol drawn by the lottery means" Special lottery result display means for displaying the special symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery results and then stopping and displaying the special symbols to display the lottery results of the special symbols drawn based on the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols; and the special lottery result display means. an advantageous gaming state generating means that opens and closes the big prize opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state when a lottery result of a special symbol that generates an advantageous gaming state is displayed (a so-called DigiPachi machine). )", "a sorting means for distributing game media accepted into the prize winning opening, and opening and closing the prize winning mouth in a predetermined pattern when the game media distributed by the sorting means are received in the V prize opening. A machine that is equipped with an advantageous gaming state generation means that generates an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (a so-called Hanemono machine), and a machine that has a big prize opening and a prize winning opening, The grand prize opening or the accessory prize opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the media, and when the game media accepted in the accessory prize opening is distributed to the V prize opening, the prize is won. A machine equipped with an advantageous gaming state generating means that opens and closes a prize opening or a big winning opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (a so-called multifunction machine).

According to the structure of the means 7, the gaming machine has a plurality of receiving ports provided in the gaming area so as to be able to receive gaming media, and a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media in response to receiving the gaming media into the receiving port. This is a pachinko machine equipped with a device. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the effects of the above-mentioned means can be achieved.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 that includes a payout control board 633 in addition to a power board 630 that includes a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player and a power switch 630a that can power on the pachinko machine 1. , a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. We are prepared.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is provided, an effect display device 1600 which is placed in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100. A front unit 2000 is provided, and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined benefit for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B. (For example, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted into or passes through the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2004, gate 2002, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. Thus, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, and displays the lower right unit 2400 and the back unit. The back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 of 3000, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper and rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, etc. are used to perform light emitting effects and movable effects. , can entertain players.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis, and are attached to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flat to the right on the right side surface from the part opposite to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulged portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat plate-like lower lateral fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper lateral fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 13a, and The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 23a, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d has a flat plate shape and extends briefly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting portion 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. There is also a box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first one. Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). This grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the curtain front member 42 (curtain interior space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders and communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the plurality of inclined blades 46b transmit the air vibrations emitted from the curtain plate inner space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 to the handle cover unit 290 located diagonally above and in front. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player inserts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (game ball B driving device), the main body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is opened toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, it is not released from the port member 47 to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 or to other players who are roaming around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the performance sound can be heard, the interest of the players can be attracted by the performance sound, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output sound with deeper bass, thereby entertaining the players and preventing them from losing interest.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21(a) seen from the front bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a part on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal part 60a vertically and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 , a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 , a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 , and the upper side of the pan unit 200 . a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit; The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a door window 101a penetrating back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 installed near the right end in rear view at the lower rear side of door frame base 101, and the back side of door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side in view, the handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, the handle unit 180 moves the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher. 540 to play a game by hitting into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side in a front view so that the hinge can rotate, and the front side of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 The gaming area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. .

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the door frame base 101 in the front and rear directions and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side forming the inner periphery and both left and right sides are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed at the lower right corner of the front surface in front view and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.). A cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b when viewed from the front. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front and back and allows the ball feeding unit 140 to face the entrance 141a and the ball exit 141b forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 32, 33, and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in front view of the upper part of a rectangle extending vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decorative board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board etc. of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (the part extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with an open front and left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat door frame base 101 and imparting rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically spaced apart from each other on the back side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are engaged with the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left, right, and upper sides of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch part 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular in front view, and flat protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protrusion piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. Figure 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of a conventional pachinko machine. FIG. 3D is a perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, and FIG. 36(b) shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 34(a). It is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock, and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening/closing and locking the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular key hole 132 provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 that is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates when a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132 is rotated, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction at a lower part than the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a part to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A first arm 136 in the form of a band plate, whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the second cam member 135, and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135; A second arm 137 in the form of a band plate is rotatably attached at a position below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to the rear cover 115 and both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115 from the rear side, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side of the cylinder attachment frame 115 so as to be rotatable therewith. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axis. are doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a protruding outward from the lower ends of the left and right sides in a cylindrical shape and is locked in the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side is fitted with a screw (not shown). It is removably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be explained. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the cylinder body 131 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. There is. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment As shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b), a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. At the same time, both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to positions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise at an angle of 90 degrees from a normal state using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. That will happen. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is There is almost no force trying to rotate it clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is applied to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134, and the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. The power to do so increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 will be larger than that on the first arm 136. , the second cam member 135 is rotated counterclockwise mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

In addition, when the key is used to return to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees clockwise, an action opposite to that described above is used. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from a normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the first cam member 134 moves downward, and the second arm 137 whose upper end is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 can be rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is hardly any force trying to rotate it in the direction of .

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction. The second cam member 135 rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is transmitted to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. and the rotation center of the first cam member 134 in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 becomes smaller in the first arm 136, whereas In the arm 137, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force increases, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

In addition, when the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state and then rotated 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the key operates in the opposite manner to the above. I will do it.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached with the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) is connected at any rotational position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected to transmit the rotation. By transmitting the rotation, the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133) can be rotated, and the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked effectively.

Moreover, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, by transmitting rotation by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism, the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to any desired position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the pachinko machine 1 The increase in costs can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who is aware of the configuration may insert a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 using the tool, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 may be opened and a fraudulent act may be carried out. On the other hand, the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment has the rotation transmitting member 133 located at a position away from the axis (backward) of the cylinder body 131, so that a tool cannot be inserted into the rear of the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present in the relevant part, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 with respect to the first arm 136, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. The portion of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 that is attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts furthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It becomes a state of being. Therefore, by positioning the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at the dead center using either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if the rotation cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137. The key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly without much resistance being applied to the rotation, making it easy to unlock and lock the lock, and without forcing the key inserted into the keyhole to be rotated. This can prevent the key from being damaged, and can prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and a pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Moreover, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 having a smooth rod shape (band plate shape). Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, there is a risk that the gear will rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 will be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. By making the arm 136 and the second arm 137 rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to get caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 can be moved. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and it is possible to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 from being unlocked due to unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650. be able to.

Note that in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but is not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts. , etc.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 37(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141 and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extracting port 141b on the rear side of the ball extracting member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. A weight portion 143d protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is moved downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, and the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 167) of the dispensing control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission section 242b, causing the operation transmission section 242b to move downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part 242b, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. The partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

Note that the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, in which the operation transmitting portion 242b that the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with, is biased upward by a spring, so that the game ball B is not placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring through the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extracting member 143, etc. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142 when viewed from the rear. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proofing member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed in which an illegal game ball B is moved in and out of the first starting port 2004 etc. by manipulating the attached string, the illegal game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launching device 540 is The force causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is inserted. The ball can be cut at the narrowed part of the shape, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 39(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and communicates the lower normal delivery passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. Ball passage 150a, and a full ball receiver that opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full ball dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. A port 150b is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives the filled game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open toward the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received in the full ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed against the body frame 4, and also allows the game area 5a to be visible from the player side (front). This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, and is spaced apart from side to side. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player to control the game ball B in the upper tray 201. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be explained. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 that are attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 that will be described later; and a disc-shaped handle guide 196 that is attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. A front lens 185 is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and the transmission gear 188 through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d are inserted into the three grooves 181c, respectively. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (three in this case) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring part 195c connecting the tips of the parts 195b, and two rings extending in an arc shape around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub part 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend counterclockwise from positions at angles of 120 degrees. The three spoke portions 195b extend to a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

This handle 195 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated to be electrically continuous from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect a touch on the handle 195 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, even if the outer ring portion 195c is rotated, the game ball B can be hit.

The handle guide 196 includes a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the attachment stays 196b are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 such that the guide portions 196a are located behind the outer ring portions 195c of the handle 195. The movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, into the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three attachment bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two on the upper left of the outer circumference, two on the upper right of the outer circumference, and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. (See Figure 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decoration board 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls each group with 3 systems, for a total of 15 systems, so that each of the 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups can emit light in full color. That's what I do.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. . When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. Each group of the 10 LEDs 184a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since this handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which number is greater than the number of electric wires making up the wiring cable to be connected, is controlled individually (in this case, as a group). Since the number of electric wires can be reduced and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

The front handle lens 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward, and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a three-dimensional lens member made of a transparent member. The front handle lens 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes depending on the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes in accordance with the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 changes. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with a force depending on the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When a player touches the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the static electricity acting on the player and prevents the player from touching the handle 195. To detect. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the solenoid fires with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 195 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The single button operation sensor 194 detects a pressing operation of the single button 193 by the player. When the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button By releasing the pressing operation of 193, it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side than the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. an inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; an annular handle cover decorative board 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted; It includes an annular board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylinder part 291a that extends back and forth with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the outer circumferential ring part 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylinder part 291a that has an inner diameter that becomes smaller toward the front from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a. a cylindrical rear cylinder part 291c that penetrates the middle wall part 291b and extends back and forth with an inner diameter that allows insertion of the base 181a of the handle base 181; and an inner periphery of the rear cylinder part 291c. The handle base 181 is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) protrusions 291d that protrude inwardly from the handle base 181 and extend back and forth, and are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion in the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a. A cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward to 291f, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a, and a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a in a region between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e. An opening 291h passing through the lower part of the portion 291a is provided.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate shape with an outwardly bulging cross section from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively unrotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer cylindrical portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylindrical portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in a range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three circumferential directions at angular intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearwardly than the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the U-shaped guide portion By positioning the guide piece 291g within the guide portion 196a, it is possible to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a to the vicinity of the flange part 291e, and has a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and passes through the front cylinder part 291a. .

The inner 292 includes an annular base 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and a larger outer diameter than the flange part 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c which are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to near the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base part 292a from the front, and the base part 292a is located behind the flange part 291e. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape that swells outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 groups: 2 on the bottom left from the center, 2 on the left, 2 on the top left, 2 on the top right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the bottom right. (See Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and is designed to control a total of 18 systems, 3 systems for each group, so that each of the 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and signals from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as address, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. When the LED driver 293b of the steering wheel cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b divides the LED driver into six groups according to the command. Each set of the 12 LEDs 293a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The board cover 294 includes an annular front plate part 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and approximately the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base part 292a of the inner 292, and a front plate part 294a. It has a cylindrical side plate part 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward for a short distance. In this board cover 294, a front plate part 294a is located between the flange part 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and a side plate part 294b extends to the base part 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at the front end that has the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and has a spindle (kamakura-shaped or bowl-shaped) shape that expands toward the rear. , etc.), and is provided with a plurality of cutout openings 295b (four in this case) in the circumferential direction, which are cut out from the rear end toward the front. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and a plurality of cutout openings 295b are formed to match the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). Specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). Note that when molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled into the pachinko machine 1, and the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is placed inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291. The handle 195, the front handle lens 185, and the like are positioned in front of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is connected to the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 while sandwiching the part that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. 101b.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, an outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outside of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. This handle guide 196 has a rear end side of the guide part 196a inserted (locked) between the front cylinder part 291a and the outer cylinder part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange part 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, so that the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 can emit light. In addition to being able to decorate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 with light emitting light, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light emitting light.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 has a cutout opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. This alleviates the mental anxiety of the player who inserts his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub part 195a and the outer peripheral ring part 195c of the handle 195. I can do it.

Note that the upper notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper notch 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening 291h, and the lower side of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 is inserted. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the bottom It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they will pass through the gap between the front cylinder part 291a and the leg part 292b of the inner 292, and It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed in the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame 2. It is provided on the extension line of the blade part 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid body 40 in the inclination direction. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) released obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It is possible to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player inserts his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (playing device for driving game ball B), the main body frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, you can hook your finger on the right side notch opening 295b and pull it. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring part 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring part 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by gripping the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b by hooking your fingers on the handle cover 295. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant force even if the user does not keep twisting his hand. In this way, since the game ball B can be driven in by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the player can select a driving operation suitable for the player.

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c is provided, and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is not provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have a shape that has never been seen before, can be seen in the area where the player is playing, giving a strong impact to the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play at the pachinko machine 1, and to encourage the players who are roaming around the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to play the game. It is possible to make it easier for players to select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, when operating the handle 195, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from that of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained and amused by the new sensation of operating the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and outputs a performance sound from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to The air inside the enclosure 624 is vibrated by the box 623, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 is caused by sound pressure through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 transfer the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c. Stimulation by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the gaming state in the gaming area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 can be supplied to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. , it is possible to surprise the player, foreshadow the arrival of an opportunity, and change the amount of operation of the handle, thereby entertaining the player and making it difficult for the player to get bored. , it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

In addition, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the hands and fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, the stress on the player can be alleviated and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, as described above, the handle 195 and The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle cover unit 290 is provided, is absorbed by the grill member 46. Since the stimulation is guided by the plurality of blades 46b, various sensors provided on the handle 195 (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.), the bearing mechanism, etc., it is possible to make the handle unit 180 difficult to damage, and the damage to the handle unit 180 can cause injury to the player. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer circumferential ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to a steering wheel of a car, so it is similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine that allows players to play without hesitation. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

Furthermore, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a downwardly facing portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Because of the provision of the This makes it possible to give a feeling of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, which reduces the player's anxiety about inserting his or her fingers into the handle cover unit 290, and makes the player feel more comfortable. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a penetrating notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened toward the front, even if liquid such as a drink or the game ball B gets into the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for liquid etc. discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has a plurality of handle cover 295 having the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub part 195a allows the handle to be grasped and operated with the hand, similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the spoke part 195b allows the operation to be performed using only the fingers. The handle cover unit can be operated by using the portion 195c like a steering wheel of a car, by gripping the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b by putting your fingers on the outer ring portion 195c, or by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which operations such as pinching the inside and outside of the ball 290 with fingers can be performed, and various driving operations (handle operations) for driving game balls B can be performed. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate depending on the game state, the player's state, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b may be gripped with fingers, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, it is also possible to perform handle operations that cannot be performed with conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to provide players with a wide variety of handle operations. , it is possible to make steering wheel operations more enjoyable and prevent players from getting bored.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance in which the handle 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a good appearance and attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary. By suppressing the upward pressure on the gaming area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to avoid narrowing the gaming area 5a, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a relatively large. The large gaming area 5a allows the pachinko machine 1 to stand out, making it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even when the player operates the handle 195, the light-emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c is not obstructed by the player's hands, making the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c more noticeable. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players.

Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look bad, and the door frame 3 can have a good look.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring part 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and also includes a flange part 291e and a flange part 291e that restricts movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer ring part 195c. 195c and the spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke parts 195b and the outer ring part 195c Even if the handle 195 is touched, the game ball B can be driven in, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made capable of a variety of driving operations (handle operations) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being hit in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and a plate base unit 210 attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is attached to and protrudes forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) that is attached to the right side of the mounting base, and a ball that is attached to the top of the mounting base. A rental operation unit 220, an upper plate ball pre-extraction unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit, It is equipped with

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, a plate left decoration unit 270 and A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touched and operated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, and an operation section base 315. An annular production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the top surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the production operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320, and an operation part attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A relay board unit 330 is provided.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit 350 that can protrude upward from the production operation cover unit 310 and is provided with the production operation unit 301, and a production operation unit 350 that is attached to the operation base 315 to operate the production operation. A production operation part lifting mechanism 360 that supports the production operation part unit 350 so as to be able to rise and fall, and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protrusion force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. There is.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is formed into a container shape that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center on the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right in front view, and has a guide passage section 201a (FIG. 73) whose depth in the front and back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage section 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage section 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled into the tray unit 200, its bottom surface extends from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

In addition, the guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls on it), the game ball B can remove static electricity.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. It is a sectional view showing the main part, and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray of the product of this example and the conventional product. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed into a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided at the front of the center axis. The lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed into a cylindrical shape extending straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the lower plate ball supply port 211j is configured to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202b, if the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265, the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed. Since the ball extraction hole 202b and the ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower tray 202, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B from inside the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are transferred to the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower tray 202. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the details will be described later, but as shown in FIG. It is tilted to. To be more specific, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 at the portion directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow therethrough. It is tilted diagonally forward to the left so that the distance is the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located to the left of the central axis line (the line shown by the dashed line) of the rear end of the lower plate ball supply port 211c (the ball discharge port 150d). I am moving it to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower plate 202 (the part of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a moves to the left. With 202a closed, the game balls B can be prevented from being concentrated and stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray ball supply is stopped. Since the left side wall of the opening 211c extends diagonally and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which the game balls B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray ball The game ball B released from the post-ejection unit 240 (ball ejection guiding path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. This allows the game balls B to be properly stored throughout the lower tray 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area left in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a pan unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the pan unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper plate ball operating unit 220 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the pre-bulb removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. An upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) is provided, which extends vertically through the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the upper tray by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222. After the ball is removed, the ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211a is located in front of the ball socket (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the plate base unit 210, and The game ball B inside is supplied from the ball socket of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Moreover, the tray unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guide part 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower tray 202 to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guide section 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper tray 201 by the ball extraction guide path 241c to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (left side of the lower tray 202). be. As shown in FIG. 50(a), this ball guide portion 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower ball supply port 211c. Specifically, the ball guide portion 213 forms a left inner wall that faces the right inner wall where the ball extraction guide path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c formed in a cylindrical shape. It is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guiding portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the tray unit base 211 (the rear end of the lower tray 202) and the portion directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. A distance (gap) is created that allows for the flow of water. As a result, when the game ball B flowing through the ball extraction guide path 241c from the upper tray 201 comes into contact with the ball guide section 213 from the right side, it will be guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guide section 213, and the game ball B will be guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guide section 213. The ball B can be guided to the left end side of the lower tray 202, which is away from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a in the lower tray 202. In other words, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion in the lower tray 202 (lower tray ball removal hole 202a).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower plate ball supply port 211j in a conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as a conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, so that the ball is guided by the ball extraction guide path 241c. When the game ball B comes into contact with the left inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it will roll forward while bouncing to the right, and will be sent to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b in the lower tray 202. Instead, they are stored in the right area of the lower tray 202 where the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, the storage of game balls B (indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50(b)) is concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202, and If the game balls B concentrated in the area block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B will not be released from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, and the tank will not be full. There is a possibility that the detection sensor 154 will be activated and it will be determined that the lower tray 202 is full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower tray 202.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, since the ball guide part 213 is provided, the game ball B flowing through the ball extraction guide path 241c is guided to the left side area in the lower tray 202. can do. In addition, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray ball supply Pass between the left side wall of the opening 211c (ball guide section 213) and the rear end of the lower tray 202, and from the foul cover unit 150 (ball ejection port 150d) or the upper tray ball extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c). The game balls B released to the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be stored throughout the lower tray 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area remaining in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In order to support the above-mentioned effects, the inventors of the present application have found that when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated, the amount of water stored in the lower tray 202 of the product of this embodiment and the conventional product is The number of game balls B was counted. Game balls B were counted 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the lower tray 202 of this embodiment (the product of this embodiment) had a higher number of stored game balls B than the conventional product in all rounds. It was confirmed that it was possible to store approximately 40% more game balls B on average than the conventional product.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with an open upper and rear side. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and back direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays connections between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. It is for. The pan unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the pan unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing the portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and pays cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a game ball or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine can be displayed. This function is used to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the machine after deducting the amount for the loaned game balls B, to adjust the volume, and to adjust the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball extraction button 222 arranged near the left end of the top surface of the base part 221, and a button on the top surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 with translucent properties is placed on the right side of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and a ball lending button 224 is placed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display section 226 located at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221. It includes a volume adjustment button 227 placed in front and a light amount adjustment button 228 placed on the left side of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball rental button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the word "ball" written on its top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display section 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen from the player side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Furthermore, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section 226 when the ball rental machine is out of order.

The volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sounds for production such as music, voices, sound effects, etc. output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. It is for adjustment. This volume control button 227 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The area has a pattern that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the volume adjustment button 227 is pressed on the "+" side, the volume increases, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume decreases.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light intensity of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The part has a light bulb pattern on it. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. This light amount adjustment button 228 becomes brighter when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes darker when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 are of different colors (for example, the volume adjustment button 227 is white and the light amount adjustment button 228 is black), so that it is difficult for the player to confuse them.

By the way, when the volume and light intensity are adjusted using the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301, the player participation type production that requires the operation of the production operation section 301 is not executed. At times, by operating the effect operation section 301 as appropriate, a setting menu for adjusting the volume, light intensity, etc. is displayed on the effect display device 1600, an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation section 302 is operated. This requires changing the volume of the volume, the brightness of the light amount, etc., and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and light amount. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be directly adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the effort required to adjust the volume and light intensity is It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before upper plate ball removal and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 49. The upper tray ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging B to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A spring (not shown) that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward and then backward on the rear surface of the rear base 241; It is provided with a ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides it to the right in rear view.

The ball socket opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game balls B supplied to the upper tray 201 enter the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an actuation receiver (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the actuation receiver. A protruding operation transmission portion 242b is provided. The operation receiver has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operating receiving part penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an upper plate ball extracting member on the upper surface of the operating receiving part. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact with it. Further, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can be moved downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 positions the upper plate ball removal slider 242 at the upward movement end due to the biasing force of the spring, and removes the upper plate ball via the operation receiving part of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The eject button 222 is located at the end of the upward movement. Furthermore, since the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the batted ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball extracting button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 moves downward and comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting part 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the ball extractor 143 can now move downward, and the ball extractor 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extractor 143, and the partition portion 143a is connected to the entrance port 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b are ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball outlet guiding path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction member 143 returns to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 feeds the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharges them to the lower tray 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, when the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located at the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction at the bottom. is provided with a lower front decoration part 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A plate left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulges 252a, respectively.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and includes a production operation unit attachment part to which the production operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left and right direction.

The pan unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the pan base unit 210 when assembled to the pan unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower pan opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 27, 50, and the like. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

When the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal cover is aligned with the lower plate ball removal button 263. 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened, and the ball in the lower plate 202 is inserted through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200.

Note that when the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Thus, the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, backward and then release the pressure. returns to its normal position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The plate left decoration unit 270 includes a plate left decoration body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate left decoration body that penetrates the plate left decoration body 271 and has translucency. It includes a lens 272 and a plate left decorative board 273 that is provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decoration body 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the center axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the center axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate left decoration body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, its left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the plate left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate left decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate left decoration board 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate left decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate right decoration unit 275 includes a plate right decoration body 276 that has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has translucency, and a plate right decoration body 276 that has translucency and passes through the plate right decoration body 276. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative board 278 which is provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate right decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decorative body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate right decorative body 276 can be decorated with light.

When the plate right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate right decorative body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step in which the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 sides are higher. As a result, the player can hook his/her finger using the level difference between the plate left decorative unit 270, the plate right decorative unit 275, and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 can be evened out. It can also be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 52(a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front bottom. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upwardly moving end position, and FIG. 55(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the unit has moved to the raised position. FIG. 56 is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downwardly moving end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the performance when a player participation type performance is performed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. (vibration), and allows the player to participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 is provided above a pressing operation section 303. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 of the outer diameter of the production operation unit 300.

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200 and has a spherical outer shape, and a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is attached to the outside and is provided on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and a performance operation unit mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and used to decorate the upper part of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 (upper unit cover 312) with light. An outer peripheral decorative board 320, an outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operating unit base 315 so as to cover the production operating unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above, and an operating unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operating unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the production operation unit 350, and the production operation unit 350. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be movable upwardly and backwardly from the top surface of the production operation section cover unit 310 by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting section of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation section base 315. The production operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the production operation unit 300 (around the production operation section unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upwardly and backwardly, and an annular structure having an insertion hole 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and into which the production operation section 301 is inserted. A unit upper cover 312 is provided. The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower portions of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the production operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the performance operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The production operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the same as that of the door frame. The distance is approximately 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left and right direction.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 has at least a unit upper cover 312 having translucency, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of a performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. Further, the performance operation section cover unit 310 is connected such that a plate left decoration body 271 and a plate right decoration body 276 extend outward from the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The operation unit base 315 is covered with a unit lower cover 311 on the front and lower side, and is covered with a unit upper cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301 on the upper side. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operating unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body 315a that is open at the top, and a flange 315b that extends outward from the upper end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates a performance operation unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in a production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjustment screw 384 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Furthermore, a board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange part 315b so as to sandwich the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 315. The operation section relay board unit 330 covers a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation section base 315, an operation section relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation section relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333 is attached to the board base 331 as shown in FIG.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), an outer button decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. It relays connections between the lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the ejection force detection sensor 375, and the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation section unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the production operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303. It is.

The production operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disc-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 352 that is inserted into the button body 351 from below. The inserted cylindrical button sleeve 353, the disc-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to be raised and lowered by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button base 354 arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular outer button decoration board 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted.

The production operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 disposed between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is connected to the button sleeve 353 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface part 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a cylindrical cylindrical part 351b extending downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface part 351a, and a cylindrical part 351b. It has a locking part 351c projecting downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape constituting a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation section cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular decoration having a diameter approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation section cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery, and is formed into a dish shape with an inner side bulging upward by a certain width from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is bulged obliquely upward and has a flat inner side. This makes the contact sensing body 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has a flat plate-like downwardly extending piece 352a extending downwardly from both left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punched metal, so that the capacitance relative to the entire area is suppressed, thereby preventing false detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the center portion of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 can be easily detected. It can be decorated with light emitting light.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of a connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the top or side surface of the button body 351. I can do it. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a extending vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The sleeve body 353a has an outer diameter that is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and a length that is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit the light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is in the shape of a disc having approximately the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that are symmetrical with respect to the center and that extend vertically through the center, a center hole 354b that extends vertically through the center, and a center hole 354b that projects from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. A pair of guide pins 354c are provided. The guide shafts 362 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The center hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 further includes a flat detection piece 354d that extends downward and is detected by a press detection sensor 373 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The button base 354 has a lower surface in contact with the upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and is urged upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The outer button decorative board 355 has a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on its upper surface. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged on double concentric circumferences. Specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve body 353a and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration board 355, the area on the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact sensing body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the production operation section 301 moves forward and backward. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation section 301 (performance operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, vibrations from the vibration motor 356 can be transmitted to the performance operation section 301 in a good manner. Furthermore, the influence of the vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and the sensor IC and output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 allows the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects capacitance with a sensor electrode, and outputs an ON signal when a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor is exceeded. Note that in this embodiment, an ON signal is output when a predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a plurality of levels of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The production operation unit 350 of this embodiment includes a contact detection body 352 that is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 and is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 can be detected via the contact detection body 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the production operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button body It is possible to detect contact or approach of the detected object (player's hand) to the side of 351. For this reason, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the touch operation section 302 using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

This production operation section unit 350 is supported by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to rise and fall in the vertical direction. When the production operation section unit 350 is in the most downwardly moved state (normal state), the top surface part 351a of the button body 351 is aligned with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310, and the production operation section unit 350 is not operated. The unit 300 appears to be one sphere. Then, when the production operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is in a state in which it protrudes higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation section 303.

To be more specific, when the production operation unit 350 is in its lowest position (normal state), it will not move further downwards even if it is pressed, and is in a state where it cannot be pressed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the production operation section elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the press. Detected by sensor 373. As a result, a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) is detected.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, when operating the contact operation unit 302, the top surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 is touched. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal which has irregularities due to a plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation section 302. In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is covered by the button body 351, by forming minute irregularities, multiple lines, etc. on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation can be provided to the touch operation part 302. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation section 302, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

In addition, although the button body 351 is transparent in the above, it is not limited to this, and may be opaque or semi-transparent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the production operation unit 350 can be improved. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be decorated with light emitting light using the light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 provided below, the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364, etc. can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation part elevating mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation base 315, and is capable of raising and lowering the performance operation unit 350. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the production operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylindrical columns are arranged symmetrically and have lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362, a disc-shaped upper base 363 that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and a disc-shaped upper base 363 that is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and emits light upward. It includes a button interior decoration board 364 on which a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of irradiation are mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and which urges the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an operation button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and an operating button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating and lowering drive motor 367. A driving gear 368 in the form of a spur gear, a driven gear 369 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the driving gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a driven gear 369 that is rotated by the driven gear 369. and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 has a lower end connected to an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough and is rotatably attached to the elevating cam that raises and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. member 371, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the press operation unit 303, and an elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevation detection sensor 374 that detects the elevation of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevation cam member 371), and an elevation detection sensor 374 that is attached to the elevation mechanism base 361 and a holding member under the elevation spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380. A protrusion force detection sensor 375 that detects the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the stage 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base main body 361a formed in a disc shape, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base main body 361a, and a lifting spring that passes through the base main body 361a together with a pair of guide shafts 362. 365 through a pair of through holes 361c. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protrusion force detection sensor 375 are attached to the top surface of the base body 361a. Furthermore, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. In the elevating mechanism base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operating unit base 315, and their upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. By bringing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button interior decorative board 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration board 364 can decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by causing the plurality of LEDs 364a to emit light as appropriate.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, and a guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through the center thereof. The elevating cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a rotates counterclockwise in a plan view of the elevating cam member 371. is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (presentation operation unit 350) is biased upward by the elevating spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Furthermore, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a portion that faces the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated by bringing the upper protrusion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The press detection sensor 373 detects a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the production operation section unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowest position (normal state). When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 becomes in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates. When the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 350. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the coupling portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370. The rotational position of is detected.

The ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit 350 in a vertically movable manner via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and rear, and also supports the button base 354 by a pair of elevating springs 365. The performance operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through the above. In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) relative to the production operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367. can be done. Furthermore, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can decorate the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration board 364 as appropriate.

In the normal state of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is latched to a locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a) ). In this normal state, the production operation unit 350 is located at the end of downward movement via the button base 354, and even if the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the production operation cannot be performed. The lower unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit top cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 of the production operation section unit 350 match, and the production operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevation drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 in the normal state (the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), it engages with the elevation drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a that is visible from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 371c to the left side of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward via the guide pin 354c against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

Then, as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

Note that the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact with, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381, although details will be described later. can. Since the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the holding member 385 under the lifting spring, the production operation unit 350 is raised with a protruding force corresponding to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. It can be projected into position.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the top surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is lowered from the top surface of the unit upper cover 312. It also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lift spring 365 in this raised position, the production operation unit 350 presses the lift spring 365. The button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the button base 354 and comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( A press on the press operation section 303) is detected.

In order to return the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so the third cam 371e moves the guide pin 354c is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward via the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In addition, when returning the production operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381 of the ejecting force adjusting mechanism 380 to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward becomes weaker, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also decreases. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371, and to reduce damage (failure) to the operation button lift drive motor 367. Further, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the button base 354 stops moving downward, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the production operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In addition, in the above, in the production operation part elevating mechanism 360, by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( Although an example has been described in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is moved from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project from the lowered position to the raised position at once, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved from the lifting cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of 371 and moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a clockwise direction when viewed from above. It may also be rotated in the circumferential direction. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is approximately 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 354c to the third cam 371e. It will move upward along. When the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 can be moved upwardly at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 is pushed to the pressing operation section 303. It can function as

Note that when the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. Thereby, the load applied to the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be made lighter.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation section unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, so that the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the gaming state (for example, the first starting port 2004 or By varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game. can.

In addition, at least one shallow recessed portion capable of locking the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be stably projected to a position with the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least in one location in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the elevating cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the force (for which the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) protrudes upward) by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward. It is possible to change the ejection force (ejection force). The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 includes an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, and a pinion gear in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. The adjusting screw 384 has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported; 384, a pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and lower ends of a pair of lift springs 365 are in contact with a holding member 385 under the lift spring.

The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a such that a gap is formed between the elevating mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base body 361a. The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft protruding into a gap between the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 in the vertical direction. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 includes a main body 385a that extends back and forth, a threaded hole 385b that vertically passes through the center of the main body 385a and is threadedly engaged with a screw part 384b, and a threaded hole 385b that extends from the front and back of the main body 385a. It has a downwardly recessed spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and capable of accommodating the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. . In the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385, the guide shaft 362 passes through the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation section elevating mechanism 360.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 to rotate the adjustment screw 384, thereby moving the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction through the threaded hole 385b that engages with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lower lifting spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, by moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 upward, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 to urge the production operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. Accordingly, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation section unit 350 upward can be reduced. Thereby, the upward protrusion force of the production operation section unit 350 can be adjusted by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 is the largest. As a result, when the ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is moved by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. By stopping the upward movement of the lifting spring 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can be prevented.

Further, as described above, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 as appropriate, so when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button body. 351 is detected, and the performance operation unit 350 is projected by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the detected target. At times, the protruding force of the button body 351 may be varied by appropriately selecting the vertical position of the lifting unsprung holding member 385. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, it is possible to vary the strength applied to the player's fingers, etc., so that when the button body 351 makes strong contact, something good may happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that this is the case, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game. Therefore, according to the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, depending on the gaming state (for example, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005) By increasing or decreasing the protruding force of the button body 351, it is possible to make the player's expectations for the game suggest to the player.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by adding twist to the spring. However, in order to protrude the production operation unit 350, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it will be difficult to use it differently from the original use. This causes stress to act on the compression coil spring, leading to early deterioration of the internal structure and risk of damage. On the other hand, in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 ( Since the biasing force) is adjusted, unreasonable stress is not applied to the lift spring 365, and early deterioration of the lift spring 365 can be reduced. Stable protrusion can be achieved over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed into a spherical shape as a whole, and includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by the player. The production operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing. The contact operation section 302 is provided above the press operation section 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 in such a state that the projection direction of the press operation section 303 (the performance operation section unit 350) which can protrude upward is inclined such that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the production operation section 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300. Thereby, the performance operation section 301 is easily visible to a player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the presentation operation unit 300, the press operation section 303 (the presentation operation section unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the presentation operation section unit 350 is This corresponds to the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the press operation section 303 is pressed downward, the press operation section 303 (performance operation section unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 appears to the player as a mere spherical decoration, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 disposed below a unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the press operation section 303 (presentation operation section unit 350). An annular outer-button decorative board 355 is arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation part 303, and an inner-button decorative board 364 is arranged further inside thereof. The production operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button inner decoration board 364, the button outer decoration board 355, and the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Note that the LEDs 355a inside the inner button decorative board 364 and the outer button decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, the light transmittance is improved. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (towards the player) in a good manner.

The performance operation unit 300 can decorate the annular unit top cover 312 with light emission using the LED 320a of the performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Furthermore, the vicinity of the periphery of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer circumferential surface can be decorated with light by the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355. Furthermore, the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 can be decorated with light by the LED 364a of the button interior decoration board 364.

The plurality of LEDs 320a of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, so that By sequentially emitting light, a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the press operation section 303 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect in which the light spreads from the center of the press operation part 303 to the outside, and a light emission effect in which the light spreads from the outside to the center of the press operation part 303 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that appears to converge.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the touch operation section 302 can enable touch operations depending on the player participation type performance to be executed.

As a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance) in which the press operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) is not protruded, for example, a performance image that prompts the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs audio, sound effects, etc. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the process moves to the next production stage. Note that when a contact is detected, the button body 351 is decorated with light by emitting light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the player has accepted the contact operation. It is also possible to provide a feeling of operation to the contact operation section 302. At this time, the player's expectations for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game) are determined by the light emitting color, light emitting brightness, light emitting pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. Thereby, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation section 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the touch operation has been accepted. Note that at this time, the vibration motor 356 may be used to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm to give the player an indication of their expectations for the game. good.

In addition, as a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance), a performance image that prompts the user to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, or audio, sound effects, etc. may be output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (his/her hand or finger) to the top surface of the button body 351, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (production operation unit 350). The biasing force of the spring 365 causes it to protrude upward (pop up). To be more specific, in a normal state, when the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operating button lifting drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves toward the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), and due to the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the production operation section unit 350 (button body 351, press operation section 303) together with the button base 354 forcefully protrudes upward to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the top surface of the button body 351 is located higher than the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player. It can strongly attract interest.

Thereafter, the game moves to an effect in which the button body 351 (press operation section 303) is pressed, and the player is entertained by pressing the button body 351 (press operation section 303). To be more specific, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and pressing the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved. As the button body 351 moves downward, the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) is detected, and the performance can be changed using the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player with a player participation type performance.

In addition, during the above performance, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or weakens the protrusion force (force) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, thereby adjusting the player's expectations for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion force. It is also possible to make it suggest. Furthermore, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351.

In a performance that causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the movement range (within the protrusion range) of the button body 351 that protrudes upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like, giving a shock, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, and the strength of the protrusion force may indicate to the player the level of expectation for the game.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is projected, the contact detection body 352 detects whether the player's finger or the like is outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when it is detected that the user approaches the user. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers and the like, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or weakens the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, thereby indicating to the player his/her expectations for the game based on the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation section unit 350, the button body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is made to protrude with a strong protrusion force by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 will protrude forcefully and generate a sound (protrusion sound), so the protrusion sound may surprise the player. Can be done. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made to protrude with a weak protrusion force using the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice that the button body 351 protrudes. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

For the performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, the urging force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is It may also be possible to perform an effect that causes the user to perform a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button. Alternatively, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to perform an effect that causes the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as a performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, a performance such as a touch operation on the protruding button body 351 may be performed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be operated by contact. In addition, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, thereby making it difficult for the protruding button body 351 to move. 302) can be easily touched.

In addition, as for the effect of protruding the effect operation part unit 350, in the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button base 354 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Although an example has been shown in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b (locking part 371c) to the second cam 371d. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked with the locking part 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (production operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifts and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 clockwise in plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is moved in the middle of the third cam 371e. The button body 351 may be stopped from protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position by stopping the rotation of the button body 351. At this time, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is made to protrude partway through the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the press operation section 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, expectations for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain players.

Furthermore, as a performance in which the projected performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the performance operation unit 350 is projected, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. to its minimum state. As a result, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is at its weakest, so the production operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation. Can entertain. In addition, as a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the lifting spring 365 is moved by moving the holding member 385 under the lifting spring to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbol. The biasing force may be set to any strength from the strongest to the weakest. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and it is possible to enjoy a more diverse range of functions. It is possible to present effects and make it difficult for players to get bored.

In addition, as a performance using the performance operation unit 300, a contact detection body is installed so that the contact of a player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of levels of threshold values may be provided according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each level. In other words, by focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 increases as the player's finger approaches the button body 351 (contact sensing body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. By providing a multi-stage detection, it may be used for production. Specifically, for example, the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, or the game By dividing the presentation into stages such as when the player's hand or finger is in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the presentation according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 can present a variety of presentations to the player. This makes it possible to make it difficult for players to get bored of the game, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), as shown in FIG. It may also be in a state where it is moved downward. Thereby, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Moreover, the urging force of the strongly compressed lifting spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the holding member 385 under the lifting spring.

In this way, the performance operation unit 300 of the present embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation type performances, so it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performances, and to keep the players from getting bored. By making it difficult to play, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, in the production operation unit 300, an annular (combined two circular arcs) production operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 is provided on the top of a spherical production operation part cover unit 310, and a production operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the performance operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative board 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the production operation section unit 350, a button decoration board 364 whose position is fixed is provided. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the production operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode ) comes close to the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 and button inner decoration board 364, and as the production operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 and button inner decoration board 364 approach, the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield is connected to the ground (GND) between the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 or button inner decoration board 364 changes by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down, the contact detection sensor main body 358 A shield connected to the ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the production operation part outer circumference decorative board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 allows the production operation part outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 to It is possible to reduce the influence of changes in capacitance due to the proximity of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent false detection in the contact detection sensor body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Next, a dish unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of a production operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the production operation unit of the production operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in It is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a switching part is provided between the plate unit and the plate unit, and (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plate left decoration unit, a plate right decoration unit, a production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, and the production is performed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact sensing bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit or the like. FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, on the lower side of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right parts, a left contact detection body 390L and a right contact detection body 390R. A left contact detection sensor body 391L and a right contact detection sensor body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when the player moves his or her fingers from the left side to the right side on the top surface of the button body 351, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes sensing, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-sensing. becomes. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body Both 391R on the right are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to the original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-sensing, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R returns to its original value. The capacitance has changed and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. is determined by the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, and the patterns of their changes. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present to the player a player participation type performance that allows the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the touch operation section 302. Note that by adding more contact detectors, more complex motions can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact by a human body or the like on any one of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, any one of them will be detected. Contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation section 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, parts where the player may get injured, parts that may cause trouble to other players). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent activity, etc.), and when any contact detection body 393 detects a human body, etc., a caution or a warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switch between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which a section 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 using the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired part (contact detection body 352). . Note that the switching unit 394 may be ``a device that is switched by a switching circuit such as a relay or a transistor,'' ``a device that is switched by another electronic circuit,'' or ``a movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c). unit 270, plate right decoration unit 275, and effect operation unit 300) that are switched as the unit 270 moves, etc.

For example, in the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type performance is executed in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 may be switched in the order in which they are touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 may detect whether or not the player's finger or the like has touched the contact detection body 393. good. Thereby, it is possible to present to the player a highly game-like, player-participatory performance using the plurality of contact sensing bodies 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300 are made to be able to move forward and backward, the first plate is placed on the front side of the production operation unit 300. In addition to providing the contact detection body 393a, a second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are to be retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. It may also be possible to switch it so that it does.

As a result, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects the contact or approach of the player, and the forward movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. is stopped. Make it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressuring the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player. be able to.

On the other hand, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is projected forward, a gap may be formed at the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc., and when the player's finger or the like is inserted into the gap, the production operation unit 300 etc. If the operation unit 300 and the like are moved back to the initial position, there is a risk that the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when moving the production operation unit 300 and the like that have been moved forward to the rear, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's hand, etc., the movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. to the rear is stopped and the hand, etc. is removed from the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc. The player is notified of the guidance, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, the production operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 that detects the contact of a player's finger or the like is star-shaped, so that it has decorativeness (design). Note that the shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a shape imitating a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, etc. As a result, the contact detection body 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has a decorative (design) property, so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this, and the contact detection body can be formed of a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as above can be achieved. It should be noted that it is desirable to provide the contact sensing element on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers and the like do not touch it directly.This can avoid wear of the contact sensing element and also improve the tactile sensation with the surface member. It can be made smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button decoration board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact sensing body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61(b), A contact detection body 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided below the contact detection body 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the production operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(b), the contact sensing body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and under normal conditions, the decorative body 398 provided below is not visible due to the metallic luster of the contact sensing body 397. , the decoration 398 may be made visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 when contact with the surface member 396 is detected. good.

Further, the contact sensing body 352 may be formed so as to be unrecognizable to the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact sensing body include "one formed of a transparent member" and "one formed so as to be visible integrally with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body". As a result, the performance operation unit 301 provided with the contact sensing body 352 cannot detect the contact sensing body 352, and therefore does not detect the contact of a finger or the like with respect to the player or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player-participation performance is executed and a player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By protruding to the side, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detection body 352 (touch operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is a sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame left side base 421. The decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame has a plurality of first LEDs 422a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and the lower part of the front side of the left side base 421 of the door frame. The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are covered with a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front side. a left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421; a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423; A door frame left side decoration body 426 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and an upper and lower left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. A left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light forward from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and a first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. and a lower left side light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similar to the above-mentioned handle cover 295, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the left side base 421 of the door frame are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). ). In addition, when molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. An LED 422b is mounted. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 422a and 8 second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

On the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three groups: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, a total of 15 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, there are two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, and LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. When the LED driver 422c of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and the right side is formed to be uneven. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. An LED 423b is mounted. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups. Thus, a total of 21 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. When the LED driver 423c of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be made to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a comes into contact with the front surface of the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 424a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, which will be described later. It is. This holding tube 424b is provided at the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, at the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the holding tube 424b, the second part of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 facing from the through hole 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated onto the light guide shaft 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. be able to.

Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The lower left side reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a comes into contact with the front surface of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 425a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guiding member 428 and a cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guiding member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. This holds the light guiding shaft portion 428a and the light guiding shaft portion 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 425b is provided at the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and protrude forward, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which is closer to the door frame, is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the upper and lower sides to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 428a and 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the lower left side reflector 425, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decoration body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a that penetrate vertically at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. The left side decoration body 426 of the door frame further includes a decoration part 426b that has a certain arcuate shape and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft parts 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 427a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding tubes 424b of the left side upper reflector 424. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft parts 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 428a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding tubes 425b of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding tube 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side middle light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 428a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft parts 429a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 429b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 429a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This lower left side light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 429a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed in the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward than a lower portion, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. This door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end below the door window 101a and the pan unit base 210 of the pan base unit 210. The speaker port 211b is located above the speaker port 211b. Moreover, the upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are placed at a position a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. , the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided at a position spaced backward from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame. is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. (light), the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than other parts.

In addition, the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft part 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, and the middle left side light guiding member 428 The light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side lower light guide member 429 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides. Even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows will be difficult to see, and the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame will not be evenly spaced. It can be decorated with light emitting light on a surface.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decoration body 426 has a decoration part 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, and light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 due to the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, Since the decorative portion 426b is provided in the area where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 427a, the light guiding shaft portion 428a, and the light guiding shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to see. The appearance of the light emitting decoration of the side decoration body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame right side base 431. A decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface are mounted, and a lower part of the front side of the right side base 431 of the door frame. A lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, an upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and a lower decorative board 432 on the lower right side of the door frame. The right side reflector 434 is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the decorative board 433, and the right side reflector 434 of the door frame is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration body 435.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 forward, and a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432. The lower right side light guide member 437 guides the light from one LED 433a forward.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a having a predetermined shape and penetrating left and right. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431, and is configured to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A right-side left lens 439 having translucent properties and a decorative portion 439a to be fitted thereto, and a plurality of right-side left lenses 439 that are attached to cover the right side of the right side base 431 of the door frame and that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration body 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A right-side right lens 441 having a light-transmitting property and having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close a decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width from side to side. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends downward from the upper end almost straight to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curves toward the rear side. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (a decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439, and a right side right lens). A plurality of reflector parts 431a are provided at the height where the decorative parts 441a) are provided, and are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end. These reflector parts 431a have a rear end side that is inside the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a that is inclined toward the side surface side, and a bottom surface that is curved.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is , penetrates in the left and right direction (concave from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect light emitted rearward from a third LED 432c of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and a third LED 433c of a door frame right side lower decorative board 433, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction to decorate the decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, and a third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 16 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 432a, 8 second LEDs 432b, and 4 third LEDs 432c, are mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between them) of the second LEDs 432b. Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so each first LED 432a, second LED 432b, In order to cause each of the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 21 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the 21 systems described above, the LED driver 432d on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, which will be described later, A total of 24 systems, 3 systems for the upper 1 group of the 3rd LED 433c divided into 2 groups, are controlled.

Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires and one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 is connected. Then, when the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 groups, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 2 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 LEDs on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The upper two third LEDs 433c of the divided groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and a third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 22 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 433a, which has second LEDs 433b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c, so each first LED 433a, second LED 433b, In order to cause each of the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 27 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame can only control up to 24 systems at the maximum, the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame controls the third LED 433c, which is divided into two groups. Of these, three systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the front side, and the third LED 433c on the rear side) 2) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has two wires that supply power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one control signal line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to the main clock wire. When the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of Each group includes 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups. Each can be made to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a comes into contact with the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The sides are shaped like a saucer that widens toward the front. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. This is to hold the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 434b is provided at the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame facing from the through hole 434a on both upper and lower sides of the light guiding shaft 436a and the light guiding shaft 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and protrude forward. The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides, so that the right side decorative body of the door frame It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the light guide shaft 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decoration body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a passing through in the vertical direction at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left and right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426. Further, the door frame right side decoration body 435 further includes a decoration part 435b that has a certain arcuate shape and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft parts 436a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 436b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 436a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from the top of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This upper right side light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 436a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The right side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft parts 437a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 437b that connects the lower ends of the six light guide shaft parts 437a. , made of transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This lower right side light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 437a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a front end formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). When the decorative portion 439a is fitted into the decorative hole 438a, its surface coincides with the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration on the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for light-emitting decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. Further, the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. This door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is formed to have approximately the same height in the vertical direction as the total height of the door frame 3. Moreover, the front end side of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration body 435.

The right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, and door frame right side left side decorative body 438, has an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. It is molded in two colors using two types of resin, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and protrudes to the right to attach to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). When the decorative portion 441a is fitted into the decorative hole 440a, its surface coincides with the outside (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (see FIG. 70). The right lens 441 on the right side is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and is connected to the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration of the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for light-emitting decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 441a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern parts on the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are different from those on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side decoration body 438. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial pattern part on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes more forward than a portion of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. This door frame right side unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from the upper end to the lower end. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 largely protrudes forward from the top to approximately half the height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side to see the inside of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) in the island equipment of the gaming hall. Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed into a screen shape, it can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire gaming area 5a. By making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without worrying about it.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. , the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 provided at a position spaced backward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and a door frame right side lower decorative board. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (light guided) forward by the light guide shaft part 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft part 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be caused to emit light in a dotted manner more brightly than other parts.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 lights up the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, thereby changing the reflector part of the door frame right side base 431. 431a, the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the decorative part 439a of the right side right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame is fitted into the decorative hole 439a. The decorative portion 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side can be decorated with light emission. Furthermore, since parts of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a) can be decorated with light, other players cannot see this pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can stand out and has high appeal to players.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side with light emission, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 With the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Because of the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b is transmitted to the rear door. The frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are illuminated to decorate with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front side. It can be used to decorate or prevent luminescence. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435, the rear door frame right side left side decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be completely independently illuminated and decorated with light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light-emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, a first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and a light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a are illuminated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides, so that the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame is illuminated with light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be evenly illuminated in a planar manner.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a door frame right side decoration body 435 with a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decoration body 435 due to the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows will not be projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the area where the light guide shaft 435b is located, the shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the left side door frame unit 420 and the right side unit 430, respectively.

The door frame top unit 450 covers a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top and bottom plate (not shown) are connected to the bottom end of the door frame.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the door A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decoration body 453 so as to cover the front of the side speakers (not shown), the top center speaker and the top side speakers, and the front side of the door frame top base 451. It includes a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from above, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top cover 452 when viewed from above. Further, the door frame top decoration body 453 has a front surface formed in a semicircular arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. Thereby, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the center portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 457a to emit light.

A pair of top center speakers are provided spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters and output high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-board of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are sunk from the front to a portion behind the inside of the upper parts of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. has been done. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 22 to 28, FIG. 71, and the like. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the unit upper cover 312 and button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a semi-tubular shape. As a result, the entire circumference of the door window 101a can be seen as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights to the player.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration body 271, a plate right decoration body 276, a unit top cover 312, a door frame left side decoration body 426, a door frame right side decoration body 435, and a door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration body 453, a plate left decorative board 273, a plate right decorative board 278, a production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, a left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decorative board 432, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, these decorative boards By making the LEDs emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, and a light emitting effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 is attached at the center in the left-right direction. As a result, since the large spherical production operation unit 300 is located in the center of the dish unit 200, the visual impact can be increased. This allows the operation section 303) to stand out.

In addition, in a normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 as the production operation section 301 is continuously aligned with the top surface of the unit top cover 312, forming one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a huge sphere makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable. It is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from a pachinko machine, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to increase the appeal to the players. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300, the production operation section 301 (contact operation section 302 The upper surface of the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entire performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, and the performance operation section 301 can be easily viewed. You can make it look bigger. Further, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the giant spherical performance operation section 301, and it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the player participation type performance in which the player operates the performance operation section 301. In addition, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301, thereby increasing the interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, a door frame right side unit 430 is shown as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 as an example.

To be more specific, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the outer surface of the door frame 3 are made of two different colors and two types of synthetic resins with different translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, with a portion of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, circular or radial patterns are formed.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a is visible, and the opaque outer layer 3b is visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior with an emphasized circular or radial pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern on the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, making it relatively circular and Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior appearance emphasizes the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a.

In addition, in FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration part 441a fitted into the decoration hole 440a is part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, so the material used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthetic By appropriately selecting and combining the color, light transmittance, etc. of the resin (resin), it is possible to make the appearance significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when making a minor change, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without increasing cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern on the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, by changing the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b for each production lot, and shipping pachinko machines 1 from different lots to the same game hall and installing them in the island equipment, it is possible to create a colorful look for players. It is possible to increase the appeal of

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right lens 441 with the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame molded in two colors. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above embodiments, circular or radial patterns are formed, but the invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295 provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the left side of the right side of the door frame Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot pattern decoration is created by the two-color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is also applied to the decorative body at the same time. There is no need to apply desired decorations by painting or the like after the formation, and the effort required for decorations can be omitted and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outside appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. Specifically, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, light is transmitted through the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the circle of the polka dot pattern and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle. If they are formed using the same color with different ratios, the polka dot circles will be difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are of the same color, giving the appearance that the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b will cause The polka dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka dots. In this way, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. Costs can be reduced.

In addition, as mentioned above, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and pachinko machines 1 from different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment becomes colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can give a strong impact to players who are roaming around the game hall and can attract players.

Further, on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward in the door frame 3, there is a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, etc. are provided, so the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorative bodies to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Furthermore, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a is made transparent so that it cannot be seen from the outside, and when the model is changed, a synthetic resin with high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This allows the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body to be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

In addition, as described above, since the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, it is possible to create a pattern on the surface of the inner layer 3a (such as a pattern by shape, painting, printing, pasting of a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and when the model is changed, a transparent outer layer 3b is applied. By using a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , it is possible to suppress the increase in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, a third LED 432c of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and a lower decorative board on the right side of the door frame are capable of irradiating light inside the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame. 433 third LEDs 433c, and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the others, so that the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the door frame 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is illuminated. The part of the layer 3a (the polka dot part) can be decorated with bright light, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light to improve the appearance. The light-emitting decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be enjoyed, and a decline in player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be decorated with light by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that are irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be decorated with light emitting light, and the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame can be made to look beautiful for games. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can strongly attract the attention of players.

Further, as described above, the decorations of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances. (molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c may emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface or the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the player is not in use can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is emitting light, and by changing the decoration, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player. To explain in detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the inner layer 3a at a portion covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED will not emit light. In this state, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the part of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed, so that the inner layer is exposed to the surface of the outer layer 3b. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a and the hole portion become visible, and a different decoration is visible than when the LED is not emitting light. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is decorated with light. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated with light, so depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED, the decoration is decorated with light. It is possible to change the parts that are decorated with light, and the decoration that is decorated with luminescence can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decoration body can be made different by emitting light from the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED light up according to the game status, changes in the decoration of the decorations can alert the player to the arrival of a chance or a change in the hitting operation (for example, hitting right). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to suggest and can perform a variety of performances.

In addition, since the amount of protrusion in the front and rear direction of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) is different, Since the impression (view) of this pachinko machine 1 can be made different when viewed from the front left and from the front right, the pachinko machine 1 can be played around the game hall where it is installed. Even if a player passes in front of this pachinko machine 1, when approaching this pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1 will be drawn because the appearance will be different from the previous time. This makes it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract players who are roaming around the game hall to select a pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a player's rotation operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b. It has an appearance similar to an automobile steering wheel.

In the handle 195, the front side of a central hub portion 195a is covered by a front handle lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, a handle cover decorative board 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by broken lines in FIG. It is divided into 5 groups: 1, 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery, and 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by broken lines in FIG. 72: two on the lower left from the center, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into six groups: the two on the bottom right and the two on the bottom right. These 6 groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the handle 195, or to direct the light toward the center of the handle 195. A light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated or a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195 can be shown to the player. Further, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be decorated with light by the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decoration 435 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are semi-tubular. Because of this, the player can see the decoration as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decorative board 273 behind the plate left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decorative board 278 behind the plate right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A lower side decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

To be more specific, the plate left decorative board 273 includes four LEDs 273a mounted on the front side in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LED 273a of the plate right decorative board 278, which will be described later, to emit light. (not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 273a are controlled by six systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The plate right decorative board 278 includes four LEDs 278a mounted on the front side in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 278a are controlled in six systems by the LED drivers on the plate left decorative board 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for causing a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b to emit light. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, there are four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. Eight second LEDs 432b are mounted, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. A first LED 432a divided into two sets, a second LED 432b divided into three sets, a third LED 432c divided into two sets, and a third LED divided into two sets on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The upper set of third LEDs 433c among the LEDs 433c is controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and third LED 433c of each set are controlled by an appropriate color. It can emit light in full color.

On the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front side arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b are mounted, four third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower side. and an LED driver 433d for causing the light to emit light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and the 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower 1 group divided into 2 groups? , 24 systems are controlled by LED drivers 433d, and each set of first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the border. Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

Note that the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame are The numbers of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b are the same, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. (systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are installed symmetrically. Thereby, it is possible to easily create data of an LED lighting pattern for performing a light emission effect.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front side at intervals in the left-right direction, and the LED 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for causing the light to emit light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by nine systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, The light from the first LED 433a of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is transmitted through the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the lower left side guiding member. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, players can see a light-emitting effect that emits bright light in the form of dots on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The light-emitting effect that flashes brightly in spots can make players ``awk''.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the lower left side of the door frame Second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame, LED 455a of the top central decorative board 455 of the door frame, top left decorative board of the door frame By making the LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the light can be produced so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to the player.

In other words, in the door frame 3, a light emitting effect is performed in which spot light is emitted on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 using the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface light emission) using the LED system connected by the dashed line in FIG. 72. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transmitted to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and from there forward. Therefore, compared to the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-emitted with high brightness and brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 Even if the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is illuminated as a spot with high brightness, the glare will not make it difficult to see inside the gaming area 5a facing from the door window 101a, and the game can be played through the door window 101a. The game balls B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are made to protrude forward from the door window 101a (gaming area 5a), and emit spot light with high brightness. The opening portion 426a and the opening portion 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 that project forward. Since the light from the spot emission is provided on the vertical line), the light from the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (toward the door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and The inside of the gaming area 5a is not difficult to see, and other players can be drawn to the pachinko machine 1 by emitting spot light with high brightness.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, parts that emit spot light are provided on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which protrude forward on the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot light emitting part is located outside of the player, so the player will not block the spot light. As a result, when spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the high-intensity spot light is visible even to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to other players about the existence of this pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the players. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can attract players who are playing around the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, on both sides of the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for causing spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft part 427a, light guide shaft part 428a, light guide shaft part 429a, light guide shaft part 436a, and light guide shaft part 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the LEDs for the two surfaces have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the LEDs on the left side of the door frame 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame are illuminated with the same amount of light. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation section 302 in the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300, and has an annular shape on which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the top surface. A production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is provided. This performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 is divided into two parts: a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 of the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321, 6 LEDs are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the inner periphery, and 3 are provided at intervals on a circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer periphery.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322, four LEDs are provided on the circumference close to the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided at intervals between the inner and outer circumferences. They are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals of three on the circumference near the outer circumference near both ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 73, 6 LEDs on the inner circumference, 3 sets of 2 LEDs each in the circumferential direction, and 3 LEDs on the middle circumference. They are divided into 9 groups in total: 3 groups with 1 piece each, and 3 groups with 3 pieces each in the circumferential direction of the 9 pieces on the outer circumference. In addition, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. The 3 pieces are divided into 3 groups of 1 piece each, and the 9 pieces on the outer circumference are divided into 2 groups of 3 pieces near each end, for a total of 7 groups. That is, in the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, a light emission production in which the light rotates in the production operation section 301 or a light emission in which light is concentrated in the center can be produced. It is possible to show the player a performance and a light emission performance in which light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a extends vertically along the outside of the door window 101a facing the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front and back direction is different from each other on the outside of the left and right sides of the door window 101a. A door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body are provided. 435, a left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and a second LED 422b are mounted, and a lower left side decoration on the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted. A board 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and a second LED 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and guides the light from the first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forwards it. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 to be irradiated, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 423 on the right side of the door frame are provided. By causing the second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame to emit light, the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame are illuminated. Light emitting decoration (surface luminescence) can be performed in a planar manner, and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light irradiated forward is transmitted to the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 by the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is emitted forward from their front ends (front end surfaces), and Corresponding to the tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in the frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is possible to decorate the area with dots of light (spot light emission).

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. By appropriately emitting light from the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b, the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the gaming area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the entire door frame right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with light in a planar manner, or a part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with dotted light. Since the entire side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with luminescence in a planar manner, and a portion can be decorated with luminescence in a dotted manner, a variety of luminescence effects can be shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and also to keep the player entertained, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame are separated, and the system on the right side of the door frame. The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are separated are made bilaterally symmetrical with respect to each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are in different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side When creating the data, for example, the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side may be used as the data for the door frame right side decoration 435 side, or the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side and the door frame side may be used. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that on the right side decorative body 435 side, the effort required to create lighting pattern data can be reduced (with the same creation time) ) It becomes easier to construct data for more complex lighting patterns, and it is possible to show players a variety of lighting effects using lighting patterns. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can exhibit a sufficient lighting effect for the light emitting effects in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both the right and left sides of the door frame 101a.

Furthermore, since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LED 423b, 2nd LED 432b, and 2nd LED 433b provided with the 1st LED 422a, 1st LED 423a, 1st LED 432a, and 1st LED 433a in between are of the same system. , first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, light guide shaft 437a). Since the two second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b provided in the are always lit at the same time, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a, the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are illuminated from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to be canceled out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly decorated with light in a planar manner.

In addition, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a planar manner by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are Parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are decorated with dots of light by the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see a light-emitting effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, such as emitting light in a planar manner and partially emitting dot-like light. It is possible to strongly attract the attention of players through light-emitting effects, etc., and the light-emitting effects that emit sparkling spots in the form of dots, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, can make players ``ah-ha''. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower right side of the door frame on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are shaped asymmetrically with respect to each other, at first glance, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame are assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid incorrectly attaching the lower right side decorative board 433, improve assembly workability, and suppress increase in cost.

[3-11. Decorative board identification]
Next, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail using the door frame 3 as an example, mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, are shown. The upper side decorative board 432, the lower door frame right side decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used as a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, and non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. that are attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. That's what I do. As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board is reflected to the front side, making it possible to decorate the front decorations etc. with brighter light. This makes the decorative board less noticeable.

Note that the white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, different identification parts 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification section 7 includes a character identification section 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b using different colors (indicated by different shades of shading in FIG. 74). It has .

To be more specific, as the character identification part 7a, the plate left decorative board 273 has the characters "lower left", the plate right decorative board 278 has the characters "lower right", and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has the characters "upper left". The lower left decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has the characters "lower left," the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "upper right," and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "lower right." The text is "Top Middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "Top Left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "Top Right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is provided not on the entire rear surface but on a portion of the back surface so as not to interfere with soldering of LEDs and the like mounted on the decorative board. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In addition, in the above description, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example, but the various decorative boards provided in the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc. Identification parts 7 such as character identification part 7a and color identification part 7b may also be provided on the decorative board.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification section 7 includes both the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b, but the invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification section 7a may be used. However, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification section 7 (the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to use a decorative board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative board from being assembled during assembly work, and to improve the workability of assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be It is possible to reflect the light to the front side on the front side of the decorative board, so that the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light, and the decorative board can be made less noticeable from the front (from the player's side), improving the appearance. You can make it better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification part 7b serving as the identification part 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, a desired (desired color) can be determined just by looking at a part of the decorative board. ) can recognize whether it is a decorative board or not. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards overlap during assembly, as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, the desired decorative board can be easily found, reducing the time and effort required for assembly. can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative board, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, the same color If there is a decorative board provided with the identification part 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, if there are not enough colors in the color identification section 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, you can easily recognize whether you have prepared extra decorative boards or not enough decorative boards. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prepare the necessary number of decorative boards, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification part 7a as the identification part 7 for distinguishing from other boards is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the operator can read the characters in the character identification part 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear surfaces of each decorative board are white, and the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface, so that the decorations provided in front of the decorative board have high transparency. Also, the decorative board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), and the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED can be reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative board. This makes it possible to decorate the decorative body with brighter light, and to entertain the players with the highly effective light-emitting performance, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, so that the functional parts are not visible from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly due to visibility, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration (gaming machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by providing them on the rear surface of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to omit the trouble of coloring the functional parts and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired part where it is desired to detect approach or contact of a player By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, when a player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired part, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect changes in capacitance, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired part. In response to detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392, predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1512. On the other hand, when the contact detection body 393 of the desired part and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in other parts and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected. will be disconnected, so even if the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 provided at the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact sensing body 393 will be disconnected. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, changes in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 are not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 at the desired location is reliably detected. can be used to prevent false positive detections.

In this way, from among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions, the contact detection body 393 to be connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394. It becomes possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means, the number of channels required to detect the approach or contact of a player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, it becomes possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, and the increase in the number of performance means allows players to enjoy a more diverse range of performances. In addition to making it difficult for the players to get bored, it is possible to fully entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 are set to the desired parts by the switching unit 394 depending on the game state. The contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to detect the approach or contact of a player to a desired part, and control the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. Since it is possible to ignore a predetermined caution or alarm by means of this method, it is possible to monitor a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, and to relatively reduce the number of channels that can be used for production. The number can be increased, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor body containing electronic components such as sensor IC and output circuit can be installed in a part that is difficult for players to see, which improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increases its appeal to players. can be increased.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The contact detection sensor main body 392 can detect the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 by simply connecting it to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detection sensor body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor body 392, the contact detection sensor body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected to each other. This reduces the number of parts compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member. This reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and also eliminates the need for designing the routing of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body. 392 can be arranged more freely, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily implemented.

Further, a switching unit 394 is provided to switch the contact sensing body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the switching unit 394 can select the contact sensing body 393 to be detected. When a player participatory performance is executed in which a plurality of distributed contact sensing bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection sensor body 392 at the timing when the player touches them in order. By switching the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detectors 393, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that can be operated by pressing the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352, which is made of a metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with 351 (performance operation unit 350).

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the outside button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the production operation unit elevating and lowering. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button interior decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the production operation unit 350, a predetermined production is output, so the production operation unit 350 is activated as a non-contact operation unit or It can function as a touch operation section. Since the performance operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed and operated by the player when it is protruded, the performance operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and press operation. Since it is possible to perform a variety of production operations such as operation, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that is different from conventional pachinko machines that have operation buttons that can only be pressed, and it is easy to embody a pachinko machine 1 that has an appearance that is different from other pachinko machines. By differentiating the pachinko machine from other machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (button body 351). Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the capacitance and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the player's approach to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to the time of contact in multiple stages, and therefore output a performance according to each stage. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for players to see, so that the appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved and its appeal to players can be increased.

In addition, as mentioned above, the operation unit can perform a variety of performance operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation, so it is possible to perform player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible for the players to enjoy the player participation type performance, which reduces the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is made of punched metal made of a metal plate in which a plurality of holes are formed, the plurality of holes prevent the player from touching the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in the state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and the occurrence of false detection by the contact detection sensor body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of a plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact sensing body 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance. It is possible to widen the range in which the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is detected. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range, so as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged and , when the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing a player participation type performance. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, it is difficult to miss the operation timing in a player participation type performance, and the player can be reliably participated in the player participation type performance. This performance can entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as a performance means provided on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side can be inserted through the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. The light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the medium decorative board 364 can be outputted to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing is provided with a contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced, and even if the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced. 350 can be made less likely to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the production operation unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the player can press the production operation unit 350 without any hesitation, and can operate the production operation unit 350. It is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable and to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the thickness of the contact sensing body 352 can be made thinner than when the contact sensing body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to make it easy to provide the contact detection body 352, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased, making it more appealing to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be designed easily.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal, so the contact sensing body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to easily form an optimal shape for detecting the approach or contact of a player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the production operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button body 351, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort due to the player touching the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed. In a player participatory performance using the player as an operation part, the button body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the performance can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact sensing body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. Therefore, the effort required for cleaning can be reduced, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as the pachinko machine 1 is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side. A predetermined performance can be output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be It is possible to reliably enjoy the performance outputted through (via) the operation unit 350 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since it is arranged so that the production means is covered by the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 352 (production operation section unit 350) and the production means can be compactly integrated, so that the above-mentioned To provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by making it easy to install a performance operation unit 350, a performance means, etc., which have the above-mentioned effects, in a desired part of the pachinko machine 1. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, the performance is activated. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 to prevent the player from approaching the performance operation unit 350. Or contact can be detected. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350, the production operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the production operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the production operation unit 350, it will come into contact with (collide with) the player, and the player will be in contact with the production operation unit 350. When the performance operation section unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present to the player a performance using physical force such as pushing the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to players with performances that have not been found in conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players to the performance operation unit 350. The protrusion of the performance operation section unit 350 can be surely noticed.

When projecting the production operation unit 350, if the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lifting spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes weaker and the urging force can be increased, and the lifting spring 365 is By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the production operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be projected with various protruding forces, it is possible to increase the variation of performances based on physical force, making it difficult for players to get bored, and making it possible to control the performance operation. It is possible to enjoy the effect caused by the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the protruding force of the production operation unit 350 is changed depending on the gaming state, when the player approaches or contacts the production operation unit 350 with his or her fingers, a strong force is applied to the production operation unit 350. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, making him think that something good will happen (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 is configured as a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player participation type production is executed, the player can press the production operation unit 350 to play the game. The player can participate in the participatory performance, and can enjoy pressing operations on the performance operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing loss of interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible for players who place their hands or fingers on the production operation unit 350 (the top surface of the button body 351) to be able to perform the press operation at any time. When a player participatory performance is executed in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed, the performance operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Even without providing guidance on the start of execution of the performance, it is possible to quickly make the player aware of the start of execution of the performance with player participation, and increase the desire to press the performance operation section unit 350 to start the performance with player participation. You can enjoy it even more.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, compared to the case where the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude using a drive motor. Therefore, the performance operation unit 350 can be easily and forcefully protruded, and the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected. Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the production operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and cause the production operation unit 350 to protrude with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 to the time of contact in multiple stages, so that the By making the game stand out with a projecting force, it is possible to present a more diverse range of performances to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, by causing the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3 to pop up when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can enter the performance operation unit 350 that is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. When approaches or contacts, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches in the performance operation section unit 350 changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the performance operation unit 350, detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, it is possible to detect contact due to the approach or contact of the player. Since it is possible to detect changes in the capacitance of the detection body 352, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is activated by the capacitance. Players can be detected. Then, by detection of the contact detection sensor body 358 or movement (pressure) of the production operation unit 350 by the player, the production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer button decoration board 355, the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decoration board A predetermined effect is executed by effect means such as 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the performance operation unit 350 or approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the performance. It is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest in playing games.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation section unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) is connected to the performance operation section (non-contact operation section, contact operation section). You can make it work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances or retreats (presses) the performance operation unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation unit 350 can function like a performance operation unit (press operation unit). For this reason, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored, and it is also possible to make the players enjoy the player participation type performance, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the capacitance of a contact detection body 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that the player touches (underneath the upper surface part 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact sensing body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined performance are provided, and each It becomes possible to perform different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since a predetermined performance is executed by the player's detection by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the performance operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a sense of operation to the touch operation (contact operation), and it is possible to make the performance operation more enjoyable for the player.

Furthermore, it includes a performance operation unit 350 that the player can move forward and backward (press), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Therefore, in a player participation type performance, the player is required to perform an operation (press operation) to advance or retreat the performance operation unit 350, or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the various operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type production, thereby making it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. Can be done. When a player participates in a player participation type production, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by performing various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player in the participatory performance, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Further, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the production operation unit 350 to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the production operation unit 350 is locked so that it cannot move forward or backward. Therefore, until a performance such as advancing or retracting the performance operation unit 350 is executed, the performance operation unit 350 is prevented from moving forward or backward by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking on its own. Therefore, it is possible to avoid making the player feel distrustful or anxious due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, and making the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable. You can make it possible to

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position apart from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor that has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is difficult for players to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies, Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be selected according to the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to optimally correspond to the above, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. When the user approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396 with the button outer decorative substrate 355, the inner button decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, the contact sensing element 352 or the contact sensing element 397 The capacitance of the button changes, and a predetermined effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player side by the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The player's attention can be strongly attracted to the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 by the light irradiated to the button, and the performed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decoration board 355, the button inner decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398, Since it is formed along the decorative part provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397 is part of the decorative part, and the game It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting a player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, it is assumed that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be concerned about the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397, and the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 will not be bothered by the player. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 will not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effects of the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 can be shown to the player in a good condition, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covers the outside of the button. Since the decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 is configured to perform a production in which light is irradiated to the player side, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the production operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and it is also possible to provide the player with a sense of operation using light. Therefore, for example, when executing a player participation type production, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact sensor 352 or the contact sensor 397 approaches or contacts the player's finger or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396. By detecting the contact, the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decoration body 398 executes the effect, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the kata performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc. Since it is possible to change the effect of the outside button decorative board 355, button inside decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 depending on the distance from the outside button decorative board 355, depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the presentation by the decorative board 364 or the decoration body 398 in the button, and it is possible to show a more diverse presentation to the player, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the variety of presentation. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 are detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the game on the button body 351 or the surface member 396 It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is configured to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member, so that, for example, When the contact sensing body 397 is made of a metal vapor deposited film, it can be made transparent by making the vapor deposited film thin, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by making the vapor deposited film thick and have a metallic luster. I can do it. Alternatively, if the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punched metal with a design such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detection bodies 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable from the player side, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacitance is increased when the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front side). As a result of the change, a predetermined effect is produced by the effect presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact sensing body 395 (including the contact sensing body 352, the left contact sensing body 390L, the right contact sensing body 390R, the contact sensing body 393, the contact sensing body 397, etc.) for displaying the Since the contact sensing body 395 is formed in the outer peripheral shape, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact sensing body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351, and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact sensing body 395. Since the means presents a predetermined effect via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can function as the performance operation section 301. Since the contact detection body 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the production operation section 301 appears to have a design, which is unlike any previous pachinko machine. Since the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the operation section 301, it can give a strong impact to players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Furthermore, as described above, the touch detection body 395 etc. with a design can give a strong impact to the player, so it is possible to strongly arouse interest in the touch detection body 395 etc. (button body 351). It is possible to increase expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to make the operation of the button body 351 enjoyable when a player participation type performance in which the button body 351 is operated is executed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 and the like that detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, some effects may be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the performance operation section 301 (button body 351) for presenting the performance by means of means. Therefore, when a player participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, by prompting the player to approach or touch the button body 351, the button body 351 is first activated by the contact detection body 395, etc. It is possible to make the player aware that it is the operation section 301, and it is possible to give a surprise to the player and make the player participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player participatory performance is executed by operating the performance operation section 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing that it is the performance operation section 301, the contact detection body 395 etc. may become static. Since the capacitance changes and the performance is presented by the performance presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presentation means in accordance with the change in capacitance in the contact detection body 395 etc., the player's finger or the like does not touch the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 etc. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be easily implemented. In addition, since the effects are presented in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395, etc., contact occurs when the player's hand or finger approaches the button body 351 that covers the contact sensing body 395, etc. Since it is possible to detect the distance up to It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making it difficult for the user to get bored with the game.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punched metal, expanded metal, wire mesh, etc. is used as the conductive contact sensing body 395 etc., It is possible to impart a design to the contact sensing body 395 etc., it is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact sensing body 395 etc., it is also possible to make the contact sensing body 395 etc. stand out, and the above-mentioned effects are achieved. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer circumferential shape of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct something with design properties without forming the contact sensing body 395 etc. into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust, food and drink stains, etc. do not adhere to the contact sensing body 395 etc., and the effort required for cleaning is simplified. It can be made into something. To be more specific, since the contact detection body 395 is made of a material with irregularities such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drinks easily adheres to the irregularities, and it takes time and effort to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a material with irregularities such as punched metal, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering to the pachinko machine, and as it is easy to clean, the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact sensing body 395 etc., the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a metal vapor deposited film or the like. If a material that enhances the design, such as foil stamping, is used, it is possible to prevent premature wear due to contact by a player, and it is possible to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as mentioned above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact sensing body 395 etc. Since it is possible to use materials that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player as the sensing body 395, it is possible to increase the flexibility of the materials used for the contact sensing body 395, etc., and to meet the needs. The contact sensing body 395 and the like can be formed from a suitable material.

Furthermore, when the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 and the like is changed by bringing the player's finger or the like close to or touching the button body 351 that covers the contact sensing body 395 and the like, the button body 351 and the contact sensing body 395 Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player through the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc., the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with a finger or the like due to the effect presented through the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc. This allows the player to intuitively recognize the player's actions, and allows the player to enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. Since the effects presented to the player are executed via the button body 351, the contact sensing body 395, etc., the button body 351 can function like a contact operation section, and the presented effects can improve the operational feel. can be given, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that can perform multiple operations, the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with his/her finger or the like, and the contact detection body 352 is activated. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 emit light to cause the game to be activated through the button main body 351. A light-emitting effect in which a player is illuminated with light, a effect in which the vibration motor 356 vibrates the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact with the button body 351 through (via) the button body 351, and a effect that causes the button body 351 to protrude upwards by the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360. As a result, the button body 351 can function as the contact operation section 302, and the player can enjoy it. You can do it. Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the user's desire to operate the button body 351. Then, with the player's finger or the like touching the button body 351, by moving the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation part 303, so that the contact detection object 352 detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., and the pressing operation of the button body 351 allows the player to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored and keeping the player interested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Further, a detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is constituted by a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface part 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 will cause the button main body 351 to It is possible to detect the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like with the upper surface portion 351a of the player, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is constituted by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit Since the sensor body 358 can be placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353, which is remote from the upper surface part 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be placed in an inconspicuous area. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, there are provided an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation part lifting/lowering mechanism 360, so that light and light can be transmitted to the player through the button main body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure can be easily applied, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball firing device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a ball launcher 540 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending from side to side and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 in a single direction based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base unit 501 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b that penetrates from front to back within the height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

The main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c in front of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and includes a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front and into which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front and connect the board unit. A circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

The main body frame base 501 also has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 has a main body frame release switch for detecting the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame release switch is installed. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is located at an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinged and rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 in the left and right direction. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has the side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502, the guide body 502a is brought into contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded part. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment part 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in front view, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinged manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is sent to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 195 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downwardly from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front and has a width that is substantially the same as the top plate portion in the front-rear direction. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a in the front view, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the ball B is released from the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been loaded toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 91).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and back right direction and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance path 570a, since the ball cut detection sensor 574 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front and back direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 89(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape open to the rear and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a; It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 which is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and whose rotating shaft protrudes between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B, and a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 that detect game balls B. A movable ball extracting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball extracting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball extracting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction in the right direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the delivery blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position of about 1/3 height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward to the left in rear view, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device body 581 at a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passageway is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passageway 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball ejecting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 to the left in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball extractor lever 593 is raised to make the ball extractor movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which were tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extractor movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extractor movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so that the game balls B are closer to the side of the payout passage 580a. It will also flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extracting movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extracting passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear cover 582. Since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent strong force from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be more quickly discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b, so the pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

Further, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward in the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end in the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper ball removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper dispensing ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. is emitted downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b is opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full bulb path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball ejection passage 600e flows through the lower ball ejection passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in the normal state (the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball break detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, there is a gap between the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicates with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B will stay and be stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( In addition to informing the player that the tank is full (for example, "Please remove the ball!"), the system also controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detecting it. Temporarily stop it until the

When ejecting the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c and ejected to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall is discharged to the island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b projects downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the volume is smaller, a sufficiently wide space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and The space is in communication with the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

To be more specific, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection part 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made wider, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is removably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (Fig. 96). The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc. This is to control and pay out a specified number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and lock the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 controls the rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to be tapered. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 98(a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 101 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and removed from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward; and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that is sloped so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the opposite end (right side wall 552e side), and has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to flow through the ball.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so as to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force is always applied from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction to the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By distributing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so the interruption of the game due to ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in playing due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-back direction, and has the same side in the left-right direction as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. A detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and has a wider interval in the left and right direction than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and has a bottom surface. A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the upper open part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is covered with overflow. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate extending rearward from a low position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It extends in a shape. The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m; The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir portion 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes towards the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape, so that the detour passage 552g runs along the front end side of a portion extending diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the wide part of the tank rail 553 is used as the detour passage 552g. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this region. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately ⅓ of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The area surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as that of the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). (upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner of the rear end is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game balls B spilled outside the main body frame 4 are caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is made higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is controlled from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with an overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, they can be made difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and rides on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view of the tank rail portion of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, viewed from the back. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. In addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball rectifying member 556A are included in the tank rail 553A of the second embodiment, which is different from the above. , the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and similar structures will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove. The tank rail 553A includes a first rail cover 554A that closes the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a second rail cover 555A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. The provided ball rectifying member 556A is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) etc., the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c that meanders in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. This meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protective walls 555b extending upward from both front and rear ends upstream from the center in the left-right direction of the cover portion 555a. It has an opening 555c passing through the cover part 555a between the pair of protection walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end extending back and forth and is rotatably attached around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and projects into the tank rail 553A through the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A. It has a flat rectifying piece 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A contacts the game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a line. The game balls B are restrained from moving quickly to the downstream side, thereby preventing ball biting from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, due to the weight of the electric wire, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A may not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the ball rectifying member 556A may not be able to sufficiently exert the rectifying effect on the game balls B. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward, sufficiently exerting the rectifying action, and preventing ball biting and balls inside the tank rail 553A. Occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A where the height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in multiple stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, since the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, it is possible to prevent the upper game balls B from moving to the downstream side first. This can reduce the occurrence of ball biting.

Furthermore, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Placing near a terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or control board to which electric wires are connected, or placing a terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near tank rail 553A. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the arrangement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the main body frame including the tank rail and the like according to the third embodiment, viewed from the rear right and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail. FIG. 112 is an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame including the tank rail and the like according to the third embodiment when viewed from the rear left. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal board, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing the upper part enlarged. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the upper right back, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment seen from the upper right. It is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 116 as seen from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 116 as seen from the rear.

The tank rail, etc. of the third embodiment is the same as the tank rail, etc. of the first embodiment (ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball rectifying member 556, and ball stop member). A protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added to the configuration of 557), and the same configurations as above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails and the like of this embodiment include a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is box-shaped and open upwards and extends left and right, and a ball tank 552 that extends left and right of the dispensing base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part where the tank is located, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

This tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion that becomes lower in height toward the downstream) through which dirt, dust, etc. within the tank rail 553 can fall. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided below each of a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball rectifying member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is open toward the bottom and rear of the tank rail 553, extends left and right, and is formed in a size that cannot allow the game ball B to pass through. When the game ball B exists on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly viewed from behind through the opening 553d. Further, the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's fingers or a thin stick through the opening 553d. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the ball clogging that has occurred in the area through the opening 553d. In addition, the ball rectifying member 556 can be lifted up through the opening 553d via the game ball B at the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail, etc. is located to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes off a predetermined range above the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. A second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 553 from a spaced part to the left end between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 on the tank rail 553; A ball rectifying member 556 provided between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 , a ball stopper member 557 provided near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 , and a ball stopper member 557 provided in the vicinity of the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 , and the first rail cover 554 . A protective cover 559 straddles the ball rectifying member 556 from halfway in the left-right direction and covers the upper part of the second rail cover 555 halfway in the left-right direction.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. .

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a), etc.).

By the way, on the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one row, but when the number of stacked game balls B is reduced from two rows to one row, the game balls B in the upper row are When trying to pass the game balls B in the lower row, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball jamming due to ball jamming). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of this embodiment, when the game balls B are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, inside the tank rail 553, the game balls B on the upper stage side come into contact with the rectifying piece 556a, By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from trying to overtake the game ball B on the lower side. Thereby, the game balls B on the lower tier side move to the downstream side first, and the game balls B on the upper tier side move behind them, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one row. At this time, since the upper game ball B presses the rectifying piece 556a from below, the ball rectifying member 556 moves so that the rectifying piece 556a moves upward, and its own weight causes the upper game ball to The ball B can be pressed downward, and by vertically swinging the ball rectifying member 556 (rectifying piece 556a), the movement of the upper game ball B to the lower side can be encouraged, and the tank rail It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at this part of 553 (the part whose height decreases toward the downstream).

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

The protective cover 559 includes a band-like top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat front plate part 559c extending downward from the front side and left side of the front plate part 559c, and a flat guide plate part 559d extending forward from the front plate part 559c. The top plate part 559a and the guide plate part 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lower. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of the portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

When the protective cover 559 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the top plate portion 559a is positioned so as to cover the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction. A space is formed between the ball flow regulating member 556 and the ball flow regulating member 556 to be able to swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball rectifying member 556.

The right end side of the front plate portion 559c extends further to the right than the top plate portion 559a, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553. The guiding plate part 559d has a portion on the front side of the top plate part 559a protruding forward from the front plate part 559c by a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to be able to guide the game ball B to the left. has been done. The guide plate portion 559d is sloped more gently than the slope of the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the game ball B cannot enter therein.

The protective cover 559 can prevent the ball rectifying member 556 from coming into contact with the outside when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and touching it from below, or by inserting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 through the opening 553d with the operator's finger. This can be confirmed by pressing upward with a button or by lifting it via the game ball B.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal board 558 for some reason to the left and discharge it to the outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4 using the guide plate portion 559d. .

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are formed of a transparent material, and are arranged inside the tank rail 553. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

Furthermore, since the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, dirt, dust, etc. are prevented from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

Furthermore, since the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is impossible to touch the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B from above. Therefore, if dirt, dust, etc. are attached to the game ball B etc., it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, etc., but in this embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that the plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom of the screen. To be more specific, if dirt or dust is attached to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B inside the tank rail 553, it may come into contact with the game ball B inside through the opening 553d and pass through the game ball B or the game ball B. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be swayed by the player, dirt, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B etc. can be removed. Then, dirt, dust, etc. dropped from the game ball B etc. can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the main body frame 4, the portion where the tank rail 553 extends to the left with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction is provided at the rear of the external terminal board 558. When the electric wire connected to contacts the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the weight of the electric wire causes the ball rectifying member 556 to rotate upward even if the game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game balls B by the ball rectifying member 556 may not be fully exerted.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to a wire whose tip has been stripped of its sheath, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, the wire connection terminal 558a is connected to the wire connection terminal 558a. If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to 558a is insufficient, there is a risk that a short circuit will occur due to the remaining game ball B.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the wire connecting terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can rotate upward, fully exerting the rectifying action, and controlling the flow inside the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, if the wire comes off from the external terminal board 558 for some reason and its tip comes into contact with the game ball B located behind the external terminal board 558, a short circuit will occur and necessary information will not be transferred to the computer in the game hall. You will not be able to receive them, and there will be an error in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate part 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal board 558 for some reason is guided to the left and the main body It can be discharged to the outside from the left side of the frame 4. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal board 558, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit caused by the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding short circuits in the electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the computer in the game hall receives the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 causes the game ball B to be ejected to the left side of the main body frame 4, so that the game ball B is placed behind the main body frame 4. It is possible to avoid problems such as coming into contact with various electric wires and wiring provided on the side and causing disconnections or short circuits.

[4-13. Another embodiment of board unit]
Next, a substrate unit 620A of an embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a front view of the board unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 120(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the rear. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cooke line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a sectional view taken along the K-ke line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, components similar to those of the substrate unit 620 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661. An out ball passage 663 is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and through which the game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 circulate, and a game where the out ball passages 663 circulate. an out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one; a ball extraction guide section 627 that receives the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right in front view; The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 flows, and the ball removal passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal passage 665 are closed. a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 in a similar manner.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open to the front and long from side to side. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball extraction guide part 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall 662a. In addition, a bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed into a box shape with the rear side of the partition wall 662a open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal passage 665 are also formed transparently. Therefore, the insides of the ball removal guiding section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly viewed from the upper and lower sides of the base unit 660, making it easier to check for ball clogging, etc. There is.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in the front side of a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right in the vertical direction at a substantially constant height in the rear base 662, and is open at the front. The front end is closed by a front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 includes a ball ejection receiving section 663a that is open upwardly at approximately the center position in the left and right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left and right, and a ball ejection receiving section 663a that receives the game balls B received in the ball ejection receiving section 663a. An out ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies the game balls B in a line while meandering greatly in the left and right direction, a downward guiding section 663c that guides the game balls B rectified in a line downward by the out ball rectifying section 663b, and a lower end of the downward guiding section 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d that opens downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided at the rear of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed to have a depth in the front-rear direction of about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving part 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lower.

The out-ball rectifying section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end side becomes lower toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving section 663a. In addition, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b in the front-rear direction becomes narrower as it goes downstream (to the left), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, it is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. It has depth. In addition, in the part of the out-ball rectifying part 663b that is to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving part 663a, the vertical height decreases as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the part of the ball discharge receiving part 663a that is on the left side is The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, the game balls B can be aligned in a line in the out ball rectifying section 663b.

The lower guide part 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying part 663b which is below the ball discharge receiving part 663a, and the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall part) in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backwards in a small crank-like curve. As a result, the downstream end (out-ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guide portion 663c is located further back than the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guide portion 663c. The downward guide portion 663c is curved so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a horizontally extending portion. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it will not jump upward toward the out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life because the game ball B frequently passes through.

The ball ejection guiding portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball ejection receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opening toward the left at the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a downstream side bent rearward and extending to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the bulb removal passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall 662a in the rear base 662. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state that is open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located approximately one outer diameter of the game ball B ahead of the rear end of the rear base 662. That is, a gap larger than one game ball B is formed between the ball ejecting passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball ejection passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guiding part 627, and has the same slope as the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is lower than the ball ejection receiving part 663a. A horizontal guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) and a bulb removal outlet 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly rearward of the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

Further, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately protrude inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. The ball discharge passage 665 allows the game balls B flowing through the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward to alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game balls B to flow down in a zigzag pattern. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c can be suppressed.

This ball ejecting passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, so when the ball ejecting lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B from the ball tank 552. , many game balls B can be smoothly guided and ejected.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and ejected from the game board 5 is received by the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 The system detects this and discharges it to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to eject (take out) the game balls B from inside the ball tank 552, etc., operate the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 and move the game balls B ejected to the ball removal path 580b side to the out ball path 663. The ball is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through a ball removal guiding section 627 and a ball removal passage 665, which are separate and independent from the ball removal guide section 627 and ball removal passage 665. As a result, only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected accurately. can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to accurately determine the number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 can calculate the payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the number of game balls B hit in the game area 5a, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting hole 2005, the first The number of game balls B received in the winning holes such as the big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007, etc. and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B received in the winning hole after being hit into the gaming area 5a. This is the sum of the number of game balls B that were received into the out port 1008 and ejected from the game board 5 without being hit, and the number of game balls B that were hit into the game area 5a (number of fired balls). It is about.

Note that the payout rate (ball rate) changes depending on the gaming status, so the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) It is calculated as follows: number ÷ number of out pitches within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is removably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate, and The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and since the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, an "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. As a result, the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are connected to A pachinko machine 1 in which the influence of electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of game balls B on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and malfunctions due to the circulation of game balls B are reduced. It can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose distribution speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifier 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game ball B is Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game Since a player wants to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is difficult to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

Additionally, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player's side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow, a configuration for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of the game board 5 by eliminating the need to provide an out ball detection unit (out ball detection unit), and to secure space on the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing the performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can further entertain players.

In addition, since the ball ejection passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d alternately protrude, the game ball B can circulate through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage to the inside of the ball ejection passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game balls B ejected from the ball ejection passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, a meandering out ball rectifying section 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guiding section 665b from which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude is provided in the ball ejecting passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the flow speed of the game balls B, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

In addition, since the out ball outlet 663d and the ball outlet outlet 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball outlet outlet 665 are opened downward, the out ball outlet 663 and the ball outlet outlet 665 are designed to open downward. Since the game balls B are ejected downward from the pachinko machine 665, it becomes difficult for the game balls B to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines Damage to machines, walls, etc. can be avoided. In addition, since the game balls B are discharged downward from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal passage 665, the discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, and from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball extraction passage 665 on the island equipment side. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the part of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be By simply ejecting the game ball B hit into the region 5a downward, it becomes possible to transfer it to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. , it is possible to have a simple (easy) configuration, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the ball ejection outlet 665c of the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the ball ejection outlet 665c and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball ejection passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2. Since the ejected game balls B can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game balls B flowing vigorously through the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2. It is possible to avoid damage to the outer frame 2 and provide a pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged.

In addition, since the ball extraction outlet 665c of the ball extraction passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the part where the game balls B are collected on the island equipment side ( There is no need to advance the out-receiving part, bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the effort of installing the Pachinko machine 1 and the effort of moving the Pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the above board unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125, 126, and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 126(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in FIG. 126(a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. To be more specific, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663, there is a merging portion 663e that merges with the ball-extraction discharge passage 665. The merging portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end thereof serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward for a short distance from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. . As a result, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of a game hall, the parts for collecting game balls B (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the guide piece 667 can direct the ejection direction of the game ball B diagonally backward and downward, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is connected to the main body frame 4. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side within the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like within the island facility. Therefore, since it is possible to arrange the out ball passage 663 (out ball outlet 663d) as far forward as possible, it is possible to widen the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4. Therefore, by moving the out ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated when many game balls B flow through the out ball passage 663 can be avoided. The influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, an out sensor 664 can be attached to and removed from below at the out ball outlet 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out bulb passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f. A sensor cover 668 that restricts downward movement of the sensor 664 is provided.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guide portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out bulb rectifying portion 663b in the out bulb passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 includes a main body part 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose proximal end side is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and a sensor cover 668 for detecting the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body part 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion that coincides with the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body portion 668a and is elastically deformable. have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached at its proximal end to a portion of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided on the outside of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is configured such that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 matches the out ball passage 663. By rotating and closing the locking claw portion 668c to lock the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a comes into contact with the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and closes the locking claw portion 668c. A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see Figure 126(a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664. through which it is discharged downward. The through hole 668b of this sensor cover 668 also serves as an out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release the locking from the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body part 668a so that the locking claw part 668c moves downward, the main body part 668a of the sensor cover 668 is exposed to the bottom surface of the sensor 664. The out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the object that may be touched (for example, the outer frame 2 A certain amount of clearance is created between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with an object that may come into contact with it, thereby preventing damage to the sensor cover 668. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B are distributed. However, as mentioned above, by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below, making it easy to replace the out sensor 664. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with objects that may be touched, such as the outer frame 2. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. Specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come in contact with the out sensor 664. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 may open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during a game and the out sensor 664 falls off, the out sensor 664 will detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been hit into the gaming area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 etc. will notify the occurrence of an abnormality. In response to this notification of the occurrence of an abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like will open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the proximal end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out bulb rectifying portion 663b. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly viewed from below. Therefore, when game balls B are jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually confirmed from the outside, making it possible to identify at a glance the location where the game balls B are jammed. This allows the game ball B to be freed from clogging at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, this pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down to stand upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 can be replaced from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily check the inside of the ball discharge passage 665 and the like.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so a game that has been interrupted due to the out sensor 664 being damaged can be restarted quickly. In addition, it is possible to alleviate the frustration of players due to interruptions in play and suppress a decline in interest, and it is also possible to suppress a decline in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 does not come away from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to avoid losing the sensor cover 668.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the outer part of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front and rear direction (horizontal direction). Since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the distribution of downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of game balls B is limited to the side rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side It is relatively small on the locking claw 668c side (the other end side) that is locked on the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the force is applied to the sensor cover 668 at one end where it is rotatably attached. Since the locking claw 668c on the other end side is difficult to release, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. .

[4-14. Third embodiment of board unit]
Next, a substrate unit 700 according to a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment with the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit omitted, viewed from the front right, and FIG. 127(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) from the front left. FIG. 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 127 seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 128(b) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 127 seen from the lower right back. 129(a) is a plan view of the board unit in FIG. 127, (b) is a sectional view taken along the Corco line in (a), and (c) is a sectional view taken along the Sasa line in (a). FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X--X in FIG. 129(a).

131 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the rear. 133(a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit in FIG. 127 seen from the front, and FIG. 133(b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 seen from the back. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing how to eliminate ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing how to prevent a linear unauthorized tool from entering the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 127.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the above-described board unit 620 and board unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 127 to 136, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, payout control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above-described board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

This board unit 700 is provided with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and is provided behind the first ball path 701 so that the game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow. A second ball path 702 through which game balls B can be distributed; a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701; and a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the second ball path 702. A second ball sensor 704 that detects ball B, and a ball removal path 705 through which game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flow. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance opening upward, and each of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 detects the game ball B one by one with the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. Discharge downward.

In this embodiment, on the game board 5, the game balls B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 circulate through the first ball path 701, and the game balls B received in the game board 5 receive a general prize. The game ball B received in the opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 is configured to flow through the second ball path 702. ing. In other words, the configuration is such that out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, the winning holes (winning hole sensor) such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first big winning hole 2006, and the second big winning hole 2007 of the game board 5 are If a fraudulent act is performed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will be different, making it possible to detect a fraudulent act with respect to the winning opening. .

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 has a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface and has a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 are provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. A ball path member 713 having a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate ball clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 and to prevent unauthorized tools from entering. a security cover 714 that can be opened and closed on the rear base 712; a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705; A frame relay board 716 is provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and upward and long in the left and right directions. A ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes off the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball socket 711a that is open long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release port 711b that is opened at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the lower peripheral wall. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 rotatably around an axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the release port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and long in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes off the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball extraction passage 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in front view, and guides it downward to discharge it. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712, and is entirely open to the rear. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715. The part of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 in the ball extraction passage 705 (the part on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side is closed by a passage wall member 715.

In addition, the rear base 712 includes a first discharge guide part 712a that receives the game ball B flowing through the first ball route 701 of the ball route member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide part 712a of the ball route member 713. It has a second discharge guide part 712b that receives the game ball B that has passed through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide part 712a opens toward the front. , the inlet of the second discharge guiding portion 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b are provided at the same position in the front and rear direction. The first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are open to the rear at the rear side relative to the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the respective exits of the bulb removal passage 705, the first discharge guide part 712a, and the second discharge guide part 712b are located to the left of the release port 711b of the front base 711, and the left They are arranged in order from the top to the right. The outlet of the bulb removal passage 705 has a front end side that widens forward greatly and a rear end side that widens a little rearward with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b (Fig. 128(b) ). That is, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is formed larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the exits of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a that extends vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b that slopes downwardly toward the right from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and an upper right shelf portion 713d that slopes downwardly toward the right from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c; A rectifying wall portion 713e extending obliquely to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a rectifying wall portion 713e that increases in height toward the right from a position spaced to the right with respect to the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e. A lower shelf portion 713f extends to the right than the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and An upper wall portion 713h extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and open upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower wall upper part 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall part 713e and from the left end of the lower wall upper part 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf part 713b. The protruding inner wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downwardly toward the left from the middle of the left side of the inner wall portion 713k, and the eaves portion 713l extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f. It has an extending hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion 713n extending to the left from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall portion 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is vertically cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, and includes a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 also includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall 713p that partitions into front and back a space surrounded by the upper lower wall 713j, the middle wall 713k, the hanging wall 713m, and the lower lower wall 713n.

Moreover, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches in the upper left shelf part 713b, the upper right shelf part 713d, and the lower shelf part 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end of each one toward the partition wall part 713p side. It has a notch 713q. Each notch 713q is provided so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, which is smaller in the front and back direction than the radius of the game ball B, Through the gap, dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide protrusions 713r extending left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by an upper lower wall 713j, a hanging wall 713m, and a lower lower wall 713n on the front side of the partition wall 713p, and is surrounded by a sensor housing in which the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. The rear part of the sensor accommodating part in which the second ball sensor 704 is housed is surrounded by the upper lower wall part 713j, the hanging wall part 713m, and the lower part 713n of the lower wall part on the rear side of the front part 713s and the partition wall part 713p. 713t.

The front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t are arranged such that the detection holes of the first spherical sensor 703 and the second spherical sensor 704 are located below the area between the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f. In other words, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection holes facing to the right. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend from the front 713s of the sensor accommodating part and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating part to the left of the inner wall part 713k. .

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a first ball guide portion 713u that is provided at a portion in front of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n, projects downward, and is open to the rear. have. When the first sphere guide part 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the entrance side of the first discharge guide part 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. The first ball guide part 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f in front of the partition wall part 713p to the right and then to the rear. It can be delivered to the first discharge guide part 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall part 713p in the ball path member 713, a part of the lower wall lower part 713n is opened downward (a part of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 accommodated in the rear sensor accommodating part 713t). ) An inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 is located below. Thereby, behind the partition wall part 713p, the game balls B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f can be delivered to the second discharge guiding part 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located closer to the right than the right end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side is directed vertically downward. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify the plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed such that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (the downstream direction in which the game balls B circulate), so that the game Depending on the flow rate of the balls B, etc., there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, if ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened and the clearing port 711b is opened. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f from below through the release port 711b and the notch part 713q of the lower shelf part 713f, and the game ball B bitten by the tool is inserted. You can clear the ball jam by hitting the ball.

By the way, since the lower shelf part 713f is provided with a cutout part 713q for eliminating ball clogging and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, it is possible to prevent wire-like illegal tools such as piano wire or catheters from falling. from below through the notch 713q to the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and then insert the tip of the unauthorized tool into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk that a fraudulent act may be carried out against the game board 5 that extends upward from the ball path 702) and is provided above. There is a similar fear that such an unauthorized tool may be inserted not only in the lower shelf part 713f but also in the upper left shelf part 713b and the upper right shelf part 713d where the notch part 713q is provided.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat inhibition ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it will come into contact with the inhibiting rib 713o and the tip will Movement can be prevented, and further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden is placed on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the risk of fraud and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Note that in the upper right shelf section 713d and the upper left shelf section 713b on the right side of the middle wall section 713k, their lower and left and right sides are the rectifying wall section 713e and the lower wall where the cutout section 713q is not provided. Since the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b are closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the notches 713q of the corresponding parts. Fraudulent acts will not be performed via the cutout portion 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches 713q provided in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f, so that dirt and dust are directed downward through the notches 713q. (See Figure 136). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the front 713s of the sensor accommodating part and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating part in the upper left shelf 713b are discharged onto the rectifying wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle part. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall 713k. This prevents dust and the like from adhering to the first bulb sensor 703 and second bulb sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t. It protrudes to the left from the front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall part 713k, since the eaves part 713l extends to the left from the upper part of the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper left shelf part 713b. Dirt and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves section 713l, and are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves section 713l, causing the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 to protrude to the left beyond the inner wall section 713k. It is possible to prevent the wire from falling onto the wiring cable and the connector, and it is possible to avoid problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 forms the first ball path 701. The rear left wall 713a, upper left shelf 713b, step wall 713c, upper right shelf 713d, rectifying wall 713e, lower shelf 713f, right wall 713g, groove wall 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guiding portion 712b.

The security cover 714 is formed into a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side is rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction. Moreover, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and held horizontally, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. When the release port 711b is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward and vertical, the release port 711b is opened. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the release port 711b.

When the security cover 714 is in the closed state, it is possible to close the release port 711b of the front base 711, so that a linear unauthorized tool can enter the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and the first ball path 701) from the release port 711b. It is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted into the two-ball path 702). Furthermore, when a ball jam occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 is opened to open the release port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch part 713q of the lower shelf part 713f to clear the ball clogging of the game balls B. I can do it. This work to clear the ball jam is carried out with the main body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

When the security cover 714 has the opening 711b open (vertically), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking part 714a side) is connected to the object that is likely to come into contact with it (here, behind the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the ball clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 left open. Even if an attempt is made to close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with an object (the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. Thereby, forgetting to close the security cover 714 can be avoided, the security cover 714 can be reliably closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is possible to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in the same state. An object that may come into contact with the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably mounted around an axis in the left and right direction, an object that may come into contact with the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when it comes into contact with the security cover 714, the body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 getting caught on the object that may come into contact with it, and damage to the security cover 714 or the object that may come into contact with it can be avoided. .

In addition, the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely gets jammed with the game balls B between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f, and is basically left in the closed state, so it cannot be opened. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes a portion of the rear base 712 that is open to the rear on the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game balls B flowing through the second discharge guide section 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 holds the frame relay board 716 between the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is held between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying connections between the handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. .

In the base unit 710 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129(a), from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711, the upper left shelf 713b and part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 are connected. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball B that has fallen onto the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flown down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf section 713f, they will be broken down by the upper rectifying wall section 713e so that they are aligned in a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled leftward on the lower shelf section 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf section 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall section 713p, it falls into the ball B that is accommodated in the sensor accommodating section front 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guide section 713u, the ball passes through the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, if it is located behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor accommodating part 713t, and then discharged downward through the second discharge guiding part 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through separate paths before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first ball path 701 is located in front of the partition wall 713p, and a second ball path 702 is located behind the partition wall 713p. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 forward of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 transfers the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 in order to extract the game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc. It can be discharged downward through. The game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guiding part 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guiding part 712b (second ball path 702), and ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 are The game ball B is delivered to a part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) on the side that collects it.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the plurality of notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf section 713b, the upper right shelf section 713d, and the lower shelf section 713f, dirt can be removed through the notches 713q. Since dirt and dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid dust and the like from interfering with the circulation of game balls B, and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging, etc. can be done.

In addition, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, it is possible to check from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700) whether or not game balls B are clogged in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily confirmed. In the part of the ball path member 713 where the game balls B are aligned in a line by the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f, the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q, so that the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf If a ball jam occurs between the part 713f and the outer frame 2, open the body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and open the security cover 714 to insert a rod-shaped tool from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f, and the ball clogging can be cleared using this tool.

Furthermore, a release port 711b that opens downward is provided below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a crime prevention cover 714 that closes the release port 711b is provided. In addition to being able to clear the ball jam as described above, by keeping the clearing port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear unauthorized tool can be removed from the clearing port 711b through the first ball path 701 or It is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release port 711b is opened and closed by rotating the front end side around an axis in the left and right direction, it is possible to open and close the main body frame 4 in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close it against the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with an object that may come in contact with it (the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), making it impossible to close the main body frame 4. It is possible to make the user aware of the fact that the user has forgotten to close the cover, the security cover 714 can be reliably closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

Further, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, a plurality of flat inhibition ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward are provided, so that the linear Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it can contact the inhibition rib 713o and prevent the tip from moving; Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden is placed on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the risk of fraud and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guiding portion 712a and second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Even if a linear unauthorized tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide part 712a or the second discharge guide part 712b, the complicated route will prevent the intrusion. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all the game balls B released from the game board 5, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration for detecting the out ball B (for example, an out ball detection unit), and the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced. It is possible to secure a space corresponding to the configuration, and by providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can further entertain players.

In addition, since out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 and the safe ball detected by the second ball sensor 704 are By comparing the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game Since a player wants to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is difficult to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball removal path 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 702 Game balls B without balls are not counted. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, an out ball flows through the first ball path 701 and a safe ball flows through the second ball path 702, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 The safe ball may flow through the second ball path 702, and the out ball may flow through the second ball path 702, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may flow through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path, regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball. Any of the ball paths 702 may be used for circulation.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the release port 711b, but the invention is not limited to this, and the release port 711b is opened and closed by sliding back and forth or left and right. Good as a thing.

In addition, in the above embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall part 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 can be separated into two parts before and after the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Although the ball is ejected through one of two paths, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball path is divided into three or more in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any one of the ball paths is ejected. The game balls B passed through and released from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in which the center accessory etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 137 as seen from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 137 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the back. . FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory etc. made transparent. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board shown by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. FIG. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG. 145.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when the player operates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable prize opening 2003, which provides a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game balls B. A first starting hole 2004, a second starting hole 2005, a first big winning hole 2006, and a second big winning hole 2007 are provided. In this game board 5, the game balls B are placed in the general winning hole 2001, the gate 2002, the variable winning hole 2003, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first big winning hole 2006, and the This is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B within the game area 5a are performed so that the game ball B is accepted or passes through the two major winning openings 2007 and the like.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 167) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIGS. 145 to 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a game played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 167, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a table unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a panel relay board that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The apparatus further includes a back unit 3000 that can be used.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general prize openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B shot into the game area 5a, and which are provided at predetermined positions within the game area 5a. a gate 2002 which detects the passing of the game ball B, and a variable prize opening 2003 which makes it possible to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. , a first starting port 2004 and a second starting port 2005 that are provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. A first grand prize opening 2006 that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first grand prize prize. It is provided in a position different from the opening 2006, and depends on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. It is provided with a second grand prize opening 2007 that can accept game balls B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 167) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a.

In addition, the table unit 2000 further includes a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B. .

Further, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2004, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has four general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and a lower right unit 2400 which is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022. They are provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a big prize opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and a gate 2002 are provided near the vertical center of the gaming area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A gate member 2600 having a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a, and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and A back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 is placed behind the back box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. There is.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guide unit 3100 which is provided at the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 and through which game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate, and a back ball guide unit 3100 near the front end inside the back box 3010. a back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 provided in the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, a back upper front display unit 3300 provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at approximately the same position in the front and back direction as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200; The back lower front effect unit 3400 provided at the rear lower part of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the back box 3010, and the back upper and rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back upper front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (Fig. 162, etc.), and a back lower back effect unit 3600 provided behind the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 and 144. The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122, and the lower full ball path unit 610 is opened. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, back unit 3000, etc. arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 and 144. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 145, etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nails N in the front or attach the front unit 2000. It is said that Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is at its lowest position within the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

In addition, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and back, and is spaced apart in the left and right direction at the upper and lower edges, respectively, and is formed to have a thin board thickness. (See FIG. 152). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. It is.

In the panel board 1110, a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the upper side of the center. The right side and lower side have a wide width that allows a plurality of game balls B to be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width that does not allow a plurality of game balls B to line up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins extending outward from the holding step. Three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging steps 1114 on the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110 are arranged, and the panel protrudes upward from the lower outside of the holding step. It includes a pair of engagement pieces that engage with two engagement steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step part 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front side, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backwards. By elastically engaging the engagement step 1114 of the holding step with the engagement claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, and the player It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the players, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the gaming area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the bottom It can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 or the out-ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball path 663 are detected (counted) one by one by an out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 141, 143, 144, and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 167) that controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. It is equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front side and back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not there has been unauthorized modification, or whether an unauthorized IC has been mounted). from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to an interface board 635, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning hole sensor 3001, a first starting hole sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting hole sensor 2401, a first big winning hole sensor 2525, a second big winning hole. It is connected to the sensor 2561, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first winning opening solenoid 2524, the second winning opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting values, a setting switch button 1311b that can select and switch the setting values, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). may be electrically connected via). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), signals from the setting key switch 1311a and signals from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The setting change board 1311 has a vertical distance between its right side and left side that is almost the same as a vertical distance between the right side and left side of the main control board 1310 , and a horizontal distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction and that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311. It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of its vertical distance dimension is located on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center of the vertical distance is located on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and has a setting key cylinder in which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and a setting key switch 1311a has a press operation section above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is located on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and is located above and to the left of the setting key switch 1311a (bottom left of the setting switch button 1311b), where the switch button 1311b is arranged. 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side is arranged further down, and is located near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a press operation section is disposed at.

In this embodiment, the setting key is at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). In this case, the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the insertion slot, other The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

By rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON, and this setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to the OK key, and the signal of this OK key ON can be turned on. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned ON to the original position. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, two completely different functions, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized with only the setting key switch 1311a, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed together using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation part of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although exposed, "gaps" are formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the press operation part of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the openings corresponding to the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, wire intrusion prevention parts are molded on the cover body for each of these openings. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, it is possible to visually confirm the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of pitches displayed by the base monitor 1310h.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch The wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b should be routed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also connects various signals from the setting key switch 1311a. (In other words, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted. The wiring pattern (to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are formed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns through which signals are transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting switching button 1311b, and setting display 1310g will be briefly explained. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. A "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on needs to be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON to power on the pachinko machine 1. Note that the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 131Of is operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and It may be possible to change the setting value when a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. Turn the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON. Next, the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7) is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from off to on.

When a person who changes the settings of a setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to. Every time a person who changes the setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. The value increases from 1 to 1, and when it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, returns to the initial value of 1, increases by 1 again, and controls to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, move the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key where the setting key is turned ON). Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from its rotational position to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the enter key. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and determined setting values in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that by rotating the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, moving the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key was turned on) to the original position (in other words, the setting key When the switch 1311a is returned to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF, the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g by pressing the push operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the set value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and then the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. This improves work efficiency.

The person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key was turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and from lighting the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turning it off.

The person who changes the setting value takes out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then changes the setting value. complete.

When displaying the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 , the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on the first ON. A "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage has occurred), and then , open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to open the first By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

A person who wishes to display the currently set setting values must first check that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage), and then Then, insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. Among them, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains turned off, and even if the person performing the confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, this press operation will not work. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (that is, Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which setting values are displayed to a state in which they are not displayed.

The person who wishes to check and display the currently set setting values removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then Complete the confirmation display of the set values that have been set.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are as follows: When the power is restored at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is moved clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by turning the setting key by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is as described above. 1, or after the power is restored after a power outage (momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. It is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder, rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the , turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power restoration," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power restoration."

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the allocation rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. It is used to select the small winning symbol determination table that will be used, the normal time transition determination table that defines the percentage of the determination value for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Note that the various tables used in various lottery decisions are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As mentioned above, the setting display 1310g, in addition to displaying setting values, also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own built-in RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or (This is not possible) and displays an error message to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h collects the game balls B fired into the game area 5a through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B played is displayed. Among the game balls B fired into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 167, etc.), and this detection signal is sent to the main body via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a could be set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be configured such that the setting key switch 1311a' can be rotated only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on. In this case, move the setting key switch 1311a' counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By rotating the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it OFF, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on as the enter key ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The configuration of the setting key switch 1311a' may be referred to as "modified example (1) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A wire intrusion prevention part is provided on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The structure will be molded. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

Note that the position where the enter key button is placed on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a, or may be near the setting switch button 1311b. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either one of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with an enter key button and a setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the setting switch button 1311b should be routed. They are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. In the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance from each other). In addition, when a setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The aspect of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as "Modified example (2) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a finger is touching the ball, and a detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The signals may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on these detection signals, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; When it is not touched, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and/or when the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the enter key is not ON. On the other hand, when the launching of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (aspects of the handle touch sensor (including the aspect of a single button operation sensor) ) may be referred to as "determination key modification (3)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the firing control section of the payout control board 633, which will be described later. The firing reference pulses are branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the firing timing control circuit 633b at the dispensing control board 633, and are inputted to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. It may also be determined whether or not it is ON. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while determining that the enter key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. If the game board 5 is provided with a distance measurement sensor capable of detecting The signal may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. The distance sensor detects light emitted by a light emitting part that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, thereby making it possible to detect the player's actions. In this case, when the detection signal from the ranging sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and when it determines that there is movement, it turns on the enter key. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "modification of the enter key (5)") .

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is being transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be referred to as "modified example (6) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting the pulse may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information conveys that the setting key is ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys that the enter key is ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, turns on the enter key, and OFF (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as "modified example (7) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal are The voltage level of the signal is set between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V), and at the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a can turn ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. It is also possible to determine whether it is ON or OFF. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (an embodiment of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be referred to as "modified example (8) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening so that wires etc. cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

In addition, the position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error cancellation switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed are affixed to the positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch, respectively, so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover is provided to cover the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch). ), the color of the press operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error release switch, or the shape of the press operation part may be adopted. It is also possible to use different types of switches, or to use other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the payout control board 633 should be routed between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch. They are formed so as not to approach each other on the control board 633 (separated from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately, Also on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch should be routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). ) is formed. In addition, when a determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The mode of the enter key button (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (9) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON. Good too. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, When the press operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (10) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error release switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, and creates a command. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the push operation section is being operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and notifies the payout control MPU of that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, but the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to notify that fact. When this happens, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on (aspect 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (11) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 to be put out. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on an operation signal that is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a is input. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns the decision key ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it is determined that the enter key is not ON. Can be done. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on.

The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f. A wire intrusion prevention part is provided with a cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the part and the corresponding opening and modify the dispensing control board 633. The structure is molded into

Note that the RAM clear switch 1310f may be disposed on the payout control board 633 near an error release switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (for pressing the press operation part) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation part may be used as the RAM clear switch 131Of. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotary operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Various types of switches can be mentioned. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a RAM clear switch 1310f and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for the error release switch should be routed. are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the payout control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. Also, on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance). In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (which may also include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (12) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the port of the payout control unit power-on processing described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring during the processing, and the command created in the command transmission process of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may also be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later. When the dispensing control MPU determines that the press operation part of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON. When the dispensing control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. ).

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the out of bulb detection sensor 574, or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and sent to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or may determine the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, out of ball detection sensor 574, or delivery detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the setting key switch 1311a' (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (16) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the main body frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the main body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the OK key, and after turning on the OK key, close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the door frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, while the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main body frame 4. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the configuration of the setting key switch may be referred to as "modified example (18) of enter key").

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the initial position and then turning it OFF. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input, while determining that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input. If it is not present, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. Aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (19)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the main control board 1310. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The enter key button may be placed on the main control board 1310 near the RAM clear switch 1310f. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and RAM clear switch 1310f may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when providing an enter key button and a RAM clear switch 1310f on the main control board 1310, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed. They are formed in the main control board 1310 so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, when a decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (Aspect 2 of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as a "modified example (20) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is input to the RAM clear switch. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the enter key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (RAM clear switch Aspect 3 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (21)"). It should be noted that the period during which the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch, which will be described later, the payout control board 633 does not require an error release switch.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the signal of the gate 2002 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2601, various sensors for various winning holes (for example, general winning hole sensor 3001, first starting hole sensor 3002, second starting hole sensor 2401, variable winning hole sensor 2526, first big winning hole sensor 2525, second big winning hole sensor The main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (various sensors, etc.). This aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (22) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 to send the game ball B to the gate 2002 or open the various winning slots in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to feed the game ball B to the out port 1008 or feed the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a controls the stepping motor, DC motor, The operation of the movable object (accessory object) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electrical drive source such as a solenoid, and the operation of the movable object (official object) is controlled based on the detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on. The aspect of the object sensor (which may also include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modification of enter key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, so that the optical sensor can detect the original position of the movable object (accessory object). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory object) so that the position and operating position can be detected.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to detect illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the magnetic sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (24) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the settings needs to move the magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1. By applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1, the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is changed, and the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a that is divided and formed on the game board 5 is changed, and the course of the game ball B is changed to the various prize openings and gate parts (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects a fraudulent act of entering a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor, and also determines whether or not there is a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor. It is also possible to determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the vibration sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (25) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to control the game. A radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 and the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent activities in which the game balls B are fraudulently obtained by causing malfunction of various sensors of the various winning holes provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the radio wave sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (26) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the press operation section 303 of the production operation section unit 350 A detection signal from the press detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the , and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation section 302 of the production operation section unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510, The signals may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the production operation button The aspect of the unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (27) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separately housed. The main control board box 1320 may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body which are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at the caulking portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like through the "gaps" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and between the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding openings. In order to prevent the wire from entering the opening, a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body. Note that if the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, A setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be provided that can detect opening of the cover body. In this case, the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured so that Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above (setting change board box (This aspect may be referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the settings of the setting key switch 1311a are A wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting switch button 1311b. The wiring patterns for transmitting the signals from and to the terminals (main control The connections to the terminals of the connector MSCN of the board 1310 are also formed separately, and the wiring pattern (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, wiring pattern from which the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and wiring pattern from which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b. However, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal were formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). 1311a, one of the wiring patterns is transmitted through the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. Therefore, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on this setting change board 1311 and the main control It may be electrically connected to another connector provided on the board 1310 via a harness (a mode of routing the wiring pattern may be referred to as a "determination key modification (29)").

Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a mode that is appropriately selected and combined from among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the enter key (the selection combination of the modified examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the enter key"). ).

In addition, with the above-mentioned setting values, in addition to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, and the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, the setting value is also used for determining the lottery when transitioning from a variable probability time to a normal time. It is possible to change the probability of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (in other words, increasing the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). The probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset setting value. In other words, the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) exists in advance as a plurality of setting values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the game specifications require setting changes, and the probability of being advantageous to the player is There are game specifications in which the probability (advantage degree) has only a single preset value and does not require any setting changes. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in accordance with such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Since this depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are not dependent on game specifications, that is, can be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification where there is only a single setting value in advance and there is no need to change the settings, the probability that the setting value will be advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is Therefore, it is no longer necessary to use the settings as follows, so it is necessary to change the design of the software by assigning settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 as the following contents. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (area excluding a specific area out of all RAM areas), multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after clearing the RAM). This can be used as a setting value (which allows variation in the startup method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable object)" for the operation of the movable object (accessory object) that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and the lighting of light emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, which specifies "movement of movable objects (objects), lighting of light emitters)," is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2, which specifies "movement of movable objects (accessory objects)," is assigned as setting value 2. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as value 3, and setting value 4 is assigned as "detailed operation of the movable object (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.)". Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned, which specifies "actions such as interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories), etc.", and setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in units of one port (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)", and the setting value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "No operation" is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be referred to as "Modification (1) based on common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate the movable body (accessories) and light up the light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the movable body to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). You can move the (accessory object) and light up the light emitter. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, variations can be provided in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for a player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" as setting value 1 is assigned, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" as setting value 3 is assigned. ” is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned which specifies “25 seconds” as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies “30 seconds” as setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as a setting value 6 is assigned. )”). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time from the end of symbol variation until entering the player waiting state, variations can be given to the time from the end of symbol variation until the demonstration begins.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for the player) to be performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, the demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" as setting value 1 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern that specifies "comical effect, movement effect of movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and demo production setting pattern 3 is assigned, which specifies "serious production" as setting value 3, and demo production setting pattern specifies "serial production, movement production of movable objects (accessories)" as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, demo production setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "historical drama style production" as setting value 5, and demo production setting pattern 5 specifies "historical drama style production, movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration performance may be described as "modification example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting values included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the content of the demonstration performance is changed and set, variations can be given to the content of the demonstration performance that is performed after the variation of the symbols is completed.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned. Volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "Volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, Volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "Volume 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, Volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" as setting value 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the default volume may be described as "modification example (4) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a has a default volume set to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the minimum volume end by moving the volume adjustment switch in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the minimum level, the volume may be muted, or the volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when the user stops in front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the maximum volume end after the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decreasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. By changing and setting the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch included in the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of volumes of error notification sounds in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, they are not dependent on) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and by setting the volume to the maximum, the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound can be played in a game hall. Although it is easy for staff such as store clerks to notice this, it may be annoying to players who are playing games at other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" as setting value 2 is assigned. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" as setting value 4, and " Error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" as setting value 6 is assigned (error notification volume (The mode of change setting may be described as "Modification (5) based on common hardware configuration"). The setting value ranges from setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, but at which you can recognize the error notification sound if you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward a level at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to vary the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default brightness values for light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light emitting body controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" as setting value 2, and " A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned. be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light-emitting body, it is possible to turn on the light-emitting body, blink it, change the gradation point, etc. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the default brightness are changed and set, variations can be given to the default brightness of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. Error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 is assigned which specifies "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4. Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 is assigned, which specifies "error notification brightness 5" as setting value 5, and error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as setting value 6. Brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification may be described as "Modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the lamp's brightness increases from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp does not turn off, but the lamp brightness is low and allows you to recognize an error notification if you stop in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to change the brightness of the light emitter in error notification, and controls lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, selects the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, you can turn on, blink, change the gradation point, etc. of the light emitter. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification is changed, the brightness of the light emitting body, such as a lamp or LED, in error notification can be varied.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the common hardware configuration described above are determined when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are satisfied in the setting value confirmation display processing to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine 1 (the setting value display (This aspect may be referred to as "Modification (8) based on common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-described modification of the enter key (30).

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required that the setting key be turned on. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the push operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on process to be described later. Clear the game except for , and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In addition, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and stores data in the main control built-in RAM. The game progresses by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then setting interrupt permission. In other words, when powering on the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above are satisfied when the power is restored to the Pachinko machine 1, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. That will happen. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned on by pressing the button, the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed. be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required that the setting key be turned on. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in a setting value confirmation display process that is performed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later. Display on container 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the press operation section be pressed when powering on the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which it is pressed is limited. Therefore, as the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned ON, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not need to be pressed (when described as "a modification of predetermined setting value display permission conditions") ). In this case, when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as part of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and instead In the input process, initial settings and start-up settings for the built-in WDT are performed before the game is started, and after that, interrupt permission settings and the like are performed to proceed with the game. Note that when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side timer interrupt process because the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is set to the initial state. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and the first ON operation is performed. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a performs a main body frame opening process to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied and the setting value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, it is possible to prevent When the power is restored after a momentary power outage that occurs, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is inserted. The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs settings such as enabling interrupts. While the game is in progress, when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and then The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process once the game starts to progress. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts playing the game by setting interrupt permission or the like, it never displays the current set value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a collects balls by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process to be described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted and outputted to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. to be displayed. Therefore, the current setting values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h (this may be described as a "modified example of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values set during the period from when the power is restored until the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission settings etc. In addition, when the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, there is no need to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the modification (30) of the enter key described above.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), lottery results for normal symbols, lottery results for special symbols, etc. .

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the functional display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the gaming status and the lottery results of the normal symbols drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is equipped with a normal symbol display device made up of two LEDs and a normal reservation display device made up of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the gate 2002.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that display the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the opening 2004, and a second special symbol drawn by the reception of game balls B into the second starting opening 2005. a second special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery results; and a second special reservation number display device consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the second starting port 2005. It is equipped with.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions of the opening/closing pattern of the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "win" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that display the number of rounds.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 167) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 167).

Although the details will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of a set plate 1650 that attaches the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 and the set plate 1650. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of a set plate 1650 that is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010, which will be described in detail later (FIGS. 157 to 159). ). The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 and 144. The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100, and a portion of its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general prize openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B shot into the game area 5a, and which are provided at predetermined positions within the game area 5a. a gate 2002 which detects the passing of the game ball B, and a variable prize opening 2003 which makes it possible to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. , a first starting port 2004 and a second starting port 2005 that are provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. A first grand prize opening 2006 that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first grand prize prize. It is provided in a position different from the opening 2006, and depends on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. A second grand prize opening 2007 that can accept game balls B is provided.

In addition, the table unit 2000 further includes a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B. .

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged near the left end in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. The variable prize opening 2003 is arranged at the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting port 2004 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 located at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged above the first starting port 2004 on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The first large winning hole 2006 is arranged directly above the variable winning hole 2003 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the gaming area 5a. The second big prize opening 2007 is arranged close to the right end of the gaming area 5a, slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom in the gaming area 5a.

The first sub-out opening 2021 is arranged between the second big winning opening 2007 and the left end of the gaming area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged on the right side of the second starting port 2005.

The front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2004, and a starting port unit 2100 on the front view left side of the starting port unit 2100. On the other hand, there is a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has four general winning holes 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , a lower right unit 2400 that is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and includes the variable winning opening 2003, the first A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a big prize opening 2006, a second big prize opening 2007, and a first sub-out opening 2021, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 near the vertical center of the gaming area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A gate member 2600 is provided and has a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a and is made up of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

Although the details will be described later, the lower right unit 2400 is capable of accepting the game ball B received in the second grand prize opening 2007, and has a pseudo grand prize opening 2402 with a larger opening than the second grand prize opening 2007, and a pseudo A pseudo-out port 2404 is provided for discharging game balls B not accepted into the big winning port 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 145 and 148. FIG. 148(a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 148(b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit seen from the back. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located directly above the out port 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2004 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a flat front plate part 2101, a gutter part 2102 extending rearward from the periphery excluding the upper side of the front plate part 2101, and a gutter part 2102 extending from the middle of the gutter part 2102 in the front and rear direction to the front plate part 2101. A flat flange portion 2103 extends outward in the left and right direction in parallel with the flange portion 2103 whose rear surface abuts the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a flange portion 2103 stands upward from the bottom surface of the gutter portion 2102. It has a guiding piece part 2104. The starting port unit 2100 is formed of a transparent member except for the decorative seal 2110.

The starting port unit 2100 also includes a peeling hole 2105 penetrating the front plate portion 2101, a mounting hole 2106 penetrating the left and right flange portions 2103 in the front and back directions, and a rear surface of each of the left and right flange portions 2103. It has a positioning pin 2107 that projects rearward from the positioning pin 2107 in a cylindrical shape. Furthermore, the starting port unit 2100 has a decorative sticker 2110 affixed to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101.

The front plate part 2101 of the starting port unit 2100 has a rectangular outer shape in a front view, with the lower side of the front plate part 2101 having a semicircular arc shape. The front plate portion 2101 is recessed rearward on the inside with a substantially constant width left from the outer periphery, and a decorative sticker 2110 is pasted on the recessed portion. A peeling hole 2105 is provided in a concave portion of the front plate portion 2101, and the peeling hole 2105 is closed from the front by a decorative seal 2110.

The gutter portion 2102 extends rearward from the front plate portion 2101, and has an upper end open upward and a rear end open rearward. A portion of the gutter portion 2102 in front of the flange portion 2103 and the front plate portion 2101 constitute a first starting port 2004 that is open upward. Therefore, the direction of ball entry into the first starting port 2004 is directed vertically downward. The pair of flange portions 2103 are formed symmetrically with respect to each other, and the width in the vertical direction becomes narrower toward the outer side in the left-right direction.

The guiding piece portion 2104 is arranged at the center of the front plate portion 2101 and the gutter portion 2102 in the left-right direction, has a constant width in the left-right direction, and has a uniform width in the left-right direction. They are erected vertically in opposite directions (parallel directions). The guide piece part 2104 is formed so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 to the rear. The height of the rear end of the guide piece portion 2104 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the gutter portion 2102. Therefore, the game ball B guided by the guiding piece part 2104 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the gutter part 2102.

The guiding piece part 2104 has a steep piece part 2104a having a steep slope, and a gentle piece part 2104b continuing from the rear end of the steep piece part 2104a and having a gentler slope than the steep piece part 2104a toward the rear. Specifically, the steep piece 2104a of the guide piece 2104 is linearly inclined from a portion near the upper end of the rear surface of the front plate 2101 at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, becoming lower toward the rear. The side surface is shaped like a triangle (approximately an isosceles right triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece part 2104b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece part 2104a at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal so as to become lower toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2004 from above, it first comes into contact with the steep piece part 2104a of the guide piece part 2104, and the game ball B is reflected by the slope of the steep piece part 2104a, so that the game ball B is distributed. The direction is changed from below to the rear, and then the loose piece portion 2104b guides the user to the rear. Thereby, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the first starting port 2004 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

With the decorative sticker 2110 affixed to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted into the peeling hole 2105 from the rear side, and the decorative sticker 2110 is pressed forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member. By doing so, a part of the decorative seal 2110 can be rolled up forward from the front plate part 2101. Then, by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion of the decorative sticker 2110, the decorative sticker 2110 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the front plate portion 2101. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability of reapplying the decorative sticker 2110 during manufacturing and sorting work during disposal.

Furthermore, since the peeling hole 2105 is hidden from the front by pasting the decorative sticker 2110 on the front surface of the front plate portion 2101, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the peeling hole 2105, and also to The existence of the peeling hole 2105 can be made difficult to notice, and it can be made difficult to plan fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2105.

The attachment hole 2106 is a countersink hole, and is used to attach the starting port unit 2100 to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by inserting a mounting screw (countersunk screw) from the front. The positioning pin 2107 is provided closer to the periphery of the flange portion 2103 than the mounting hole 2106, and is provided within a predetermined range (see FIG. 150(c)) from the adjacent mounting hole 2106. There is. The positioning pin 2107 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance.

In the starting port unit 2100, two sets of one mounting hole 2106 and one positioning pin 2107 are arranged on the left and right sides with respect to a vertical line passing through the center of the front plate part 2101 (gutter part 2102) in the left and right direction. They are placed in symmetrical positions. By inserting a pair of positioning pins 2107 into corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100 can be moved to a specific position within the gaming area 5a (a center position to be described later). It is possible to accurately position the object 2500 at a position directly below the central emitting portion 2513a on the stage 2513. Thereby, the acceptance probability of the game ball B from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 to the first starting port 2004 can be made within a desired range.

In addition, in the starting port unit 2100, positioning pins 2107 and mounting holes 2106 are provided at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2004 in between, so that the starting port unit 2100 may change due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity. Even if a shrinkage difference occurs between the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the center position of the first starting port 2004 can be prevented from being biased to either the left or right direction, and the first starting port 2004 can maintain the center position.

In addition, since the starting port unit 2100 has a pair of positioning pins 2107, when installing the starting port unit 2100 on the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2107 are inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel 1100. 1117, the starting port unit 2100 can be positioned, so even if the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 190(b)) through the mounting hole 2106 and tightened, the starting port unit 2100 can be positioned. The mouth unit 2100 does not move slightly, and the starting mouth unit 2100 can be reliably attached to a specific position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the first starting port 2004 is opened upwardly, and the first starting port 2004 is opened in the left and right direction of the center accessory 2500. Located directly below the center. More specifically, the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is located directly below the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, the game ball B released from the central release part 2513a of the stage 2513 is received into the first starting port 2004 with a high probability.

The starting port unit 2100, while attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and transfers it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. I can do it. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 and then discharged downward.

In addition, in the above-mentioned starting port unit 2100, the rear end side of the upper end surface of the guide piece part 2104 is shown as having a pin angle, but the rear end side of the upper end surface is not limited to this. A chamfered portion such as a chamfer may be provided.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 145 and 149. FIG. 149(a) is a front view of a side unit in the front unit, and FIG. 149(b) is a perspective view of the side unit in the front unit seen from behind. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with four general winning holes 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B. The four general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning holes 2001 opens upward.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat front plate part 2201, a rear extension part 2202 extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate part 2201, and a rear extension part 2202 extending from the rear end of both left and right ends of the rear extension part 2202 to the front plate part 2201. and a flange portion 2203 extending outward in parallel with the flange portion 2203 . The front plate portion 2201 is recessed rearward at a portion below a certain width from the upper edge on the front surface. A side unit seal 2220 is attached to a concave portion of the front surface of the front plate portion 2201. Further, the front plate portion 2201 is inclined so that a portion of a certain width from the upper edge on the rear surface becomes thinner upwards (it is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes downward).

The rear extending portion 2202 has, from the left, a first gutter portion 2202a, a second gutter portion 2202b, a third gutter portion 2202c, and a fourth gutter portion 2202d, each of which is open upward and backward and has a half-shaped bottom. It is curved in an arc. The first gutter portion 2202a, the second gutter portion 2202b, the third gutter portion 2202c, and the fourth gutter portion 2202d each cooperate with the front plate portion 2201 to form the general prize opening 2001. In addition, the first gutter portion 2202a, the second gutter portion 2202b, the third gutter portion 2202c, and the fourth gutter portion 2202d are located at a certain height from their respective lower ends at the rear of both left and right ends of the rear extension portion 2202. It extends further back than the end (flange portion 2203).

The first gutter portion 2202a has a height slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side opens diagonally to the upper right direction when viewed from the front. The second gutter portion 2202b has a height approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side is open upward in front view. The third gutter portion 2202c has a height approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side opens diagonally to the upper right direction when viewed from the front. The fourth gutter portion 2202d has a height approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side opens diagonally to the upper right direction when viewed from the front.

When the four general prize openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 are assembled on the game board 5, the four general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the position shown in FIG. ), the direction of ball entry is as shown by the arrow. To explain in detail, the ball entry direction of the general winning hole 2001 (the leftmost general winning hole 2001) constituted by the first gutter portion 2202a is directed diagonally to the lower left as shown in the figure, and the ball entering direction is An upper end surface of a sharp piece 2210a of a first guide piece 2211, which will be described later, is located on the axis. The ball entry direction of the general winning hole 2001 (the second general winning hole 2001 from the left) configured by the second gutter part 2202b is directed diagonally to the lower right as shown in the figure, and the axis of the ball entering direction is It passes above a second guiding piece 2212, which will be described later. The ball entry direction of the general winning hole 2001 (the third general winning hole 2001 from the left) constituted by the third gutter portion 2202c is directed diagonally to the lower left as shown in the figure, and the axis of the ball entering direction will be described later. It passes above the third guiding piece portion 2213. The ball entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (the fourth (rightmost) general winning opening 2001 from the left) configured by the fourth gutter part 2202d is directed diagonally to the lower left as shown in the figure. The axis of the direction passes above a fourth guiding piece portion 2214, which will be described later.

Further, the rear extending portion 2202 is provided on the right side of the fourth gutter portion 2202d, and has a shelf portion 2202e that is gently sloped to become lower toward the right.

The rear surface of the flange portion 2203 comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). The flange portions 2203 are provided at two locations, one to the left of the left end of the first gutter portion 2202a, and the other to the lower right corner of the shelf portion 2202e.

Further, the side unit 2200 further includes a guide piece portion 2210 for guiding the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100. The guide piece portion 2210 extends in the front-rear direction from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to the rear end of the rear extension portion 2202. The guiding piece part 2210 has a steep piece part 2210a having a steep slope, and a gentle piece part 2210b continuing from the rear end of the steep piece part 2210a and having a gentler slope than the steep piece part 2210a toward the rear.

The guide piece portion 2210 of the side unit 2200 includes a first guide piece portion 2211 provided in the first gutter portion 2202a, a second guide piece portion 2212 provided in the second gutter portion 2202b, and a third gutter portion. It is composed of a third guide piece part 2213 provided at 2202c and a fourth guide piece part 2214 provided at the fourth gutter part 2202d.

The first guide piece part 2211 of the side unit 2200 has a different configuration from the second guide piece part 2212, the third guide piece part 2213, and the fourth guide piece part 2214, and has a different configuration from the above-mentioned steep piece part 2210a and loose piece. In addition to the configuration by the section 2210b, the following configuration is also provided. The first guiding piece part 2211 includes a changing piece part 2211a that is erected in a direction opposite to (parallel to) the ball entering direction of the general winning opening 2001 and changes the flow direction of the game ball B to the rear; It is composed of a rear piece portion 2211b that is erected in a direction different from the direction (including the opposing direction) and guides the game ball B backward. The changing piece part 2211a and the rear piece part 2211b of the first guiding piece part 2211 each have a steep piece part 2210a and a loose piece part 2210b.

In this embodiment, the change piece part 2211a is erected diagonally upward and to the right from the upper left part of the lowest part of the arcuately curved bottom surface of the first gutter part 2202a, and the rear piece part 2211b is erected vertically upward from the lowest point on the arcuately curved bottom surface of the first gutter section 2202a. Therefore, the portion of the changing piece portion 2211a that is rearward of the portion where the rear piece portion 2211b branches is located to the left and above the rear piece portion 2211b when viewed from the front.

To explain the first guiding piece part 2211 in more detail, the changing piece part 2211a is formed so that its upper end surface (tip surface) is perpendicular to the direction of ball entry, and the front and left sides are higher than the horizontal plane. It is formed like this. The upper end surface of the change piece part 2211a is linear so that it becomes lower at a steeper angle (45 degree angle with respect to the bottom of the change piece part 2211a) toward the rear from a part near the upper end on the rear surface of the front plate part 2201. After being inclined to , it is bent at a gentle angle (an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the bottom of the change piece part 2211a) so as to become lower toward the rear, and is then linearly inclined. The part of this change piece part 2211a with a steep angle is a steep part 2210a, and the part with a gentle angle is a loose part 2210b. The sharp piece part 2210a of the change piece part 2211a has a triangular side surface (approximately a right isosceles triangle).

The rear piece portion 2211b branches from the middle of the steep piece portion 2210a in the change piece portion 2211a, and is sloped linearly so as to become lower at a steeper angle toward the rear, and then gradually becomes lower as it goes toward the rear. It is bent at an angle (an angle of 5 degrees to the horizontal) and slopes in a straight line. The part of this rear piece 2211b with a steep angle is a steep part 2210a, and the part with a gentle angle is a loose part 2210b. The rear piece part 2211b of this embodiment is formed so that the upper surface of the steep piece part 2210a is flush with the upper surface of the steep piece part 2210a of the change piece part 2211a so that the front and left sides are higher, and the rear piece part 2211b is a loose piece. The upper surface of the portion 2210b is formed so that only the front side is higher than the horizontal plane. Therefore, the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b is twisted between the steep piece 2210a and the loose piece 2210b.

In the general prize opening 2001 where this first guide piece part 2211 is provided, when the game ball B enters from the upper right diagonally along the ball entry direction diagonally lower left, the upper end surface of the steep piece part 2210a in the change piece part 2211a The flow direction is changed from the diagonally lower left direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the backward and downward direction, and toward the rear of the rear piece part 2211b that branches from the middle of the change piece part 2211a. It will roll backward on the lowered upper end surface. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the general winning hole 2001 can be smoothly and quickly guided to the rear.

According to the first guide piece part 2211 of the side unit 2200, in the general winning hole 2001 where the ball entry direction is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, it extends in a direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction). Since it has the changing piece part 2211a, the game ball B that has entered the general winning hole 2001 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface of the changing piece part 2211a. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner between the upper end surface and the side surface of the first guide piece part 2211, the side surface of the first guide piece part 2211, etc., and the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner. This prevents the first guiding piece 2211 from becoming fatigued early and becoming easily damaged due to contact with the side surface or side surface, thereby preventing ball clogging from occurring due to fragments of the damaged first guiding piece 2211. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball jamming, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

By the way, in the case where only the change piece part 2211a is provided upright in the direction facing (parallel to) the ball entry direction of the game ball B, the change piece part 2211a is connected to the first gutter part as described above. Since it is provided at the upper left position than the lowest part of the bottom surface of 2202a, the game ball B comes into contact with the bottom surface of the first gutter section 2202a. Since the bottom surface of the first gutter section 2202a extends horizontally and is not inclined, if the game ball B comes into contact with the bottom surface of the first gutter section 2202a, there is a risk that the circulation of the game ball B will be stopped. . In contrast, in this embodiment, the rear piece 2211b is made to protrude upward from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the first gutter part 2202a, and the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b is made to become lower toward the rear. Since the game ball B is tilted to the side, the game ball B does not come into contact with the horizontal bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a, and can be reliably guided (circulated) backward by the sloped upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2211b. can.

In addition, the speed at which the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 varies, and if the speed of the game ball B at a high speed, the direction of the ball B entering the game ball is diagonally to the lower left, so the general winning hole Since a strong (large) force is acting on the game ball B that has entered the mouth 2001 to move it to the left, the game ball B tends to move to the left from the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b due to that force. This will be the case. At this time, as described above, a part of the steep piece part 2210a and the loose piece part 2210b of the change piece part 2211a are located at the upper left of the rear piece part 2211b, so the part of the change piece part 2211a concerned is This makes it possible to prevent excessive movement of the game ball B to the left within the first gutter section 2202a. It is possible to guide the game ball B backward (as if straddling the ball). Thereby, the game ball B can be prevented from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first gutter portion 2202a. For this reason, according to the first guiding piece part 2211, since the rear piece part 221b is branched into two from the changing piece part 2211a, it is possible to handle game balls B (winning balls) flowing in at various speeds. It is.

Subsequently, the second guiding piece portion 2212 of the side unit 2200 is erected vertically upward from the lowest portion of the semicircularly curved bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b. The second guide piece portion 2212 is formed such that its upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B toward the rear. The height of the rear end of the second guiding piece portion 2212 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b. Therefore, the game ball B guided by the second guiding piece part 2212 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the second gutter part 2202b.

This second guiding piece part 2212 also has a steep piece part 2210a with a steep slope, and a gentle piece part 2210b which continues from the rear end of the steep piece part 2210a and has a gentler slope than the steep piece part 2210a toward the rear. . The steep piece part 2210a of the second guiding piece part 2212 extends horizontally from the lowest part of the bottom of the second gutter part 2202b on the rear surface of the front plate part 2201 to approximately the same height as the diameter of the game ball B. It is linearly inclined at an angle of 45 degrees to the rear, and the side surface is formed in a triangular shape (approximately an isosceles right triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece part 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece part 2210a to the rear end of the second gutter part 2202b so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The general winning opening 2001 constituted by the second gutter part 2202b has the axis line of the ball entry direction of the game ball B passing above the second guide piece part 2212, so the general winning opening 2001 (the front plate part 2201 ) to the upper end surface of the second guiding piece 2212 . Therefore, when the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 along the direction of ball entry pointing diagonally downward to the right, the upper edge of the front plate part 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail planted just before N) flows down on a parabola, and by the time the game ball B reaches the second guide piece part 2212, its flow direction will be directed downward, so the game ball B will flow down the second guide piece part 2212. It comes into contact with the steep piece 2210a on the upper end surface of the portion 2212. Thereby, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the second guide piece part 2212, the side surface of the second guide piece part 2212, etc.

Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the steep piece 2210a of the second guide piece 2212 is reflected by the slope of the steep piece 2210a, so that the direction of flow is changed from below to the rear, and then the game ball B is transferred to the loose piece. The portion 2210b guides the user backward. Thereby, the game ball B can be quickly guided rearward from the entrance of the general winning hole 2001 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

The third guiding piece portion 2213 of the side unit 2200 is vertically provided upward from the lowest portion of the semicircularly curved bottom surface of the third gutter portion 2202c. The third guide piece portion 2213 is formed such that its upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B toward the rear. The height of the rear end of the third guiding piece portion 2213 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the third gutter portion 2202c. Therefore, the game ball B guided by the third guiding piece part 2213 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the third gutter part 2202c.

This third guiding piece part 2213 also has a steep piece part 2210a with a steep slope, and a gentle piece part 2210b which continues from the rear end of the steep piece part 2210a and has a gentler slope than the steep piece part 2210a toward the rear. . The steep piece part 2210a of the third guiding piece part 2213 extends horizontally from the lowest part of the bottom of the third gutter part 2202c on the rear surface of the front plate part 2201 to a height that is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B. It is linearly inclined at an angle of 45 degrees to the rear, and the side surface is formed in a triangular shape (approximately an isosceles right triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece part 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece part 2210a to the rear end of the third gutter part 2202c so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The general winning hole 2001 constituted by the third gutter portion 2202c has the axis line of the ball entry direction of the game ball B passing above the third guide piece portion 2213, so the general winning hole 2001 (front plate portion) 2201 ) to the upper end surface of the third guide piece 2213 . Therefore, when the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 along the ball entry direction pointing diagonally to the lower left, the upper edge of the front plate part 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N ) flows down on a parabola, and by the time the game ball B reaches the third guide piece 2213, its flow direction will be directed downward, so the game ball B will flow down from the third guide piece 2213. It comes into contact with the steep piece part 2210a on the upper end surface of 2213. Thereby, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the third guide piece part 2213, the side surface of the third guide piece part 2213, etc.

Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the steep piece 2210a of the third guide piece 2213 is reflected by the slope of the steep piece 2210a, so that the direction of flow is changed from below to the rear, and then the game ball B is transferred to the loose piece. The portion 2210b guides the user backward. Thereby, the game ball B can be quickly guided rearward from the entrance of the general winning hole 2001 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

The fourth guiding piece portion 2214 of the side unit 2200 is vertically arranged upward from the lowest portion of the semicircularly curved bottom surface of the fourth gutter portion 2202d. The fourth guiding piece portion 2214 is formed such that its upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B toward the rear. The height of the rear end of the fourth guiding piece portion 2214 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the fourth gutter portion 2202d. Therefore, the game ball B guided by the fourth guiding piece part 2214 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the fourth gutter part 2202d.

This fourth guiding piece part 2214 also has a steep piece part 2210a with a steep slope, and a gentle piece part 2210b which continues from the rear end of the steep piece part 2210a and has a gentler slope than the steep piece part 2210a toward the rear. . The steep piece part 2210a of the fourth guide piece part 2214 extends horizontally from the lowest part of the bottom of the fourth gutter part 2202d on the rear surface of the front plate part 2201 to a height that is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B. It is linearly inclined at an angle of 45 degrees to the rear, and the side surface is formed in a triangular shape (approximately an isosceles right triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece part 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece part 2210a to the rear end of the fourth gutter part 2202d so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The general winning hole 2001 constituted by the fourth gutter section 2202d has an axis line in the ball entry direction of the game ball B passing above the fourth guide piece section 2214, so the general winning hole 2001 (front plate section) 2201 ) to the upper end surface of the fourth guiding piece 2214 . Therefore, when the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 along the ball entry direction pointing diagonally to the lower left, the upper edge of the front plate part 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N ) flows down on a parabola, so by the time the game ball B reaches the fourth guide piece 2214, the direction of flow will be downward, so the game ball B will flow down from the fourth guide piece 2214. It comes into contact with the steep piece 2210a on the upper end surface of 2214. Thereby, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the fourth guide piece part 2214, the side surface of the fourth guide piece part 2214, etc.

Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the steep piece 2210a of the fourth guide piece 2214 is reflected by the slope of the steep piece 2210a, and its flow direction is changed from below to the rear, and then the game ball B is transferred to the loose piece. The portion 2210b guides the user backward. Thereby, the game ball B can be quickly guided rearward from the entrance of the general winning hole 2001 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

The side unit 2200 also has a peeling hole 2204 that penetrates back and forth in the portion of the front plate section 2201 where the front surface is recessed rearward, and a mounting hole 2205 that penetrates back and forth in each of the two flange sections 2203. , and a positioning pin 2206 that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface of each of the two flange portions 2203. The peeling hole 2204 is closed on the front side by a side unit seal 2220 affixed to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201.

With the side unit seal 2220 affixed to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted into the peeling hole 2204 from the rear side, and the side unit seal 2220 is peeled forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member. By pressing , a part of the side unit seal 2220 can be rolled up forward from the front plate part 2201. Then, by the operator pulling the rolled up portion of the side unit seal 2220, the side unit seal 2220 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the front plate portion 2201. Thereby, it is possible to improve the workability of reapplying the side unit seal 2220 during manufacturing and sorting work during disposal.

Furthermore, since the peeling hole 2204 is hidden from the front by pasting the side unit seal 2220 on the front surface of the front plate portion 2201, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the peeling hole 2204, and also to Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2204, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2204.

The attachment hole 2205 is a countersunk hole, and is used to attach the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by inserting a mounting screw (countersunk screw) from the front. The positioning pin 2206 is provided within a predetermined range from the adjacent mounting hole 2205 (see FIG. 150(c)). The positioning pin 2206 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance.

In the side unit 2200, two sets of one mounting hole 2205 and one positioning pin 2206 are provided so that the four general prize openings 2001 are located between them. This side unit 2200 allows the side unit 2200 to be accurately positioned at a specific position within the gaming area 5a by inserting a pair of positioning pins 2206 into corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the gaming panel 1100. can. Thereby, the acceptance probability of the game ball B being accepted into the general winning hole 2001 via the plurality of obstacle nails N installed in the game panel 1100 can be made within a desired range.

Furthermore, since the side unit 2200 has a pair of positioning pins 2206, when installing the side unit 2200 on the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2206 are inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100. Since the side unit 2200 can be positioned by inserting it, the side unit 2200 does not move when screwing the mounting screw into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 190(b)) through the mounting hole 2205. It is possible to prevent the screws from getting stuck or floating from the game panel 1100, making the installation work easier, and even when the installation screws are screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2205 and tightened. The side unit 2200 does not move slightly, and the side unit 2200 can be reliably attached to a specific position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the four general winning holes 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is located to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. This lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second starting port sensor 2401 (see FIG. 153, etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. , is equipped with.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo big winning hole 2402 extending left and right across the entire width in the left and right direction, and a pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402. It has a pseudo-out opening 2404 provided below near the left end of the pseudo-big winning opening 2402. The pseudo big winning opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 are open toward the front. The pseudo big winning hole 2402 opens larger (wider) on the left and right sides than the second big winning hole 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of a normally used big winning hole, which is 135 mm.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo large winning opening door 2405 that opens and closes the pseudo large winning opening 2402, and a pseudo large winning opening solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo large winning opening door 2405 (see FIG. 153, etc.) ). The pseudo big prize opening door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and its lower side is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is located to the right of the pseudo-out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo-big winning port 2402, and the second sub-out port 2022 is located to the right of the second starting port 2005. are located adjacent to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out exit 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and the left and right direction is located near the right side of the lower right rail 1004. It is formed in a length that covers the upper part.

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat base plate 2407 that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, and projects forward from the base plate 2407, forming a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. It has a possible delimiter 2410. The base plate 2407 and the partition section 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second starting opening 2005, the second sub-out opening 2022, the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the pseudo out opening 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403 is connected to the base plate 2407. It is located at the rear. A pseudo big winning opening 2402 and a pseudo out opening 2404 are provided inside the partition 2410.

The partition part 2410 includes a bottom wall part 2411 that extends left and right over the entire width and is sloped so that the right end side is higher, and a first standing wall part 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall part 2411. , a right slanted wall 2413 extending obliquely from the upper end of the first standing wall 2412 to the lower left, and a right lateral wall 2414 extending horizontally from the lower end of the right slanting wall 2413 to the first standing wall 2412; A second standing wall portion 2415 is spaced leftward from the right side wall portion 2414 and extends upward from the first standing wall portion 2412 from a portion at the same height as the lower end of the right side wall portion 2414; A left slanted wall 2416 extends obliquely to the lower right from a portion at the same height as the upper end of the first standing wall 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second erected wall 2415; A left horizontal wall portion 2417 that extends horizontally to the left of the standing wall portion 2415; and an inclined wall portion 2418 that extends obliquely to the lower left from the left end of the left horizontal wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411; , and a third vertical wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length that is approximately one game ball B shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction. The distance between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length of the second big prize opening 2007 in the left-right direction. The distance between the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length of the second large winning opening 2007 in the left and right direction.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged at a portion of the left side wall portion 2417 between the second vertical wall portion 2415 and the inclined wall portion 2418. The pseudo big prize opening 2402 is arranged directly under the right side wall 2414, the left side wall 2417, and the inclined wall 2418, and the part along the inclined wall 2418 is cut out diagonally from the horizontally long rectangle. Due to its shape, it opens towards the front. The pseudo outlet 2404 is arranged adjacent to a portion where the bottom wall portion 2411 and the third vertical wall portion 2419 intersect.

The lower right unit 2400 also includes a flat lower right decorative portion 2431 that closes the front end side of a triangular frame formed by a first standing wall portion 2412, a right slanted wall portion 2413, and a right horizontal wall portion 2414. and closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second standing wall portion 2415, left slanted wall portion 2416, and left horizontal wall portion 2417, and extends forward of the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided in the center between the flat plate-shaped lower right decorative portion 2432, the lower right decorative portion 2431, and the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and extends forward from the base plate 2407 in a downward arrow shape. It has a protruding lower right middle decorative part 2433 (see FIG. 137, etc.).

Furthermore, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and allows the pseudo big prize opening 2402, the lower right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right middle decorative part 2433 to be independent of each other. It further includes a lower right decorative board 2434 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light and decoration are mounted.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes decorative stickers having translucency on the front surfaces of each of the pseudo-big winning opening door 2405, the lower right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right middle decorative part 2433. is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a in a state where the gaming balls B cannot be circulated to the right side and the lower side when assembled to the gaming board 5. The front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward around the upper part of each of the right inclined wall section 2413, the second standing wall section 2415, and the left inclined wall section 2416, and there are a plurality of obstacles in the area. Nail N is planted. Further, a portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second big prize opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the second standing wall part 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall part 2568 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described later, and the right side of the second standing wall part 2415, that is, the inside of the partition part 2410 is It is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the area 5a.

In addition, when the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly to the right with respect to directly below the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418 The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004. The front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is also exposed forward above the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in these areas. It is set up.

Further, when the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 by about one game ball B to the upper right. Moreover, the pseudo big prize opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent base plate 2407 and the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, detect it with the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Further, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo big winning opening 2402 and a pseudo out opening 2404 inside the partition 2410 (pseudo gaming area 2010). Inside this dividing part 2410, it is formed so that only the game ball B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 can circulate.

In the lower right unit 2400, in a normal state, the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 so that it cannot accept the game ball B. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the partitioning part 2410 (pseudo game area 2010) passes through the front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and passes through the bottom wall part 2411. After flowing upward and rolling to the left along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411, the third vertical wall portion 2419 prevents further rolling to the left and opens forward at that portion. It is accepted into the pseudo-outlet 2404 that is located there. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is not returned into the game area 5a, but is ejected downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo outlet 2404 is provided close to the outlet 1008. The player can be given the illusion that the game ball B, which has rolled toward the side and been received by the pseudo-out port 2404, has actually rolled on the lower right rail 1004 and been received by the out port 1008.

The pseudo big winning opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is used to display the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the game ball B being accepted into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. 2. When the pseudo big prize opening solenoid 2406 is energized according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, it rotates around the bottom side so that the top end moves forward, and the top end is positioned slightly above the bottom end. It is in a state of protruding forward from the base plate 2407 (gaming panel 1100) so that the rear side is lower. In this state, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 can receive the game ball B. When the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is in a state where it can receive the game ball B, when the gaming ball B flows down in front of the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it hits the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 protruding forward. It is guided backward by the slope of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 and accepted into the pseudo big winning opening 2402.

The pseudo big winning opening 2402 extends to the left even to the lower part of the right discharge passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500 without being accepted into the second big winning opening 2007. When the big winning opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) is opening and closing, when the game ball B is released downward from the right release passage 2565, the gaming ball B is also received into the pseudo big winning opening 2402. It is possible to give the player the illusion that he or she is playing the game.

In addition, since it extends to the left directly under the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-out opening 2022, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opening and closing, it is not accepted into the second big winning opening 2007. The game ball B, which was released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 and received into the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, appears to have been received into the pseudo big winning port 2402. It can create an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. The pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the player side even through the open pseudo big winning hole 2402. By making this pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 visible, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole.

This pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined performance by detecting the game balls B, and opening and closing the pseudo big winning hole door 2405 by counting the number of game balls B. . By opening and closing the pseudo big winning hole door 2405 depending on the number of game balls B accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402, it is possible to make it easier to create the illusion that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole. can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of this embodiment, it has a pseudo grand prize opening 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of a normally used grand prize opening of 135 mm and extends longer from side to side, which is different from conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to give players the illusion that this is a pachinko machine that has a large prize opening that they have never seen before, giving a strong impact to players, and making it a great choice for players to play pachinko. It is possible to make it easier for players to actively select the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to increase its appeal to players.

Moreover, according to the lower right unit 2400, the right side wall part 2414 and the left side wall part 2417 are located above the pseudo big winning hole 2402, which is larger in the left and right direction than the second big winning hole 2007. and a sloped wall part 2418 between the right side wall part 2414 and the left side wall part 2417 which are separated by about half the distance in the left and right direction of the second big prize opening 2007 (the right sloped wall part 2413 and the left sloped wall part). 2416), and the game ball B is received into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. As a result, the plurality of game balls B accepted into the second big prize opening 2007 can be concentrated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo big winning opening 2402, so that the game balls B accepted into the second big prize opening 2007 can be A player can be made to have the illusion that a larger number of game balls B than balls B are accepted into a pseudo big prize opening 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143 to 147 and FIGS. 150 to 1534. FIG. 150(a) is a front view of the center accessory in the front unit, FIG. 150(b) is an enlarged view of a section A in FIG. 150(a), and FIG. 150(c) is a sectional view of FIG. 150(b). FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 152(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel board and the obstacle nail, and FIG. 152(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 152(a) seen from the front. 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate in FIG. 152, viewed from the front, and FIG. 153(b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate in FIG. 152. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 154 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 152 in which only the center right front plate is viewed from the rear and viewed from the front.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a transparent frame shape, and allows the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 and various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front. .

The center accessory 2500 includes a variable prize opening 2003 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B in accordance with the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, and a first start. A first big prize that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It is equipped with an opening 2006 and a second big prize opening 2007.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is inserted into the game area 5a. Game ball B is prevented from entering the frame.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel board 1110 is inserted. This peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the inside of the frame when assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support section 2503 (flange section 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall section 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the end side of the support portion 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line, so that the support portion 2503 is made inconspicuous. This support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the amount of protrusion from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). I try to make it less noticeable.

The center accessory 2500 further includes a plurality of mounting holes 2504 for attaching to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a plurality of positioning pins 2505 for positioning to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. . The attachment hole 2504 is provided in the flange portion 2502 so as to penetrate from front to back. The attachment hole 2504 is a countersink hole (see FIG. 150(c)), and preferably has a seat surface with a diameter of 7 mm or more.

Further, it is desirable that the mounting hole 2504 be provided at a position a predetermined distance (for example, 4.5 mm) or more from the vertical wall (for example, the peripheral wall portion 2501). Thereby, when assembling the game board 5, it is possible to prevent the screw tightening holder for tightening the mounting screws from interfering with the standing wall. In addition, at the time of assembly, in a region where the mounting screws are simultaneously tightened through the plurality of mounting holes 2504, the respective mounting holes 2504 are provided with a predetermined distance (for example, 29 mm) or more from each other. Thereby, interference between the screw fastening holders can be avoided.

The positioning pin 2505 projects rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 in a cylindrical shape. The positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward with a length that is approximately the same as the thickness of the protruding flange portion 2502 (in this embodiment, the effective length is 2 mm). The positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance. The positioning pin 2505 has a conical tip and can be easily inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100.

The plurality of positioning pins 2505 are located at a lower right portion of the stage 2513 in the flange portion 2502, a portion below the warp entrance 2511, a portion of the left guide passage group 2530, a portion below the first sub-out port 2021, and a portion of the upper left corner. They are provided in five locations, and each one is placed so that the parts that affect the game are sandwiched between them. Specifically, a positioning pin 2505 at the bottom right of the stage 2513 and a positioning pin 2505 at the bottom of the warp entrance 2511 are provided with the stage 2513 involved in receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 in between. It is being In addition, a positioning pin 2505 below the warp entrance 2511 and a positioning pin 2505 of the left guide passage group 2530 are provided between the variable winning hole 2003 and the first big winning hole 2006. Furthermore, a positioning pin 2505 of the left guide passage group 2530 and a positioning pin 2505 of the upper left corner are provided with the first big prize opening 2006 in between. In addition, a positioning pin 2505 at the lower right of the stage 2513 and a positioning pin 2505 at the lower side of the first sub-out port 2021 are provided with the second big prize opening 2007 in between.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which some of the attachment parts 2504 are not paired with the positioning pin 2505, such as the attachment part 2504 in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, all the mounting holes 2504 may be paired with the positioning pins 2505. In this case, the center accessory 2500 can be more firmly fixed to the game board 5 (game panel 1100). In addition, since the desired position of the game panel 1100, that is, the positional relationship between the peripheral wall 2501 and the obstacle nail N can be accurately positioned around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, Variations in the flow of game balls B for each game board 5 (product) in the outer area (for example, the area above and below the left guide passage group 2530, the space forming part 2550 below the right guide passage group 2540, etc.) can be reduced as much as possible.

The positioning pin 2505 is provided adjacent to the attachment hole 2504, and the distance L1 between the centers of the adjacent attachment hole 2504 is provided within a predetermined range. The above distance L1 is set within a range of 1 to 6 times the length of the positioning pin 2505, preferably within a range of 5 mm to 8 mm. The reason why the distance L1 is within the above range is that if it is smaller (closer) than the above range, the mounting screw will be screwed through the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning hole 1117 into which the positioning pin 2505 is inserted in the game panel 1100. This is because if the screw holes 1116 are too close to each other, when the positioning holes 1117 and the screw holes 1116 are drilled in the game panel 1100, there is a risk that the hole positions may be shifted or the holes may be distorted. Also, if it is larger (further) than the above range, when the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504, the portion between the positioning pin 2505 and the mounting hole 2504 in the flange portion 2502 will be distorted. This is because cracks may be more likely to occur.

The positional relationship between the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 is not limited to the center accessory 2500, but includes the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the lower right unit 2400 (pseudo attacker unit), and the gate member 2600. , etc. can also be applied.

Further, the positioning pin 2505 is provided on the rear side of a portion of the front surface of the flange portion 2502 that can be contacted by the operator from the front. In other words, the positioning pin 2505 is not provided at the rear part of a member (for example, the front plate part) that is forwardly away from the flange part 2502. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, it is possible to press the front surface of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 is provided and to reliably push the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100. can.

Since the center accessory 2500 has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, by inserting the positioning pins 2505 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500 can be played. It is possible to accurately position at a specific position within the region 5a. As a result, the probability of receiving the game ball B into the stage 2513, the variable winning hole 2003, the first big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007, etc. provided in the center accessory 2500 is within the desired range. It can be done.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, when attaching the center accessory 2500 to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2505 are inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel 1100. 1117, the center accessory 2500 can be positioned, so when screwing the mounting screw into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504, the center accessory 2500 may move or the game panel It is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from floating away from the game panel 1100, making the installation work easier, and even when the installation screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the installation hole 2504 and tightened, the center accessory 2500 does not The center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to a specific position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a) without moving slightly.

This center accessory 2500 has a peeling hole 2508 penetrating back and forth in a portion of the flange portion 2502 where the decorative seal is pasted on the front surface (see FIG. 151). This peeling hole 2508 is closed on the front side by a decorative seal. The peeling hole 2508 is formed by inserting a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side with the decorative sticker pasted on the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and pressing the decorative sticker forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member. , a part of the decorative seal can be rolled up forward from the flange portion 2502. The decorative seal can be easily removed (peeled off) from the flange portion 2502 by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion of the decorative seal. As a result, it is possible to improve work efficiency such as reapplying decorative stickers during manufacturing and sorting during disposal.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2511 which is opened on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. Then, the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 can be released from the warp exit 2512 which is opened in a frame on the rear side of the front side of the game panel 1100 and can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146, etc.). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B that bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is positioned directly above the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100. 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximately center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2513 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction (center emitting portion 2513a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2513b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central discharge part 2513a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

At this time, since the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment is provided with positioning pins 2505 on both left and right sides with the stage 2513 (center emitting part 2513a) in between, the center accessory 2500 is The stage 2513 can be accurately positioned at a specific position within the gaming area 5a (the position directly above the first starting port 2004 in the starting port unit 2100). As a result, the acceptance probability that the game ball B released from the central release part 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted into the lower first starting port 2004 can be set within a desired range, and the temperature and Even if the environment such as humidity changes, the relative position between the stage 2513 and the first starting port 2004 can be maintained, and the acceptance probability can be prevented from changing.

In addition, although the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment is shown as having positioning pins 2505 adjacent to some of the mounting holes 2504, the present invention is not limited to this, and all the mounting holes 2504 are provided with positioning pins 2505. On the other hand, the positioning pin 2505 may be provided adjacently. That is, the attachment hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 may be used as a set of attachment parts, and the center accessory 2500 may be attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by providing only a plurality of attachment parts. As a result, in addition to achieving the same effects as described above, the entire center accessory 2500 can follow the expansion and contraction of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes. I can do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, the positioning pins 2505 (positioning pins 2107, 2206) are cylindrical, but are not limited to this. It is also possible to have a shape such as .

[5-8e-1. First Attacker Department]
The center accessory 2500 includes a first attacker part 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first big winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501. The first attacker part 2520 of the center accessory 2500 responds to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the variable winning opening door 2521 which opens and closes the variable winning opening 2003 and the gate 2002. A variable winning hole solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 167 etc.) which is energized to open and close the variable winning hole door 2521, and a variable winning hole sensor 2526 which detects the game ball B received in the variable winning hole 2003.

In addition, the first attacker section 2520 is configured to accept the game ball B into the first big prize opening door 2523, which opens and closes the first big prize opening 2006, and the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. a first grand prize opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 167, etc.) which is energized to open and close the first grand prize opening door 2523 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the , and a first big winning hole sensor 2525 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006.

Furthermore, the first attacker section 2520 includes a transparent flat center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the variable winning opening 2003, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second left guide passage 2532 (see FIG. 137 etc.).

In the center accessory 2500, a first attacker part 2520 is provided above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501. The first attacker section 2520 has a variable winning hole 2003 and a first big winning hole 2006.

The variable prize opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, on the front side of the flange portion 2502 extending outward on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, near the approximate center in the vertical direction of the center accessory 2500, It opens towards the left. Further, the first large prize opening 2006 opens upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B, directly above the variable winning hole 2003.

The variable prize opening door 2521 is rotatably supported around an axis whose lower end side extends back and forth, and when it is in an upright state (normal state), the game ball B can be received into the variable prize opening 2003. can be closed. When the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is energized, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the variable winning opening 2003 is brought into a state where the game ball B can be received (open state). ). When the variable prize opening door 2521 is in the open state, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side and is tilted lower to the right. It is possible to guide the player to the variable winning opening 2003 of the player.

The game ball B accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. be done.

The first big prize opening door 2523 has a flat plate shape that slopes lower to the left, and is provided so as to be movable forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In a normal state, the first big prize opening door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2006. In this state, the game ball B that has flown down above the first big prize opening door 2523 is guided to the left by the inclination of the first big prize opening door 2523 and flows through the second left guide passage 2532. .

When the first big prize opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first big prize opening door 2523 retreats backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B is placed against the first big prize opening 2006. It can be brought into acceptable condition. The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2006 in this state flows down in front of the flange part 2502 and is placed at a site at a height between the first big prize opening 2006 and the variable winning hole 2003. It is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 located there, and then guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 directly above the variable winning hole 2003. Thereafter, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and includes a left guide path group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (in this case, two) paths through which game balls B can flow. There is. In other words, between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002, there is provided a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can circulate. Therefore, when a game ball B is hit so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is formed so as to always pass through the left guide path group 2530.

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided at a position below and to the left of the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom with respect to the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5. ing. The left guide passage group 2530 has a height approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game balls B in circulation can be visually recognized in good condition.

The left guide passage group 2530 includes a first left guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a second left guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the first left guide passage 2531. The first left guide passage 2531 and the second left guide passage 2532 are partitioned by a passage wall 2533 that projects forward from the flange portion 2502.

A first grand prize opening 2006 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the second left guide passage 2532. Therefore, if you want the first big prize opening 2006 to accept the game ball B, it is necessary to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B enters the second left guide path 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a right guide passage group 2540, which is provided at the upper right corner and is composed of a plurality of (in this case, two) passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When this center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the right guide passage group 2540 (the upper right corner end of the center accessory 2500) It is formed so that the game ball B, which is approximately in contact with the right rail 1005) near the stop portion 1006 and is driven to the right side above the center accessory 2500, always passes through the right guide path group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 has a vertical length that is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the gaming area 5a. This right guide passage group 2540 allows the game balls B in circulation to be visually recognized in good condition.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall part 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right side of the right first guide passage 2541 that is away from the peripheral wall part 2501 and the right first guide passage 2541. and a second right guide passage 2542. The entrance of the first right guide passage 2541 and the entrance of the second right guide passage 2542 are separated from each other in the left and right directions.

The right first guide passage 2541 extends backward from the front of the game panel 1100 at a portion directly below the entrance, and then extends downward, and then extends from the front of the game panel 1100 at a position to the left of the entrance. It also extends forward, with an exit opening diagonally to the lower right. In addition, the second right guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and is lined up on the right side of the exit of the first right guide passage 2541, with the outlet opening diagonally to the lower right. are doing. That is, the first right guide passage 2541 and the second right guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right sides intersect.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) when the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 is located directly below the lower end of the blocking portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have come into contact with the blocking portion 1006 are located in the right first guide passage 2541. It is formed so as to enter one guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide path 2541 is released to the side closer to the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide path 2542 is released to the side closer to the right rail 1005, and enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. Although details will be described later, the game ball B that has entered the second guide area 2712 has a high possibility of being accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, so it will enter the second right guide path 2542. When the game ball B enters, it is more likely to be accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 than when it enters the right first guide passage 2541.

This right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a circulation detection sensor 2543 that can detect the game balls B circulating through the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, when the number of game balls B detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543 is equal to or less than a predetermined number per hour in a game situation in which the player is required to play "right-handed", the game situation can be made more enjoyable. In order to do so, it is possible to encourage "right-handed hitting" or to instruct the driving strength to avoid acceptance into the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542. becomes.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming part 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker part 2560 provided below the space forming part 2550 (see FIG. 147, etc.). ). The space forming part 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall part 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height about half of the total height of the gaming area 5a. The second attacker part 2560 has a second big prize opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided at the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500.

In the space forming part 2550, a flange part 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall part 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5. The space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right wall part 2551 projecting forward from the right side of the flange part 2502 and a lower part of the space forming part 2550 in the peripheral wall part 2501 projecting forward from the flange part 2502. It has a guide wall part 2552 extending to the lower right, and an opening part 2553 penetrating the flange part 2502 back and forth between the right wall part 2551 and the peripheral wall part 2501 and the guide wall part 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap between the right rail 1005 and the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with a cutout portion 2551a near the upper portion that penetrates from side to side. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 so that an interval approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the left-right direction.

The opening 2553 extends vertically over substantially the entire height of the space forming portion 2550. In this opening 2553, the side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 and the guide wall 2552 is a certain distance from the peripheral wall 2501, and the side closer to the right wall 2551 becomes farther away from the right wall 2551 as it goes downward. That is, in the space forming part 2550, the side of the flange part 2502 near the peripheral wall part 2501 and the guiding wall part 2552 extends vertically with a constant width to the right from the peripheral wall part 2501 and the guiding wall part 2552. The side closer to the right wall portion 2551 extends vertically so as to become wider to the left as it goes downward.

When the game panel 1100 is assembled to the game board 5, some of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 are inserted through the opening 2553 from the rear. The plurality of faulty nails N inserted through the opening 2553 are a specific faulty nail group 2700 implanted in a specific gauge arrangement, although details will be described later. In other words, the space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a plurality of rear protrusions 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend left and right, and are provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The rear protrusions 2554 are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of front protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, and are staggered in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange part 2502 in the space forming part 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front and rear direction by the front ridge 2555d and the rear ridge 2554.

Furthermore, the space forming part 2550 includes a transparent flat center right front plate 2555 that covers the space from the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 to the front end of the right wall part 2551, and a translucent plate attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. (See FIG. 153, etc.). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and closes off the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of first accommodating parts 2555a which penetrate in the front and back and each accommodate the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (combined nail parts 2701), and a plurality of first accommodating parts 2555a which penetrate in the front and back and accommodate one obstacle. A second accommodating part 2555b in which the head of the nail N is accommodated, a peeling hole 2555c penetrating back and forth at the part where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached, and a peeling hole 2555c that bulges rearward from the rear surface and extends left and right. It has a plurality of protrusions 2555d provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center accessory 2500 unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first accommodating part 2555a is provided in the shape of a long hole that surrounds and contacts the heads of the plurality of faulty nails N (assembled nail part 2701) and forms a certain gap with respect to the circumferential line that is in contact with the head. It is being In this embodiment, one first accommodating part 2555a is formed in a size that accommodates the heads of two obstacle nails N, and the center of the first accommodating part 2555a is different from the center of the obstacle nail N. It is eccentric. The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at positions corresponding to each of the faulty nails N of the specific faulty nail group 2700, which will be described later.

Note that the gap between the front end (head) of the obstacle nail N in the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b is within the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, more preferably 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to keep it within the range of . If the gap is smaller than this range, when the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, it may affect the obstacle nail N and cause the obstacle nail N to bend. This is because it becomes difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstacle nail N in the portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, which takes time and effort, which may increase costs. In addition, if the gap is larger than this range, when the obstacle nail N bends due to the impact caused by contact with the game ball B, the degree of bending will exceed the allowable range, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk that

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N accommodated in the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b, so that the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B It is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstructing nail N due to an external impact caused by a The game balls B can be distributed in a stable state in the impaired nail group 2700, and the effects of the specific impaired nail group 2700 can be continuously exhibited, and the movement of the game balls B in the specified impaired nail group 2700 It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by entertaining people.

Furthermore, as described above, since the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 can suppress the deformation of the obstructing nail N, It is possible to reduce the effort required for maintenance of the faulty nail N.

In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the front sides of the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b are closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 affixed to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. It is not possible to touch the faulty nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b from the front. Thereby, it is possible to avoid bending of the faulty nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or of the faulty nail N being bent intentionally. Furthermore, if the faulty nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b via the center right front plate seal 2556 is bent, traces thereof will remain on the center right front plate seal 2556. It is possible to easily notice a problem with the faulty nail N.

With the center right front plate seal 2556 affixed to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side of the peeling hole 2555c, and the center right front plate seal 2556 is removed from the rear with the rod-shaped member. By pressing forward, a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555. Then, by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion of the center right front plate seal 2556, the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2555. Thereby, it is possible to improve the workability of reapplying the center right front plate seal 2556 during manufacturing and sorting work during disposal.

This peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of the triangular part surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall part 2501, the guide wall part 2552, and the closing wall part 2566 when assembled to the game board 5, so the peeling hole 2555c Through the 2555c, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the area where the game balls B are distributed, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed. .

Further, the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by pasting the center right front plate sticker 2556 on the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, so it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c, and it is possible for the player to On the other hand, it can be made difficult to make the user aware of the existence of the peeling hole 2555c, and it can be made difficult to plan fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of front protrusions 2555d are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of rear protrusions 2554 protruding from the flange portion 2502. These front protrusions 2555d are provided so that their vertical directions are alternate with respect to the rear protrusions 2554. Thereby, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange part 2502 in the space forming part 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front and rear direction by the front ridge 2555d and the rear ridge 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second Attacker Department]
The second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500 has a second big prize opening 2007 that is long in the left-right direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out mouth 2021 that is provided on the right side of the second big prize mouth 2007. It has . The right end of the second big prize opening 2007 is located at a portion slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right, and the left end is located at the entire width within the gaming area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right. The second grand prize opening 2007 is provided at a higher position than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right side wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall part 2551 of the space forming part 2550.

In addition, the second attacker part 2560 can open and close the second big winning hole 2007 by moving back and forth in the front and back direction with the second big winning hole sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second big winning hole 2007. A lottery was made by accepting the game ball B into the flat plate-shaped second prize opening door 2562 which is closed and tilted lower to the left, and the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It has a second grand prize opening solenoid 2563 that is energized to open and close the second grand prize opening door 2562 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol.

In addition, the second attacker section 2560 is provided above the second grand prize opening door 2562 in front of the flange section 2502, and has an attacker passage 2564 through which the game ball B can flow to the left, and a second grand prize opening 2007. A right discharge passage 2565 extends downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 on the left side of the center and can discharge the game ball B downward; It has a closing wall part 2566 that forms a part of the guide wall part 2552 and extends leftward from the lower end of the guide wall part 2552 to the peripheral wall part 2501.

The attacker passage 2564 extends lower to the left at a height slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and the ceiling wall is constituted by a part of the peripheral wall part 2501 and a closing wall part 2566. At the same time, the wall of the floor is constituted by a second large prize opening door 2562. This attacker passage 2564 has a plurality of rear protrusions 2564a that bulge forward, extend in the vertical direction, and are provided at intervals in the left-right direction at the portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502. , in a portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the center lower right front plate 2572, which will be described later, is bulged rearward and extends in the vertical direction, and is spaced in the left-right direction so as to alternate with a plurality of rear protrusions 2564a. A plurality of protrusions (not shown) are provided. The plurality of front and rear protrusions 2564a allows the game ball B to flow to the left in the attacker path 2564 while meandering in the front and back direction, and also suppresses the circulation speed.

The right discharge passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a left and right width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The right discharge passage 2565 has an outlet located at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. In the right discharge passage 2565, the right wall is constituted by the attacker left wall section 2568, and the left wall is constituted by a part of the peripheral wall section 2501.

Furthermore, the second attacker part 2560 protrudes forward from the flange part 2502 on the right side of the second big winning opening door 2562, and is higher than the right end of the second big winning opening door 2562 and slightly higher than the right end of the closing wall part 2566. The attacker right wall part 2567 extends downward from the lower position, and the attacker's right wall part 2567 protrudes forward from the flange part 2502 on the left side of the second big winning opening door 2562 and is lower than the left end of the second big winning opening door 2562. In the left-right direction, there is a space between the attacker left wall 2568 extending downward from the attacker, the right shelf 2569 extending lower to the left from the lower end of the attacker right wall 2567, and the right shelf 2569. A left shelf part 2570 extends downwardly to the right from near the upper end of the attacker left wall part 2568 to form a gap, and a left shelf part 2570 is provided in the center between the left shelf part 2570 and the right shelf part 2569. It has an inner wall portion 2571.

The second big prize opening 2007 is defined in the left and right direction by an attacker right wall part 2567 and an attacker left wall part 2568. In other words, the width in the left-right direction between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the width in the left-right direction of the second big prize opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the second grand prize opening 2007 in the left-right direction is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent briefly to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper end of the second vertical wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end, making it impossible for the game ball B to move back and forth between the left and right sides. There is. The lower ends of the right shelf section 2569 and the left shelf section 2570 are located above the lower end of the attacker left wall section 2568. A second big prize opening sensor 2561 is provided between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571, and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, respectively. The middle wall portion 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled to the game board 5.

The second attacker section 2560 extends in front of an attacker passage 2564, a right discharge passage 2565, and a space formed by an attacker right wall section 2567, an attacker left wall section 2568, a right shelf section 2569, and a left shelf section 2570. It further includes a closed center lower right front plate 2572 in the form of a transparent flat plate (see FIG. 137, etc.).

In the normal state, the second attacker part 2560 has the front end of the second big prize opening door 2562 protruding forward from the front surface of the flange part 2502, and cannot accept the game ball B into the second big prize opening 2007. It is closed to. The second grand prize opening door 2562, which opens and closes the second grand prize opening 2007, is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and back, so it is difficult to see when viewed from the front. , it is difficult to tell whether it is open or closed.

In this normal state, the game ball B that has been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has flown down the right guide path group 2540 and the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) is connected to the guide wall part 2552 and the right wall. It will flow down from between the part 2551 and the second attacker part 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B flowing down along the right wall portion 2551 is accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that was not accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 and flowed down onto the second big winning port door 2562 enters the attacker passage 2564 while meandering in the front and rear direction by the plurality of ridges in front and behind the ridges 2564a. After rolling to the left, it enters the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second big prize opening door 2562, and is returned to the gaming area 5a from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565.

The second attacker part 2560 of this center accessory 2500 is located directly above the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5, and is located on the attacker left wall forming the right wall of the right discharge passage 2565. The upper end of the second vertical wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the portion 2568. As a result, the game ball B is prevented from coming and going between the right discharge passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415. That is, an area (pseudo game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right discharge passage 2565 or the game area 5a is formed to the right of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, a pseudo game area partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the dividing section 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, the attacker left wall section 2568, the right shelf section 2569, and the left shelf section 2570 in the second attacker section 2560. 2010 has been formed. In this pseudo game area 2010, only game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 can be distributed.

Then, the second big prize opening solenoid 2563 is activated according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. When energized, the second large prize opening door 2562 moves backward, and the second large prize opening 2007 becomes in a state where it can receive the game ball B. At this time, the game balls B circulating through the attacker passage 2564 and the game balls B flowing down from the space forming part 2550 to the second grand prize opening 2007 are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007.

After the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2007 rolls on the right shelf 2569 or the left shelf 2570, it is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2561 and released into the pseudo game area 2010 below. It will be done. In this second attacker section 2560, two second big prize opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, so even if many game balls B are accepted into the second big prize opening 2007 in a short time, they will not be delayed. can be detected.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 has a first accommodating portion 2555a that accommodates the heads of the plurality of faulty nails N of each set of nails 2701 constituting the specific faulty nail group 2700. , it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N, and prevent the obstacle nail N from deforming due to the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or some external impact. (bending) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unintended flow of the game balls B, and it is possible to allow the game balls B to flow in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the effects of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. It becomes possible to continuously exhibit the movement of the game ball B on the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, according to the center accessories 2500, the second grand prize opening door 2562, which closes the second grand prize opening 2007 so as to be openable and closable, is shaped like a flat plate extending in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and Since the second big winning opening 2007 is opened and closed by moving the winning opening door 2562 forward and backward, the second big winning opening door 2562 can be difficult to see when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the big prize opening 2007. As a result, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) provided below the second big winning opening 2007 can be made relatively conspicuous. can be strongly attracted to the players, and can create a strong illusion as if the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole. Therefore, if a pachinko machine is equipped with a large prize opening that has never been seen before, it can create an illusion for the player, give a strong impact to the player, and make the player want to play the game. It is possible to make it easier for players to actively select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play, and it is possible to increase its appeal to players.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, the support portion 2503 that protrudes inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude briefly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. Obstruction of the visibility of the decoration of the unit 3000, the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that the support portion 2503 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) In the close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thereby, it is possible to widen the area of the game using the plurality of obstacle nails N as much as possible within the game area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the support portion 2503 Since the support portion 2503 is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the area within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is more It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be more easily seen. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulation area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall part 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support part 2503 may be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. You can also do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends by an amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

[5-8f. Gate components]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 143, 144, and the like. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position slightly below the center skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and below the variable prize opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500. Directly above the gate member 2600, the exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. Further, at the lower right of the gate member 2600, a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens toward the left.

The gate member 2600 includes a gate 2002 in which a normal symbol lottery is performed to open and close a variable prize opening 2003 when the game ball B passes through the gate, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. have. In this embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002.

[5-8g. Specified impaired nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 145 and 147. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided upstream of the second grand prize opening 2007 on the right side of the gaming area 5a. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of set nail parts 2701 in which a plurality of fault nails N arranged adjacent to each other form one set, and the plurality of set nail parts 2701 are connected to one game ball each other. They are arranged at intervals that allow passage through B. In this embodiment, the set nail part 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific faulty nail group 2700 is provided so that the parts (gap parts) between the plurality of set nail parts 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern, The game ball B can be guided by the portion 2701. Thereby, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guiding region 2710 that can guide the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guiding region 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guide area 2710 is composed of a first guide area 2711 and a second guide area 2712 provided on the right side of the first guide area 2711. The first guide area 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the left side from the center of the guide wall part 2552. The second guide area 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the second right guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to a position on the right side from the center of the guide wall part 2552.

The first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 formed by the specific failure nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape such that the center in the vertical direction bulges to the right. To be more specific, in the first guiding region 2711 and the second guiding region 2712, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the outside of the circular arc, a straight line connects the braided nail portions 2701 near the upper end and the lower end. The circular arc formed by the plurality of pegs 2701 forming the inner side of the circular arc is provided so as to be in contact with the circular arc. That is, the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are formed so that the width in the left and right direction is the distance of two game balls B. Since the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the vertically extending portions are reduced, making it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left and right direction.

Furthermore, the plurality of pegs 2701 forming the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are the pegs located below between the two pegs 2701 spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. 2701 is provided to the right of the center between the two upper pegs 2701 (on the side far from the center of the arc). This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712.

Furthermore, the plurality of pegs 2701 forming the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 have gaps spaced apart above and below the plurality of pegs 2701 arranged in an arc shape. They are provided so as to be located higher toward the right column. In other words, in the plurality of pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in the two pegs 2701 that are paired in the left and right direction, the right side The braided nail portion 2701 is arranged higher. This makes it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

The guidance area 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward in a meandering manner in the left-right direction by a plurality of set nail parts 2701 arranged at intervals. As a result, compared to the area where the obstacle nails N are planted in a general arrangement, the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and slowed down, and the falling time of the game ball B to the predetermined position ( (arrival time) can be delayed. In addition, in the set nail part 2701, by forming a set of two obstacle nails N, the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B can be increased compared to when the obstacle nail N is configured with one obstacle nail N, and the game ball B can collide with the obstacle nail N. The effect of delaying the fall of ball B is increased.

In the guidance area 2710, the plurality of pegs 2701 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, so the guided game ball B moves to the left outer side or right outer side through the part of the space. Sometimes I put it away. In other words, the game ball B moves from the first guide area 2711 to the second guide area 2712, moves from the second guide area 2712 to the first guide area 2711, or moves from the first guide area 2711 to the left outer side. or move from the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside.

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 will come into contact with the guide wall 2552, and between the guide wall 2552 and the attacker right wall 2567 (the second big winning It will flow down to the top of the opening door 2562 or inside the second grand prize opening 2007).

The game ball B that has moved from the first guidance area 2711 to the left outside is located between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, after the plurality of protrusions 2554 provided on the flange 2502. And it flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the plurality of protrusions front 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555. Then, it comes into contact with the guide wall 2552 and flows down between the guide wall 2552 and the attacker right wall 2567 (on the second grand prize opening door 2562 or inside the second grand prize opening 2007). .

The game ball B that has moved from the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside is located between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall section 2551, and between the rear ridges 2554 of the plurality of protrusions provided on the flange section 2502 and the center right front plate. It flows down while meandering in the front and rear direction due to the plurality of protrusions in front 2555d provided in 2555. Then, it flows down to the first sub-out port 2021 or between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or inside the second big winning opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, it will flow through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside There is a possibility that it will be accepted into one sub-out port 2021. In other words, in this embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 is higher in the second right guide passage 2542 than in the first right guide passage 2541. . Therefore, the player can perform a driving operation such that the game ball B enters the first right guide path 2541. In other words, when "hitting to the right", by hitting the ball harder, it becomes easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the stop portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with subtle adjustments. There is no need to worry, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if only one obstacle nail N constitutes a set nail part, a pair will be formed with respect to the obstacle nail N to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. Other obstructing nails N become obstructing nails N in all directions forming gaps around the obstructing nail N. In other words, one obstacle nail N is responsible for forming gaps in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N bends, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction, so the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guiding area 2710 changes greatly due to the deformation of one obstacle nail N. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distribute game balls B in a stable state. In addition, when the obstacle nail N is bent, the gap must be adjusted to the desired distance with respect to the obstacle nails N provided in all directions, which requires a lot of effort for maintenance. becomes.

On the other hand, when the assembled nail section 2701 is configured by a plurality of obstacle nails N as in this embodiment, the direction of the adjacent obstacle nails N with respect to a certain obstacle nail N in the assembled nail section 2701 is as follows. Since the adjacent obstacle nails N are responsible for forming the gap, it is possible for a certain (one) obstacle nail N to be responsible for forming the gap only in some directions, and the gap is The number of obstacle nails N that form a pair can be reduced. Thereby, even if one obstacle nail N of the set nail part 2701 bends, there are few parts of the gap that will be affected, so it is possible to suppress a change in the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guiding area 2710. In addition, when a certain faulty nail N is bent, the gap between the faulty nail N and the faulty nail N in some directions only needs to be adjusted to the desired distance, which saves maintenance compared to adjusting the gap in all directions. This time and effort can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the heads of the obstacle nails N are inserted and accommodated in the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. The nail assembly part 2701, which is constituted by a plurality of obstacle nails N, is housed in the first housing part 2555a so that the periphery of the head thereof is surrounded.

As a result, in the specific faulty nail group 2700, the movement of the head of the faulty nail N is restricted by storing the faulty nail N in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation (bending) of the obstructing nail N due to the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or some external impact, and the game ball It is possible to reduce the unintended flow of balls B, and it is also possible to distribute the game balls B in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, so that the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be sustained. It is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B on the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the specific faulty nail group 2700, as described above, the heads of the faulty nails N are accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby preventing the deformation of the faulty nails N. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N at the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in the specific faulty nail group 2700, the first accommodating part 2555a and the second accommodating part 2555b that accommodate the heads of the faulty nails N are attached to the center right front plate sticker 2555 affixed to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. Since the nail N is closed, it is impossible to touch the nail N from the front. Thereby, it is possible to avoid bending of the faulty nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or of the faulty nail N being bent intentionally. Furthermore, when the faulty nail N of the specific faulty nail group 2700 is bent from the front, a trace of the bending remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, making it easier to notice the problem of the faulty nail N.

In addition, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has the function of sorting the incoming game balls B to either the first sub-out port 2021 or the second grand winning port 2007. This function is an important function that affects the ball payout rate. All nail adjustments are prohibited in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, and the center right front plate 2555 and the center Since the right front plate seal 2556 covers the front side of the specific failure nail group 2700, no nail adjustment can be performed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the plurality of nail sets 2701 forming the specific faulty nail group 2700 were shown as being composed of two faulty nails N, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three It may be constructed using the above-mentioned obstacle nails N. When the set nail part 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, the plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a line or arranged in a polygonal shape such as a triangle, quadrangle, pentagon, or hexagon. Also good.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the guidance region 2710 by the specific faulty nail group 2700 is composed of two regions, the first guidance region 2711 and the second guidance region 2712, but the invention is not limited to this. , may be composed of one region, or three or more regions.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, since the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, for example, in the second attacker section 2560 provided downstream, the first special symbol is If the second grand prize opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short period of time so that the game ball B can be received, the game Even if the player attempts to drive the game ball B so that it reaches the second grand prize opening 2007 at the timing when it can be accepted, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 causes the game ball B to reach the second grand prize opening 2007 at the desired timing. It can be made difficult to reach the ball B, and it can be difficult to find the timing to hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to give a level of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to make the game more rewarding and enjoyable for the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second grand prize opening 2007 to accept the game ball B, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting a plurality of obstacle nails N, so compared to the case where it is made of a synthetic resin member, the structure is The cost for the Pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost for the Pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[5-8h. Pseudo gaming area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The pseudo game area 2010 is independent from the game area 5a, and is an area where only specific game balls B can be distributed. Specifically, the pseudo game area 2010 is the area where only the game ball B (the so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 can be distributed. This pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 includes a portion where the front surface of the flat game panel 1100 with the game area 5a provided in front thereof is exposed, and a plurality of obstacles planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100. A pseudo-big prize that can be opened and closed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the nail N and the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has an opening 2402 and a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging game balls B that are not accepted into the pseudo big winning port 2402 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. In other words, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo big prize opening 2402 that serves as an acceptance port that can accept the game balls B, and a pseudo output port 2404 that discharges the game balls B. It has a similar configuration to the inside of the gaming area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the partition part 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the right shelf 2569, the left shelf 2570, and the middle wall 2571 of the second attacker section 2560. The pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned at the right end by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first standing wall part 2412 of the partition part 2410. The left end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the attacker left wall part 2568 of the second attacker part 2560, the second standing wall part 2415 of the dividing part 2410, the left horizontal wall part 2417, the inclined wall part 2418, and the third standing wall part 2419. ing. The pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned at the lower end by the bottom wall part 2411 of the partition part 2410.

In the pseudo game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward between the second attacker part 2560 and the pseudo big prize opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in this area.

The second big prize opening 2007 as a supply source of game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second big prize opening door 2562. Since this second big prize opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward in the front and back direction, it is difficult to see the second big winning opening door 2562 from the player side. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a, and the parts that are partitioned from the game area 5a (such as the dividing part 2410 and the attacker left wall part 2568 of the center accessory 2500) are transparent. At the same time, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100, it is difficult for the player to see the pseudo game area 2010 as a part of the game area 5a. You can create the illusion that

The pseudo big winning hole 2402 provided in the pseudo gaming area 2010 is formed to be longer in the left and right direction than the second big winning hole 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the left and right sizes of the second big winning opening 2007 are 131 mm, and the left and right sizes of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 are 170 mm. Since this pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opened toward the front, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed (normally In the state), the side thereof is facing forward, and the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 is visible to the player.

For this reason, when a player looks at this pachinko machine 1, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 will be more conspicuous than the second big prize opening 2007, which is unlike anything seen in previous pachinko machines. It is possible to make the player think that the game has a large winning opening that is not available in the first place, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player.

In the pseudo game area 2010 of this embodiment, in a normal state, the pseudo big winning hole door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo big winning hole door 2405 makes the pseudo big winning hole 2402 unable to accept the game ball B. Closed. In addition, in the normal state, since the second grand prize opening 2007 is closed by the second grand prize opening door 2562, the game that is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second grand prize opening door 2562 The ball B rolls to the left on the second big prize opening door 2562 and is released into the gaming area 5a through the right release passage 2565. Therefore, under normal conditions, game balls B do not circulate within the pseudo game area 2010.

From the normal state, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, and the second special symbol is drawn according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol. When the big prize opening door 2562 retreats, the game ball B can be accepted into the second big prize opening 2007. In this state, when the game ball B is accepted into the second big winning hole 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 and then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game balls B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 flow down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the forwardly exposed portion of the game panel 1100. At this time, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo gaming area 2010 passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 and goes to the bottom. It flows down onto the wall 2411 and rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, and then is prevented from rolling further to the left by the third vertical wall 2419, and flows forward at that part. The pseudo-out port 2404 that is open is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100. In other words, it is ejected from the pseudo game area 2010.

Since the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out port 1008, the game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 appears to the player as being in the out port 1008. It can create the illusion that you are accepted by others. Thereby, it is possible to create an illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, it is possible to create an illusion that the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 in the pseudo gaming area 2010 is the same as the game in which the gaming ball B passes through the big winning opening in a conventional pachinko machine. If the game ball B is not accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, the player can be disappointed. On the other hand, since the game ball B accepted in the second big prize opening 2007 is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo big prize opening 2402, it is distributed to the second big prize opening 2007. Upon acceptance, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. As a result, the game ball B is paid out even though the game ball B is not accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, so it is possible to make the player feel like he has won, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo big winning opening door 2405, which stands out from the front, opens and closes, so the player instantly notices that the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is open for acceptance. can be set. Thereby, it is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right-handed hitting") so that the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. Further, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 may be opened and closed as a kind of notice, or the pseudo big winning hole 2402 may be opened and closed as one of the signals instructing the player to "hit right." This pseudo big winning hole 2402 is entered only when the player hits the right hand, so it is easy for the player to intuitively understand.

For this reason, for example, before the second big prize opening 2007 becomes available for acceptance, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 may be opened and closed with a flicker to cause the player to "hit the right hand". . This makes it easier for the "right-hit" game ball B to reach the second grand prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second grand prize opening 2007 is ready for acceptance, making it possible for the player to enjoy the game even more. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the second big prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern during a "jackpot" game, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 also opens and closes, many game balls B can be drawn in a short time through the second big winning opening 2007. By supplying the game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010 and distributing many game balls B within the pseudo game area 2010, it is possible for the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and the games within the pseudo game area 2010. You can do it. At this time, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B will be accepted into the large pseudo big winning hole 2402, so the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in player's interest can be suppressed. can be done.

In this embodiment, the left and right direction of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is formed larger than the second big winning hole 2007, but above the pseudo big winning hole 2402, there is a right side wall part 2414, a left side wall part 2417 and A slanted wall portion 2418 is provided, and the game ball B passing between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (between the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the left slanted wall portion 2416) enters a pseudo big winning hole. 2402. The distance between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 is approximately half the distance of the second big prize opening 2007 in the left and right direction. Therefore, since the plurality of game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 are concentrated in a narrow area and headed toward the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the game balls B accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 are The player can be made to have the illusion that a larger number of game balls B are accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

The pseudo big prize opening 2402 of this embodiment does not pay out the game ball B or give a benefit to the player upon receiving the game ball B. Therefore, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 can be set to an opening/closing pattern that is not seen in the big winning hole of conventional pachinko machines (for example, 337 time, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beat, 16 beat, BGM, or a predetermined pattern). can be opened and closed at the same tempo as the music, etc.), which can entertain the players.

In addition, in addition to the obstacle nails N, a windmill W may be provided in the pseudo game area 2010. By making the windmill W exist in the pseudo game area 2010, it becomes even more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided approximately at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outside parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a left guide passage group 2530, a gate 2002, and a side upper left unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. , a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that the game balls B are gathered above the entrance of the second left guide passage 2532. As a result, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be passed through the second left guide path 2532 with a higher probability than through the first left guide path 2531. The game ball B that has circulated through the second left guide passage 2532 will circulate downward while approaching the center accessory 2500, and will flow down the left side of the variable prize opening 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance of the second left guide passage 2532, there is a first grand prize opening 2006 that is closed by the first grand prize opening door 2523 under normal conditions, and the second left guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game ball B rolls on the first grand prize opening door 2523 and flows down. Then, the first big prize opening door 2523 is opened according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. When the game ball B enters the second left guide passage 2532 while moving backward, it will be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B accepted into the first big prize opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball guidance of the back unit 3000 It is discharged downward via unit 3100. When a game ball B is detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2525, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be gathered directly above the gate 2002 at a lower part than the variable prize winning opening 2003. Thereby, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B flows downward on both the left and right sides of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery of normal symbols is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is a "normal win", the variable winning hole 2003 becomes in a state where it can accept the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable winning hole 2003 is ready to accept, the variable winning hole door 2521 rotates to the left, so the game ball B that circulates through the second left guide passage 2532 has a high probability of winning a variable prize. 2003. The game ball B accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, then detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and sent downward. is discharged to. When a game ball B is detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

A warp entrance 2511 and a windmill W are provided between the gate 2002 and the upper left side unit 2300 from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens toward the left in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. The windmill W is arranged closer to the center accessory 2500 between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002.

The plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate 2002 and the windmill W are caused by the gate 2002 and the game balls B that have flown around the right outside of the gate 2002 flowing mainly down the area to the right of the center of the windmill W. It is arranged so that Therefore, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain probability. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated on the left outside of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 passes through the warp passage and exits from the warp exit 2512 that opens within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is provided near the lower end of the center part in the left-right direction of the center accessory 2500. It is supplied to stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction and is discharged from either the central discharge section 2513a or the side discharge section 2513b so as to flow back into the gaming area 5a.

Since the center release part 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2004 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release part 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first start port 2004. It is received into the starting port 2004. The game ball B released from the side release parts 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a is accepted into the first starting port 2004 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002. and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a lottery of the first special symbol is carried out and benefits such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out are provided.

Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 are received in the out port 1008 and discharged outside the gaming area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guiding section 1003 and then discharged downward.

A game ball B that has passed on the right side of the center of the windmill W has a high probability of hitting the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally in two upper and lower rows along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down onto a plurality of obstacle nails N. The game balls B that have not flown down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper stage side through the right side of the windmill W flow down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. On the other hand, the game ball B that circulated on the left side of the center of the windmill W flows down onto the shelf section 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls to the right on the shelf section 2301, and then moves onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. flows down to.

The game ball B, which flows on the right side of the center of the windmill W and flows down to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, is located below the center accessory 2500 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction ( There is a possibility that the fuel is guided toward the first starting port 2004) and accepted into the first starting port 2004. In addition, on the upper side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are diagonally arranged, there is a gap through which one game ball B can pass, so it may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning slot 2001 of the side unit 2200. Game balls B that are not accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 are discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left part of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B that has flown down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally is caused to move in the left and right direction of the game area 5a by the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is guided toward the center, and is not received into the first starting port 2004, but is received into the out port 1008 and discharged from the gaming area 5a. On this lower stage side, since there are a plurality of gaps in the middle through which one game ball B can pass, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 through the gaps.

The game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. At the top, it is discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540, a space forming part 2550, a specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second attacker part 2560, and a lower right unit 2400 are arranged in order from the top. In the space forming part 2550 between the right guide path group 2540 and the second attacker part 2560, a specific fault nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of fault nails N is provided.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B is pushed with such strength that the game ball B enters the upper part of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower toward the right from near the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B, which is relatively strongly hit aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, comes into contact with the blocking part 1006 and enters the right first guide path 2541 of the right guide path group 2540. On the other hand, the game ball B, which was hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and enters the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the second right guide passage 2542.

The game ball B that has entered the first right guide passage 2541 is detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543 and then moves downward from the side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 between the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. released. Then, the game ball B that passed through the right first guide path 2541 enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming part 2550, and moves in the left and right direction within the first guide area 2711. It flows down in a meandering manner. The game ball B that has circulated through the first guide area 2711 comes into contact with the guide wall part 2552 and also flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall part 2552.

The plurality of pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the first guiding area 2711 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass. Through this, the game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side (second guiding area 2712) of the first guiding area 2711. The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall part 2501 and flows down to the guide wall part 2552. At this time, the plurality of rear protrusions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 cause the water to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has flown down to the guide wall portion 2552 flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall portion 2552. The game ball B that has moved from the first guidance area 2711 to the right outside will flow through the second guidance area 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released downward from the side closer to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B that passed through the right second guide path 2542 enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming part 2550, and moves in the left and right direction within the second guide area 2712. It flows down in a meandering manner. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide area 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall part 2552 and also flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall part 2552.

The plurality of pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the second guiding area 2712 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass. Through this, the game ball B may move to the left outer side (first guide area 2711) or right outer side of the second guiding area 2712. The game ball B that has moved from the second guidance area 2712 to the left outside flows through the first guidance area 2711. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guidance area 2712 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall 2551, and passes between the guidance wall 2552 and the right wall 2551. Flows down to the body part. At this time, the plurality of rear protrusions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 cause the water to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has moved from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward via the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

The game balls B guided by this specific faulty nail group 2700 have a suppressed distribution speed and are kept at the same height compared to the part where the faulty nails N are planted in a general gauge arrangement. It will flow with a delay.

Game balls B that have passed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming section 2550) and have not been accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 are sent from between the guide wall section 2552 and the attacker right wall section 2567 to the second attacker section. Enter the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second big prize opening 2007 of 2560. In a normal state, the second grand prize opening door 2562 moves forward and closes the second grand prize opening 2007 so that it cannot be accepted, so the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 is After rolling to the left on the upper surface of the body, it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565. In this attacker passage 2564, the game ball B rolls to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the rear ridge 2564a of the flange portion 2502 and the front of the ridge of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the second attacker part 2560 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left horizontal wall part 2417). do. Then, with a certain degree of probability, it is received into the second starting port 2005 that is always open upward below the right discharge passage 2565. Further, although the probability of acceptance into the second starting port 2005 is lower, it is accepted into the second sub-out port 2022 which is open on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a lottery of a second special symbol is carried out and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

Game balls B released from the right release passage 2565 and not received by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 roll obliquely toward the lower left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After moving, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

The game balls B circulating through the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker section 2560 are the lottery results of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, or the lottery result of the first special symbol. When the second grand prize opening door 2562 retreats in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol, it is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2007 is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by either of the two second big prize opening sensors 2561 provided below. When a game ball B is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2561, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 from the second big prize opening 2007 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010. When the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, it flows down onto the bottom wall part 2411 through the front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, and flows along the slope of the bottom wall part 2411. After rolling to the left, it is received into the pseudo outlet 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When game balls B are circulating in the pseudo game area 2010, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 or the second special symbol When the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the lottery result, there is a high probability that it will come into contact with the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 and be accepted into the rear pseudo big winning opening 2402. It will be done. The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. By detecting the game ball B by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance.

The performance using the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is based on the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, according to "big hit", "small win", etc.) When the second big prize opening 2007 is open, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is opened by the peripheral control board 1510 for presentation. At that time, the peripheral control board 1510 can know the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 opens, so the degree to which the pseudo big winning hole 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. Utilizing this property, it can be suggested that when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 picks up a lot of game balls B, it will be in a high probability state (so-called probability variable state) after a "big hit". On the other hand, when there are many missed wins in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low probability state (so-called normal non-probability variable state) will occur after the "big hit". Furthermore, it is possible to suggest probability settings (generally 6 levels of settings 1 to 6) based on such a state of missing data.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the normal state, there is only a possibility that it will be accepted into the second starting port 2005 where a privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is Since there is no possibility that the game ball B will pass through or be accepted into the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

To be more specific, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. Regarding the lottery result, the special variation time for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol to the player is set longer for the lottery result of the second special symbol than the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, since it takes longer for the second special symbol lottery result to consume the reserved number, even if the number of game balls B accepted per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. , the number of lottery results of the second special symbol to be executed using the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Furthermore, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of game balls B that is put out is one. For this reason, under normal conditions, even if you hit the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that it will only be accepted by the second starting hole 2005, and even if it is accepted by the second starting hole 2005, you will receive a bonus. Since the number of game balls B paid out is one, it is possible to make it easier for the player to hit the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game balls B are received in the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007, a privilege of paying out many game balls B is given. In order to make it possible to accept the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005 need to receive the game ball B, so that they are It is necessary to draw a first special symbol and a second special symbol that can be accepted.

For this reason, under normal conditions, the player is advised to play the game so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004. The driving operation of the ball B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the first starting port 2004 It is possible to increase expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B by the player.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004, a "hit" (for example, "small hit", "medium hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, since the first grand prize opening 2006 or the second grand prize opening 2007 opens and closes, it is necessary to drive the game ball B so that the game ball B can be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2006 or the second grand prize opening 2007. Not only can the operation be enjoyed, but also the anticipation for receiving the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 can be increased.

Specifically, when the first grand prize opening 2006 becomes available for receiving, a driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the left side of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, when the second big prize opening 2007 becomes available for receiving, it is possible to perform a driving operation (“hitting right”) so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center accessory 2500.

When hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a right guide path group 2540 consisting of a right first guide path 2541 and a right second guide path 2542, and a specific obstacle A guide region 2710 consisting of a first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage through which it flows facilitates acceptance into the second sub-out port 2022, so that the desired guide can be achieved. The driving force of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the passageway (in this case, the first right guide passage 2541), and the driving operation of the game ball B is instructed to the player. Can be entertained.

In addition, the second grand prize opening 2007 has a larger opening in the left and right direction than the first grand prize opening 2006, so at first glance it seems to the player that the second grand prize opening 2007 is faster than the first prize opening 2006. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is possible to accept many game balls B. As a result, when the second grand prize opening 2007 becomes available for acceptance, the player can immediately change the driving operation so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the second It is possible to increase expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the grand prize opening 2007 and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the game ball B is received in the second big prize opening 2007, the game ball B is supplied into the pseudo gaming area 2010 where a pseudo big winning hole 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning hole 2007 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, and it is also possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B within the pseudo game area 2010, suppressing a decrease in interest. can be done.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 143, 144, 155, and the like. FIG. 155 is a front view of the back unit of the game board. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B that has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B that has been accepted into the first starting hole 2004 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. A first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the guided game ball B is provided. The general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and A back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 is placed behind the back box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. There is.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guide unit 3100 which is provided at the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 and through which game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate, and a back ball guide unit 3100 near the front end inside the back box 3010. a back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 provided in the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, a back upper front display unit 3300 provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at approximately the same position in the front and back direction as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200; The back lower front effect unit 3400 provided at the rear lower part of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the back box 3010, and the back upper and rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back upper front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (Fig. 162, etc.), and a back lower back effect unit 3600 provided behind the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a functional surface portion 3011 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). The functional surface section 3011 is provided in the back box 3010, and is used for attaching other members such as a presentation unit (here, the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200) to the back box 3010, and for directing the front side of the back unit 3000 downward. It can be used for placing the device face down with the back unit 3000 facing upward, or placing it on the back with the back side of the back unit 3000 facing upward.

[5-9a. Back box related]
Next, the configuration related to the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160 and the like. FIG. 156 is a front view of the configuration of the rear unit related to the rear box. FIG. 157(a) is a perspective view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box seen from the front, and FIG. 157(b) is a perspective view of the structure of the back unit related to the back box seen from the back. 158(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box shown in FIG. 157 as viewed from the front, broken down into main components, and FIG. 158(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 157 viewed from the back. 159(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 158 as seen from the front, and FIG. 159(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 158 as seen from the back. FIG. 160(a) is a side view showing a state where the back unit is placed face down using the functional surface part, and FIG. 160(b) is a side view showing a state where the back unit is placed face down using the functional surface part.

The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 opened to the front, a back box rear unit 3030 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a back box provided behind the back box rear unit 3030. A back board unit 3040 attached to the rear side of the board 3010 is provided. The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back box 3010 by a lock slider 3020.

The back box 3010 has a box shape with an open front and has an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and is provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a, on which the back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) is placed. two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and a lower side near the center in the left-right direction of the mounting surface 3010b. It includes a lock mechanism section 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 is attached so as to be slidable left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a rectangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size in the left-right direction as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. Further, the opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the vertical center of the back box 3010. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing piece 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the back box rear unit 3030 is inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the locking mechanism section 3010d of the back box 3010 from the rear with the lock slider 3020 being slid to the left in rear view. When the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view with the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted into the locking mechanism section 3010d, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1652 from moving backward. be able to.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for attaching the back ball guiding unit 3100 and the like.

Furthermore, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft supports 3010f that can rotatably support the shaft portion 3041a of the back board unit 3040 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of shaft supports 3010f on the rear surface. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and includes a locking portion 3010g to which the locking claw 3041b of the back board unit 3040 is locked.

The back box rear unit 3030 is removably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from the rear. The back box rear unit 3030 includes a production display device 1600 that can display a predetermined production image, a set plate 1650 to which the production display device 1600 is attached to the front side and is attached to the back box 3010, and a set plate 1650 that is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650. and a peripheral control unit 1500 in which a peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device with an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed into a rectangular flat plate having the same size as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 that are spaced apart from the upper side in the left-right direction and protrude upward, and one lower fixing piece 1652 that protrudes downward from near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction. There is. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing groove 3010c of the back box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the locking mechanism section 3010d of the back box 3010.

Further, the set plate 1650 has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that is open toward the front on the front side. The liquid crystal mounting part 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and attached from the front. In this embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 coincide with each other when viewed from the front. The set plate 1650 is transparent. Thereby, the inside of the back box 3010 can be visually confirmed from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 167, etc.) having a peripheral control section 1511 and a performance display control section 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 housing the peripheral control board 1510. has been done. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of set plate 1650 such that the upper side of peripheral control board box 1520 is located slightly below the upper side of set plate 1650. As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, there is an area with a height of approximately 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. It is formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and has a thin box shape in the front and back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. We are prepared. The substrate box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer side of the L-shaped vertically extending portion. Further, the board box 3041 has a locking claw 3041b that is locked to the locking portion 3010g of the back box 3010 at the tip of the L-shaped portion extending left and right.

This back board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 across the opening 3010a (back box rear unit 3030). When assembled into the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back board unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 when viewed from the rear. Further, the L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 extending left and right is located between the rear lower end of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

This back board unit 3040 can be assembled into a back box by releasing the lock between the locking part 3010g and the locking claw 3041b and rotating the locking claw 3041b rearward about the shaft part 3041a. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the rear box rear unit 3030 can be attached to and removed from the rear box 3010 without removing it from the rear box 3010.

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a large enough to attach a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a set plate 1650 is attached to the opening 3010a. A 15-inch performance display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the 1650. As a result, when the effect display device 1600 is 19 inches in size, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. It can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 via a set plate 1650 that corresponds to the size of the display device 1600. Therefore, effect display devices 1600 of different sizes can be attached to the back box 3010 by simply changing the set plate 1650. In other words, in conventional pachinko machines, the design of the back box 3010 is changed when the model changes, but in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common component even if the model changes. , the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when it is desired to change the position of the effect display device 1600 due to design changes, etc., this can be easily done by changing only the set plate 1650. This makes it possible to reduce costs associated with design changes and the like.

In the above embodiment, a transparent set plate 1650 is shown, but the set plate 1650 is not limited to this, and may be colored transparent, colored opaque, etc. If the set board 1650 is visible from the player's side, it is desirable to use an opaque color including black. This makes it possible to avoid the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unsightly due to players being able to see the inside of the island equipment or seeing light from behind. In this case, in particular, by making the set board 1650 black, even if the set board 1650 is visible from the player side, the set board 1650 can be made less conspicuous. 1600 and other decorations can be made more conspicuous, and it is possible to make it easier to fully exhibit the effect of displaying them.

Further, the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 of this embodiment has a functional surface portion 3011 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). The functional surface portion 3011 is provided inside the outer periphery of the back box 3010 and behind the fixed piece portion 3010e for attaching the back box 3010 to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The functional surface portion 3011 is formed so that the front side and the rear side are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. The functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 when viewed from the front. The functional surface portion 3011 has a plurality of functional hole portions 3012, each of which is a set of two through holes arranged vertically or horizontally. The two through holes of the functional hole portion 3012 have the same diameter.

The functional surface portion 3011 can have a predetermined member abutted on the front side or the rear side. For example, as shown in FIG. 155, in this embodiment, a part of the rear surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is brought into contact with the functional surface portion 3011. At this time, a positioning pin (not shown) of the back and front periphery decoration unit 3200 is inserted into one of the through holes in some of the functional holes 3012 in the area where the back and front periphery decoration unit 3200 is in contact. At the same time, a mounting screw for mounting the back and front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is screwed into the other through hole. For this reason, the functional surface portion 3011 and the functional hole portion 3012 can be used for attaching other members such as a presentation unit to the back box 3010. At this time, since a plurality of function holes 3012 are provided, if the mounting position of other components is changed due to design changes, model changes, etc., any of the function holes 3012 can be used for installation. I can do it. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be reused, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the functional surface section 3011 is provided so that the rear surface side faces rearward (visible in rear view), and is installed from the rear of the back box 3010 with a mounting screw through the functional hole section 3012 that passes through the functional surface section 3011. Since the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is attached to the front side of the functional surface part 3011, the heads of the mounting screws for attaching the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 to the back box 3010 are exposed on the front side of the back unit 3000. There is no need to do this, and the appearance from the front can be improved, and the decorative effect of the back-front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be further exhibited.

Further, since the functional surface section 3011 can have a predetermined member in contact with the front side or the rear side, for example, as shown in FIG. 160(a), a work table, a mounting table, etc. The upper end of an intermediate member 3016 protruding from a predetermined member 3015 may be brought into contact with the upper end. At this time, the intermediate member 3016 protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the front surface of the back unit 3000 (here, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200). As a result, when assembling the game board 5, if you want to place the back unit 3000 on the predetermined member 3015 with the front side facing downward (place it face down), you can place the back unit 3000 with the front side facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member 3016 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 into contact with the front surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the back unit 3000 can be moved to a predetermined position while the front surface of the back unit 3000 is separated upward from the predetermined member 3015. It can be placed on member 3015.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the back unit 3000 from being damaged due to contact with the predetermined member 3015, maintain the back unit 3000 (back front peripheral edge decoration 3201) in good condition, and It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to damage to the decorative body 3201, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the intermediate member 3016 may be a separate member separated from the predetermined member 3015.

Further, as described above, since the functional surface portion 3011 can avoid contact between the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 of the back unit 3000 and the predetermined member 3015, the back side holding the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be avoided. With the unit 3000 (back box 3010) placed face down, other members such as the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 can be attached and wired to the rear side of the back box 3010.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided in the back box 3010, the performance unit is The back box 3010 can be placed face down even when not being held. Therefore, the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be placed face down even during assembly, and various work conditions (work modes) can be accommodated.

Further, since the functional surface section 3011 can have a predetermined member in contact with the front side or the rear side, for example, as shown in FIG. 160(b), a work table, a mounting table, etc. The upper end of an intermediate member 3017 protruding from a predetermined member 3015 may be brought into contact with the upper end. At this time, the intermediate member 3017 protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the rear surface of the back unit 3000. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, if you want to place the back unit 3000 on the predetermined member 3015 with the back side facing down (place it on your back), you can place the back unit 3000 with the back side facing down. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member 3017 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the rear unit 3000 can be moved to a predetermined position while the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 is upwardly separated from the predetermined member 3015. It can be placed on member 3015.

Therefore, by bringing the upper surface of the intermediate member 3017 into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the predetermined member 3015 is prevented from coming into contact with the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the back unit 3000 is placed on its back on the predetermined member 3015. Since the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) can be placed on its back during assembly etc., it can be stabilized with the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) on its back, making it easy to perform assembly work etc. from the front end side of the back box 3010. can do.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided in a portion that is recessed from the front surface of the back box 3010 to the rear, at least a portion of the periphery of the functional surface portion 3011 is provided with a portion that protrudes forward or backward (for example, the back box 3010 side wall), the relative movement of the functional surface portion 3011 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 3016 or the intermediate member 3017 in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015 can be restricted by this portion. can. This makes it difficult for the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) to move when placed face down or on the back via the functional surface portion 3011, making it easier to assemble.

Furthermore, since the functional surface section 3011 is provided with a plurality of functional holes 3012, a positioning pin that can be inserted into the through hole of the functional hole section 3012 is provided on the upper surface of the intermediate member 3016 or the intermediate member 3017. The positioning pin can restrict movement of the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) placed face down or on its back via the functional surface portion 3011 in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015, and the same as above can be used. It can produce effects.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 when viewed from the front, the back unit 3000 can be connected to a predetermined member 3015 such as a work table or a mounting table via the intermediate member 3016 or 307. When the rear unit 3000 is placed face down or on its back, the rear unit 3000 can be kept in a stable state, and the front side of the rear front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be prevented from coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015 due to the rear unit 3000 tilting. be able to.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided behind the front of the back box 3010, when the back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), the functional surface portion 3011 will not touch the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 without any problem.

In the above embodiment, the functional surface section 3011 has a planar shape parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, but the present invention is not limited to this. ``Curved surface part concave in the shape of a truncated cone'', ``multifaceted part concave backward in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or truncated polygonal pyramid'', ``curved surface part protruding forward in the shape of a cone or truncated cone'', ``forward It may also be a "multifaceted part projecting in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or truncated polygonal pyramid." When the functional surface part is a curved surface part or a multifaceted part as described above, it is desirable that the upper end surface of the intermediate member has a shape that follows the functional surface part. Thereby, relative movement of the functional surface portion (back box 3010) and the intermediate member in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015 can be restricted.

Further, in the above embodiment, the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3011, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the production unit attached to the back box 3010 and the ball guiding member that guides the game ball B It may also be provided in the following locations. For example, the drive motor of the presentation unit, the end face of the solenoid, the tip end face of the ball guide member, etc. may be used as the functional part.

[5-9b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the lower part of the back box 3010 near the front end. The back ball guiding unit 3100 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, and a first starting hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B accepted in the first starting hole 2004. , and a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 167, etc.).

The back ball guidance unit 3100 has a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, a second big winning opening 2007, a first sub-out opening 2021, and It has a discharge passageway that receives the game ball B that has been received by the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, guides it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower end, and then discharges it downward. There is.

[5-9c. Back front peripheral decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end inside the back box 3010. The back front periphery decoration unit 3200 is used to decorate the back front periphery decoration 3201 which is formed in an annular shape along the periphery of the game area 5a and the back front periphery decoration 3201 with light when assembled on the game board 5. A back front peripheral edge decorative substrate (not shown) is provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon.

The back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a sumo ring. The back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 is formed to have translucency, and can be decorated with light emitted from the LED mounted on the back front peripheral edge decoration board. The front side of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 projects further forward than the front end of the back box 3010.

According to this back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 can decorate the peripheral edge of the gaming area 5a in an annular shape, making it possible to improve the appearance of the gaming area 5a. Further, by decorating the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 with light emission, the peripheral edge of the gaming area 5a can be made to emit light in an annular shape, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the inside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 can independently emit light from a plurality of parts divided in the circumferential direction using a plurality of LEDs on the back front peripheral edge decorative board, so that the light rotates in the circumferential direction. A light emitting performance can be shown to a player, the player can be entertained, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the front side of the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 protrudes forward beyond the front end of the back box 3010, and when assembled on the game board 5, the front end side penetrates the back side of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 and the panel holder 1120. It is located in a space partitioned by a mouth 1121. As a result, the front-back position of the front surface (decoration) of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 is brought as close as possible to the front-back position of the game area 5a, so the focus is on the game area 5a. The back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 is also brought into focus, and the decoration of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be clearly seen while viewing the inside of the game area 5a. can be shown to the public with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to make the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 stand out and strongly attract the attention of the players, and the decorative effect of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be sufficiently and reliably exhibited, and the game It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

[5-9d. Back top front production unit]
Next, the back top/front presentation unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back top front presentation unit 3300 is provided at approximately the same position as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the front and back direction at the top inside the back box 3010. The back top and front presentation unit 3300 includes a back top and front decoration body 3310 that is rectangular in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and a back side that is provided behind the back top and front decoration body 3310 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It includes an upper front decorative board (not shown) and a back upper front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back upper front decorative body 3310.

The back upper front decorative body 3310 is arranged so that the ranks of sumo rankings such as "Yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and the respective rankings are displayed by the LEDs on the back upper front decorative board. can be decorated with light independently. The back upper front decoration body 3310 is formed in a length such that the left and right direction crosses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 is attached so as to be movable up and down, and can be raised and lowered by the back upper front lifting unit. The back upper front decorative body 3310 can be raised and lowered within a height range that is approximately the same as the height of the back upper front decorative body 3310. In a normal state, this back upper front decorative body 3310 is in a raised position, which is the uppermost position. In this state, when assembled to the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at approximately the same height as the top end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front, and is located at the top of the game area 5a. Most of the back and front decorations 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. can.

This back upper front decoration body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal raised position state to the lowered position state by the back upper front lifting unit. When the back top front decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, the center in the vertical direction is located at approximately the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 166). In the lowered position, almost the entire back upper front decorative body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

According to this back top front presentation unit 3300, each of the rankings of the back top front decoration body 3310 can be decorated with light emission independently, so for example, after all the rankings have been decorated with variable light emission, only one ranking It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the light is decorated and the fluctuation stops. As a result, when a high-ranked player is decorated with light, it is possible to make the player think that a chance has arrived, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and prevent a decline in interest.

Moreover, according to the back top and front decoration body 3310, the order of the rankings decorated with light emission also suggests to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur. can do. As a result, when the fluctuating light-emitting decoration of a plurality of rankings of the back top and front decoration body 3310 is started, it is possible to make the player nervous and nervous depending on whether or not the fluctuation is stopped at the desired ranking. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the back upper front lifting unit, the back upper front decoration body 3310 moves to the center side of the gaming area 5a and the front side of the effect display device 1600 is moved. Since the upper part is blocked, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back top front decorative body 3310, and the player's attention can be drawn to the back top front decorative body 3310. As a result, the light emitting effect using the back and front decorations 3310 as described above can be reliably shown to the players, and it is possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest. In addition, if the above-mentioned light-emitting effect is executed when the player is in the lowered position than when the light-emitting effect is in the raised position, it is possible to increase the sense of premium for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of anticipation for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

[5-9e. Ura-bottom-front production unit]
Next, the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 143 and the like. The back lower front presentation unit 3400 is provided at the lower part of the back box 3010 and behind the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200. The back lower front presentation unit 3400 includes a back lower front decorative body 3410 which is long in the left and right direction, and a back lower front decorative board (not shown) which is provided behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (omitted)) and a back and front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back and front decorative body 3410.

The back lower front decorative body 3410 can be decorated with light by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower front decorative board. In addition, the back lower front decoration body 3410 is provided so as to be movable up and down between a lowered position where it is lowered the most and a raised position where it is raised more by the back lower front elevating unit. The back lower front decoration body 3410 is formed in a length such that the left and right direction crosses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The back lower front decorative body 3410 includes a base decorative body 3411 that is long from side to side, a central decorative body 3412 provided at the center of the base decorative body 3411 in the horizontal direction, and a base decorative body 3411 that can cover the central decorative body 3412 from the front. A front left decorative body 3413 and a front right decorative body 3414 are provided in front of the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 163, etc.).

The base decoration body 3411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape imitating a rope, and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the characters ``goshu'' are formed in a relief shape. The central decorative body 3412 is rotatably provided around an axis extending in the front-back direction centering on the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located so as to be in contact with each other, and are provided so as to be movable away from each other in the left-right direction. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 each have translucency. The front left decorative body 3413 has the character "heaven" formed in a relief shape. The front right decorative body 3414 has the character "Sho" formed in a relief shape.

In a normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in a closed position where they are close to each other and in contact with each other, and hide the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear from being visible from the front. ing. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved from a normal state to an open position where they are separated from each other in the left-right direction. In this open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear can be seen from the front through the space between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414.

In the normal state of the back and front presentation unit 3400, the back and front decoration body 3410 is located at the lowered position. Further, in a normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in the closed position, and the central decorative body 3412 is not visible from the front. In the normal state, when the back lower front decorative body 3410 is assembled on the game board 5, the vertical center is located at a height slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300, and the lower end is the lower end of the center accessory 2500. It is located at approximately the same height as the warp entrance 2511, and its upper end is located at a height slightly below the warp entrance 2511. In this normal state, a part of the back and front decoration body 3410 is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest is visible between the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. It is visible through.

The back lower front decoration body 3410 can be moved from the lowered position to the raised position by the lower back front lifting unit. When the back lower front decorative body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is located at a slightly lower height than the back upper front decorative body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 161). In other words, the center of the back lower front decoration body 3410 in the up-down direction when in the raised position is located at approximately the same height as the first grand prize opening 2006. In addition, the back lower front decorative body 3410 can move the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at any position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be moved.

According to this back-lower-front effect unit 3400, when the back-lower-front decorative body 3410 is moved upward from the lowered position, it moves to the center side of the gaming area 5a and blocks a part of the effect display device 1600. can strongly attract the attention of the user, and can draw attention to the back lower front decorative body 3410.

In addition, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear becomes visible (appears). ) Therefore, the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 can make the player think that something good is going to happen, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in the back lower front decorative body 3410, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved to the open position to open the central decorative body. By rotating the central decorative body 3412 with the body 3412 appearing, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that something good will happen, further increasing the player's sense of expectation. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Furthermore, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears visibly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether the central decorative body 3412 rotates or not. can be entertained.

In addition, the back/front front production unit 3400 can raise and lower the back/front decorative body 3410 as described above, the appearance of the center decorative body 3412 due to the movement of the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414, and the rotation of the central decorative body 3412. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to present a variety of movable effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the movable effect of the back and front decorative body 3410 as described above, the back and front display unit 3400 also enables light emitting effects using a plurality of LEDs on the back and front decorative board, allowing for more diverse effects. This can be shown to the players, and it is possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

[5-9f. Back top/back production unit]
Next, the back top/back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be explained. The back upper and rear effect unit 3500 is provided at the upper part of the back box 3010 and behind the back upper and front effect unit 3300. The back top and rear effect unit 3500 is provided with a back top and back decorative body 3510 (see FIG. 162, etc.) that is long in the left and right direction, and is provided behind the back top and back decorative body 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back top and rear decoration board (not shown) and a back top and back lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back top and back decoration body 3510.

The back top and rear decoration body 3510 has translucency, and can be decorated with light by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top and rear decoration substrates. Further, the back top and rear decoration body 3510 is provided so as to be movable up and down between a raised position where it is raised the most and a lowered position where it is lowered the most by the rear up and down rear lifting unit. Furthermore, the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3510 are provided at the rear of the back lower front decorative bodies 3410.

The back top and back decoration body 3510 is formed in a shape that imitates the top half of a championship cup, and has the character "Excellent" formed in relief in the center in the left and right direction. The back upper and rear decorative bodies 3510 can form one large championship cup by abutting the lower ends of the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3610 (see FIG. 164, etc.). The back upper and rear decorative bodies 3510 have approximately the same height as the back upper and front decorative bodies 3310.

In the normal state of the back top and rear effect unit 3500, the back top and back decoration body 3510 is located at the raised position. In this state, the back upper and rear decorative body 3510 is located behind the back upper and front decorative body 3310 in the raised position, and is not visible from the front.

In the back top and rear effect unit 3500, when the back top and back decoration 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back up and back lifting unit, the lower end of the back top and back decoration 3510 is at a height approximately at the vertical center of the game area 5a. It is located in the When the back upper and rear decoration body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back top and front decorations 3310 or the back and bottom front decorations 3410 have not moved in front of the back top and rear decorations 3510, the back top and back decorations 3510 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back top and rear effect unit 3500, by raising and lowering the back top and back decorations 3510, it can be made visible from the front, so the appearance of the back top and back decorations 3510 can not surprise the player. This makes it possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest. In addition, the back top and rear decorations 3510 can form one large decoration by making contact with the back and bottom back decorations 3610, which can give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making people think that a chance has arrived.

[5-9g. Back and rear production unit]
Next, the back lower post effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be explained. The back lower rear effect unit 3600 is provided behind the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom rear effect unit 3600 is provided with a back bottom rear decorative body 3610 (see FIG. 162 etc.) which is long in the left and right direction, and is provided behind the back bottom rear decoration body 3610, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back and lower back decoration board (not shown) and a back and back rear elevating unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back and lower back decorative body 3610.

The lower back decoration body 3610 has translucency, and can be decorated with light by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back decoration board. Further, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be movable up and down between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the rear lower rear lifting unit.

The lower back decorative body 3610 is formed in a shape that imitates the lower half of a championship cup, and has the word "Award" formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The upper and lower rear decorative bodies 3610 can form one large championship cup by abutting the upper and lower rear decorative bodies 3510 at the upper end (see FIG. 164, etc.). The back lower rear decorative body 3610 has approximately the same height as the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In the normal state of the back lower back effect unit 3600, the back lower back decoration body 3610 is located at the lowered position. In this state, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is located behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 in the lowered position, and is not visible from the front.

In the state in which the back lower rear decoration body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the back lower rear decoration unit 3600, the upper end of the back lower rear decoration body 3610 is the lower end of the back upper rear decoration body 3510 in the raised position. It is located at a height that is almost in contact with the When the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back upper and front decorations 3310 or the back and lower front decorations 3410 have not moved in front of the back and lower rear decorations 3610, the back and lower rear decorations 3610 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back and rear effect unit 3600, by raising and lowering the back and rear decorations 3610, it can be made visible from the front, so the appearance of the back and rear decorations 3610 does not surprise the player. This makes it possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest. In addition, the back and lower rear decorations 3610 can form one large decoration by making contact with the back and upper and rear decorations 3510, which can give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making people think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front presentation unit and the back lower rear decoration body of the back lower front presentation unit in the back unit have respectively moved to the raised position. . In Figure 162, the back lower front decoration of the back lower front presentation unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the play area, and the back upper and rear decoration of the back upper and rear presentation unit has moved above the back lower front decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear effect unit is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body. FIG. 163 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front presentation unit have moved to the open position and the central decorative body has appeared in the state shown in FIG. 162. It is a front view of a game board.

In addition, FIG. 164 shows that the back top and rear decoration of the back top and rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back and bottom back decoration of the back bottom and rear effect unit is raised to form the back top and back decoration. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which it is in contact with the game board. FIG. 165 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front presentation unit have moved to the open position and the central decorative body has appeared in the state shown in FIG. 164. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 166 shows that the back top and front decoration of the back top and front presentation unit in the back unit has moved to the lowered position, and the back top and rear decoration of the back top and rear presentation unit has moved to the rear of the back top and front decoration. Then, the back lower front decoration of the back lower front decoration unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back upper front decoration, and at the same time, the back lower rear decoration of the back lower rear direction unit rises to create the back lower front decoration. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear side of the game board is in contact with the upper and lower back decorations.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, the game panel can be viewed through them as shown in FIG. In the back unit 3000 arranged behind the back unit 1100, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back top front decoration body 3310 of the back top front presentation unit 3300, and the bottom back of the back bottom front presentation unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410, etc. can be clearly viewed, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is provided in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and cannot be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, center accessory 2500, etc. I can do it. The back top front decorative body 3310 of the back top front presentation unit 3300 is located above the top end of the presentation display device 1600 at a raised position where the center in the vertical direction is approximately at the same height as the top end of the inner rail 1002, Most of it can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500.

In addition, the back lower front decoration body 3410 of the back lower front presentation unit 3400 is located in a lowered position near the lower end of the presentation display device 1600, with the center in the vertical direction being slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300, A part of it can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are located directly above the vicinity of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen within the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the square area between the back top and front decorations 3310 and the back and bottom front decorations 3410.

In addition, the back top and back decoration body 3510 of the back top and rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back top and front decoration body 3310, and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Further, the back lower rear decoration body 3610 of the back lower rear effect unit 3600 is located behind the back lower front decoration body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 receives the back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, which are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper and rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, etc. perform predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects. Furthermore, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, the so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform movable effects as shown in FIGS. 161 to 157. First, as shown in FIG. 161, the back lower front decoration body 3410 of the back lower front effect unit 3400 and the back lower rear decoration body 3610 of the back lower front effect unit 3600 are moved together to the raised position. As a result, the back and front decorations 3410, which are crossing the effect display device 1600, move upward so as to traverse the effect and display device 1600, thereby attracting the player's attention to the back and front decorations 3410. It can make people think that something good is going to happen.

By the way, in FIG. 161, when only the lower back front decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the lower back rear decorative body 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front. Since it is formed to form a pair with the rear decorative body 3510, if only the lower back decorative body 3610 is visible, it will look half-hearted and unnatural, and the appearance of the game area 5a will be poor. There is a fear. Furthermore, when the back and bottom rear decorations 3610 are visible, due to its incomplete shape, some players may think that it is merging with another decoration, and may be confused with the back and top and rear decorations 3510, which will be described later. When executing a movable performance, the impact on the player may be reduced and sufficient performance effects may not be obtained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the lower front decorative body 3410, the lower back decorative body 3610 can remain hidden. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from becoming unsightly, and to make it difficult for people to notice the existence of the back and lower back decorations 3610, and to make it possible to move jointly with the back and upper and rear decorations 3510, which will be described later. It is possible to fully demonstrate the effect of the performance.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 161, the back and front decoration body 3410 is moved to the center of the gaming area, as shown in FIG. 162. At this time, for the same reason as above, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved together with the lower back front decorative body 3410 so that the lower back front decorative body 3410 is located in front. In addition, the back upper and rear decorations 3510 are moved to a position between the back upper and front decorations 3310 and the back and lower front decorations 3410, and the back and lower back decorations 3610 are moved to the lower side of the back and lower front decorations 3410. let

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered by the back top and rear decorations 3510, the back bottom front decorations 3410, and the back bottom and rear decorations 3610, which creates a strong impact on the player. You can give something, and it can make you feel strongly that something good is going to happen. In this state, the back upper and rear decorations 3510 and the back lower and rear decorations 3610, which together form one decoration (here, a championship cup), are vertically separated from each other, but there is a space between them. Because the back and front decorations 3410 are located, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the middle of the vertically long winning cup is hidden by the back and front decorations 3410, resulting in a poor appearance. can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 162, as shown in FIG. 163, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position where they are close to each other to the open position where they are separated from each other. The center decoration 3412 is made to appear visibly between the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414. As a result, a new center decoration 3412 appears in the back and front decorations 3410, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous occurs. It is possible to make the player think strongly of the game, increase expectations for the advantageous gaming state, and suppress a decline in interest.

When moving the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 to the open position, they may be moved gradually or may be opened and closed repeatedly. Thereby, depending on whether or not the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 open to reveal the central decorative body 3412, the player can be made nervous and excited, and the player can be entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 163, the center decorative body 3412 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. As a result, by rotating the central decorative body 3412, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous will occur. It is possible to increase expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 163, the front left decorative body 3413 and front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved to the closed position as shown in FIG. 162, and then as shown in FIG. , the back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are respectively moved to the center in the vertical direction and brought into contact (combined) with each other. As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the gaming area 5a, making it possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) will occur in which the player is advantageous. , it is possible to increase expectations for advantageous gaming conditions and suppress a decline in interest.

Thereafter, from the state shown in FIG. 164, as shown in FIG. 165, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) will occur, increasing expectations for an advantageous gaming state and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 165, the center decorative body 3412 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous is confirmed, and the expectation for the advantageous gaming state is increased and interest is increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, the first action is to move the back lower front decorative body 3410 (back lower rear decorative body 3610) to the raised position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 166, the back top front decoration body 3310 is moved to the lowered position, and the back top and rear decoration body 3510 is moved together with the back top front decoration body 3310 to the back top front decoration body 3310. The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower side of the back upper front decorative body 3310, and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the rear of the back lower front decorative body 3410 together with the back lower front decorative body 3410. You may also move it to . Alternatively, the back lower front decoration 3410 may be moved to the center of the game area 5a together with the back lower back decoration 3610. These can also provide the same effects as above.

In this way, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described series of performances are performed by drawing the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. It is executed according to the lottery result and the second special symbol, and can entertain the players. In addition, the series of productions can proceed to the end or end midway depending on the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is multi-stage. This makes it difficult for players to get bored.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the above-described movable effects can be appropriately combined with light-emitting effects, and also with effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, by appropriately combining light emitting effects, display effects, etc., it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible to attract players with various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effects include the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, Although the execution is shown in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol, the execution is not limited to this, and it may be executed in response to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403. As a result, even during an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state), it is possible to enjoy the movable effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest. be able to.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls on the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 167 and the like. FIG. 167 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that controls. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, etc., and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. MPU1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and errors, and a section on the game board 5. It is equipped with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an incoherent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a will not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will remain activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also operates a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as a "main control built-in hardware It has a built-in random number circuit. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values within the predetermined numerical value range are extracted. After extracting all the values, extract one value within the predetermined numerical range again, and quickly extract the other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number. It is designed to be set as .

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that is

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004, and a second starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. mouth sensor 2401, general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B that passed through the gate 2002, game accepted in the first big winning hole 2006 The first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects the ball B, the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects the game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2007, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is detected. Detection signals from the out sensor 664, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, etc. are sent to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port.

Further, respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame release switch and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, via the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When the signals are input to the main control board 1310 without any intervention, they are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the respective detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and are input to the main control board 1310 directly. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, each detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 3001, gate sensor 2601, first big winning hole sensor 2525, second big winning hole sensor 2561, magnetic sensor 1050, and vibration sensor connects the panel relay board. The signal is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit controls the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 and the first The respective drive signals are outputted to the big winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the function display unit 1400. status display, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special symbol display, first special reservation number display, second special symbol display, second special reservation number display, round display, Each drive signal is directly output without going through another board. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power outage clear signal) can be output to the power outage monitoring circuit, and the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted, a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is outputted to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission for launch is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. is set to Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). Up to this point, the device is constructed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2401, the variable winning hole sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning hole sensor 2525, the second big winning hole sensor 2561, and the out sensor 664. , a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, whereas a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the variable prize winning port 2003, and the gate 2002, so the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor Detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 and the gate sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the first big prize opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so the first big winning opening sensor Detection of game ball B by 2525 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first big prize opening sensor 2525 as well. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is sectioned on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 frequently detects the game balls B. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used also for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of a proximity switch. Incidentally, regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not, a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed explanation will be given later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs ball feeding control. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a push operation unit that releases the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball A ball extraction switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extraction operation. , is equipped with.

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the out of ball detection sensor 574, and the dispensing control I/O port are input. Detection signals from a detection sensor 591 and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, a power outage of the main control board 1310, A power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and an error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys permission to fire the game ball B is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit connects the CR unit to the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal when firing condition 1 is established that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. If the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the game ball B is allowed to fire based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B For example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 195, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In this embodiment, the firing control board 633 is provided with a firing control unit 633b that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The signal may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not connected to the power supply board 630.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 167, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that performs drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voices, and sound effects that are referenced by this sound source IC. It is equipped with a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls the peripherals based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC sends game board side light emission data to the lamp drive board serial I/O for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate various presentation units provided on the game board 5 is sent to the game board decoration drive board. Drive signals are sent from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or to the vibration motor 356 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. It consists of door-side drive data for outputting the door-side drive data, and door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door side driving light emission data to be displayed is sent from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is sent to the serial I/O port for the display control unit. In addition to sending data from the I/O port to the performance display control section 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, press detection sensor 373, elevation detection sensor 374, and protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the production display control unit The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs sound information from the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input/outputs different from display commands. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is As main scanning, each of the pixels for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. is struck into the upper part of the gaming area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the gaming board 5, and the game with the gaming ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more clockwise the handle 195 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The downward speed of the ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It will circulate through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Near the entrance of the second left guide passage 2532, there is a first grand prize opening 2006 that is closed by the first grand prize opening door 2523 under normal conditions, and the second left guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game ball B rolls on the first grand prize opening door 2523 and flows down.

Game balls B that have circulated through the left guide passage group 2530 are released above the gate 2002, and are connected to the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521. 2002, and then pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is "normal win", the variable winning slot The variable winning hole 2003, which is closed by the door 2521, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the variable winning hole 2003.

In this embodiment, since the variable prize opening 2003 is provided in a part close to the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is more expensive to circulate through the second left guide passage 2532 than through the first left guide passage 2531. It is accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 with probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of game balls B are delivered to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. will be paid out.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning hole 2003 normally becomes open after the variable time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 after the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and before the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the regular symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous regular symbol is finished. Further, the maximum number of holding lottery results for normal symbols is set to four, and any more than that are discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

At the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, or the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B flowing downward from the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W allow the game ball B that has passed through the right outside of the gate 2002 to enter the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability. .

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2004, there is a high probability that the first It is received into the starting port 2004.

When game balls B are received into the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) win", A lottery is held for "time saving (time saving) win," "probable variable time saving win," "probable variable time saving win," "second jackpot," etc.). If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "lose", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special variable time), the first starting When the game ball B is accepted into the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol. The start of suggesting the drawing result of the symbol is put on hold. The maximum number of reserved first special symbol lottery results is up to four for each first starting port 2004, and for more than that, game balls B will not be accepted into the first starting port 2004. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500 It passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540 and is discharged into the space forming part 2550 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first right guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open near the stop portion 1006, and an entrance spaced leftward from the entrance of the first right guide passage 2541. and a second right guide passage 2542 which is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (so-called right-hand hit), it enters the first right guide passage 2541 and hits the ball B with such force that it does not contact the stopper 1006 (right-hand hit). If the game ball B is hit with a force that is somewhat weaker than the hitting force, it will enter the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first right guide path 2541 or the second right guide path 2542 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game balls B that have passed through the first right guide passage 2541 are released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game balls B that have circulated through the second right guide passage 2542 are released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. The second guiding region 2712 of the nail group 2700 is discharged.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guide area 2710. As a result, the falling velocity of the game ball B is suppressed in the area of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 compared to the normal area.

In the first guidance area 2711 and the second guidance area 2712, the game ball B may come off from the guidance area 2710, and when it comes off the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2022 provided below have a high probability of being accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is ejected out of the gaming area 5a without having a chance to be received in the second big winning port 2007 or the second starting port 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the second right guide passage 2542 is configured to be accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 with a higher probability than the first right guide passage 2541. This makes it possible for the player to perform a driving operation for the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the first right guide path 2541 when "hitting right". There is. In other words, to encourage a driving operation in which the handle 195 is largely rotated so that the game ball B is hit with such force that the game ball B comes into contact with the abutting portion 1006 when "hitting to the right". This makes it easier to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 through a relatively easy driving operation.

Game balls B that have passed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming section 2550) and have not been accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 pass between the guide wall section 2552 and the attacker right wall section 2567 and reach the second attacker section. Enter 2560. In a normal state, the second big prize opening 2007 provided in the second attacker part 2560 is closed by the second big prize opening door 2562 so that it cannot accept the game ball B, so the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker The game ball B that passed between the right wall part 2567 flows down onto the second big winning opening door 2562, rolls to the left on the second big winning opening door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then moves to the right. It passes through the discharge passage 2565 and is discharged downward from the second attacker section 2560.

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Slanted wall portions 2418 are provided respectively. Furthermore, a plurality of obstruction nails N are installed between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565, the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received into the second starting port 2005 with a certain degree of probability. Further, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received into the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Then, the game balls B released downward from the right release passage 2565 and not received by the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 flow down onto the sloped wall portion 2418 and follow the slope of the sloped wall portion 2418. It rolls diagonally downward and to the left along the line, is ejected to the left at a location below the first starting port 2004, and is received into the out port 1008.

That is, in a normal state, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 ("hit right"), the second starting port 2005 is the only opportunity to receive the game ball B. As a result, under normal conditions, the player can be made to actively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side of the center accessory 2500 ( It is possible to give a premium feel to players (right-handed hitters).

When the game ball B hit into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received into the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one ball) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. As the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, the main control board 1310 displays a second special symbol (for example, "Lose", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot"). , ``Probability variable (probability change) win'', ``Time saving (time saving) win'', ``Probable variable time saving win'', ``Probable variable winning without time saving'', ``Second jackpot'', etc.). If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "lose", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol that has been drawn is obtained by the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time) that is longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. suggested.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 until the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is suggested (special variable time), the second starting When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started, so the second special The start of suggesting the drawing result of the symbol is put on hold. The maximum number of reserved second special symbol lottery results is up to four for each second starting port 2005, and for more than that, game balls B will not be accepted into the second starting port 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 is the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004. It is set longer than the special variation time for lottery results. As a result, since the second special symbol lottery result takes longer to consume the reserved number, the number of game balls B accepted per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed using the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, in a normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting hole 2005 will be accepted, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed less frequently. , the player can be made to actively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As mentioned above, when the game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005, the first special symbol is drawn by drawing the first special symbol or the second special symbol is drawn by the first big winning hole. 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 open and close in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and become ready to receive the game ball B.

In the case where the first grand prize opening 2006 can be accepted, since the first grand prize opening 2006 is provided in the second left guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, A driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second guide passage 2532. Then, when the first big prize opening 2006 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, when the game ball B that has entered the second left guide passage 2532 is accepted into the first big prize opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 onto the upper tray 201 by the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, in the case where the second grand prize opening 2007 can be accepted, since the second grand prize opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center accessory 2500, The driving operation can be performed so that the game balls B circulate. Then, when the second big prize opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the game ball B enters the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker section 2560 from between the guide wall section 2552 and the attacker right wall section 2567. is accepted into the second big prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

In this way, by allowing the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 to accept the game ball B when the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, Since many game balls B can be put out, it is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

By the way, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", for example, the second big prize opening 2007 is opened for a short time to be able to accept the game ball B. It opens and closes in between (for example, small hit rush). At this time, even if you try to hit the game ball B aiming at the second grand prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second grand prize opening 2007 opens and can accept the game ball B, the second grand prize opening 2007 will open. Since a specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the falling speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to determine the timing to drive the game ball B. As a result, a level of difficulty is assigned to the driving operation of the game ball B, which makes the game more rewarding and enjoyable for the player, and prevents the player from losing interest. . In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second grand prize opening 2007 to accept the game ball B, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, if the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "jackpot", after the second grand prize opening 2007 becomes open to accept the game ball B, When either a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 10 balls) have been received into the second grand prize opening 2007, the game balls B An opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the device into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, you can change the probability that the first special symbol or the second special symbol such as "Jackpot" will be drawn ("probable winning"), or change the lottery result of the first special symbol. There is also a "win" that changes the display time of a performance image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("time-saving win").

If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is a "second jackpot", the first grand prize opening 2006 or the second grand prize opening 2007, After making it possible to accept game balls B in a predetermined pattern, an ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is to maintain a state of reliable variation or time saving for a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, below the second big prize opening 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game balls B accepted in the second big prize opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2007 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, and then enters the pseudo gaming area 2010. The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is able to accept the game ball B. , the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo big prize opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, the game ball B is ejected through the front of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 from the pseudo out hole 2404 without being returned to the gaming area 5a.

For example, when the second big winning hole 2007 is able to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to a "jackpot" as described above, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 receives the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Becomes acceptable. Since this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is provided to be larger and more conspicuous than the second big winning hole 2007, many game balls B accepted into the second big winning hole 2007 are accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player entertained while making it difficult for the player to get bored during the "jackpot" game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery results of the first special symbol and the lottery results of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). The function display unit 1400 indicates the special symbol lottery result by flashing a plurality of LEDs for a predetermined period of time by repeatedly turning them on and off, and then suggests the special symbol lottery result by the combination of lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the lottery results of special symbols as a performance image. The performance image that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a state where three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each symbol row is varied. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (special fluctuation time)) that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol (the symbol row fluctuates) on the performance display device 1600. (The time it takes for the final image to be displayed) is different from the time taken for the final image to be displayed, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit in the door frame 3 It is possible to perform a player participation type performance in which the player operates the contact operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in 300. In the player participation type performance, the push operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lift drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper and front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper and rear effect unit 3500, the back lower and rear effect unit 3600, etc. Therefore, the players can be entertained by various performances, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly.

[8. Second embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 168 to 173 and the like. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment, showing the inside of the game area where game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. FIG. 169(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment seen from the front, and FIG. 169(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment seen from the back. be. Figure 170 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the right half of the center accessory shown in Figure 169, with the center front right plate and ball guiding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 171(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 169, and FIG. 171(b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 171, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 171, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view taken along the saw line, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the tartar line in FIG. 171. 173(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit shown in FIG. 171 seen from the front right, and FIG. 173(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit shown in FIG. 171 seen from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the configuration of a part of the table unit 2000. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed explanations of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5A of the second embodiment, three general winning holes 2001 are provided. In addition, in the game board 5A, the second starting port 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 on the game board 5 is used as the normal winning port 2008 instead of the gate 2002, and the variable winning port 2003 of the game board 5 is used as the normal winning port 2008. A second starting port 2005 opens and closes according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the ball B. Furthermore, the game board 5A is provided with a ball guiding unit 2580 that can guide the game ball B instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

Due to the above-mentioned differences, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning hole sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting hole sensor, and the second starting hole sensor 2401 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting hole sensor. It has been replaced with the normal winning hole sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming part 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker part 2560, and is a ball that can guide the game ball B that has passed through the right guide passage group 2540. It has a guiding unit 2580 and a flat center right front plate 2590 extending vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker part 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guiding unit 2580. .

The space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating vertically in a long rectangular shape in a flange part 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall part 2501, and an opening 2553 below the opening 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b, through which the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 2580 are provided.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape extending downward from the entrance, rightward, and then downward. A second lower right passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the first lower right passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open at the front and are closed by the center right front plate 2590. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located approximately at the vertical center of the gaming area 5a when assembled to the gaming board 5A.

A space is formed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker part 2560, and the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the area.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward directly above the first sub-out port 2021. Thereby, the probability that the game ball B discharged downward from the lower right second passage 2550b is received by the first sub-out port 2021 is higher than from the lower right first passage 2550a. In this lower right second passage 2550b, the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guiding unit 2580 flows, so it goes to the first sub-out port 2021. In order to reduce the acceptance probability of the game ball B, the player can be made to actively perform a driving operation to enter the game ball B into the first right guide path 2541. Therefore, when "hitting to the right", by hitting the ball harder, the game ball B will more easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the stop portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with delicate adjustments. There is no need to worry, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

[8-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 2580 separately guides the game balls B that have passed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 in a state where they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guiding unit 2580 has a first guiding passage 2580a that guides the game ball B from the first right guiding passage 2541, and a second guiding passage 2580b that guides the gaming ball B from the second right guiding passage 2542. are doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b are capable of guiding the game ball B downward while being visibly swung in the left-right direction and the front-back direction.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guide unit 2580 has an inlet opening toward the front near the upper end, and an outlet opening diagonally forward and downward at the lower end. The second guide passage 2580b has an entrance opening toward the front at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guidance passage 2580a, and an exit opening diagonally forward and downward at the lower end.

The ball guide unit 2580 includes a left passage member 2581 in which a first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right is provided, and a second guide that is attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and is open to the right. It is composed of a right passage member 2582 in which a passage 2580b is provided, and a flat passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The sphere guiding unit 2580 is transparent.

The left passage member 2581 has a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2581a extending longitudinally and vertically, and protrudes to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2581a, and is inclined so that one side in the longitudinal direction is lower. It has a plurality of inclined parts 2581b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined parts 2581b are provided vertically at intervals that allow the game balls B to flow therethrough, and are provided so that the lower sides of the upper and lower sides are alternately different. Further, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are configured such that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-rear direction at an interval that allows the game ball B to flow than the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b. It is provided.

Further, the left passage member 2581 includes a standing wall portion 2581c extending from the upper end of each inclined portion 2581b upwardly than the upper inclined portion 2581b, and a standing wall portion 2581c extending from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c upwardly than the upper inclined portion 2581b. It has a projecting ceiling wall portion 2581d.
The ceiling wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the slope portion 2581b above the slope portion 2581b on which the vertical wall portion 2581c rises. Further, the top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to near the lower surface of the further upper sloped portion 2581b of the upper sloped portion 2581b, and forms a gap between the top wall portion 2581d and the further upper sloped portion 2581b. .

Furthermore, the left passage member 2581 includes a plurality of first protrusions 2581e that protrude to the right from a portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2581b on the side wall portion 2581a, and It has a plurality of first protruding pieces 2581f protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall 2581c. The first protruding part 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the center of the inclined part 2581b in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined part 2581b, and has a triangular shape with a tapered tip. has been done. The first projecting piece 2581f extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined part 2581b, and is inclined so that the upper end is lowered to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined part 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lower, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. . In addition, the lowermost inclined part 2581b is inclined so that its front end is lower, and is located further back than the front end of the upper inclined part 2581b, and forms the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. are doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2582a that closes a first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, and a plurality of side walls that protrude leftward from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a. It has one protrusion 2582b. When the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are assembled into the ball guiding unit 2580, two each of the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided in the front and rear direction on one inclined part 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusions 2581e in between. The first protruding part 2582b has an upstream side of the first protruding part 2581e that protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and a downstream end of the first protruding part 2581e that has an inclined upstream end and extends downstream to near the standing wall part 2581c. It has a trapezoidal shape and protrudes to the left.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 protrudes to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a, is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower, and is provided at intervals in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c. The plurality of inclined parts 2582c are provided vertically at intervals that allow the game balls B to flow therethrough, and are provided so that the lower sides of the upper and lower sides are alternately different. Further, the plurality of inclined parts 2582c are arranged such that the upper end of the lower inclined part 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow than the lower end of the upper inclined part 2582c. It is provided.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 includes a standing wall portion 2582d extending from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c upwardly than the upper inclined portion 2582c, and a standing wall portion 2582d extending from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d to above the upper inclined portion 2582c. It has a projecting ceiling wall portion 2582e.
The top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the slope portion 2582c above the slope portion 2582c on which the vertical wall portion 2582d rises. Further, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to near the lower surface of the upper slope portion 2582c, and forms a gap with the upper slope portion 2582c. .

Furthermore, the right passage member 2582 includes a plurality of second protrusions 2582f that protrude to the right from a portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2582c on the side wall portion 2582a, and It has a plurality of second protruding pieces 2582g that protrude rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall 2582d. The second projecting piece 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the center of the inclined part 2582c in the front-back direction, and has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined part 2582c, and has a triangular shape with a tapered tip. It is formed. The second protrusion portion 2582g extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and is inclined so that the upper end is lowered to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined part 2582c is inclined so that the rear end is lower, and the front end forms the lower side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. Further, the lowermost inclined part 2582c is inclined so that its front end is lower, and is located further back than the front end of the upper inclined part 2582c, and forms the lower side of the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. are doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and a plurality of side walls that protrude leftward from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2583a. It has two protrusions 2583b. When assembled into the ball guiding unit 2580, the plurality of second protrusions 2583b are provided two at a time on one inclined part 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second protrusions 2582f in between in the front-rear direction. The second protruding part 2583b has an upstream side of the second protruding part 2582f protruding to the left in a triangular shape, and a downstream end of the second protruding part 2582f having an inclined upstream end and extending downstream to near the standing wall part 2582d. It has a trapezoidal shape and protrudes to the left.

In the ball guiding unit 2580 of this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guiding passage 2580a through the right first guiding passage 2541 of the right guiding passage group 2540, it is directed backward by the inclined part 2581b of the left passage member 2581. roll towards. Above the slope 2581b, a first protrusion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protrusions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right in front and behind the first protrusion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b, then to the right by the next first protrusion 2581e, and then guided to the left again by the next first protrusion 2582b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined part 2581b onto the lower inclined part 2581b along the vertical wall part 2581c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b is guided to the right by the first protrusion 2581f protruding to the right and flows down to the lower slope 2581b. do. Thereby, the game ball B does not flow down vertically from the upper slope part 2581b to the lower slope part 2581b.

The game ball B that has flown down to the lower slope portion 2581b rolls forward according to the slope of the slope portion 2581b. Above this inclined portion 2581b, a first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right in front and behind the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the first protruding piece 2581f on the rear side is guided to the left by the first protruding part 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first protruding part 2581e. Then, it is guided to the left again by the next first protrusion 2582b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction until it reaches the front end of the inclined part 2581b. Thereafter, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined part 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first projecting piece part 2581f on the front side and further flows down onto the lower inclined part 2581b, and the exit of the first guiding passage 2580a. The movement of the game ball B as described above will be repeated until.

In addition, in the ball guiding unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guiding passage 2580b through the right second guiding passage 2542 of the right guiding passage group 2540, it is directed backward by the inclined part 2582c of the right passage member 2582. Roll. Also in this second guide path 2580b, the game ball B flows down while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, similarly to the above-described first guide path 2580a. To be more specific, a second protruding part 2582f protrudes from the left above the inclined part 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and a second protruding part 2582f of the passage closing plate 2583 protrudes from the right in front and behind the second protruding part 2582f. Two protrusions 2583b protrude. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the second protrusion 2583b, then to the right by the next second protrusion 2582f, and then guided to the left again by the next second protrusion 2583b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined part 2582c onto the lower inclined part 2582c along the vertical wall part 2582d. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the second protrusion 2583b is guided to the right by the second protrusion 2582g protruding to the right and flows down to the lower inclined part 2582c. do. Thereby, the game ball B does not flow down vertically from the upper inclined part 2582c to the lower inclined part 2582c.

The game ball B that has flown down to the lower slope portion 2582c rolls forward according to the slope of the slope portion 2582c. Also above this inclined portion 2582c, a second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protruding portions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right in front and behind the second protruding portion 2582f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second protruding piece 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second protruding part 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second protruding part 2582f. Then, it is further guided to the left again by the next second protrusion 2583b, and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. Thereafter, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined part 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second projecting piece part 2582g on the front side and further flows down onto the lower inclined part 2582c, and the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. The movement of the game ball B as described above will be repeated until.

In this way, according to the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game balls B that have passed through the right guide path group 2540 are allowed to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and then are released downward. Therefore, the residence time (flowing time) of the game ball B at the same height can be made longer than when the game ball B is allowed to flow down vertically or through a spiral path. I can do it. As a result, the distribution speed of the game ball B becomes relatively slow, so the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and a decline in interest can be suppressed. can.

In addition, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the game ball B is caused to flow down in a spiral path. Since the game ball B makes complicated movements, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball B that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the left side faces the frame of the center accessory 2500, by looking through the frame of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B can be seen in the front and back direction in the ball guidance unit 2580. It is possible to visually recognize the meandering movement of the game ball B in good condition, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that the same effect as the above-mentioned specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be achieved. To be more specific, for example, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 (for example, " The second big prize opening 2007 of the second attacker section 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short period of time so as to be able to receive the game ball B (for example, , small hit rush), the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second big prize hole 2007 at the timing when the second big prize hole 2007 becomes ready for acceptance. I will do it. At this time, even if you try to hit the game ball B at that timing, a ball guiding unit 2580 that can delay the falling speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second big prize opening 2007. It is possible to make it difficult to find the timing to hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to give a level of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to make the game more rewarding and entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, gaps are formed between the inclined part 2581b and the top wall part 2581d, and between the inclined part 2582c and the top wall part 2582e, so that the first guiding passage 2580a and the first guiding passage 2580a When ball clogging occurs inside the second guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be resolved by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. , compared to the case where a passage is formed using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed due to the circulation of the game ball B (deformation of the obstacle nail N), and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front plate]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape, and the center accessory 2500 covers the front area from near the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker section 2560. It is attached to the front end of the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 in . The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming section 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has, at its lower part, a plurality of first accommodating parts 2590a that penetrate in the front and back and accommodate the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N, respectively, and a plurality of first accommodating parts 2590a that penetrate in the front and back and accommodate the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N, respectively. It has a second accommodating portion 2590b in which the head is accommodated, and a peeling hole 2590c penetrating back and forth.

The panel board of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed is located between the first lower right passage 2550a and the second lower right passage 2550b and the second attacker part 2560 in the first accommodating part 2590a and the second accommodating part 2590b. The heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating part 2590a has a constant width with respect to a circumferential line that surrounds and is in contact with the head of a plurality of (not shown, but in this embodiment, two or three) faulty nails N accommodated therein. It is provided in the shape of a long hole forming a gap. As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstacle nail N. The second accommodating portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. These first accommodating part 2590a and second accommodating part 2590b coincide with the respective obstacle nails N planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker part 2560. located at the site.

This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N accommodated in the first accommodating part 2590a and the second accommodating part 2590b. It is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstructing nail N due to external shocks caused by external forces, etc., and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B flows down in an unintended manner, and also to The balls B can be circulated in a stable state, the movement of the game balls B can be enjoyed, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as described above, since deformation of the obstructing nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating part 2590a and the second accommodating part 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the obstructing nail N. It is possible to reduce the effort required for maintenance of the faulty nail N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided on an attachment boss for attaching the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the attachment hole of the attachment boss. When pasting a decorative or protective sticker on the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, this peeling hole 2590c is used to insert a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side with the sticker pasted. By pressing the seal forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member, a portion of the seal can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2590. The seal can then be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2590 by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion of the seal. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as reapplying the seal during manufacturing and sorting during disposal.

This peeling hole 2590c is provided at the mounting boss, so if an attempt is made to insert a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire through the peeling hole 2590c into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the area where game balls B are distributed. However, when assembled on the game board 5, the rear side is closed with a mounting screw, which prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted and prevents fraudulent acts.

Note that if a sticker is pasted on the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peeling hole 2590c can be made difficult to see from the front by the sticker, and it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the peeling hole 2590c, and also to prevent players from seeing the peeling hole 2590c from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2590c.

Furthermore, if a sticker is pasted on the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, when the game board 5 is assembled, the sticker affixed on the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 will allow the first storage portion 2590a and the second storage portion Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, it is impossible to touch the trouble nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a or the second accommodating portion 2590b from the front. Thereby, it is possible to avoid bending of the faulty nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or of the faulty nail N being bent intentionally. Furthermore, if a sticker is pasted, if the trouble nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b is bent through the sticker, traces of the bending will remain on the sticker. It is possible to easily notice a problem with the faulty nail N.

[9. Third embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. FIG. 175(a) is a perspective view of the front component of the game board in FIG. 174, the game panel, and the panel decoration board in an assembled state, viewed from the front, and FIG. 175(b) is a front component of the game board in FIG. 174. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the assembled gaming panel and panel decorative board, seen from behind. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the front component, the game panel, and the panel decoration board of the game board in FIG. 174, viewed from the front in an exploded state, and FIG. 177 is the front component, the game panel, of the game board in FIG. 174. , and an exploded perspective view of the panel decoration board viewed from behind in an exploded state. In addition, in FIG. 174, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is shown with hatching.

In the game board 5B of the third embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white and opaque with translucency, and a predetermined pattern (not shown) is applied to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. It has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the front sheet 1130 is attached and the panel decoration board 1140 is provided behind the panel board 1110A. A detailed explanation of the parts of the structure will be omitted.

The game board 5B includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped panel decoration including a plate-shaped game panel 1100, a front sheet 1130 affixed to the front of the game panel 1100, and a plurality of LEDs 1141 that can illuminate the game panel 1100 from behind. A substrate 1140 is provided.

The front component 1000 is the same as the front component 1000 of the game board 5 of the first embodiment. This front component 1000 is formed transparent.

The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110A whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a panel plate 1110A that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A and is located on the rear side of the front component 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and a rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface thereof. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel board 1110A. The panel board 1110A of this embodiment is formed to be white and opaque with translucency. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed transparent.

[9-1. Game panel of game board of third embodiment]
Next, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. The game panel 1100 of the game board 5B includes a white opaque flat panel board 1110A whose outer periphery is formed to be slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which has translucency, and a panel board 1110A. 1110A, a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The thickness of the panel board 1110A is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nail N even if it is planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that

The panel board 1110A is at the lowest position within the game area 5a, and a portion corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110A, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

Since the panel board 1110A is milky white and opaque, as shown in FIG. The parts cannot be visually recognized from the front (player side).

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is white and opaque with light-transmitting properties, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201, the back upper front decoration 3310, and the back lower front decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. When a decoration such as 3410 is used as a light-emitting decoration, light from the rear is transmitted through the panel plate 1110A, allowing the player to see the light-emitting decoration of the decoration, and transmitting the emitted light color of the decoration in its original color. It is possible to display a richly colored light emitting effect to the player.

Note that the portion of the panel board 1110A that overlaps with the front component 1000 in the front-rear direction can be seen from the front through the front component 1000 because the front component 1000 is transparent. reference).

In addition, the panel board 1110A has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and back, and is spaced apart in the left and right direction at the upper and lower edges, respectively, and is formed with a thin plate thickness. (See FIG. 176). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is configured to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engagement claw 1125 or the engagement piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

In the panel board 1110A, a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the upper side of the center. The right side and lower side have a wide width that allows a plurality of game balls B to be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width that does not allow a plurality of game balls B to line up.

This panel board 1110A includes, in addition to the opening 1112 and the positioning hole 1113, a nail hole (not shown) for planting the obstacle nail N, and a screw hole for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500. A plurality of holes 1116, positioning holes 1117, etc. are formed. The nail holes, screw holes 1116, and positioning holes 1117 penetrate the panel board 1110A and the front sheet 1130 in the front-rear direction.

To explain in more detail, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment includes a main body part 1151 that is translucent, and a specific part 1152 that is translucent and has a different light transmittance from the main body part 1151. have. In the panel plate 1110A, the main body part 1151 and the specific part 1152 are integrally formed of the same material, and by making the thickness thinner than the main part 1151, the light transmittance of the specific part 1152 is made different. There is.

The identification portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic portion of a picture (not shown) on the front sheet 1130. The identification portion 1152 is formed by a blind hole-shaped recess 1115 that is recessed in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 toward the front, and the front surface is located on the same plane as the front surface of the main body portion 1151. , the rear surface is located forward of the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 (see FIG. 178).

A plurality of specifying parts 1152 of this embodiment are provided in the guide area 2710 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the game panel 1100A is arranged. Specifically, it is provided at the first guidance region 2711 in the guidance region 2710. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration board 1140 are made to emit light, the rear of the guiding region 2710 can be made to emit light, and the first guiding region 2711 can be made to shine brightly by the plurality of specific parts 1152.

The thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within the range of 10% to 80% of the thickness of the main portion 1151. The reason why the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within the above range is that if the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is thinner than the above range, the strength of the specific portion 1152 in the panel board 1110A is reduced. This is because the specific portion 1152 may become uneven due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, or may be damaged due to circulation or collision of the game ball B. Furthermore, if the thickness of the specific part 1152 is thicker than the above range, the light transmittance approaches that of the main part 1151, so even if the rear LED 1141 is emitted, it will not have the same brightness as the main part 1151. This is because there is a possibility that the light emission effect of the light emission effect by the specifying unit 1152 may not be fully exhibited.

Note that the identifying portion 1152 is provided on the panel board 1110A to avoid the obstacle nail N. In other words, the identifying portion 1152 is provided at a location where the obstacle nail N is not planted. It is desirable that the identifying portion 1152 be provided at a certain distance (for example, 1 mm or more) from the site where the faulty nail N is installed. As a result, the specific part 1152, which is thinner than the main body part 1151, is provided avoiding the part where the faulty nail N is planted, so that the part around the root of the faulty nail N in the main body part 1151 becomes thinner. By making the root depth of the faulty nail N relatively shallow, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the holding strength of the faulty nail N.

The panel board 1110A of this embodiment is made of milky white high impact polystyrene (HIPS). HIPS is significantly cheaper than acrylic resin, which is generally used for transparent game boards. Further, in this embodiment, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is set to 20% of the thickness of the main body portion 1151, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152 is set to the thickness of the main body portion 1151. It is set at 40%. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the thickness of the main body portion 1151 is 10 mm, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is 2 mm, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 is 4 mm.

Note that the opaque material having light-transmitting properties in the panel board 1110A preferably has a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to provide luminous decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. In addition, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the members provided at the rear will be easier to recognize, and there is a risk that the effect of concealment will not be sufficiently obtained.

In addition, the panel board 1110A is white as a milky white color (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), but there are "white Munsell value (N 9.5)" and "white Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2/0.5)", "Ubana color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "Ecru color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "Oyster "White Munsell Value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Gray White Munsell Value (10YR 9/0.5)", "White Indigo Munsell Value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", " Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", It may be a white color such as "cherry blossom color Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5)".

Furthermore, although the panel board 1110A is made of high impact polystyrene (HIPS), "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", " It may also be formed from polyethylene, polypropylene, glass, or the like. Further, although the panel board 1110A has a white color due to the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), it may be made white by adding a coloring agent to the transparent material.

In this panel board 1110A, an opening 1112, a positioning hole 1113, etc. are formed by cutting with a front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of a flat base material. To explain in detail, in the panel board 1110A, first, a front sheet 1130 is attached to one side of a flat base material. Next, using an NC router processing machine or the like, the penetrating positioning holes 1113 and 1117 and the screw holes 1116 are formed from the side (front side) to which the front sheet 1130 of the base material is attached. , the engagement step portion 1114 recessed from the front side, etc. are processed. Next, the opening 1112 and the specific portion 1152 are processed from the side of the base material to which the front sheet 1130 is not attached (back side). Finally, the panel board 1110A is completed by processing nail holes (slanted nail holes) for planting the obstacle nails N from the front surface side. Thereafter, using a planting machine, the obstacle nail N is planted into the nail hole.

By the way, when cutting is performed using an end mill or the like with an NC router processing machine, etc., the cutting waste is discharged to the proximal end of the end mill. A force acts in the direction of . Therefore, when cutting is performed with an end mill from the surface side to which the front sheet 1130 is attached, cutting waste is discharged to the side opposite to the base material (panel board 1110A) and force is applied to the front sheet 1130. Therefore, the front sheet 1130 is likely to be rolled up from the base material, and burrs are likely to occur on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the penetrating opening 1112 is cut with an end mill from the back side, cutting waste is discharged to the base material side and force is applied to the front sheet 1130. However, since a force is applied to the front sheet 1130 in a direction that brings it into close contact with the base material, the front sheet 1130 becomes difficult to peel off, and the shearing force on the front sheet 1130 becomes strong, which prevents burrs from forming on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130. It can be made less likely to occur and the appearance can be improved.

Since the specific part 1152 is machined at the same time as the opening 1112 is machined, there is no need to take the trouble to change the base material setup for machining the specific part 1152, resulting in a slight increase in machining time. The specific portion 1152 can be processed using the above method, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

By the way, a drill is used to cut (drill) circular through holes such as part of the positioning hole 1113, the nail hole, the screw hole 1116, and the positioning hole 1117. When cutting with a drill from the unattached back side of the front sheet 1130, a strong force is applied to the front sheet 1130 in the opposite direction to the base material when the hole penetrates, so the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 The surrounding area may peel off from the base material, or burrs may occur on the cut end surface. In contrast, in this embodiment, cutting (drilling) of a part of the positioning hole 1113, the nail hole, the screw hole 1116, the positioning hole 1117, etc. is performed from the surface side. The cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 can be made less likely to generate burrs, and the appearance can be improved.

Note that the positioning hole 1113 and the engagement step 1114 are machined from the surface side, but when assembled on the game board 5B, they are located outside the game area 5a and cannot be visually recognized from the player side. Therefore, even if some burrs occur on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, the appearance will not deteriorate. In addition, since the obstructive nail N, screw, etc. is inserted into the nail hole or screw hole 1116 from the surface side, even if a burr is formed on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, the burr may be inserted into the obstructive nail N, screw, etc. As a result, it will be pushed into the hole, and the appearance will not deteriorate. Furthermore, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque, even if the burr on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 is pushed into the hole, the opaque panel plate 1110A can make it invisible from the outside, improving the appearance. I can do it.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110A, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110A (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1127 (see FIG. 176) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110A and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008 (see FIG. 175(b) and FIG. 177).

The panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins 1124 that protrude forward from the holding step 1127 and are respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110A, and a plurality of protruding pins 1124 that are arranged outside the holding step 1127. A plurality of engagement claws 1125 elastically engage with engagement step portions 1114 on the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110A, and a plurality of engagement claws 1125 protrude upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1127. It includes a pair of engagement pieces 1126 that engage with two engagement steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110, respectively.

The panel holder 1120 is constructed by engaging the engagement step part 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110A with the engagement piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backwards. By elastically engaging the engagement step portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engagement claw 1125, the panel plate 1110A can be removably attached while being accommodated in the holding step portion 1127. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110A is positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120.

In the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is provided in the front is white and opaque, so the end face of the opening 1112 where the center accessory 2500 etc. are attached. is white in color. Therefore, compared to the case where plywood is used for the game panel, the end face of the opening 1112 can be made less noticeable, and the end face can be finished neatly, the end face can be decorated, and the center accessory that can be attached to the opening 1112 can be made neatly. 2500 etc., there is no need to hide the end face, and the cost of the game panel 1100 can be reduced. Further, even if the center accessory 2500 etc. attached to the opening 1112 are made of a transparent material, the end face of the opening 1112 is not noticeable, so the center accessory 2500 etc. can be made of a transparent material.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white and opaque, a white decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided on the end face of the opening 1112 where the center accessory 2500 is attached. , it is possible to create an illusion that the decorative board is integrated with the end surface of the opening 1112, making the decorative board less noticeable, and by emitting light from the LED of the decorative board, the panel board 1110A can be It is possible to cause the center accessory 2500 to emit light or to cause the center side of the center accessory 2500 to emit light.

[9-2. Front sheet of game board of third embodiment]
Next, the front sheet 1130 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be explained. The front sheet 1130 is attached to the entire front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 178, etc.). The front sheet 1130 is formed of a synthetic resin film with excellent wear resistance and a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. Although not shown, a predetermined pattern is printed on the front sheet 1130. The front sheet 1130 is formed so that a part of the pattern shines brightly through the panel board 1110A by causing the LED 1141 of the panel decorative board 1140 to emit light.

Although not shown, the pattern on the front sheet 1130 has a characteristic part, and a specific part 1152 of the panel board 1110A is provided behind the characteristic part. Thereby, the characteristic part of the picture can be made to shine brighter than other parts via the specifying section 1152.

Note that the front sheet 1130 (the pattern thereof) may have a transparent part, an opaque and translucent part, or a non-transparent part. It's okay. For example, in the front sheet 1130, if a portion corresponding to the specific portion 1152 is surrounded by an opaque (low translucent) portion, the visual contrast can be increased, and the specific portion 1152 You can make the corresponding areas shine brighter.

The materials of the front sheet 1130 in this embodiment include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", " Examples include "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

This front sheet 1130 is cut together with the base material of the panel board 1110A before processing while being attached to the base material.

According to the front sheet 1130 of this embodiment, since it is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel board 1110A from the game balls B circulating in the gaming area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to use an inexpensive material with low wear resistance as the material for the panel board 1110A, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[9-3. Panel decoration board of game board of third embodiment]
Next, the panel decoration board 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. The panel decoration board 1140 is provided behind the part of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged, that is, the part where the guide area 2710 is provided in front. The panel decoration board 1140 has a white solder resist applied to the front and rear surfaces, so that the front and rear surfaces are white. A plurality of LEDs 1141 are mounted on the front surface of the panel decoration board 1140. The plurality of LEDs 1141 are composed of a first LED 1141a located behind the identification portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A, and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151.

The plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration board 1140 are high-intensity, full-color LEDs. Note that the first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 may be a narrow-angle LED with a narrow irradiation range, and the second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151 may be a wide-angle LED with a wide irradiation range. .

Although not shown, the rear surface of the panel decoration board 1140 is provided with a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for causing the plurality of LEDs 1141 to emit light, and the like.

When the second LED 1141b is made to emit light, the panel decoration board 1140 can make the area behind the second guiding region 2712 in the main body part 1151 of the panel board 1110A brightly emit light, and when the first LED 1141a is made to emit light, the panel board 1110A can be made to emit light. A region behind the first guidance region 2711 in can be caused to emit light so as to shine brighter than the second guidance region 2712 via the specific portion 1152.

[9-4. Light emitting effect using the game panel and panel decoration board of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the light emitting effect by the game panel 1100 and the panel decoration board 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 schematically shows the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration board, and (a1) is an explanatory diagram seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration board turned off, (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing (a1) in cross section, (b1) of (b) is an explanatory diagram seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration board turned on, and (b2) is ( b1) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section. In FIG. 178, for convenience, the color of the white (milky white) material of the panel board 1110A is dark gray, the amount of light is indicated by shading, and the pattern of the front sheet 1130 is omitted.

In the game board 5B of this embodiment, a translucent front sheet 1130 is attached to the front surface of a translucent white (here, milky white) opaque panel plate 1110A. A panel decoration board 1140 on which a plurality of LEDs 1141 are mounted on the front surface is provided behind 1110A. The panel board 1110A includes a main body portion 1151 having a predetermined thickness and a plurality of specific portions 1152 that are thinner than the main body portion 1151. The identification portion 1152 is formed by machining a blind hole-like recess 1115 into the main body portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) so as to be recessed in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface toward the front. Therefore, the front surface of the identifying portion 1152 is on the same plane as the front surface of the main body portion 1151.

The panel decoration substrate 1140 has a white solder resist coating applied to the front and rear surfaces. The plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative board 1140 are composed of a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151 of the panel board 1110A, and a first LED 1141a located behind the identification portion 1152.

In the normal state in which the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative board 1140 are not emitted, the entire front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) has uniform brightness as shown in FIG. 178(a). Therefore, the identifying portion 1152 and the panel decoration board 1140 provided at the rear are not visible from the player's side in front.

Since the entire inside of this panel board 1110A is uniformly opaque, the amount of light incident from the rear surface is attenuated (decreased) as it moves forward. In the panel board 1110A, the main body part 1151 and the specific part 1152 are made of the same opaque material, and the thickness of the specific part 1152 is different from the thickness of the main part 1151. 1152, the amount of attenuation of the amount of light incident from the rear surface until it is radiated forward from the front surface is different, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 and the light transmittance of the main body portion 1151 are different.

From this normal state, when the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration board 1140 are made to emit light as the game progresses, the light emitted forward from the LEDs 1141 is directed to the rear surface of the panel board 1110A (the main body part 1151 and the specific part 1152). The light is irradiated and enters the light-transmitting interior.

The light emitted forward from the second LED 1141b provided at the rear of the thick main body part 1151 enters the inside from the rear surface of the main body part 1151 while spreading in a truncated cone shape, and further emitted before reaching the front surface. As the light spreads, the amount of light is attenuated relatively largely by the opaque material (see (b2) in FIG. 178(b)). As a result, the area in front of the second LED 1141b on the front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) has a circular shape with a relatively large diameter and emits brighter light than other areas (see FIG. 178(b)). b1)).

On the other hand, the light emitted forward from the first LED 1141a provided at the rear of the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main body portion 1151, is irradiated onto the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 while spreading in a truncated cone shape. However, the light spreading from the first LED 1141a is diffusely reflected on the inner surface of the concave portion 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, and is irradiated onto the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 while the spread is suppressed. Therefore, in the identifying section 1152, even though the distance from the rear surface to the LED 1141 (first LED 1141a) is longer than the distance from the rear surface of the main body section 1151 to the LED 1141 (second LED 1141b), the rear surface of the identifying section 1152 is not illuminated. The amount of light radiated onto the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 is almost the same as the amount of light irradiated onto the rear surface of the main body portion 1151.

The light that enters the interior from the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 will attenuate (decrease) in light intensity as it moves toward the front, but because the light is thin, the light will be shaped like a truncated cone before reaching the front surface. The spread range is narrow, and attenuation of the amount of light due to the opaque material is relatively small (see (b2) in FIG. 178(b)). As a result, the portion in front of the first LED 1141a (specific portion 1152) on the front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) has a circular shape with a smaller diameter than the portion in front of the second LED 1141b, and the portion in front of the second LED 1141b It emits light that shines brighter than the other parts (see (b1) in FIG. 178(b)). In this embodiment, the specific portion 1152 emits light so that it shines brightly with the same brightness as when the panel board 1110A is made transparent.

For this reason, in the pattern (not shown) of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A, by providing a specific part 1152 behind a characteristic part of the pattern, the panel decorative board By emitting light from the first LED 1141a of 1140, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which a characteristic part of the pattern shines brightly. As a result, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Since it can suggest the arrival of an opportunity, it can make the player think that something good will happen, and it can increase the player's expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest. I can do it.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is applied as a pattern on the front sheet 1130, and a specific part 1152 is placed behind a characteristic part of the character (e.g., eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.). When the first LED 1141a at the rear of the specific part 1152 is provided and the light is emitted forward, the specific part 1152 can make the characteristic parts of the character shine brightly, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is also possible to make the players think that something good is going to happen to them, increasing their expectations for the game and suppressing a decline in interest. can be done.

According to this embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, which has a game area 5a in front where game balls B circulate and has a front sheet 1130 with a predetermined pattern attached to the front side, is transparent. The main body part 1151 is white in color and has a specific part 1152 that has higher light transmittance than the main body part 1151 and is provided in a part corresponding to the pattern on the front sheet 1130. Accordingly, when the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body part 1151 in the panel decoration board 1140 is made to emit light, the light from the second LED 1141b is diffused within the main body part 1151, making the pattern on the front sheet 1130 brightly illuminated. In addition, when the first LED 1141a provided at the rear of the specific portion 1152 is made to emit light, the amount of light traveling in a straight line is reduced because the light transmittance is higher than that of the main portion 1151. Therefore, the part of the picture corresponding to the specific part 1152 can be made to shine brighter than other parts, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or a transparent board as the game panel 1100, the illumination of the pattern on the front sheet 1130 allows the inside of the game area 5a to be displayed in various ways that have never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 that emits light by itself can be shown to the players, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players. A part of the pattern shines brightly, indicating to the player that an opportunity has arrived, making the player think that something good is about to happen, and increasing the player's ability to play. It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

[9-5. Different specific part of the embodiment in the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, another embodiment of the specifying section 1152 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 to 181. FIG. 179(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the game panel in a perspective view in which a specifying section having a different form from that of FIG. 178 is provided, and FIG. (c) is an explanatory diagram showing, in a perspective view, a part of the game panel provided with the game panel; FIG. FIG. 180(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel provided with specific parts with different thicknesses together with a panel decoration board, and FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel with a panel decoration board, and (c) is a cross section of a game panel in which a specific part with a light-shielding coating is provided on the side surface of a blind hole-shaped recessed part, together with a panel decoration board. (d) is an explanatory view showing a game panel in cross section along with a panel decoration board, in which a specific part in which a light-shielding sleeve is provided in a blind hole-like recess is provided. FIG. 181(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel in which a specific part formed by a groove-shaped recess is provided together with a panel decoration board, and FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel with a panel decoration board, and (c) is a panel decoration of a game panel in which a specific part filled with a transparent material is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess from the rear surface of the game panel. It is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section together with a board, and (d) shows a cross section together with a panel decoration board of a game panel in which a specific part filled with a transparent material is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess from the front side of the game panel. It is a diagram.

First, in the embodiment of FIG. 179(a), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), a specific portion 1152 is formed by a triangular prism-shaped blind hole-shaped recess 1115 formed in a main body portion 1151. In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape when viewed from the front) of the identifying portion 1152 is triangular. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative board 1140 provided at the rear is made to emit light, the specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A can be made to emit light in a bright triangular shape.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 179(b), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), a specific portion 1152 is formed by a concave portion 1115 of a star-shaped columnar blind hole formed in the main body portion 1151. In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape when viewed from the front) of the identifying portion 1152 is star-shaped. Thereby, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative board 1140 provided at the rear is made to emit light, the specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A can be made to emit light so as to shine brightly in a star shape.

In the embodiments of FIGS. 179(a) and (b), the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shown to be triangular or star-shaped; however, it is not limited to this, and may be "elliptical" or "quadrangular". , "pentagon," "hexagon," "polygon," "heart shape," "indeterminate shape," "shape of a predetermined character or item," "shape of a character such as a logo," and the like.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 179(c), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), a specific portion 1152 is formed by a hexagonal cylindrical blind hole-shaped recess 1115 formed in the main body portion 1151. In other words, the specific portion 1152 is formed by a groove-shaped recess 1115 with a constant width extending along the outer periphery of the hexagon. In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape when viewed from the front) of the identifying portion 1152 has an annular hexagonal shape. Thereby, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration board 1140 provided at the rear is made to emit light, the specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A can be made to emit light so as to shine brightly in an annular hexagonal shape. Note that one first LED 1141a may be provided for one specific portion 1152 (recessed portion 1115), or a plurality of first LEDs 1141a may be provided depending on the size and shape of the specific portion 1152.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 179(c), the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is an annular hexagonal shape, but the shape is not limited to this, and may be "annular circular" or "annular elliptical". , "ring triangle", "ring square", "ring pentagon", "ring polygon", "ring star shape", "ring heart shape", "ring irregular shape", "predetermined It may also be the shape of the outer periphery of a character or item, the shape of the outer periphery of a character such as a logo, etc.

Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 179(c), the specific portion 1152 is formed by extending a groove of a constant width in an annular shape, but the specific portion 1152 is not limited to this, and may extend in a straight line or a curved shape. The specific portion 1152 may be formed by the protruding groove.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 179, since the identifying portion 1152 has various shapes, the front surface of the game panel 1100 (front sheet 1130) can be The region in front of the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine brightly in the same shape as the rear surface of the specific portion 1152. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players, to strongly attract the attention of the players, and to make the players think that something good will happen to them. , it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Specifically, for example, a pattern of a predetermined character is applied to the front sheet 1130, a groove is provided in the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 along the outer periphery of the character to form a specific part 1152, and the rear panel When the first LED 1141a of the decorative board 1140 is made to emit light, the outer periphery of the character can be made to shine brightly, and a light emitting effect that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 180(a), the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is made different in one panel board 1110A. As a result, as the specific portion 1152 becomes thicker, the light transmittance decreases, so even if the first LED 1141a provided at the rear emits light with the same brightness, the thicker the specific portion 1152 becomes, the lower the brightness of the front surface of the specific portion 1152 becomes. Get dark. Therefore, since the front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) emits light with various brightnesses, it is possible to present a more diverse range of light emitting effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored. .

Furthermore, when forming the specific portion 1152 by cutting, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed by simply changing the cutting program. Alternatively, when forming the specific part 1152 (gaming panel 1100) by injection molding, the thickness of the specific part 1152 can be easily changed by simply changing the amount of protrusion of the core pin or mandrel for forming the specific part 1152. I can do it. Therefore, since it is possible to easily change the thickness of the specific portion 1152, it is possible to easily respond to design changes and model changes, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. At the same time, it is possible to easily provide the specifying section 1152 with a higher production effect, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 180(b), the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is formed into a conical shape that is thinnest at the center. As a result, the center of the specific portion 1152 is the thinnest, so when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration board 1140 is made to emit light, a light emitting effect is created in which the center shines brightest in the area in front of the specific portion 1152 on the panel board 1110A. It can be shown to players.

Furthermore, since the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is conical, the reduction in strength of the panel board 1110A due to the formation of the recessed portion 1115 is suppressed, compared to a case where the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is made thinner overall. be able to. Thereby, the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine brighter while maintaining the strength of the panel board 1110A. Further, since the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is conical, it can be easily machined with a drill having a conical tip, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180(b), a conical shape with the center located in front of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be shaped like a ring, and can be illuminated in an annular shape by the light from the first LED 1141a.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 may be shaped into a "pyramid shape," "a relief shape imitating a character, item, logo, etc.," "geometric pattern shape," or the like. If the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is made into a relief shape or a geometric pattern, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 will vary depending on the region so as to follow the shape of the rear surface, so the light transmittance will vary depending on the region of the specific portion 1152. Due to the difference, the light from the first LED 1141a makes it possible to see a light shade in front of the specific part 1152 on the panel board 1110A in accordance with the shape of the rear surface of the specific part 1152. 1130), a predetermined character, pattern, etc. can be projected on the front surface of the player, and a light emitting effect that can strongly attract the attention of the players can be provided.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 180(c), a light-shielding coating 1153 is provided on the side surface of a blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming a specific portion 1152. The coating 1153 is formed by applying a highly light-shielding paint or pasting a highly light-shielding film or metal foil. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 180(d), a light-shielding sleeve 1154 is provided (inserted) in a blind hole-shaped recess 1115. The sleeve 1154 is made of highly light-shielding synthetic resin, paper, wood, metal, or the like. The sleeve 1154 is attached to the recess 1115 by press fitting or adhesive. Alternatively, the sleeve 1154 is provided by insert molding or two-color molding when the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) is injection molded.

According to the embodiments of FIGS. 180(c) and (d), when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative board 1140 provided behind the specific portion 1152 is made to emit light, the specific portion of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) Since only the part in front of 1152 can be brightly illuminated, the decoration effect and performance effect by the brightness of the part can be surely exhibited, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

Specifically, in the panel board 1110A, the side surface of the recessed part 1115 forming the specific part 1152 is formed by the main body part 1151 having translucency. When the light from the first LED 1141a is irradiated onto the side surface of the recessed portion 1115, a portion of the irradiated light will enter the main body portion 1151, and the light that has entered the main body portion 1151 will cause the panel board 1110A to The area around the specific part 1152 in the main body part 1151 of will shine brightly. Therefore, since the area around the specific part 1152 in the main body part 1151 lights up together with the specific part 1152, the shape of the specific part 1152 may become unclear, or a part of the pattern on the front sheet 1130 that does not correspond to the specific part 1152 may emit light. By doing so, there is a possibility that the effect of producing light emission by the specifying unit 1152 may be reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the coating 1153 and sleeve 1154 with high light-shielding properties are provided on the side surfaces of the recessed portion 1115 forming the specific portion 1152, light is not incident into the main body portion 1151 from the side surfaces. This can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the area around the specific part 1152 in the main body part 1151 from shining due to the light from the first LED 1141a behind the specific part 1152, and it is possible to make only the specific part 1152 shine brightly. It is possible to reliably exhibit the performance effect of the brilliance of the specific part 1152, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Note that the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 may be made of materials with high light reflectance. As a result, the light from the first LED 1141a can be diffusely reflected by the inner surface of the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 and guided forward, so that the light emitted forward from the first LED 1141a can be diffused and guided forward. Most of the light can be irradiated onto the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, and the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine more brightly.

Further, in the embodiments of FIGS. 180(c) and (d), a coating 1153 and a sleeve 1154 are provided on the side surface of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a coating 1153 or a sleeve 1154 may be provided on the side surface of the groove-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181(a), a second LED 1141b is provided at the rear of the main body part 1151 between two specific parts 1152 formed by a groove-shaped recess 1115. As a result, the first LED 1141a provided at the rear of the specific portion 1152 can emit light to brightly illuminate the portion of the specific portion 1152 (range a). By emitting light from the second LED 1141b provided behind the area (range b) between the parts (range b), only the area sandwiched by the specific part 1152 (range b) can be illuminated brightly, and the boundary between the brightness and darkness of the light is clearly defined. A light emitting effect can be shown to the player.

In detail, in the panel board 1110A, since the main body part 1151 has translucency, when light from the second LED 1141b provided at the rear enters the inside from the rear surface of the main body part 1151, the light is transmitted. The light is also diffused in the direction along the front surface of the panel board 1110A. However, if the panel board 1110A has a groove-shaped recess 1115 to form the specific portion 1152, the light is Therefore, light is not diffused beyond the specific portion 1152 toward the main body portion 1151 on the opposite side. For this reason, in FIG. 181(a), when the second LED 1141b is made to emit light, only the area sandwiched by the specific part 1152 (range b) can be made to emit bright light, and the area outside the specific part 1152 can be made to emit light brightly. You can darken the area.

Therefore, for example, if the specific portion 1152 formed by a groove is provided along the outer periphery of a characteristic character, etc. in the pattern of the front sheet 1130, the specific portion 1152 formed by a groove may be provided along the outer periphery of a characteristic character or the like in the pattern of the front sheet 1130. The light from the second LED 1141b makes it possible to make only the character glow brightly while keeping the parts outside of the character dark, and the light from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific part 1152 illuminates the outer periphery of the character. You can make it shine. This makes it possible to make the character stand out and strongly attract the attention of the player, and by appropriately setting the light emitting pattern of the first LED 1141a and the second LED 1141b, the player can enjoy a variety of light emitting effects. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be displayed in a realistic manner and that can entertain players.

In the embodiment of FIG. 181(b), a board accommodating recess 1155 recessed forward is provided on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A), and a panel decorative board 1140 is accommodated in the board accommodating recess 1155. This is what I did. As a result, the rear surface of the panel decorative board 1140 can be positioned in front of the rear surface of the panel board 1110A, making it easier to secure a space behind the panel board 1110A, and the decorative body of the back unit 3000 The pachinko machine 1 can present a performance with a higher performance effect by relatively increasing the size and the like.

In addition, by housing the panel decorative board 1140 in the board accommodation recess 1155, the first LED 1141a provided at the rear of the specific part 1152 can be brought closer to the rear surface of the specific part 1152, so that the specific part 1152 can be made closer to the rear surface of the specific part 1152. It can be made to shine brightly.

In the embodiments of FIGS. 181(c) and (d), a recess 1115 such as a blind hole or groove for forming a specific portion 1152 is filled with a transparent filling portion 1156. The filling portion 1156 may be formed by forming the specific portion 1152 using the recess 1115 and then providing a filling portion 1156 having the same shape as the recess 1115 by press-fitting or bonding. Alternatively, when injection molding the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A), the filling portion 1156 may be provided by insert molding or two-color molding. According to this embodiment, the filling portion 1156 allows the panel plate 1110A to have a constant thickness, and compared to the case where the hollow recess 1115 is formed, the strength and rigidity of the panel plate 1110A can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

More specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181(d), the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is located behind the front surface of the panel board 1110A, and the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel board 1110A. , a recess 1115 such as a blind hole or groove in front of the specific portion 1152 is filled with a filling portion 1156 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel board 1110A are on the same plane. Thereby, the surface of the panel board 1110A can be made into a flat surface without unevenness, and the front sheet 1130 can be pasted on the front surface of the panel board 1110A in good condition, and the surface through which the game balls B circulate. can be a flat surface.

In addition, in the panel board 1110A, the front surface of the specifying part 1152 may be located behind the front surface of the panel board 1110A, and the rear surface of the specifying part 1152 may be located in front of the rear surface of the panel board 1110A. That is, the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main body portion 1151, may be provided at an intermediate portion in the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (main body portion 1151). In this case, it is desirable to fill at least a portion in front of the specific portion 1152 with the filling portion 1156 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel board 1110A are on the same plane. Thereby, the front surface of the panel board 1110A can be made flat, and the front sheet 1130 can be attached in a good condition without floating.

[9-6. Game panel of different embodiment in game board of third embodiment]
Next, in the game board 5B of the third embodiment, a game panel 1100A according to a different embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration board whose thicknesses are changed, and FIG. 182(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a different relationship from that in FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182 shows a portion where the thickness of the game panel 1100A changes. The game panel 1100A of this embodiment includes a main body part 1151 having a predetermined thickness, and a specific part 1152 that is thinner than the main part 1151 and has increased light transmittance. At the rear of the game panel 1100A, a first LED 1141a located behind the identification section 1152 and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body section 1151 (not shown in FIG. 182) are mounted on the front surface. A panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided.

The game panel 1100A of the present embodiment has a thicker plate at a portion where a plurality of obstacle nails N are installed (for example, a portion where a game area 5a is provided in the front), and a thinner plate at other portions. ing. Thereby, in the game panel 1100A, it is possible to reduce the weight while maintaining the holding strength of the obstacle nail N. In addition, by forming the game panel 1100A of this embodiment by injection molding, the amount of synthetic resin required for the game panel 1100A can be reduced compared to the case where the entire thickness is formed with a constant thickness. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182(a), the panel decoration board 1140 extends to the rear of the region where the thickness of the game panel 1100A changes, and the panel decoration board 1140 extends behind the region where the thickness of the game panel 1100A changes. An LED 1141c that can emit light forward is provided. As a result, when the LED 1141c is made to emit light, the portion in front of the portion where the plate thickness changes on the front surface of the game panel 1100A will emit light such that it becomes brighter toward the left in the paper. That is, the light from the LED 1141c can cause the peripheral edge of the game area 5a to emit light in an annular manner so that it becomes brighter toward the outside. For this reason, in this embodiment, the portion of the game panel 1100A where the thickness changes is a type of specific portion 1152.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 182(a), the portion where the board thickness changes is the portion on the periphery of the game area 5a, but this is not limiting. The plate thickness may be changed by slanting the end face of the opening 1112 that penetrates from front to back, and the LED 1141c may be provided behind it.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182(b), a portion of the game panel 1100A where the thickness changes in a direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100A is located outside of the portion where the thickness of the game panel 1100A changes. A second panel decorative substrate 1145 is provided on which an LED 1146 capable of emitting light is mounted. As a result, when the LED 1146 is made to emit light, light is irradiated along the front surface of the game panel 1100A to the area where the board thickness changes, and the light that enters the inside of the game panel 1100A from that area is By diffusing, it is possible to cause the area in front of the area where the thickness of the game panel 1100A changes and the area inside thereof to emit light darker than in the embodiment of FIG. 182(a). Therefore, for example, when the portion where the board thickness changes is the periphery of the gaming area 5a, the light from the LED 1146 can be emitted in an annular shape with a constant width inward from the periphery of the gaming area 5a.

[9-7. Features of game board of third embodiment]
Next, the main features of the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177 and the like. As described above, the game board 5B of the third embodiment includes the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and having the game area 5a in front, and the game panel 1100. It includes a front sheet 1130 that is attached to the front surface and has a predetermined pattern on it, and a panel decoration board 1140 that can irradiate light onto the game panel 1100 from behind.

The game panel 1100 includes a white opaque flat panel board 1110A in which a game area 5a is provided at the front and a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted therein, and the panel board 1110A is detachably held from the front. It consists of a transparent frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. The panel plate 1110A includes a main body portion 1151 having a light-transmitting property and a specific portion 1152 having a higher light transmittance than the main body portion 1151. The specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A is provided behind a characteristic portion of the not-illustrated pattern of the front sheet 1130.

The panel decoration board 1140 is provided at a position between the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A and the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the front-rear direction. The panel decorative substrate 1140 has white surfaces (front and rear surfaces). A plurality of LEDs 1141 capable of emitting light forward are mounted on the front surface of the panel decoration board 1140. The plurality of LEDs 1141 are composed of a first LED 1141a located behind the identification portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A, and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151.

According to the game board 5B of this embodiment, according to the progress of the game (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005), When the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body part 1151 of the panel board 1110A in the panel decoration board 1140 is made to emit light, the light from the second LED 1141b is diffused within the main body part 1151, making the pattern on the front sheet 1130 shine brightly. In addition, when the first LED 1141a provided at the rear of the specific portion 1152 emits light, the amount of light traveling straight can be reduced because the light transmittance is higher than that of the main portion 1151. Since the number increases, the part of the picture corresponding to the specific part 1152 can be made to shine brighter than other parts, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Therefore, compared to the conventional pachinko machine 1 that uses plywood or a transparent board as a game panel, because the pattern on the front sheet 1130 shines, the inside of the game area 5a can be displayed in various ways that have never been seen before. Since it is possible to show the pachinko machine 1 that emits light by itself with brightness to the players, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players. , a part of the picture shines brightly, indicating to the player that an opportunity has arrived, making the player think that something good is about to happen. It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is applied as a pattern on the front sheet 1130, and a specific part 1152 is placed behind a characteristic part of the character (e.g., eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.). In the case where the specific part 1152 is provided, when light is emitted from the rear to the front of the specific part 1152, the specific part 1152 can make the characteristic parts of the character shine brightly, giving a strong impact to the player. , it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is also possible to make the players think that something good is going to happen to them, and to increase their expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest. I can do it.

In addition, a front sheet 1130 with a pattern is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A, and a specific part 1152 is formed by recessing the panel board 1110A (main body part 1151) from the rear, so that the game The identification portion 1152 of the panel 1100 is not visible from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 is irradiated with light by the light emitted from the LED 1141 provided on the panel decoration board 1140, until a light emitting effect in which the main body part 1151 and the specific part 1152 shine with different brightness is executed. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the specific part 1152, it is possible to increase the impact of the execution of the light emitting effect (light emitting decoration) on the game panel 1100 and to surprise the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by making the player think that something good will happen to the player.

In addition, since the main body part 1151 of the panel board 1110A is white and opaque, and the specific part 1152 is not visible from the front, the front surface of the panel board 1110A has a uniform white color, so that the gaming area 5a The interior can be made to appear brighter, and the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a can be easily seen. Since the color of the front unit 2000) can be made relatively conspicuous, the decorative effect of the decoration can be strongly exhibited, and it has a high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the players. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided. Furthermore, as described above, since the front surface of the panel board 1110A is uniformly white, the coloring of the pattern applied to the front sheet 1130 can be improved, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be reliably exhibited. be able to.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is white and opaque, and the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration board 1140 are full-color LEDs, the main body of the panel board 1110A is It becomes possible to make the part 1151 and the specific part 1152 emit light in various colors, and it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect of a variety of colors, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and also making it possible to It is possible to suggest the level of expectation for the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white and opaque, the inside of the game area 5a provided in front can be made to appear brighter, making it easier to see the game balls B circulating inside the game area 5a. At the same time, it is possible to make the color of the decoration of the table unit 2000 provided in the pachinko machine 1 relatively noticeable, so that the decorative effect of the decoration can be strongly exhibited, and the player's interest is strongly increased. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract people. Furthermore, as described above, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white, the coloring of the pattern on the front sheet 1130 attached to the front can be improved, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be ensured. can be demonstrated.

In addition, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A is made thinner than the main portion 1151 to vary the light transmittance, it is possible to create a recess such as a blind hole or groove with respect to the main portion 1151. By forming the specific portions 1115 and having different thicknesses, specific portions 1152 having different light transmittances can be easily provided. As a result, the identifying portion 1152 can be made of the same material as the main body portion 1151, and compared to the case where the identifying portion 1152 with different light transmittance is inserted into the main body portion 1151, it is possible to make the identifying portion 1152 be made of the same material as the main body portion 1151. Cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, a recess 1115 is formed in the main body part 1151 and the thickness is varied to provide a specific part 1152 with different light transmittance. Since it is made of the same material as the portion 1151, the cost of the game panel 1100 can be reduced compared to the case where specific portions with different light transmittances are inserted into the main body portion. Additionally, since the specific portion 1152 is formed by cutting, the thickness (light transmittance), shape, and position of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed by simply changing the cutting program. , it is possible to easily respond to design changes and model changes, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and it is also possible to easily provide the specifying section 1152 with a higher production effect, so that the game It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Moreover, when the specific part 1152 of the panel board 1110A is formed by cutting, a nail hole (prepared hole) for planting the obstacle nail N in the panel board 1110A, and a center accessory in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A). 2500 or the lower right unit 2400 can be cut at the same time as the opening 1112 penetrating the front and back for attaching the front unit 2000 and the lower right unit 2400. As a result, there is no need to take the trouble to change the setup in order to cut the specific part 1152, and the specific part 1152 can be machined with a slight increase in processing time, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A is white and opaque, compared to a case where the panel board is transparent, even if the front sheet 1130 has a transparent part in the pattern, it will not be embedded in the panel board 1110A. The roots of the plurality of obstacle nails N (portions inserted into the panel board 1110A) can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a can be improved.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is white and opaque, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) and the back lower front production unit 3400 A part of the back lower front decorative body 3410 can be made invisible from the front (player side). Then, when the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 etc. provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A are decorated with light, the light from the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 etc. is transmitted forward through the panel board 1110A having translucency. Therefore, the panel board 1110A can be partially decorated with light emission, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the back-front peripheral edge decoration 3201 and the like provided at the rear. In this case, since the panel plate 1110A is white, when the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 etc. provided at the rear of the panel plate 1110A are decorated with light, it is possible to transmit the light to the front with the same color. To allow players to enjoy colorful light-emitting performances, to present a variety of light-emitting performances to players, to make it difficult for players to get bored, and to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white and opaque, a part of the back and front decoration body 3410 of the back and front presentation unit 3400 provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A is set to the front (the player Therefore, when the back lower front decorative body 3410 is raised to the area behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel board 1110A, the back lower front decorative body can be hidden through the opening 1112. 3410 can be made visible from the front, allowing the player to see a movable effect in which a part of the back/lower front decorative body 3410 is hidden or the whole part being visible, as well as allowing the player to see a variety of movable effects. This makes it possible to make it difficult for players to get bored and to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A is white and opaque, and the surface of the rear panel decorative board 1140 is white, the panel decorative board 1140 can be made difficult to see through the panel board 1110A, and the gaming panel 1100 ( In addition, the white panel decorative board 1140 can reflect light from the LED 1141 and the panel board 1110A side forward, and the panel board 1110A (inside the front sheet 1130) can be made to emit brighter light.

In addition, the panel board 1110A is made of an opaque material (synthetic resin), and a front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A protects the panel board 1110A from the game balls B circulating within the gaming area 5a. Therefore, compared to the case where the panel plate 1110A is transparent, an inexpensive synthetic resin with a low grade of wear resistance (here, high impact polystyrene) is used as the material for the panel plate 1110A. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is white and opaque, and the front sheet 1130 has a pattern, when the player looks inside the gaming area 5a, it becomes easier to focus on the front side of the panel board 1110A. , just by looking at the panel board 1110A, the focus will naturally be on the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a. At this time, as described above, the panel board 1110A (the main body part 1151 and the specific part 1152) becomes self-luminous due to the light from the LED 1141 of the panel decoration board 1140, so that the interior of the gaming area 5a is Since the circulating game balls B can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from behind, the game balls B circulating within the gaming area 5a can be easily recognized, and the movement of the game balls B can be easily recognized. It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the specific part 1152 of the panel board 1110A is made thinner than the main body part 1151, when the second LED 1141b of the panel decorative board 1140 provided behind the main body part 1151 emits light, the light is diffused within the main body part 1151. The light emitted from the second LED 1141b is blocked from being diffused by the part recessed to form the specific part 1152, so that only the part in front of the second LED 1141b in the main part 1151 can emit light. Become. Therefore, for example, when an annular groove is formed in the main body part 1151 and the part of the groove is used as the specific part 1152, the second When the LED 1141b is made to emit light, only the part inside the specific part 1152 can be caused to emit light brightly, and the part outside the specific part 1152 can be made dark. In other words, depending on the shape of the specific portion 1152 and the arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 1141 on the panel decorative board 1140, it is possible to emit light from only an arbitrary portion of the main body portion 1151, and the pachinko machine 1 is able to perform more diverse lighting effects. can be provided.

In addition, since the identifying portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A is made thinner than the main body portion 1151, when the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 is formed into a three-dimensional relief shape imitating a predetermined character, item, logo, etc. Since the thickness of the portion 1152 differs to follow the shape of the rear surface, when the first LED 1141a provided at the rear of the specific portion 1152 on the panel decorative board 1140 is emitted, light is transmitted through the specific portion 1152. Due to the different degrees of intensity, when viewed from the front (player side), light with shading along the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 can be seen, and a predetermined light is emitted from the first LED 1141a on the front surface of the panel board 1110A. It is possible to provide a light emitting effect that can project characters and the like and strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A is formed by being recessed from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151, the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is on the same plane as the front surface of the main body portion 1151. The game balls B can be smoothly circulated within the game area 5a, allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the front component 1000 is transparent, the portion of the front component 1000 that overlaps the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction also has the pattern of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. It is possible to decorate the panel board 1110A and show the light emission of the panel board 1110A to the player. In other words, since the front component 1000 is transparent, the entire panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) can be viewed from the player side, and a wider area can be decorated (see FIG. 174).

Further, since the panel board 1110A in the game panel 1100 is made opaque, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to hide the wiring and the like behind the panel board 1110A. In other words, in order to improve the appearance of a transparent panel board, it is necessary to hide the wiring behind the panel board, but in this embodiment, since the panel board 1110A is opaque, it is necessary to hide the wiring behind the panel board 1110A. There is no need to hide the wiring, etc. As a result, compared to the case where the game panel (panel board) is made transparent, it is necessary to separately provide a member to hide the wiring etc. behind the panel board 1110A and devise ways to route the wiring etc. so that it is difficult to see. There is no need to do so, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the panel board 1110A is provided with a plurality of recesses 1115, the weight of the panel board 1110A can be reduced by the plurality of recesses 1115, and the game board 5 can be made lighter. In addition, the panel board 1110A may be provided with a recess 1115 for light weight, in addition to the light emitting effect due to the difference in light transmittance as described above, which further reduces the weight of the game board 5 (panel board 1110A). be able to.

In addition, although in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is composed of the panel board 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 can be composed of one member. It's good as well.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A is shown as a cut-processed flat base material, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an injection molded panel plate 1110A (gaming panel 1100). By injection molding the panel plate 1110A, it is possible to form the specific portion 1152 with a complicated shape or sharp shape that cannot be obtained by cutting. Furthermore, by using insert molding or two-color molding (multi-color molding) to mold the panel board 1110A, the specific part 1152 can be made of a material with a different light transmittance than the main part 1151, and the sleeve 1154 and the filling part 1156 can be Can be integrally formed or.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) is recessed to have different thicknesses to form the specific portions 1152 having different light transmittances, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specific portion 1152 may be formed of a material having a different light transmittance from that of the main portion 1151. Specifically, for example, a material having a different light transmittance from that of the main body part 1151 may be provided so as to penetrate through the main body part 1151 (the material may be inserted, press-fitted, injected, insert molded, two-color molded, etc.). The identifying portion 1152 may be formed by

When the game panel 1100 (including the panel board 1110A) is formed by injection molding, the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittances can be integrally formed at the same time. Furthermore, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a transparent material can be insert molded or multi-colored molded in the part (recessed part 1115) where the specific part 1152 is formed, which is thinner than the main part 1151. By making the thickness of the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 the same, and by eliminating recessed portions, a decrease in strength and rigidity of the game panel 1100 can be avoided. Furthermore, in this case, since the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 have the same thickness, it becomes possible to plant the obstacle nail N in the specific portion 1152 as well, increasing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the specific portion 1152. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with higher decorative effects and presentation effects.

In addition, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the amount of protrusion of the core pin and mandrel into the cavity for forming the recessed portion (recessed portion 1115) due to the specific portion 1152 which is thinner than the main portion 1151 is changed. By simply doing this, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be changed, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed.

Furthermore, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a finer shape and sharper shape can be formed in the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, the shape of the specific portion 1152 when viewed from the front, etc., compared to cutting processing. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide the specifying section 1152 that can further enhance the performance effect, and it is possible to entertain the players and strongly attract the interest of the players, making it possible to create a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players. can be provided.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the panel board 1110A is white and opaque, but the panel board 1110A (gaming panel 1100) may be of a "predetermined color (for example, reddish color)". , blue, yellow, mixed color, etc.)" or "colorless or colored transparent". In addition, the opaque panel board 1110A includes ``one that is entirely opaque including the inside,'' ``a part of the inside that is opaque,'' ``one that is transparent inside and at least one side is opaque,'' and ``a translucent panel.'' ``Things molded from transparent and opaque synthetic resin'', ``Things made by laminating a transparent plate and a transparent opaque plate'', and ``At least one side of a transparent plate has transparency.'' ``A transparent plate with an opaque film (cell) pasted on it'', ``A transparent plate with a stiffening process applied to the back surface using ultraviolet curable ink'', ``A transparent plate with a sandblast process applied to the back surface of the transparent plate'', etc. can be mentioned. Colors include "red-ish", "blue-ish", "yellow-ish", and "mixed-color" (mixture of multiple specific colors to make a single color). , "Multicolored ones (those in which each color is dispersed in a pattern such as a mottled pattern, a striped pattern, a polka dot pattern, a geometric pattern, etc.)", etc.

Further, in the above embodiment, the specific portion 1152 has a higher light transmittance than the main body portion 1151, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific portion 1152 has a lower light transmittance than the main body portion 1151. It can also be used as a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 1151 of the panel board 1110A is shown to be opaque, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main body portion 1151 may be transparent. In this case, since the light transmittance does not change significantly even if the thickness of the main body part 1151 is varied, a specific part 1152 having a different light transmittance from the main body part 1151 depending on the color or material is provided. Thereby, the specific part 1152 can appear to be floating in the air with respect to the transparent main body part 1151, and the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated by the shape of the specific part 1152. At this time, when the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) is irradiated with light, the specific part 1152, which appears to be floating in the air, emits light as if it were self-luminous, so the player has a strong interest in the specific part 1152. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that attracts players and has high appeal to players.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel board 1110A to irradiate light to the rear surface of the panel board 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative substrate may be provided on the outside of the side surface or end surface to irradiate light onto the side surface or end surface of the panel board 1110A.

In addition, in the above embodiment and the embodiment described later, the panel board 1110, panel board 1110A, panel board 1110B, etc. of the game panel 1100 on which the obstacle nails N are implanted are made of resin regardless of whether they are transparent or opaque (milky white). Because it is made of aluminum, the precision of the spacing between the installed obstacle nails N is better than when plywood such as veneer is used for the game panel, and there is little deterioration over time.

[10. Fourth embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the panel board, rear sheet, and panel decoration board of the game board of the fourth embodiment, viewed from the front. The game board 5C of the fourth embodiment has a panel board 1110B of a game panel 1100 that is white and opaque with translucency, and a rear sheet 1160 on which a predetermined pattern is applied to the rear surface of the panel board 1110B. A panel decoration board 1170 is provided on the front surface of which a plurality of LEDs 1171 capable of emitting light from the rear to the front of the rear sheet 1160 are mounted. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed explanations of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

The panel board 1110B has the same shape as the game panel 1100 and the game panel 1100A described above, and is detachably held by a frame-shaped transparent panel holder 1120 from the front, and is attached to a transparent front structure via the panel holder 1120. It is attached to the rear side of member 1000.

The panel board 1110B of this embodiment is made of milky white high impact polystyrene (HIPS).

Note that the opaque material having light-transmitting properties in the panel board 1110B preferably has a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to provide luminous decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. In addition, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the members provided at the rear will be easier to recognize, and there is a risk that the effect of concealment will not be sufficiently obtained.

In addition, the panel board 1110B is white as a milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), but there are "white Munsell value (N 9.5)" and "white Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2/0.5)", "Ubana color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "Ecru color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "Oyster "White Munsell Value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Gray White Munsell Value (10YR 9/0.5)", "White Indigo Munsell Value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", " Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", It may be a white color such as "cherry blossom color Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5)".

Furthermore, although the panel board 1110B is made of high impact polystyrene (HIPS), "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", " It may also be formed from polyethylene, polypropylene, glass, or the like. Further, although the panel board 1110A has a white color due to the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), it may be made white by adding a coloring agent to the transparent material.

In addition, the opaque panel board 1110B includes ``one that is entirely opaque including the inside'', ``a part of the inside that is opaque'', ``one that is transparent inside and at least one side is opaque'', and ``a transparent one. ``Things molded from transparent and opaque synthetic resin'', ``Things made by laminating a transparent plate and a transparent opaque plate'', and ``At least one side of a transparent plate has transparency.'' ``A transparent plate with an opaque film (cell) pasted on it'', ``A transparent plate with a stiffening process applied to the back surface using ultraviolet curable ink'', ``A transparent plate with a sandblast process applied to the back surface of the transparent plate'', etc. It's good as well.

Further, a front sheet having excellent wear resistance may be attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110B, similar to the game board 5B of the third embodiment. The front sheet attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110B may or may not have a pattern. As a result, the panel board 1110B can be protected by the front sheet from the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a. In this case, high impact polystyrene) can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

The rear sheet 1160 is attached to the entire rear surface of the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100. The rear sheet 1160 is formed of a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear sheet 1160 has a predetermined translucent pattern printed thereon. The rear sheet 1160 can project a pattern onto the white opaque panel board 1110B by causing the LED 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 to emit light.

Note that the rear sheet 1160 (the pattern thereof) may have a transparent portion, or may have an opaque portion other than the front of the panel decorative substrate 1170.

The materials of the rear sheet 1160 in this embodiment include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", " Examples include "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

The panel decoration board 1170 is provided at the rear of two places on the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100: the part between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300, and the part where the guidance area 2710 is provided in front. . The panel decoration board 1170 has white solder resist applied to the front and rear surfaces, and the front and rear surfaces are white. A plurality of LEDs 1171 are mounted on the front surface of the panel decoration board 1170. The plurality of LEDs 1171 are high-intensity, full-color LEDs.

Although not shown, the rear surface of the panel decoration board 1170 is provided with a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for causing the plurality of LEDs 1171 to emit light, and the like.

In the game board 5C of this embodiment, in a normal state in which the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 are not emitting light, the entire front surface of the panel board 1110B is white with uniform brightness, and the front (player) The pattern on the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decoration board 1170 provided at the rear are not visible from the side).

From this normal state, when the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 are made to emit light as the game progresses, the light passes through the rear sheet 1160 and the panel board 1110B and is irradiated forward. At this time, since a predetermined pattern is applied to the rear sheet 1160, the pattern is projected onto the white-based opaque panel board 1110B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171, so that it is visible to the player. The pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be made visible.

As described above, according to the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment, the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 according to the progress of the game (for example, By lighting up the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative board 1170 (according to the above), the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 can be projected onto the panel board 1110B, so the pattern is projected onto the rear surface of the gaming area 5a where the game balls B circulate. By doing so, it is possible to show the game area 5a with the pattern emerging at the rear, which has never been seen in previous pachinko machines, giving a strong impact to the players, and It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players and has high appeal to players.

In addition, since a pattern is projected onto the panel board 1110B as the game progresses, it can make the player think that something good is going to happen, heightening expectations for the game and increasing interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 projects (projects) the translucent pattern of the rear sheet 1160 onto the panel board 1110B. Since the light transmittance can be varied depending on the color, ink (paint), etc., the main body part 1151 and the specific part 1152 of the panel board 1110A in the game board 5B of the third embodiment can be changed depending on the pattern on the rear sheet 1160. The same functionality can be provided. To be more specific, in the rear sheet 1160, for example, by increasing the light transmittance of the part of the picture and lowering the light transmittance of the part other than the picture, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 can be used to cover the parts other than the picture. It is possible to make the part of the image shine brightly, and also make the part of the pattern shine brightly. Therefore, the game board 5C of this embodiment can also have the same effects as the game board 5B of the third embodiment described above.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110B is white and the surface of the panel decorative board 1170 provided at the rear of the panel board 1110B is white, the color of the panel decorative board 1170 is different from the color of the panel board 1110B. It can be blended in and made invisible from the front, making it possible to prevent the player from noticing the existence of the panel decoration board 1170 and even the rear sheet 1160 (the pattern thereof). When the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 are made to emit light, the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 is projected onto the panel board 1110B, so that the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be seen through the panel board 1110B, so that its presence cannot be predicted. By noticing the existence of (the pattern of) the back sheet 1160, which was not present, it is possible to greatly surprise the player, make the player feel strongly that an opportunity has arrived, and also create a light-emitting production with a higher production effect. This can be shown to the players, and it is possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

Further, since the rear sheet 1160 is formed of a sheet material, the rear sheet 1160 can be made relatively light, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In addition, since the rear sheet 1160 is formed into a flat shape and is provided so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the panel board 1110B, the space in the front and rear direction required for the arrangement of the rear sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5C) can be reduced. Since it can be made as small as possible, it is easy to secure space for relatively arranging other members (for example, presentation device, presentation display device, etc.) behind the panel board 1110B (rear sheet 1160). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of showing more diverse performances to players.

In the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is attached to the rear surface of the panel board 1110B, but the invention is not limited to this. You can also do it. This can reduce the possibility that the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 is seen through the panel board 1110B, and the impact of the appearance of the pattern when the pattern is projected by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 on the panel decorative board 1170. can be further increased.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is provided on the entire rear surface of the panel board 1110B, but the invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 is made translucent and the light transmitted through the pattern is projected onto the panel board 1110B. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the pattern is made opaque. Alternatively, the shadow of the pattern may be projected onto the panel board 1110B.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1170 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201, the back lower front decoration 3410), the effect display device 1600, etc. may be used to project the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 onto the panel board 1110B.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decoration board 1170 are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decoration board 1170, Decorative bodies that can emit light provided therein, effect images of the effect display device 1600, etc. may be projected onto the panel board 1110B. To be more specific, a light-transmitting decorative body provided at the rear of the panel board 1110B is used instead of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160, and a decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted to make the decorative body emit light is used as a panel. It is used instead of the decorative substrate 1170. Alternatively, the liquid crystal panel for displaying the effect image in the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160, and the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the panel decoration board 1170 are replaced. As a result, it is possible to achieve the same effects as above, and by moving the decorative body or making the effect image a moving image, the pattern projected on the panel board 1110B moves, resulting in more effective light emission. The performance can be shown to the players.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel board 1110B is shown as white, but the panel board 1110B is not limited to this, and may have a color. Colors include "red-ish", "blue-ish", "yellow-ish", "mixed color" (mixture of multiple specific colors into a single color), " Examples include multicolored ones (those in which each color is dispersed in a pattern such as a mottled pattern, a striped pattern, a polka dot pattern, a geometric pattern, etc.).

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1170 is provided behind the panel board 1110B to irradiate the rear surface of the panel board 1110B (rear sheet 1160) with light, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a decorative substrate may be provided on the outside of the side surface or end surface of the panel board 1110B to irradiate the side surface or end surface of the panel board 1110B with light.

Further, in the above embodiment, the front sheet 1130 may be attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110B. At this time, a predetermined pattern that corresponds to the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 may be applied to the front sheet 1130. Specifically, for example, if the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 due to light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative board 1170 is projected onto a portion of the front sheet 1130 excluding the characteristic portion of the pattern, When the LED 1171 is not emitting light, the pattern on the front sheet 1130 can be shown with the same brightness as a whole, and when the LED 1171 is made to emit light as the game progresses, the pattern on the back sheet 1160 is changed by the light from the LED 1171. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can brighten (shine) a characteristic part of the pattern on the front sheet 1130 by using the shadow, and can strongly attract the attention of players. .

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is provided between the panel board 1110B and the panel decorative board 1170, but the present invention is not limited to this. A movable or deformable projection body may be provided between them as the game progresses. As a result, the shadow of the projector projected onto the game panel 1100B can be moved or deformed by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170, which can greatly surprise the players. , to make the player strongly believe that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous will occur, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation and suppressing a decline in interest. I can do it.

Further, the above projection body can be moved as the game progresses between a retracted position where it cannot be seen from the front through the panel board 1110B and an appearance position where it can be seen from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110B. You may also do this. As a result, when the projection body is in the retracted position, it is not visible from the front due to the opaque panel plate 1110B, so when the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 are not emitting light, the projection body Since the shadow of the object is not projected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the projection object. In this state, if the LED 1171 is made to emit light as the game progresses, the shadow of the projector will be projected onto the panel board 1110B by the light from the LED 1171. The shadow of the projection body can be shown to the player, making the player indirectly aware of the existence of the projection body, and the shadow of the projection body being projected onto the panel board 1110B makes it possible to make the player aware of the presence of the projection body. It can be surprising and can strongly attract the interest of the players. Then, as the game progresses, when the projection body is moved to an appearance position where it can be seen from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110B, the projection body becomes directly visible through the opening 1112, which greatly confuses the player. To be able to surprise the player, to have a strong impact on the player, and to make the player strongly believe that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) will occur. This increases the expectations of the players and prevents them from losing interest.

Furthermore, as described above, when the projector is moved between the retracted position and the appearance position, the panel is affected by the shadow of the projector projected onto the panel board 1110B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 at the retracted position. The decoration mode of the plate 1110B and the decoration mode of the projection body itself (for example, a pattern applied to the projection body) may be made to be different. Specifically, for example, when the external shape of the projection body is the shape of the initial form of a predetermined character, and a picture of the final form of the character is applied to the front surface of the projection body, when the projection body is in the retreat position, the light from the LED 1171 is Since the initial form of the character is projected onto the panel board 1110B by light, the player can be made aware of the existence of the projection object (decoration object) of the character in its initial form. When the projector is moved from the retreat position to the appearance position as the game progresses, the final form of the character appears, contrary to the expectation that the initial form of the character will appear. It can give a strong impact to the player, make the player think that an advantageous gaming state will occur, and increase the expectation for the game, making the player entertained and interested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Further, in the above embodiment, the shadow of the pattern of the flat rear sheet 1160 is projected onto the panel board 1110B by light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative board 1170, but the invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a three-dimensional projection body may be provided in place of the rear sheet 1160, and the shadow of the projection body may be projected onto the panel board 1110B. In this case, if the three-dimensional projection body is made to have translucency, shading will appear in the shadow of the projection body projected onto the panel board 1110B by the light from the LED 1171, making the decoration of the projection body visible to the player. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Further, if the projection body is formed into a three-dimensional shape by air pressure forming or vacuum forming from a sheet material, the projection body can be made lighter than its apparent size. If this projector is made movable as the game progresses, it will be possible to move the projector even with a small amount of force (energy), so it will be possible to move the projector using a drive motor, solenoid, etc. to move the projector. A small drive source with low output can be used, the space required for driving can be made relatively small, and an inexpensive drive source can be used. In addition, since the projector can be made lighter, the projector can be supported even by a support mechanism with relatively low rigidity, and the support mechanism for the projector can be easily miniaturized (space-saving). The support mechanism can be made inexpensive. For this reason, it is possible to easily secure space for arranging other members, and by arranging other members it is possible to show and entertain players with a more diverse range of performances. Such costs can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the game board 5C, the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a through which the game balls B circulate is provided in front is made of an opaque white color having translucency. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear brighter, and the game balls B circulating inside the game area 5a can be easily seen. When light, light from lighting in the game hall in which this pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, etc. is irradiated onto the panel board 1110B, the light is diffused in the panel board 1110B. This allows the panel board 1110B to appear dimly bright and self-luminous. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as the game panel 1100, it is possible to show players a pachinko machine 1 that is self-luminous within the game area 5a, which has never been seen before. Therefore, it is possible to strongly attract players' interest, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made of an opaque material with light-transmitting properties, the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative board 1170 provided behind the panel board 1110B (rear sheet 1160) do not emit light. In the normal state, the rear sheet 1160 (projection body) and the panel decorative board 1170 are not visible from the front due to the opaque panel board 1110B, and the player cannot see the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decorative board 1170. You can make it difficult to notice its existence. When the LED 1171 is made to emit light as the game progresses from this normal state, the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 is projected onto the panel board 1110B by the light from the LED 1171, so the translucency is The shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be made visible to the player through the panel board 1110B, and the panel board 1110B can be made to emit light in a manner that has brightness and darkness. At this time, since the panel board 1110B is white and opaque, the emitted light color of the LED 1171 and the color of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be transmitted forward, allowing the player to enjoy a colorful light emitting effect. At the same time, it is possible to present a variety of light-emitting effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest. In this way, since the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 is projected behind the gaming area 5a, the inside of the gaming area 5a can be decorated with the shadow, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. It is possible to give a strong impact to the players and to strongly attract the interests of the players. In addition, the patterns on the back sheet 1160, which are normally invisible, become visible due to the light from the LEDs 1171 that emit light as the game progresses, so it is thought that something good will happen to the players. This can increase expectations for the game and prevent a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 may become self-emitting due to light from the outside, or the panel board 1110B may become emissive due to light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170. Since the game ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette due to the light from the rear panel board 1110B, the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a can be The game ball B can be easily recognized, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and a decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the game ball B in the game area 5a can be easily recognized, the driving strength of the game ball B can be easily adjusted, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be made easier. It is possible to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the rear sheet 1160 is formed of a sheet material, the rear sheet 1160 can be made relatively light, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the rear sheet 1160 is formed in a flat shape so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the panel board 1110B, the space in the front and rear direction required for arranging the rear sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 can be made as small as possible. can. Therefore, behind the panel board 1110B (rear sheet 1160), it is possible to easily secure a space for relatively arranging other components (for example, a production device, a production display device, etc.), and more diverse productions can be achieved. A pachinko machine 1 that can be shown and enjoyed by players can be provided, and the rear sheet 1160 can be easily made inexpensive, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made of an opaque material (synthetic resin) with light-transmitting properties, the grade of A low cost synthetic resin can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel board 1110B is opaque, compared to a case where the panel board 1110B is transparent, the roots of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the panel board 1110B (the portion inserted into the panel board 1110B) can be easily seen by the player. It can be made invisible from the side, and the appearance within the gaming area 5a can be improved.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 is white, the color of the decorations provided on the pachinko machine 1 can be relatively noticeable, so that the decoration effect of the decorations can be strongly exhibited. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract players' interest. Furthermore, since the panel board 1110B is white, when the front sheet 1130 with a pattern is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110B, it is possible to improve the color development of the pattern applied to the front sheet 1130. Therefore, the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, by pasting the front sheet 1130 on the front surface of the panel board 1110B, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel board 1110B from the game balls B circulating within the gaming area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to use an inexpensive material with a low grade of wear resistance as the material for the panel board 1110B, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made opaque, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to hide the wiring and the like behind the panel board 1110B. In other words, with a transparent game panel, it is necessary to hide the wiring etc. at the rear of the game panel in order to improve the appearance, but in this embodiment, since the panel board 1110B is opaque, the rear side of the panel board 1110B is There is no need to hide the wiring, etc. As a result, compared to the case where the game panel (panel board) is made transparent, it is necessary to separately provide a member to hide the wiring, etc. behind the panel board 1110B, or devise ways to route the wiring, etc. so that it is difficult to see. There is no need to do so, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[11. Detailed configuration of winning slots on game board]
Next, the detailed configuration of the winning hole in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 184 to 189. FIG. 184(a) is a plan view showing the configuration of the winning opening in the game board, and FIG. 184(b) is a side sectional view of FIG. 184(a). FIG. 185(a) is a side sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the winning opening of this embodiment, and FIG. 185(b) is a side sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the conventional winning opening. 186(a) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning opening in which a guiding piece of a different embodiment is provided in the winning opening where the direction of ball entry is inclined, and FIGS. 187(a) and (b) 188(a) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning opening in which a guiding piece part of a further different embodiment is provided, and FIGS. 188(a) and (b) show a winning opening in which a guiding piece part of a further different embodiment is provided. FIG. FIG. 189 is a perspective view showing a conventional winning hole in which the direction of ball entry is inclined.

Below, the relationship between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 that constitute the winning opening unit 2030 having the winning opening 2015, and the guide piece 2035 or guide provided in the winning opening 2015 or the winning opening 2016 will be described. The configuration of the piece 2050 will be explained in detail. In addition, the winning hole 2015 or the winning hole 2016 can be applied to the general winning hole 2001, the variable winning hole 2003, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the normal winning hole 2008, the sub-out hole, etc. Further, the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 can be applied not only to the prize opening unit 2030 but also to a guide passage, a discharge passage, etc. through which the game balls B circulate.

[11-1. Relationship between upstream passage section and downstream passage section]
First, the relationship between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 in the winning opening unit 2030 having the winning opening 2015 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 184. Note that FIG. 184(b) shows only the cut end surface. The winning hole unit 2030 of this embodiment has a winning hole 2015, and is an upstream passage section that can receive the game balls B circulating in the gaming area 5a and change the direction of the flow backward. 2031, and a downstream passage section 2032 which is provided behind the upstream passage section 2031 and through which the game balls B received in the prize opening 2015 can flow.

The upstream passage section 2031 includes a box-shaped (container-shaped) upstream body 2031a that is open at the top and rear, and a rib-shaped guide piece that stands upward from the center in the left-right direction of the bottom of the upstream body 2031a. 2035. The upstream main body 2031a is formed in a size that allows only one game ball B to enter. The upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 is sloped such that it is highest on the front end side and becomes lower toward the rear. The height of the rear end of the guide piece 2035 is higher than the top surface of the bottom of the upstream main body 2031a.

The upper end surface (tip end surface) of the guide piece portion 2035 is bent in the middle in the front-rear direction so that the inclination angle changes. To be more specific, the guide piece portion 2035 has a bent portion at a steep angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and a rear portion of the bent portion at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. It is gently sloping. The part of the guide piece 2035 that is inclined at a steep angle (steep piece 2035a) has a triangular shape (approximately a right isosceles triangle) when viewed from the side, and the direction of flow of the game ball B is It is a change piece that can be changed backwards. On the other hand, a portion of the guiding piece portion 2035 that is inclined at a gentle angle (loose piece portion 2035b) serves as a rear piece portion that guides the game ball B backward. For this reason, the upstream passage section 2031 can guide the game ball B that has entered the upstream main body 2031a from above to the downstream passage section 2032 provided at the rear by the guiding piece section 2035.

In the winning opening unit 2030 of this embodiment, the guide piece part 2035 of the upstream passage part 2031 has a side surface shape of the front side part in a shape where a triangular straight line is bent, so the front part has an arc shape. Compared to the case, the length of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the front-rear direction can be shortened. As a result, the guiding distance (rolling distance) until the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2015 is guided backward can be shortened as much as possible, so the game ball B can be quickly It is possible to guide the game balls B backward, suppress the stagnation of the game balls B, and make it difficult for ball jams to occur, and also increase the number of game balls B accepted per unit time into the prize opening 2015. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to have more fun.

The downstream passage section 2032 includes a gutter-shaped downstream main body 2032a that is open in the front-rear direction and above, and a flat plate-shaped flange section 2032b that extends in the left-right direction and downward direction from the front end of the downstream main body 2032a. There is. The bottom of the downstream main body 2032a is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The downstream main body 2032a has an internal width w1 in the left-right direction larger than a width w2 in the left-right direction inside the upstream main body 2031a of the upstream passage portion 2031 (see FIG. 184(a)). The flange portion 2032b is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in contact with the rear surface.

By the way, when the flow path through which the game ball B flows is formed by a plurality of passage parts like the winning a prize opening unit 2030 of this embodiment, the upstream passage part 2031 on the upstream side and the downstream passage part on the downstream side. 2032, if the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 are set to be at the same height when assembled into the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5), the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section Due to manufacturing errors (errors or tolerances), assembly errors, etc. of 2032, there is a risk that a step (also referred to as a reverse step) may occur where the downstream passage section 2032 is higher than the upstream passage section 2031. If a reverse level difference occurs between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, the game ball B may become stagnant due to the reverse level difference, causing a ball jam, or the game ball B may be moved upstream due to the reverse level difference. By rebounding to the side, it may flow backward through the upstream passage section 2031 and be discharged from the entrance of the upstream passage section 2031, causing a problem such as invalidating the winning prize.

On the other hand, when the winning a prize opening unit 2030 of this embodiment is assembled, at the boundary between the upstream passage part 2031 and the downstream passage part 2032, the upstream passage part 2031 is higher than the downstream passage part. It is formed in such a way that it can be done. To be more specific, a step 2033 (see FIG. 184(b)) that is higher on the upstream passage section 2031 side is formed between the rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece section 2031b and the front end of the bottom of the downstream main body 2032a. It is formed. As a result, a step 2033 is formed between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, with the upstream passage section 2031 being higher than the other. Even if there are errors, assembly errors, etc., it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reverse level difference where the downstream passage portion 2032 side is higher. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as ball jamming of the game balls B due to the reverse level difference and invalidation of winnings due to the backflow of the game balls B.

Incidentally, it is desirable that the height G of the step 2033 between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 be within the range of 0.5 mm to 5 mm, preferably within the range of 0.5 mm to 1 mm. The reason why the height G of the step 2033 is set within this range is that if the height G of the step 2033 is smaller than the above range, manufacturing errors of the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, and the upstream passage section Depending on the assembly error between 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, a reverse level difference occurs where the downstream main body 2032a side is higher, and the reverse level difference obstructs the circulation of game balls B, resulting in ball clogging, This is because there is a risk that the game ball B that has entered the winning hole 2015 will flow backwards and be discharged from the winning hole 2015, making the winning invalid. On the other hand, if the height G of the step 2033 is larger than the above range, the game ball B from the upstream passage section 2031 will easily bounce off the bottom of the downstream passage section 2032. If the game balls B fly out from the open upper end side, or if the game balls B move wildly in the downstream passage section 2032, the circulation will be delayed and the balls will become clogged. This is because the dimension in the direction may become unnecessarily large. As described above, in this embodiment, since the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 are configured as separate members, significant effects can be expected since mounting errors and the like occur. Note that even when the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 are integrally configured, the effect of preventing the game ball B from flowing back can be expected due to the step 2033.

In the above embodiment, the sharp piece 2035a of the guide piece 2035 has a triangular side surface shape, but the shape is not limited to this, and it may be arcuate.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B flows (rolls) on the bottom of the downstream main body 2032a of the downstream passage section 2032, but the present invention is not limited to this. A guiding rib (guiding piece) may be provided that projects upward from the bottom of the main body 2032a and extends in the front-rear direction so that the rear side is lower, and on which the game ball B rolls on the upper end surface. When a guide rib is provided in the downstream passage section 2032, the front end of the guide rib is made lower than the rear end of the upstream passage section 2031 (guiding piece section 2035). Further, when providing a guide rib in the downstream passage section 2032, the bottom of the downstream main body 2032a may be formed horizontally.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear end side of the upper end surface of the guide piece part 2035 in the upstream passage section 2031 is shown as having a pin angle, but the invention is not limited to this, and the rear end side of the upper end surface A chamfered portion such as a C chamfer or an R chamfer may be provided. Thereby, when plating the upstream passage portion 2031, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging due to plating accumulation. To be more specific, when a plating pool is formed on the rear end side of the upper end surface of the guiding piece part 2035, since the plating pool also bulges upward, the game ball B gets caught in the plating pool, causing the ball to There is a risk of clogging. On the other hand, by providing a chamfered portion on the rear end side, plating (plating solution) can escape downward, making it difficult for plating puddles to form, and even if plating puddles are formed, the plating puddles cannot be removed. can be suppressed from bulging out above the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035, and the occurrence of ball clogging due to plating accumulation can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the downstream passage section 2032 is attached to the front side of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), but the present invention is not limited to this. may be extended to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the downstream passage portion 2032 may be a ball guiding member (or a ball ejecting member) provided at the rear of the game panel 1100.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning a prize opening unit 2030 is configured by the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, but it is not limited to this, and the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section The portion 2032 may constitute a guide passage or a discharge passage through which the game balls B circulate.

[11-2. Preventing balls from clogging in the prize opening]
Next, prevention of ball clogging in the winning hole 2015 (winning hole unit 2030) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 185. The winning hole unit 2030 having the winning hole 2015 of this embodiment has the same configuration as the winning hole unit 2030 in FIG. 185, and is composed of an upstream passage section 2031 and a downstream passage section 2032. The prize opening 2015 opens upward in the gaming area 5a so as to be able to receive the gaming ball B. This winning a prize opening unit 2030 has a guide piece part 2035 for guiding the accepted game ball B backward. The guide piece 2035 is formed such that its upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is bent so that the inclination angle changes midway in the front-rear direction.

The guide piece part 2035 has a steep part 2035a in which the front part of the bend is steeply inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the part on the rear side of the bend is a steep part 2035a that is steeply inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal. The loose piece portion 2035b is gently inclined at an angle of 100 degrees. The sharp piece part 2035a in the guide piece part 2035 has a triangular shape (approximately a right isosceles triangle shape) when viewed from the side, and serves as a changing piece part that changes the flow direction of the game ball B to the rear. . On the other hand, the loose piece part 2035b in the guiding piece part 2035 is a rear piece part that guides the game ball B backward.

Therefore, when the game ball B enters the prize opening 2015 from above, it first comes into contact with the steep piece 2035a of the guiding piece 2035, and the direction of flow is changed so that the game ball B is reflected by the slope of the steep piece 2035a. Can be changed from downwards to backwards. Then, the game ball B whose distribution direction has been changed to the rear by the steep piece part 2035a is guided to the rear by the loose piece part 2035b. Thereby, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the prize opening 2035.

In the winning opening unit 2030 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A guiding piece portion 2035 is formed forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) constituting the rear end of the game ball B so as to be located at a distance shorter than the radius of the game ball B.

By the way, the winning hole unit 2901 having the conventional winning hole 2900 has a guiding piece part 2902 for guiding the accepted game ball B backward, as shown in FIG. 185(b). . The guide piece 2902 is formed such that its upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is bent so that the inclination angle changes midway in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the guide piece 2902 has a steep piece 2902a with a steep slope, and a gentle piece 2902b which continues from the rear end of the steep piece 2902a and has a gentler slope than the steep piece 2902a. There is.

In the guide piece part 2902 of such a conventional winning a prize opening unit 2901, the center of the game ball B that is in contact with the steep piece part 2902a and the loose piece part 2902b forms the rear end of the winning a prize opening 2900. It is located in front of the front surface of the panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the length of the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when the game ball B that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 from above comes into contact with the game ball B that is in contact with the steep piece part 2902a and the loose piece part 2902b, Due to the load from the upper game ball B, a forward force acts on the lower game ball B, making it impossible for the lower game ball B to move backwards, resulting in a ball jam. Occur. This occurrence of ball jamming in the prize opening 2900 may cause discomfort to the player and reduce interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the winning opening unit 2030 of this embodiment, as described above, the center of the game ball B that is in contact with both the steep piece part 2035a and the loose piece part 2035b of the guide piece part 2035 is located on the game panel. 1100, so that the game ball B is in contact with both the steep piece part 2035a and the loose piece part 2035b of the guide piece part 2035. When the game ball B that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 comes into contact with the game panel 1100 from above, the load from the upper game ball B causes a backward force to act on the lower game ball B. , the lower game ball B can be moved backward by the force, and the game ball B will not stay on the guiding piece part 2035. Therefore, ball jamming (ball clogging) does not occur in the winning opening 2015, so it is possible to avoid giving discomfort to the player due to ball clogging, allowing the player to enjoy the game and keep it interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the flange part 2032b did not extend to the upper side of the winning a prize opening 2015 in the front view in the downstream passage part 2032, but it is not limited to this, and in the front view , a downstream passage portion 2032 with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2032b extending may also be provided at a portion directly above the prize opening 2015 on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this case, the center of the game ball B that is in contact with both the steep piece part 2035a and the loose piece part 2035b of the guide piece part 2035 is moved forward from the front surface of the flange part by a length longer than the radius of the game ball B. Be located at a short distance.

[11-3. Detailed configuration of the winning hole where the direction of ball entry is slanted]
Next, the detailed configuration of the winning hole unit 2040 having the winning hole 2016 in which the ball entry direction of the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 186 to 189 and the like. The prize opening 2016 of this embodiment is capable of receiving the game ball B within the game area 5a. The winning opening unit 2040 includes a flat front plate portion 2041 provided in front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and extends rearward from the front plate portion 2041 and is open diagonally upward and backward. A gutter-shaped receiving part 2042, a flat plate-shaped flange part 2043 that extends outward from the rear end of the receiving part 2042 and can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the flange part 2043 is continuous with the receiving part 2042. It has a gutter-like rear extending portion 2044 extending rearward as shown in FIG. This winning hole unit 2040 forms a winning hole 2016 with a front plate part 2041 and a receiving part 2042.

Moreover, the winning hole unit 2040 has a guide piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B received in the winning hole 2016 to the rear. The guiding piece part 2050 has a changing piece part 2051 that changes the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered the prize opening 2016 to the rear, and a rear piece part 2052 that guides the game ball B to the rear. The changing piece portion 2051 is provided with the tip end surface (upper end surface) that the game ball B comes into contact with facing the direction (parallel direction) to the direction in which the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016. The rear piece portion 2052 is provided so that the tip end surface (upper end surface) that the game ball B comes into contact with is directed in a direction different from the ball entry direction (including the opposing direction).

By the way, in the conventional winning hole 2910 in which the ball entry direction of the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. A guiding piece portion 2911 is vertically provided. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the prize opening 2910 from diagonally above, the game ball B tends to come into contact with the corner of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece part 2911, the side surface of the guide piece part 2911, etc. Since force acts on the guide piece 2911 in a direction different from the direction in which the guide piece 2911 is erected due to the contact of the game ball B, there is a problem that the guide piece 2911 becomes easily fatigued and damaged at an early stage. When the guiding piece 2911 is damaged, the fragments cause balls to become jammed, forcing players to interrupt the game, thereby reducing the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the winning hole unit 2040 of this embodiment, in the guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B backward, it extends in the direction opposite to the direction of ball entry into the winning hole 2016 (parallel direction). Since it has the changing piece part 2051, the game ball B that has entered the winning hole 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changing piece part 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner or the side surface. By contacting the guide piece 2050, it is possible to prevent the guide piece 2050 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. Therefore, the balls will not be jammed due to the fragments of the broken guide piece 2050, and the game will not be disrupted due to ball clogging. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Next, a specific embodiment of the winning opening unit 2040 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the winning a prize opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 186(a) will be explained. The receiving part 2042 of this winning a prize opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular arc shape, and is formed into an inclined U-shape when viewed from the front. The guiding piece portion 2050 extends upward from the lowest portion of the semicircular bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and extends in the front-rear direction from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The rear extending portion 2044 is shaped like a gutter that is open upward, and has a bottom surface curved into an arc with a radius larger than the radius of the arc-shaped bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and is lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. located at the location.

This winning opening unit 2040 further includes a rear guiding piece 2045 that extends upward from the lowest point on the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044 and whose upper end surface is inclined to become lower toward the rear. have. The rear guide piece part 2045 is provided directly behind the guide piece part 2050, and the front end of the upper end surface is located lower than the rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece part 2050, and the front end of the rear extending part 2044 It extends back and forth from the to the rear end. As a result, in the winning a prize opening unit 2040 of this embodiment, a step is formed between the guide piece part 2050 and the rear guide piece part 2045, with the guide piece part 2050 side being higher.

In this winning opening unit 2040, a front plate part 2041, a receiving part 2042, and a guiding piece part 2050 are integrally formed, and a flange part 2043, a rear extending part 2044, and a rear guiding piece part 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving part 2042 side (upstream passage part side) and the flange part 2043 side (downstream passage part side) are mutually separate members.

The guiding piece part 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment is vertically installed upward from the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042, and a portion from the front end to a predetermined range rearward is located in the ball entry direction of the winning opening 2016 ( It is bent in a direction (parallel) opposite to the direction of the arrow in the figure and extends upward. In this embodiment, a portion of the guide piece 2050 that is bent and extends in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction is a change piece portion 2051, and a portion on the rear side thereof is a rear piece. 2052.

The upper end surface of the rear piece part 2052 of the guide piece part 2050 slopes from the rear end of the changing piece part 2051 to be lower than the upper surface of the changing piece part 2051, and then further slopes in the middle in the front-rear direction. It is bent so that it becomes loose. As a result, the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is bent in two steps from the front end side so that the slope becomes gentler.

In the winning opening unit 2040 of FIG. 186(a), when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 along the ball entry direction that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the upper end surface of the changing piece part 2051 of the guiding piece part 2050 , the flow direction is changed from the direction of ball entry along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the backward and downward direction, and the upper end surface of the rear piece part 2052 that is continuous with the rear end of the change piece part 2051 is turned backward. It will be transferred to. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

In this way, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, in the guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B backward, it extends in the direction opposite to the direction of ball entry into the winning opening 2016 (parallel direction). Since it has the changing piece part 2051, the game ball B that has entered the winning hole 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface of the changing piece part 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner or the side surface. By contacting the guiding piece 2050, it is possible to prevent the guiding piece 2050 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. Therefore, the balls will not become clogged due to the fragments of the broken guiding piece 2050, and the game will not be disrupted due to ball clogging. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Next, the winning a prize opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 186(b) will be explained. The receiving part 2042 of this winning a prize opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular arc shape, and is formed into an inclined U-shape when viewed from the front. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The rear extending portion 2044 has a bottom surface curved in a semicircular arc shape, and is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step is formed between the receiving portion 2042 and the rear extending portion 2044, with the receiving portion 2042 side being higher. In this embodiment, two guide pieces 2050 are provided. This winning a prize opening unit 2040 is integrally formed as a whole.

The two guide pieces 2050 are each provided on both sides with the center line of the prize opening 2016 parallel to the ball entry direction of the game ball B (the direction of the arrow in the figure) in between. The guiding piece portion 2050 above the center line extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and extends from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 facing the direction of ball entry. It extends upward (inlet side) in the direction (parallel direction). The upper end surface of this upper guide piece part 2050 is inclined so that the front end side becomes lower as it goes rearward from a lower part than the entrance of the prize opening 2016 (the upper end side of the front plate part 2041), and the rear end is It coincides with the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042. The guiding piece 2050 has a triangular side surface (approximately a right isosceles triangle), and has only a changing piece 2051 that changes the direction of flow of the game balls B.

On the other hand, the guiding piece portion 2050 below the center line extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the rear extending portion 2044, and also extends in half of the receiving portion 2042 and the rear extending portion 2044. It extends vertically upward from the lowest point of the arcuate bottom surface, and from the middle, it bends in a direction opposite (parallel to) the direction of ball entry and extends upward (inlet side). It's out. The part of the lower guiding piece 2050 in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction is provided at a position symmetrical to the upper guiding piece 2050 with respect to the center line of the winning hole 2016. , its upper end surface is formed on the same plane as the upper end surface of the upper guide piece section 2050. Therefore, in the lower guiding piece 2050, the part facing (parallel to) the direction of ball entry is the changing part 2051, and the part standing vertically behind it is the changing part 2051. The upper end surface is twisted between the changing piece 2051 and the rear piece 2052. The rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is located above the bottom surface of the rear extension portion 2044.

From the above, the guide piece part 2050 of the winning a prize opening unit 2040 of this embodiment has two change piece parts 2051 and one rear piece part 2052, and one of the two The change piece portion 2051 is integrally continuous with the rear piece portion 2052.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 186(b), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the ball entering direction that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the ball entering direction (parallel direction) The ball comes into contact with the upper end surface of each of the changing piece parts 2051 of the two guide pieces 2050 provided in the game panel 1100, and the direction of flow is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the backward and downward direction. Ru. Then, the game ball B whose distribution direction has been changed to the rear by the changing piece 2051 will roll backward on the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052 of the lower guiding piece 2050. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

In this way, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, in the guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B backward, it extends in the direction opposite to the direction of ball entry into the winning opening 2016 (parallel direction). Since it has the changing piece part 2051, the game ball B that has entered the winning hole 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface of the changing piece part 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner or the side surface. By contacting the guiding piece 2050, it is possible to prevent the guiding piece 2050 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. Therefore, the balls will not become clogged due to the fragments of the broken guiding piece 2050, and the game will not be disrupted due to ball clogging. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, in the winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment, two changing pieces 2051 are provided that extend in a direction opposite to the ball entry direction (parallel direction), so that the game ball B that enters the winning opening 2016 is Since the change piece 2051 is in contact with the two change piece parts 2051, the impact caused by the contact of the game ball B on the one change piece part 2051 can be reduced, and the durability of the change piece part 2051 (guide piece part 2050) can be reduced. In addition, the main winning hole 2016 can be applied to a winning hole into which more game balls B enter.

Next, the winning a prize opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 187(a) will be explained. A part of the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042 of this winning a prize opening unit 2040 is curved in an arc shape and is low. In the flange portion 2043, the rear end surface of the receiving portion 2042 is in contact with the front surface, and an opening 2043a penetrating through the flange portion 2043 is formed in a portion corresponding to the downstream end of the receiving portion 2042 with a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. ing. The lower end of the opening 2043a of this flange portion 2043 is located below the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042 and the opening 2043a, with the receiving part 2042 side being higher. A portion of the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044 is curved into an arc shape and is lowered, and is provided at a position lower than the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. As a result, a step is formed between the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 and the rear extension portion 2044, with the flange portion 2043 side being higher.

This winning a prize opening unit 2040 further includes a pair of rear guide piece parts 2045 that are inclined to become lower toward the rear on both left and right sides of the lowest part of the rear extension part 2044. The pair of rear guide pieces 2045 extend back and forth from a portion on the same plane as the front surface of the flange portion 2043 to a portion rearward of the rear end of the rear extension portion 2044. The front ends of the upper end surfaces of the pair of rear guiding pieces 2045 protrude into the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 at a height lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042.

In this winning opening unit 2040, a front plate part 2041, a receiving part 2042, and a guiding piece part 2050 are integrally formed, and a flange part 2043, a rear extending part 2044, and a rear guiding piece part 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving part 2042 side (upstream passage part side) and the flange part 2043 side (downstream passage part side) are mutually separate members.

The winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with two guide pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. One guiding piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and faces in a direction opposite to the ball entry direction on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends from the part in the direction facing (parallel to) the ball entry direction to the part near the entrance of the prize opening 2016 (the part on the entrance side of the lowest part in the receiving part 2042). The guide piece 2050 that extends in a direction opposite to (parallel to) the ball entry direction has an upper end surface inclined at a steep angle with respect to the side (base) that is in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving section 2042. ing. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of this guide piece part 2050 is formed into a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 from the ball entry direction to the rear. This is a possible change piece part 2051.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and extends upward from the lowest portion of the arcuately curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends vertically to. This guide piece part 2050 has an upper end surface inclined at a gentle angle with respect to the horizontal so as to be lowered rearward, and serves as a rear piece part 2052 that can guide the game ball B backward. The entire rear piece portion 2052 protrudes above the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. This rear piece 2052 is provided so as to be located in front between the pair of rear guide pieces 2045.

As described above, in the guiding piece part 2050 of the winning a prize opening unit 2040 of this embodiment, the changing piece part 2051 and the rear piece part 2052 are provided separately.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 187(a), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the ball entering direction that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, one of the two guiding pieces 2050 is placed in the ball entering direction. It comes into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changing piece portion 2051 provided in the direction facing (parallel to) direction is changed. This change piece part 2051 partially extends to the entrance side of the prize opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece part 2052 which is the remaining guiding piece part 2050 below, so the change piece part 2051 causes the flow direction to be backward. The game ball B changed to comes into contact with the upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2052 and rolls backward on the upper end surface. Then, the game ball B that has rolled on the rear piece 2052 will roll rearward from the rear end of the rear piece 2052 so as to straddle the pair of rear guide pieces 2045. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward, and can be rectified straight backward by the pair of rear guiding pieces 2045. .

In this way, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, in the guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B backward, it extends in the direction opposite to the direction of ball entry into the winning opening 2016 (parallel direction). Since it has the changeable piece part 2051 that has a changeable piece part 2051, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece part 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner or the side surface. By contacting the guiding piece 2050, it is possible to prevent the guiding piece 2050 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. Therefore, the balls will not become clogged due to the fragments of the broken guiding piece 2050, and the game will not be disrupted due to ball clogging. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, a part (upper end side) of the changing piece part 2051 is extended toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece part 2052 (in plan view, the upper end surface of the changing piece part 2051 and the rear piece 2052), the changing piece 2051 changes the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered (entered) the prize opening 2016, while the rear piece 2052 moves the ball B backward. It can be induced. Thereby, even if the direction of ball entry into the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the game ball B that has entered can be guided backward in a good condition.

Furthermore, like the winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment, even if the positions of the guide piece part 2050 and the rear guide piece part 2045 provided at the front and rear are different and are not continuous, the rear rear guide piece Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is configured to be lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning a prize opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 187(b) will be explained. The receiving part 2042 of this winning a prize opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular arc shape, and is formed into an inclined U-shape when viewed from the front. The flange portion 2043 has a front surface in contact with the rear end surface of the receiving portion 2042, and an opening 2043a that is cut out in a U-shape and has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, at a portion corresponding to the downstream end of the receiving portion 2042. is formed. The lower end of the opening 2043a of this flange portion 2043 is located below the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the opening 2043a, with the receiving portion 2042 side being higher.

The rear extending portion 2044 has a J-shape when viewed from the front, and its bottom surface is curved into a semicircular arc with a radius larger than the radius of the U-shaped portion of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. At the same time, it is provided at a position lower than the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. As a result, a step is formed between the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 and the rear extension portion 2044, with the flange portion 2043 side being higher.

This winning opening unit 2040 further includes a rear guiding piece 2045 that extends upward from the lowest point on the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044 and whose upper end surface is inclined to become lower toward the rear. have. The rear guide piece portion 2045 extends back and forth from the same portion as the front surface of the flange portion 2043 to the rear end of the rear extension portion 2044. Further, the front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 extends upward to the same height as the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and projects into the opening portion 2043a of the flange portion 2043.

In this winning opening unit 2040, a front plate part 2041, a receiving part 2042, and a guiding piece part 2050 are integrally formed, and a flange part 2043, a rear extending part 2044, and a rear guiding piece part 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving part 2042 side (upstream passage part side) and the flange part 2043 side (downstream passage part side) are separate members from each other.

The winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with two guide pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. One guiding piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and extends from a portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 facing in a direction opposite to the ball entry direction. It extends to a portion near the entrance of the prize opening 2016 (a portion closer to the entrance than the lowest portion of the receiving portion 2042) in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction. The guiding piece part 2050 extending in a direction opposite to (parallel to) the ball entry direction has an upper end surface (tip surface) that is steeper than the side (bottom side) in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042. tilted at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of this guide piece part 2050 is formed into a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 from the ball entry direction to the rear. This is a possible change piece part 2051.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and is lower than the lowest portion of the arcuately curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends upward from a portion on the opposite side to the changing piece portion 2051. This guide piece part 2050 has an upper end surface (tip surface) inclined at a gentle angle with respect to the horizontal so as to be lowered rearward, and serves as a rear piece part 2052 that can guide the game ball B backward. . The entire rear piece portion 2052 protrudes above the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. This rear piece portion 2052 is provided below the change piece portion 2051.

As described above, in the guiding piece part 2050 of the winning a prize opening unit 2040 of this embodiment, the changing piece part 2051 and the rear piece part 2052 are provided separately.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 187(b), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the ball entering direction that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the ball entering direction of the two guiding pieces 2050 is It comes into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changing piece portion 2051 provided in the direction facing (parallel to) direction is changed. This change piece part 2051 partially extends to the entrance side of the prize opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece part 2052 which is the remaining guiding piece part 2050 below, so the change piece part 2051 causes the flow direction to be backward. The game ball B changed to comes into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the rear piece part 2052 below the changing piece part 2051, and rolls backward.

At this time, since the rear piece part 2052 is provided on the opposite side to the change piece part 2051 with the lowest part of the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042 in between, the game ball B is 2052 and rolls backwards. Thereby, the swinging of the game ball B in the left and right direction is suppressed, and the game ball B is straightly rectified backward. Then, the game ball B guided rearward rolls backward from the rear end of the receiving part 2042 on the upper end surface of the rear guiding piece part 2045. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided to the rear.

In this way, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, in the guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B backward, it extends in the direction opposite to the direction of ball entry into the winning opening 2016 (parallel direction). Since it has the changeable piece part 2051 that has a changeable piece part 2051, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece part 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner or the side surface. By contacting the guiding piece 2050, it is possible to prevent the guiding piece 2050 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. Therefore, the balls will not become clogged due to the fragments of the broken guiding piece 2050, and the game will not be disrupted due to ball clogging. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, a part (upper end side) of the change piece part 2051 is extended toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece part 2052 (in plan view, the upper end surface of the change piece part 2051 and the rear piece 2052), the changing piece 2051 changes the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered (entered) the prize opening 2016, while the rear piece 2052 moves the ball B backward. It can be induced. Thereby, even if the direction of ball entry into the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the game ball B that has entered can be guided backward in a good condition.

Furthermore, like the winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment, even if the positions of the guide piece part 2050 and the rear guide piece part 2045 provided at the front and rear are different and are not continuous, the rear rear guide piece Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is configured to be lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning a prize opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 188(a) will be explained. A part of the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042 of this winning a prize opening unit 2040 is curved in an arc shape and is low. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The front end surface of the rearward extending portion 2044 is in contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2043 . Further, the rear extending portion 2044 has a bottom surface curved in an arc shape with a radius larger than the radius of the arcuate bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044, with the receiving portion 2042 side being higher.

This winning a prize opening unit 2040 extends upward from the lowest part of the rear extension part 2044, and has a rear guide piece part 2045 extending back and forth over the entire length of the rear extension part 2044. It also has more. The upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is gently sloped so as to become lower toward the rear. The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is approximately at the same height as the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042.

In this winning opening unit 2040, a front plate part 2041, a receiving part 2042, a guiding piece part 2050, and a flange part 2043 are integrally formed, and a rear extending part 2044 and a rear guiding piece part 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving part 2042 side (upstream passage part side) and the rear extending part 2044 side (downstream passage part side) are separate members from each other.

The winning a prize opening unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of guide pieces 2050 (three in this case) for guiding the game ball B. One guiding piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and faces in a direction opposite to the ball entry direction on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends from the part in the direction facing (parallel to) the ball entry direction to the part near the entrance of the prize opening 2016 (the part on the entrance side of the lowest part in the receiving part 2042). The guiding piece part 2050 extending in a direction opposite to (parallel to) the ball entry direction has an upper end surface (tip surface) that is steeper than the side (bottom side) in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042. tilted at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of this guide piece part 2050 is formed into a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 from the ball entry direction to the rear. This is a possible change piece part 2051.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the same portion as the rear surface of the flange portion 2043, and also extends from the lowest portion of the arcuately curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends vertically upward from the parts on both the left and right sides between. The pair of guide pieces 2050 have upper end surfaces (tip surfaces) inclined at a gentle angle with respect to the horizontal so as to be lower toward the rear, and serve as rear pieces 2052 that can guide the game ball B backward. ing. The entire rear piece portion 2052 protrudes above the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The pair of rear pieces 2052 are provided such that the portion between them is located in front of the rear guide piece 2045.

As described above, the guide piece 2050 of the winning a prize opening unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with one change piece 2051 and two (pair) rear piece parts 2052, respectively.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 188(a), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the ball entering direction that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the ball entering direction (parallel direction) The ball comes into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changing piece portion 2051 provided in the game panel 1100, and its flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the backward and downward direction. This change piece part 2051 partially extends to the entrance side of the prize opening 2016 from directly above the lower pair of rear pieces 2052, which are the remaining guide piece parts 2050, so that the change piece part 2051 The game ball B whose has been changed to the rear comes into contact with the upper end surfaces (tip surfaces) of the pair of rear pieces 2052, and rolls backward while straddling the pair of rear pieces 2052. This pair of rear pieces 2052 allows the game ball B to be rectified straight backward. Then, the game ball B guided backward will roll backward on the upper end surface of the rear guiding piece 2045 from the rear end of the pair of rear pieces 2052. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

In this way, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, in the guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B backward, it extends in the direction opposite to the direction of ball entry into the winning opening 2016 (parallel direction). Since it has the changeable piece part 2051 that has a changeable piece part 2051, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece part 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner or the side surface. By contacting the guiding piece 2050, it is possible to prevent the guiding piece 2050 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. Therefore, the balls will not become clogged due to the fragments of the broken guiding piece 2050, and the game will not be disrupted due to ball clogging. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, a part (upper end side) of the changing piece part 2051 is extended toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece part 2052 (in plan view, the upper end surface of the changing piece part 2051 and the rear piece 2052), the changing piece 2051 changes the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered (entered) the prize opening 2016, while the rear piece 2052 moves the ball B backward. It can be induced. Thereby, even if the direction of ball entry into the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the game ball B that has entered can be guided backward in a good condition.

Furthermore, like the winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment, even if the positions of the guide piece part 2050 and the rear guide piece part 2045 provided at the front and rear are different and are not continuous, the rear rear guide piece Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is configured to be lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning a prize opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 188(b) will be explained. The receiving part 2042 of this winning hole unit 2040 has a side wall 2042a vertically erected so as to face the winning hole 2016. The bottom surface of this receiving portion 2042 is formed into a flat shape and gently slopes downwardly toward the rear. The guide piece portion 2050 is provided within the receiving portion 2042. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The rear extending portion 2044 extends rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2043.

This winning opening unit 2040 is vertically arranged upward from the bottom surface of the rear extension part 2044, and the upper end surface is gently inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear, and the entire length of the rear extension part 2044 is It further includes a rear guide piece portion 2045 extending back and forth. The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is provided at a lower position than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. In this embodiment, a pair of rear guiding piece portions 2045 are provided in the winning opening 2016 on the left side in the paper of FIG. 188, and one rear guiding piece portion 2045 is provided in the winning opening 2016 on the right side.

This winning opening unit 2040 has a front plate part 2041, a receiving part 2042, a guiding piece part 2050, a flange part 2043, a rear extending part 2044, and a rear guiding piece part 2045 which are integrally formed.

The guide piece part 2050 of the winning a prize opening unit 2040 of this embodiment extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate part 2041 to a part in front of the rear end of the receiving part 2042, and enters from the side wall 2042a of the receiving part 2042. It extends to a portion near the entrance of the prize opening 2016 in a direction opposite (parallel to) the direction of the ball. The guide piece 2050 that extends in a direction opposite to (parallel to) the ball entry direction has an upper end surface (tip surface) that is steeper than the side (base) that is in contact with the side wall 2042a of the receiving section 2042. It is inclined at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guiding piece part 2050 is formed into a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 from the ball entry direction to the rear. It is a change piece part 2051.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 188(b), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the ball entering direction that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the ball entering direction (parallel direction) The ball comes into contact with the tip end surface (upper end surface) of the changing piece portion 2051 provided in the game panel 1100, and its flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the backward and downward direction. Since the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 that is gently inclined toward the rear is provided below the changing piece portion 2051, the game ball B whose circulation direction has been changed to the rear by the changing piece portion 2051 can be placed in the receiving portion. It comes into contact with the bottom surface of the portion 2042 and rolls backward. Then, the game ball B that has rolled backward on the bottom surface of the receiving section 2042 is moved from the rear end of the receiving section 2042 so as to straddle the pair of rear guiding pieces 2045 or on the upper end surface of one rear guiding piece 2045. will roll backwards. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be smoothly and quickly guided backward.

In this way, according to the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, in the guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B backward, it extends in the direction opposite to (parallel to) the direction in which the ball enters the winning opening 2016. Since it has the changeable piece part 2051 that has a changeable piece part 2051, the game ball B that has entered the winning hole 2016 can be brought into contact with the tip surface (upper end surface) of the changeable piece part 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, the side surface of the guide piece part 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not come into contact with the edge of the corner or the side surface. By contacting the guide piece 2050, it is possible to prevent the guide piece 2050 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. Therefore, the balls will not be jammed due to the fragments of the broken guide piece 2050, and the game will not be disrupted due to ball clogging. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, like the winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment, the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the rear guiding piece portion 2045 on the rear side of the receiving portion 2042 is such that the game ball B on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 rolls. Since it is configured lower than the part where the game ball B flows down, it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

In the above embodiment, the modified piece part 2051 of the guide piece part 2050 has a triangular side surface, that is, the upper end surface (tip surface) is a linear flat surface, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a curved surface in which the upper end surface (tip side) is curved in an arc shape.

By the way, like the winning hole 2016 shown in FIG. 187(a), when the opening 2043a in the flange portion 2043 through which the game ball B passes is a through hole, that is, when the flange portion 2043 is located above the winning hole 2016 when viewed from the front. If the opening 2043a is a through-hole that extends to the opening 2043a through which the game ball B passes, the guiding direction will not be affected regardless of whether the ball entry direction of the winning hole 2016 is vertical or inclined to the vertical. It is desirable that the upper end surface (tip surface) of the modified piece portion 2051 (or steep piece portion) of the piece portion 2050 be a curved surface that is curved in an arc shape.

In detail, if the opening 2043a of the flange part 2043 is a through hole, the flange part 2043 that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) exists on the rear end side of the entrance of the winning opening 2016. Therefore, the rear end of the entrance of the winning hole 2016 will be located forward by the thickness of the flange portion 2043, and the front-back dimension of the winning hole 2016 will be the same as the thickness of the flange portion 2043. becomes smaller. When such a winning opening 2016 is provided with a changing piece part 2051 having a triangular side surface and a flat upper end surface (tip surface), changing piece part 2051 (guiding piece part 2050) becomes shorter as it goes downward from the upper end of the changing piece portion 2051, and then becomes longer, so the size of the flow path of the game ball B becomes partially narrow, and the game Prompt distribution of the balls B is inhibited, and there is a risk that the game balls B will be stagnant or ball jams will occur. On the other hand, if the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece part 2051 is a curved surface that is concavely curved in an arc shape, the change piece part 2051 (guiding piece part 2050) hardly changes even when going downward from the upper end of the changing piece portion 2051, and the size of the flow path of the game ball B can be kept approximately constant. As a result, the distribution of the game balls B that have entered (accepted) the prize opening 2016 is not suppressed, and the game balls B can be quickly distributed, resulting in the occurrence of stagnation of game balls B, ball clogging, etc. can be avoided.

In addition, for the guide piece part 2050 of the prize opening 2016 in which the direction of entry of the game ball B as described above is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, a guide having a function of preventing ball jamming as shown in FIG. 185 is provided. The configuration of the piece portion 2035 may also be applied. Thereby, it is possible to prevent ball jamming even in the winning hole 2016 where the direction of ball entry is inclined.

[12. Relationship between the front unit and the game panel on the game board]
Next, the relationship (attachment relationship) between the table unit 2000 and the game panel 1100 on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192 and the like. FIG. 190(a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the starting port unit and the center accessory in the front unit of another embodiment from the front, and FIG. 190(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the positioning pin and the mounting hole in FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged cross-sectional view of the relationship between the two. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing a section of a positioning pin in a table unit of a further different embodiment. FIG. 192(a) is an explanatory view showing the positioning pin part in a table unit of a further different embodiment from the front, FIG. 192(b) is an explanatory view showing FIG. 192(a) in cross section, and FIG. ) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which the portion of the game panel is brought into contact with the game panel. Note that the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration as in the embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 190(a), the starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in this embodiment extends outwardly to the left and right with the first starting port 2004 in between, and extends from the gaming panel 1100 (panel It has a flange portion 2103 that comes into contact with the front surface of the plate 1110). The starting port unit 2100 also includes a mounting hole 2106 for attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, and a positioning pin 2107 for positioning the starting port unit 2100 at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100. There is.

The attachment hole 2106 is a countersink hole (see FIG. 190(b)) that penetrates the flange portion 2103 in the front and back directions. The positioning pin 2107 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2103 in a cylindrical shape, and has a conical tip. The mounting hole 2106 and the positioning pin 2107 of the starting port unit 2100 are set as a pair, and the distance L1 between their centers is within a predetermined range (for example, in the range of 5 mm to 8 mm). In the left and right flange portions 2103, two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 are provided symmetrically with respect to a vertical center line CL passing through the center of the first starting port 2004 in the left-right direction.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in this embodiment has a frame shape as a whole, and includes a flat flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a center accessory 2500. It has a mounting hole 2504 for attaching to the game panel 1100 and a positioning pin 2505 for positioning the center accessory 2500 at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100.

The attachment hole 2504 is a countersink hole (see FIG. 190(b)) that penetrates the flange portion 2502 in the front and back directions. The positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 in a cylindrical shape, and has a conical tip. The mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 of the center accessory 2500 are set as a pair, and the distance L1 between their centers is within a predetermined range (for example, in the range of 5 mm to 8 mm).

Moreover, the center accessory 2500 has a stage 2513 on the lower side of the frame that causes the game ball B to roll in the left-right direction and then be released into the game area 5a. This center accessory 2500 is also provided with a flange portion 2502 below the stage 2513, and two sets of attachments are installed at a portion of the flange portion 2502 below the stage 2513, with the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in between. Holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided on both left and right sides, respectively.

The two sets of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 provided below the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 are centered at the center passing through the center in the left-right direction of the center discharge portion 2513a, that is, the center in the left-right direction of the first starting port 2004. They are provided at symmetrical positions with respect to the line CL. Although not shown, the center line CL passes through the center of two obstacle nails N (so-called navel nails) installed directly above the first starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, the two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 (mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505) affect games such as the first starting port 2004, the central release part 2513a of the stage 2513, and the navel nail. They are provided at symmetrical positions with respect to a center line CL passing through the center of a certain part. As a result, by inserting the positioning pins 2107 and 2505 of the starting port unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 and the stage 2513 The central emitting portion 2513a can be accurately positioned at a specific position (on the center line CL) within the gaming area 5a. As a result, the acceptance probability that the game ball B released from the center release part 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted into the first starting port 2004 located below can be set within a desired range, and the game board 5 Variations among (products) can be reduced as much as possible.

In addition, since the positioning pins 2107 and 2505 are provided symmetrically with respect to the center line CL, changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity may affect the game panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100, and the center accessories. 2500, etc., expand and contract and deform, the centers of the first starting port 2004 and the central discharge portion 2513a can be maintained on the center line CL, and the receiving of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 is facilitated. This can prevent the probability from changing.

In addition, since it has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, when attaching the center accessory 2500 to the front of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2505 can be inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100. Since the center accessory 2500 can be positioned, when screwing the mounting screw into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504, the center accessory 2500 does not move or float from the game panel 1100. This prevents the center accessory 2500 from moving slightly even when the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504 and tightened. Therefore, the center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to a specific position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

Further, in the present embodiment, a member such as a front plate part that is spaced further forward than the flange part 2502 is not provided in front of a portion of the flange part 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 extends rearward. In other words, the positioning pin 2505 is not provided in the rear portion of the flange portion 2502 where the front plate portion is provided and is spaced further forward than the flange portion 2502. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, the front plate part does not get in the way when inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, and the positioning pin 2505 in the flange part 2502 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100. By pressing the front surface of the provided portion, the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably pushed into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100. Note that in a portion where the operator's finger can be inserted between the flange portion 2502 and the front plate portion, the positioning pin 2505 may be provided at a portion at the rear of the front plate portion.

In the above embodiment, two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 (mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505) are applied to the first starting port 2004 (center discharge part 2513a of stage 2513). However, it is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, and the normal winning opening 2008, It may also be applied to

Next, an embodiment different from the above will be described with reference to FIG. 191 in a portion of the center accessory 2500 where the attachment hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided. In this embodiment, on the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, a groove portion 2506 that is recessed forward so as to surround the outer periphery of the positioning pin 2505 is provided at the base of the positioning pin 2505 that projects rearward. , has.

By the way, when the center accessory 2500 is formed by injection molding or the like, it is easy to form a radius at the base of the positioning pin 2505, and the radius makes the base of the positioning pin 2505 thick. Then, when trying to insert the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 2505 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with the radius attached to the base, the thicker part of the base will enter the positioning hole 1117. As a result, the insertion of the positioning pin 2505 stops midway, resulting in incomplete insertion of the positioning pin 2505 (a state where there is a gap between the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 and the front surface of the game panel 1100). There is a possibility that the center accessory 2500 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In addition, a decorative or protective sheet is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and when forming the positioning holes 1117 etc. on the game panel 1100, the positioning holes 1117 etc. Burrs may appear on the front edge. When the positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 with a burr formed on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117, the burr is caught between the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. As a result, there is a risk that the center accessory 2500 may be attached to the game panel 1100 with the positioning pin 2505 incompletely inserted. As described above, if the positioning pin 2505 is incompletely inserted, the positioning effect may not be sufficiently exerted, and there is a possibility that the above-mentioned effects may not be obtained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the root of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange 2502, the root of the positioning pin 2505 is located in the groove 2506 in front of the rear surface of the flange 2502. Even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 is rounded, the part of the positioning pin 2505 that is behind the rear surface of the flange 2502 will not become thicker, and the thickness of the effective range of the positioning pin 2505 ( The positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 until the front surface of the game panel 1100 comes into contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. Further, even if a burr is formed on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the burr is accommodated in the groove portion 2506, so that the burr is not caught between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502. The positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117. For this reason, the positioning effect of the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably exerted, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 is rounded, the groove 2506 allows the thickened part of the positioning pin 2505 to be moved forward from the rear surface of the flange 2502. A gap will not be created between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 due to incomplete insertion into the positioning hole 1117 due to the thickened portion at the base. In addition, since the burr generated on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 can be accommodated in the groove 2506, the burr creates a gap between the gaming panel 1100 and the flange 2502 at the mounting hole 2504 of the flange 2502. There are no gaps. Therefore, the center accessory 2500 will not be attached to the game panel 1100 with a gap created between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502, and the center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1100 will not be attached to the game panel 1100. It's not rattling.

Furthermore, since a groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 on the rear surface of the flange part 2502, when the center accessory 2500 is injection molded, the difference in plate thickness due to the presence of the positioning pin 2505 on the flange part 2502 can be avoided. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks where the front side of the flange portion 2502 is depressed when the molten resin hardens.

In the above embodiment, the groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 of the center accessory 2500. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the gate member 2600, and other members attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 may be provided.

Next, a further different embodiment from the above will be described with reference to FIG. 192 in a portion of the center accessory 2500 where the attachment hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 192, a seat surface portion 2507 is provided that projects rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500. The rear surface of this seat portion 2507 is formed into a flat surface parallel to the rear surface of the flange portion 2502.

A set of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided in this seat portion 2507 . In other words, the seat portion 2507 is provided so as to surround the set of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505. Therefore, the outer shape of the seat portion 2507 is teardrop-shaped. The seat portion 2507 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 by a predetermined length (for example, in the range of 0.2 mm to 1 mm).

According to this embodiment, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the seating surface portion 2507 comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, thereby causing the connection between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502. A predetermined amount of gap will be formed between them. As a result, even if the flange portion 2502 is wavy when the center accessory 2500 is injection molded, the unevenness due to the undulation can be absorbed by the gap, and the center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to the front of the game panel 1100. be able to.

Furthermore, if the expansion/contraction rate of the center accessory 2500 is different from that of the game panel 1100 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, a gap may be formed between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 by the seat portion 2507. Therefore, the difference in expansion and contraction between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 can be absorbed by the gap, and distortion of the center accessory 2500 can be suppressed.

Further, since a seating surface portion 2507 is provided that surrounds a set of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505, for example, if the center accessory 2500 is made transparent, the teardrop-shaped seating surface portion 2507 will be visible from the front side. Therefore, when attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, the position of the attachment hole 2504 can be easily grasped by the seat portion 2507, and the effort required for attachment can be made easier.

In the above embodiment, the seat portion 2507 is provided in the center accessory 2500, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the lower right unit 2400, the gate member 2600, or the like may be provided on a member attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[13. Detailed configuration of distribution channel with game ball detection sensor]
Next, the detailed configuration of the distribution passage 2061 having the detection sensor 2060 for the game ball B will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a circulation passage in which the passage is cranked downstream of the detection sensor, and FIG. 193(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of the circulation passage different from that in FIG. 193(a). and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a circulation path having a conventional detection sensor. In this embodiment, a guiding part 2062 for guiding the game ball B is provided in the distribution passage 2061 to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060 (so-called double counting). Note that the "lateral direction" hereinafter may be any horizontal direction, and may be the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 or the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1.

First, a conventional distribution passage 2920 shown in FIG. 193(c) will be described. The conventional circulation passage 2920 includes a first horizontal portion 2920a extending laterally so as to be lower on the downstream side, and a first vertical portion 2920b extending vertically downward from the downstream end of the first horizontal portion 2920a. A second horizontal part 2920c extends in the horizontal direction from the downstream end of the first vertical part 2920b so that the downstream side is lower, and a second horizontal part 2920c extends vertically downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal part 2920c. It has two vertical parts 2920d. A detection sensor 2060 for detecting the game ball B is provided in the middle of the first vertical portion 2920b. The second lateral portion 2920c is provided below the first lateral portion 2920a. Therefore, on the downstream side of the detection sensor 2060, the passage is cranked by the first vertical portion 2920b, the second horizontal portion 2920c, and the second vertical portion 2920d.

In the conventional circulation passage 2920, the outer corner of the part where the downstream end of the first vertical part 2920b and the upstream end of the second horizontal part 2920c are in contact with each other is the outer wall of the first vertical part 2920b and the second horizontal part 2920c. It is in contact with the bottom wall. Further, the outer corner of the part where the downstream end of the second horizontal part 2920c and the upstream end of the second vertical part 2920d are in contact is the part where the top wall of the second horizontal part 2920c and the outer wall of the second vertical part 2920d are in contact. It is in the form of For this reason, the conventional distribution passage 2920 has walls in two different directions that the game balls B can touch at the same time. In other words, the conventional distribution passage 2920 has a portion where walls in different directions contact the game ball B at the same time, which may impede the flow of the game ball B.

To be more specific, for example, as shown in FIG. 193(c), the detection sensor 2060 detects the game ball B that is in contact with the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2920b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c. When the game ball B that is in contact with the inner surface of the hole 2060a on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical part 2920b comes into contact with it from above, the center of the lower game ball B is a little higher than the center of the upper game ball B. Since it is located on the outer wall side of the first vertical part 2920b, the load from the upper game ball B causes the lower game ball B to move toward the outer wall side of the first vertical part 2920b, that is, on the upstream side of the second horizontal part 2920c. As a result, the lower game ball B cannot move downstream of the second lateral portion 2920c.

Therefore, the upper game ball B bounces upward due to the reaction of contacting the lower game ball B from above, and the upper game ball B moves back and forth up and down within the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. Therefore, the upper game ball B will be detected by the detection sensor 2060 multiple times. Therefore, the detection sensor 2060 has a problem of detecting (erroneously detecting) more game balls B than the number that actually circulated through the distribution path 2920. If the detection sensor 2060 makes a false detection, the burden on the game hall side will increase due to the extra payout of game balls B, and problems such as balls clogging may occur due to discrepancies with the separately counted number of game balls B. There is a problem that it may be determined that there is a player in the game, causing the game to be interrupted. Further, as described above, since the lower game ball B cannot move to the downstream side of the second lateral portion 2920c, there is a problem that balls become clogged in the circulation passage 2920.

Although not shown in the drawings, with respect to the game ball B that is in contact with the top wall of the second horizontal part 2920c and the outer wall of the second vertical part 2920d, there is a ball B that is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2920c from the upstream side. When the game ball B on the downstream side makes contact with the game ball B on the downstream side, since the center of the game ball B on the downstream side is located above the center of the game ball B on the upstream side, the game ball B on the downstream side will move upward (second horizontal part). 2920c), and the game balls B on the downstream side cannot flow down the second vertical portion 2920d, leading to a risk of ball clogging. Then, when the game balls B that have been stagnant due to the occurrence of ball clogging in that part accumulate below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 (downstream end of the first vertical part 2920b), the game balls B that have flowed down from the upstream, When it comes into contact with the game ball B below the detection hole 2060a and rebounds, it may move up and down within the detection hole 2060a and be detected multiple times, causing the same problem as above.

On the other hand, the circulation passage 2061 of this embodiment includes a first horizontal portion 2061a extending laterally so as to be lower on the downstream side, and a second horizontal portion 2061a extending vertically downward from the downstream end of the first horizontal portion 2061a. one vertical part 2061b, a second horizontal part 2061c that extends in the horizontal direction from the downstream end of the first vertical part 2061b so that the downstream side is lower, and a second horizontal part 2061c that extends vertically downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal part 2061c. It has a second vertical portion 2061d extending out.

The first lateral portion 2061a and the second lateral portion 2061c are gently inclined at an angle of θ1 (for example, within a range of 2 degrees to 7 degrees, here 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal. The second lateral portion 2061c is provided below the first lateral portion 2061a. In this circulation passage 2061, a detection sensor 2060 for detecting the game ball B is provided in the middle of the first vertical portion 2061b. Therefore, on the downstream side of the detection sensor 2060, a passage is cranked by a portion of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c, and the second vertical portion 2061d.

Further, the circulation passage 2061 has a first lateral portion 2061a provided above the detection sensor 2060, and a second lateral portion 2061c provided below the detection sensor 2060. As a result, the circulation passage 2061 meanders around the detection sensor 2060 up and down, so that the lateral size of the circulation passage 2061 can be made compact. In addition, the circulation passage 2061 is such that the vertical length of the first vertical part 2061b is such that when the first horizontal part 2061a and the second horizontal part 2061c wrap around the detection sensor 2060 in the vertical direction, the detection sensor 2060 is inserted between them. It is formed to the minimum length necessary for installation. The length of this first vertical part 2061b (distance from the top wall of the first horizontal part 2061a to the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2061c) is in the range of 2.5 to 3.5 times the diameter of the game ball B. It is within. Thereby, the detection sensor 2060 can be provided in the first vertical part 2061b, and an increase in the circulation speed (falling speed) of the game ball B can be suppressed in the first vertical part 2061b.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the circulation passage 2061 of this embodiment is located between the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a and the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b, The guiding portion 2062 is provided between the outer wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d. The guide portion 2062A in FIG. 193(a) is formed in an arc shape with a radius r centered on the lower end of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b.

It is desirable that the radius r of the arc of the guide portion 2062A is larger than the diameter of the game ball B. Specifically, the arcuate radius r of the guide portion 2062A is within the range of 1 to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm to 16 mm, preferably 11 mm to 13 mm). This is desirable. The reason for limiting the radius r of the arc-shaped guide part 2062A to within the above range is that if the radius r of the guide part 2062A is smaller than this range, the game ball immediately below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 in the guide part 2062A Since the angle of the tangent line of the part that B contacts becomes close to horizontal, the force that guides the game ball B in the lateral direction becomes weaker and the game ball B does not move downstream quickly, so that the ball B comes into contact with the guiding part 2062A. This is because the repulsion force when the game ball B of the late starter comes into contact with the game ball B of the starting player increases, and there is a possibility that the game ball B of the late player bounces upward and is detected by the detection sensor 2060 again. Furthermore, if the radius r of the guide portion 2062A is larger than this range, the horizontal and vertical directions of the circulation passage 2061 will become unnecessarily large, which may reduce the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the circulation passage 2061, and the second As the height of the horizontal portion 2061c increases, the speed of the game ball B flowing down from the first vertical portion 2061b to the second horizontal portion 2061c increases, and the impact when it comes into contact with the guiding portion 2062A becomes stronger. This is because the circulation passage 2061 may become fatigued early due to the impact and become easily damaged. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the radius r of the circular arc is 12 mm.

According to this embodiment, a circle is formed between the outer wall of the first vertical part 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal part 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical part 2061d. Since the arc-shaped guide portion 2062A is provided, walls in two different directions do not come into contact with the game ball B at the same time, and there is no part that would obstruct the flow of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B that has passed through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 can be quickly moved away from the lower part of the detection hole 2060a to the downstream side by the arc-shaped guiding part 2062A. Even if the game ball B of the second player (upper side) hits the game ball B of the second player (side), the game ball B of the starting player moves downstream (laterally) due to the impact of the contact with the game ball B of the second player. Since the repulsive force acting on the late game ball B is as small as possible, the late game ball B will not bounce back upstream, and the game ball B will not be detected multiple times by the detection sensor. . Therefore, the number of game balls B circulating through the distribution passageway 2061 can be accurately detected (counted), so it is possible to prevent the payout of game balls B due to unnecessary detection. In addition to reducing the burden on the game hall side, there will be no discrepancy with the number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, and the game can be interrupted due to the discrepancy. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to the interruption of the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the arcuate guide portion 2062A can quickly guide the game balls B to the downstream side, ball clogging in the distribution passage 2061 can be prevented. be able to.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the circulation passage 2061 is cranked, the vertical dimension of the circulation passage 2061 can be made as small as possible, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the circulation passage 2061 can be increased. can.

By the way, although not shown in the drawings, when the conventional circulation passage 2920 has a length of the first vertical part 2920b and a detection sensor 2060 is provided near the upper end of the first vertical part 2920b, that is, the detection sensor When the downstream part of the detection hole 2060a in 2060 is extended straight downward, immediately after the first player's game ball B passes through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060, the second player's game ball B, which has a faster circulation speed, When the ball B passes through the detection hole 2060a and collides with the game ball B of the starting player, the game ball B of the second player may bounce upward and be detected (double counted) again by the detection sensor 2060, causing the same problem as described above. occurs. In contrast, in this embodiment, the length of the first vertical part 2061b is shortened, and the passage is cranked downstream of the detection sensor 2060, so that the starting game ball B is detected by the guiding part 2062. The sensor 2060 can be quickly moved from a position below the detection hole 2060a. In other words, the guiding portion 2062 directly below the detection sensor 2060 allows the centers of the starting game ball B and the late starting game ball B to be quickly shifted in the lateral direction. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fast-moving game ball B to collide with the game ball B of the starting player at a portion directly below the detection hole 2060a, and even if it does collide, it will bounce back laterally and upward. This makes it possible to avoid the subsequent game ball B from being detected again (double counting) by the detection sensor 2060, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Next, another embodiment of the distribution passage 2061 shown in FIG. 193(b) will be described. The distribution passage 2061 of this embodiment differs only in the shape of the guide portion 2062B, and the other configurations are the same as the distribution passage 2061 of FIG. 193(a), and a description of the same configurations will be omitted. The guide portion 2062B of the circulation passage 2061 is formed in a straight line inclined at an angle of θ2 with respect to the vertical line, and is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the guide portion 2062. The center of the second horizontal part 2061c is in contact with the center of the upper game ball B, which is in contact with the inner surface of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical part 2061b. They are formed to be separated by a distance L2 in the downstream direction.

The inclination angle θ2 of the linearly inclined guide portion 2062B is preferably within the range of 40 degrees to 50 degrees. The reason why the inclination angle of the guiding part 2062B is limited to within the above range is that if the inclination angle is smaller than the above range, when the game ball B flowing down from the detection sensor 2060 comes into contact with the game ball B, the game ball B will be moved laterally. As the force for guiding the game ball B to the guide part 2062B becomes weaker and the game ball B does not move downstream quickly, the repulsion force when the game ball B of the second player comes into contact with the game ball B of the starter who is in contact with the guiding part 2062B increases. This is because there is a possibility that the game ball B that comes later will bounce upward and be detected by the detection sensor 2060 again. Furthermore, if the inclination angle is larger than the above range, the force that guides the game ball B downward when it comes into contact with the game ball B becomes stronger, so that the impact acting on the bottom wall of the second lateral portion 2061c is relatively This is because the flow passage 2061 may become fatigued early due to the impact and become easily damaged. Incidentally, in this embodiment, θ2 is set to 45 degrees.

Further, it is desirable that the distance L2 between the center of the lower game ball B and the center of the upper game ball B be within the range of 0 mm to 5.5 mm, preferably 3 mm to 4 mm. The reason for limiting the distance L2 within this range is that the distance L2 is smaller than this range (the center of the lower game ball B is located upstream of the second lateral portion 2061c than the length of the upper game ball B). ), the game ball B flowing down from the detection sensor 2060 is likely to come into contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2061c at approximately the same time as the guiding part 2062B, so if the game ball B that comes later comes into contact with it from above at that timing, This is because the upward repulsive force of the game ball B increases, and there is a risk that it will bounce back to the detection sensor 2060 side and be detected again. Moreover, if the distance L2 is larger than this range, the distance from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the side closer to the inner wall of the first vertical part 2061b to the inclined guiding part 2062B becomes shorter. As the flow path narrows, the game balls B tend to get stuck, and when the game ball B from the starting game ball B comes in contact with the stalled game ball B, the game ball B tends to bounce upward, and the detection sensor causes the game ball B to bounce back up again. This is because there is a risk of being detected. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the distance L2 is 3.5 mm.

According to this embodiment, there is a straight line between the outer wall of the first vertical part 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal part 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical part 2061d. In addition, the center of the game ball B that is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2061c and the guide part 2062 is located at the inner wall of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. The guide portion 2062B is provided so as to be spaced apart by a distance L2 in the downstream direction of the second lateral portion 2061c from the center of the game ball B that is in contact with the downstream portion of the second lateral portion 2061c. As a result, the lower game ball B that is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2061c and the guide part 2062B at the same time is connected to the inner surface of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical part 2061b. When the upper game ball B makes contact, the lower game ball B is pressed toward the downstream side of the second horizontal portion 2061c due to the load from the upper game ball B, and the downstream game ball B will move away from the guide portion 2062B and toward the downstream side.

Therefore, even if the game ball B on the upstream side makes contact with the game ball B on the downstream side, the game ball B on the downstream side moves downstream due to the impact of the contact with the game ball B on the upstream side, so that the game ball B on the upstream side Since the repulsive force acting on the game ball B is as small as possible, the game ball B on the upstream side will not bounce back to the upstream side, and the game ball B will not be detected multiple times by the detection sensor. . As a result, it is possible to accurately detect (count) the number of game balls B circulating through the distribution passage 2061, so it is possible to prevent the payout of game balls B due to unnecessary detection, and this pachinko machine 1 can be It is possible to reduce the burden on the installed game hall side, and there will be no discrepancy with the number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, and the game will not be interrupted due to the discrepancy. Interruptions can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to interruptions in the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the downstream game balls B can be moved downstream by the inclined guide portion 2062B, ball clogging in the distribution passage 2061 can be prevented. can do.

As described above, according to the embodiment of FIGS. 193(a) and (b), even if the game ball B of the starting player comes into contact with the game ball B of the starting player below the detection sensor 2060, the guiding part 2062 Since it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game balls B, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and to reduce the number of game balls B circulating through the distribution passage 2061. ) can be provided.

In addition, the guiding portion 2062 provided between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d allows the game ball B flowing through the second horizontal portion 2061c to be immediately transferred to the second vertical portion. Since the balls 2061d can be moved downward, it is possible to prevent the plurality of game balls B whose momentum has been weakened by flowing laterally in the second lateral portion 2061c from becoming jammed, and also to prevent congestion. It is possible to prevent a subsequent game ball B from coming into contact with the current game ball B and bouncing back toward the detection sensor 2060, and to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060. As a result, (the number of) game balls B circulating through the distribution path 2061 can be accurately detected.

For this reason, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060 (also referred to as double counting, false detection, etc.). It is possible to prevent the provision of benefits such as the payout of game balls B due to unnecessary detection, and it is possible to suppress the burden on the game hall side where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed. Alternatively, as described above, since it is possible to prevent double counting of the game balls B, it is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring with the count number of the game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, By avoiding interruption of the game due to the discrepancy, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game from causing discomfort to the player and reducing interest.

In addition, since the second horizontal portion 2061c extends in the horizontal direction from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c can suppress an increase in the distribution speed of the game ball B. The flow velocity (force) of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor 2060 can be weakened, and the game ball B can be kept in a good condition (for example, with less impact) with respect to the member provided on the downstream side of the distribution passage 2061. state, rectified state, etc.).

Furthermore, in the circulation passage 2601, a first horizontal portion 2061a extending in the horizontal direction is provided on the upstream side of the first vertical portion 2061b where the detection sensor 2060 is provided. The increase in the distribution speed of the game ball B can be suppressed, and the momentum of the game ball B is weakened, so that the game ball B flows through the first horizontal section 2061a and is connected to the top wall of the first horizontal section 2061a and the first vertical section 2061b. When the game ball B between the outer wall of The detection sensor 2060 directly below can reliably detect each one one by one.

In the above embodiment, the guide portion 2062 of the circulation passage 2061 is shown as having a wall shape, but is not limited to this, and may be a rib-like guide portion.

In addition, as the detection sensor 2060 in the above embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the first big winning opening sensor 2525 , a second big winning hole sensor 2561, a pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 used for production, an out sensor 664, and the like.

[14. Stop prevention part of game ball on rolling surface]
Next, the stop prevention portion 2071 of the game ball B on the rolling surface 2070 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 194. FIG. 194(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a stopping prevention part of a game ball on a rolling surface, and FIG. 194(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a stopping prevention part of a different embodiment from (a). (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention part of a further different embodiment, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional rolling surface without a stop prevention part. The rolling surface 2070 of this embodiment has a portion (horizontal portion 2070a) that contacts the horizontal line (horizontal surface) from below, and a stop prevention portion 2071 for preventing the game ball B from stopping at the horizontal portion 2070a. It further has the following.

First, as shown in FIG. 194(d), the conventional rolling surface 2070 on which the game ball B rolls is located at the highest point in the middle of the range in which the game ball B can roll, that is, from the bottom. It has a horizontal portion 2070a that is in contact with the horizontal line (or horizontal surface). As a result, depending on the rolling direction (circulation direction) and rolling speed (circulation speed) of the game ball B, the game ball B may stop at the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, and the game ball B may stop. This may cause the game to stagnate, which may reduce the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the stop prevention part 2071 is provided on the horizontal part 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, the stop prevention part 2071 can prevent the game ball B from stopping at that part. can.

Specifically, the stop prevention part 2071A shown in FIG. 194(a) has a predetermined width (for example, 1 mm to 3 mm) in the left and right directions and projects upward in a semicircular arc shape, and has the same cross-sectional shape and extends in the front and rear directions. It has ridges. Further, the stop prevention portion 2071B shown in FIG. 194(b) has a triangular shape with a base having a predetermined length (for example, 1 mm to 3 mm) that protrudes upward, and a protrusion that has the same cross-sectional shape and extends in the front-rear direction. Article 1. The height of the stop prevention portion 2071 is a height that the game ball B can overcome, and is, for example, in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm (or 0.1 to 0.3 times the diameter of the game ball B). It is within.

According to this embodiment, since the stop prevention portion 2071 protruding in a semicircular arc shape or a triangular shape is provided on the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, the game ball B stops on the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070. I can't. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the game from being stagnant due to the stoppage of the game ball B on the rolling surface 2070, and it is possible to let the player enjoy the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since the height of the stop prevention part 2071 is set to a height that the game ball B can overcome, depending on the rolling speed of the game ball B, it may roll with the horizontal part 2070a (stop prevention part 2071) in between. Since the game ball B can roll from one side of the moving surface 2070 to the other side, it is possible to perform the function as the rolling surface 2070 on which the game ball B rolls, and the player can enjoy the rolling surface 2070. It is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B in the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In the above embodiment, the stop prevention part 2071 is shown as a protrusion, but the stop prevention part 2071 is not limited to this. It's good as well.

Further, the stop prevention portion 2071C shown in FIG. 194(c) has a columnar shape extending in the front-rear direction at a portion directly above the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070. This columnar stop prevention portion 2071C is provided within a predetermined range (for example, within a range of 1 mm to 3 mm) upward from the rolling surface 2070, so that the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface 2070 is in the opposite direction. It is said that it is possible to climb over to the side. This stop prevention portion 2071C can also provide the same effects as described above.

The columnar stop prevention portion 2071C may be an obstacle nail N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), or a flange for attaching the rolling surface 2070 to the front surface of the game panel 1100. It may also extend forward from the section.

The rolling surface 2070 of this embodiment may be provided on the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the lower right unit 2400 (pseudo attacker unit), the center accessory 2500, the gate member 2600, etc. can. Further, the rolling surface 2070 may be a movable object (for example, a windmill, a movable shelf, a distribution member, an opening/closing door, etc.).

In addition, if there is a space in front or behind the rolling surface 2070 (at least the horizontal part 2070a) through which the game ball B can flow, the stop prevention part 2071 may guide the game ball B toward the space. It may also be a form (for example, a protrusion, a groove, etc.). In this case, the rolling surface 2070 may be used as the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500, and the stop prevention part 2071 may be used as the central release part 2513a.

[15. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiments]
The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 of this embodiment is the rear unit of the present invention, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of this embodiment is the holder of the present invention, and the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 of this embodiment is the rear unit of the present invention. In the specific surface portion of the present invention, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in this embodiment is the peripheral wall of the functional surface portion recessed rearward in the back box 3010 in this embodiment, and The side walls of the back box 3010 each correspond to a regulating portion of the present invention.

[16. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, on the game board 5, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is visible through the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in which the game area 5a is provided in front. , since the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120) is held by the back box 3010 attached to the rear side, and the front surface of the back front periphery decoration body 3201 protrudes forward from the back box 3010, the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120) The distance from the person to the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be made shorter than before, and the decoration of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be made more visible. At this time, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 is provided behind the front surface of the back box 3010, the functional surface portion 3011 does not come into contact with the game panel 1100, causing the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) to become a problem. It can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 without any problem, and the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be made more conspicuous than the functional surface part 3011. In addition, since the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 is made to protrude forward from the front surface of the back box 3010, the position of the front surface (decoration) of the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 in the front and rear direction can be adjusted to the front and back of the gaming area 5a. Since it can be brought as close as possible to the position in the direction, when the game area 5a is focused, the back front peripheral decoration 3201 will also be in focus, and while the inside of the game area 5a is visually checked, the back front peripheral decoration 3201 will be brought into focus. The decoration 3201 can be clearly seen, and the decoration of the back front peripheral decoration 3201 can be surely seen by the player. For this reason, it is possible to make the back-front peripheral edge decoration 3201 stand out, strongly attract the attention of the players, and to fully and reliably exhibit the decorative effect of the back-front peripheral edge decoration 3201. This makes it possible to entertain players and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, since the back-front peripheral decoration body 3201 is capable of performing a predetermined effect (light-emitting effect) according to the progress of the game, when the back-front peripheral decoration body 3201 executes a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. , Since the back-front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be made to stand out by this effect, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, and the player can enjoy the effect of the back-front peripheral edge decoration 3201, It is possible to make the player think that something good is going to happen, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided on the back box 3010 holding the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201, for example, when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5), the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 is attached to the back box 3010. When the front end side is placed face down on a predetermined member 3015 consisting of a mounting table such as a work table with the front end side facing downward while holding the By interposing a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member 3016 that is higher than the distance from the front surface of the body 3201 to the functional surface portion 3011, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member 3015 with the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201. . At this time, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000, when the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 is placed face down, the back box 3010 will not tilt or swing. The back box 3010 can be placed face down in a stable state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 from being damaged due to contact with the predetermined member 3015, maintain the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 in good condition, and also maintain the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 in a good condition. The occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to damage to the body 3201 can be prevented, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 can avoid contact between the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 and the predetermined member 3015, the back box 3010 holding the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 With the back box 3010 placed face down, other members (for example, back box rear unit 3030) can be attached or wired to the rear side of the back box 3010.

Furthermore, since the functional surface part 3011 is provided on the back box 3010, compared to the case where the functional surface part is provided on the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201, it is possible to remove the functional surface part 3011 during assembly without holding the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201. Even in this state, the back box 3010 can be placed face down, making it possible to respond to various work conditions.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a regulating portion (here, a peripheral wall of the functional surface portion 3011 recessed rearward in the back box 3010) that can restrict the relative movement of the intermediate member 3016 that is in contact with the functional surface portion 3011. Therefore, during assembly work, etc., when the intermediate member 3016 is interposed between the predetermined member 3015 such as a workbench and the functional surface part 3011 and the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 is placed face down, the intermediate member 3016 By coming into contact with the restriction portion, movement of the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015 can be restricted. Therefore, the regulating portion of the back box 3010 can prevent the functional surface portion 3011 from falling off from the intermediate member 3016 and the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 from tilting or falling. This can prevent the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 from coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, as described above, since the movement of the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 in the direction along the predetermined member 3015 can be restricted by the regulating portion of the back box 3010, the back box 3010 or the back unit when placed face down can be restricted. Since the unit 3000 can be made difficult to move, it can be easily assembled in a face down state, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to face the rear of the back unit 3000 (visible when viewed from the rear), assembly work such as holding the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 etc. on the back box 3010 from the front is difficult. When doing this, with the front end side of the back box 3010 facing upward (on the back), there is a distance between the functional surface section 3011 and the predetermined member 3015 that is longer than the distance from the functional surface section 3011 to the rear surface of the back unit 3000. By interposing the long column-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member 3017, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member 3015 with the rear surface of the back unit 3000, so that the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 is stable when placed on its back. This makes it possible to easily assemble the back box 3010 from the front end side.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B flows downward through the first vertical section 2061b of the distribution passage 2061, the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 is opened near the downstream end of the first vertical section 2061b. It is detected by the detection sensor 2060 by passing through, and after entering the second horizontal part 2061c from the downstream end below the detection sensor 2060 in the first vertical part 2061b, it heads toward the downstream end of the second horizontal part 2061c. The water flows laterally through the second vertical portion 2061d extending downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c. At this time, the game ball B that has passed through the detection sensor 2060 comes into contact with the guiding part 2062 provided between the outer wall of the first vertical part 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2061c, so that the game ball B can be circulated. The direction is changed from below to the lateral direction, and the fluid quickly flows toward the downstream side of the second lateral portion 2061c. In such a distribution passage 2061, when the game ball B of the starting player (the lower game ball B) that is in contact with the guiding part 2062 is brought into contact with the game ball B of the later player (the game ball B on the upper side) from above, the The lower game ball B is pushed downstream by the impact, and is quickly moved away from the position below the detection sensor 2060 by the arc-shaped or linear guide portion 2062, allowing a repulsive force to act on the upper game ball B. It is possible to suppress the upward rebound of the upper game ball B as much as possible. Therefore, even if the starting game ball B comes into contact with the starting game ball B below the detection sensor 2060, the guide portion 2062 quickly shifts the centers of the starting game ball B and the late starting game ball B in the horizontal direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the upward rebound of the game ball B that comes later, so it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and the distribution passage 2061 can be prevented from being detected multiple times. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can accurately detect (the number of) game balls B.

In addition, in this circulation passage 2061, since an arcuate or linear guide portion 2062 is also provided between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, the second vertical portion 2061d After being detected by the detection sensor 2060 provided in the second lateral part 2061c, the game ball B, whose circulation speed is suppressed by flowing through the second lateral part 2061c extending laterally, is transferred to the second lateral part 2061c. Since it can be guided downward by the guiding part 2062 provided between the ceiling wall and the outer wall of the second vertical part 2061d, it can be quickly moved below the second vertical part 2061d. It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls B whose momentum has been weakened from congesting in the second lateral portion 2061c, and also to prevent a later game ball B from coming into contact with a congested game ball B, and the detection sensor 2060 side It is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and to accurately measure (the number of) game balls B circulating through the distribution path 2061. Can be detected.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060 (also referred to as double counting, false detection, etc.). It is possible to prevent the provision of benefits such as the payout of game balls B due to (unnecessary detection), and it is possible to suppress the burden on the game hall side where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed. Alternatively, as described above, since double counting of game balls B can be prevented, it is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring with the count number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, By avoiding interruption of the game due to the discrepancy, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game from causing discomfort to the player and reducing interest.

In addition, as described above, since the guiding portion 2062 can quickly guide the game balls B to the downstream side, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from stagnation in the distribution passage 2061, and the game balls B from stagnation can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball jam).

Furthermore, since the detection sensor 2060 is provided in the first vertical part 2061b, and the second horizontal part 2061c extends in the horizontal direction from the downstream end of the first vertical part 2061b, the game ball can be detected by the second horizontal part 2061c. It is possible to suppress an increase in the distribution speed of game balls B, and the distribution speed (force) of game balls B detected by the detection sensor 2060 can be weakened. The game ball B can be delivered in a good condition (for example, in a state with little impact, in a rectified state, etc.).

In addition, since the guide portion 2062A has an arc shape with a radius larger than the diameter of the game ball B, the game ball B can be smoothly guided to the downstream side, and the game ball B that has come into contact with the guide portion 2062A is difficult to bounce. In addition, it is possible to suppress the wildness of the game balls B due to meandering within the second horizontal portion 2061c and the second vertical portion 2061d, and to quickly circulate the game balls B, thereby preventing ball clogging due to stagnation. can be prevented.

Furthermore, regarding the effects of the guiding piece part 2210 of the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the guiding piece part 2050 of the winning opening 2016 of the winning opening unit 2040 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in which the direction of ball entry is inclined. Explain in detail. In addition, although the winning a prize opening unit 2040 is made into an example and demonstrated here, the same effect can be produced also in the side unit 2200. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the winning slot unit is attached via the flange portion 2043 to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in which the game area 5a is provided in the front of the game board 5. In 2040, the front plate part 2041 and the receiving part 2042 form a winning hole 2016 whose ball entry direction (accepting direction) is inclined, and when the game ball B in the gaming area 5a enters the winning hole 2016, It rolls on the upper end surface (rolling surface) of a rib-shaped guiding piece portion 2050 provided in the receiving portion 2042 and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. This guiding piece part 2050 has a changing piece part 2051 that changes the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning hole 2016 whose ball entering direction is inclined, and the changing piece part 2051 is set in the ball entering direction. Since it extends in the direction opposite to the upper end surface of the changing piece portion 2051 (the rolling surface of the game ball B), the upper end surface of the changing piece portion 2051 includes a component in a direction perpendicular to the axis parallel to the ball entry direction. To explain in detail, the upper end surface of the changing piece portion 2051 is a surface that is a surface that is perpendicular to the ball entry direction (a surface that faces the ball entry direction) and is inclined. When the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 whose entrance direction is inclined, it first comes into contact with the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the changing piece part 2051 in the guiding piece part 2050, and the direction of the ball enters the ball. The direction is changed to the rear, and then the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the rear piece 2052 of the guide piece 2050 guides the guide piece 2050 to the rear downstream passage. At this time, since the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 comes into contact with the upper end surface of the change piece part 2051, the impact caused by the contact of the game ball B can be received by the surface, so that the game ball B can be Since the ball B does not come into contact with the corner of the guide piece part 2050 (change piece part 2051), damage to the guide piece part 2050 due to contact with the game ball B can be reduced as much as possible, and the guide piece It is possible to reduce the occurrence of ball jams due to damage to the part 2050, and it is also possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable due to interruptions in play due to ball jams, thereby suppressing a decrease in player interest. be able to.

In addition, in the winning opening unit 2040, since it has a changing piece part 2051 and a rear piece part 2052 as a guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B, the changing piece part 2051 guides the flow direction of the game ball B. Since the direction of ball entry can be changed to the rear, and the game ball B whose distribution direction has been changed to the rear can be guided backward by the rear piece 2052, the game ball B that has entered the prize opening 2016 can be quickly Therefore, the game ball B can be delivered to the downstream passage section at the rear without any problem.

Furthermore, the guide piece 2050 has a rear piece 2052 that extends in a direction different from the changing piece 2051 and guides the game ball B rearward, so that at least the game ball B is guided rearward by the rear piece 2052. Since the guiding piece 2050 is configured to support the ball B, the rear piece 2052 can reliably guide the game ball B backwards compared to the case where the guiding piece 2050 is composed of only the changing piece 2051, and the winning slot It is possible to prevent the distribution of game balls B from stopping and being delayed in the unit 2040.

In addition, since the ball entry direction of the winning hole 2016 that can accept the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the game ball B is received by the movement of the game ball B in the left and right direction within the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to vary the movement of the game ball B in the game area 5a and make it less monotonous, and it is possible to let the player enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and also to change the movement of the game ball B in the direction of ball entry. It is possible to enjoy receiving the game ball B into the prize winning hole 2016 which is inclined, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the winning opening unit 2040, a step is formed between the receiving part 2042 (guiding piece part 2050) and the rear extending part 2044 (rear guiding piece part 2045), which is lower on the rear side (downstream side). Since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing backward from the rear extension part 2044 side to the receiving part 2042 side, the game balls B inside the receiving part 2042 can be Even if the height difference of the distribution is small, the game ball B that entered the winning hole 2016 will not return to the winning hole 2016 due to backflow, and the winning hole where the ball entry direction is inclined in the gaming area 5a. 2016 can be provided, and the winning hole 2016 whose ball entry direction is inclined can entertain the player, and can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the winning opening unit 2040, the guide piece 2050 is provided in the receiving part 2042 that is open in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction and rearward, so that the game ball B guided to the rear is supported from below. The rear piece portion 2052 extends from the bottom of the receiving portion 2042 in a rib shape, and the wall thickness of the receiving portion 2042 can be increased by the amount of the rear piece portion 2052. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impact caused by receiving the game ball B into the winning hole 2016 from directly acting on the receiving part 2042, so that it is possible to suppress the receiving part 2042 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged at an early stage. This makes it possible to make the receiving part 2042 (winning hole unit 2040) less likely to be damaged, and it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable due to interruption of the game due to damage to the winning hole unit 2040. , it is possible to make the player enjoy receiving the game ball B into the winning hole 2016 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the guide piece part 2050 is made to extend in a rib shape and guide the game ball B by the upper end surface, the wall thickness can be increased by the amount that the guide piece part 2050 extends. Therefore, even if the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 with force, the impact can be received by the guiding piece part 2050, and the guiding piece part 2050 etc. can be made difficult to be damaged. Therefore, as the winning hole 2016, the parts where the game ball B enters with force or circulates frequently (for example, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first big winning hole 2006, second big prize opening 2007, etc.).

Moreover, the winning hole 2016 unit having the winning hole 2016 and the guide piece part 2050 is provided in front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) via the flange part 2043, that is, at the same position in the front and back direction as the game area 5a. Because of this, it is relatively easier to secure a space behind the prize opening 2016 unit, and the pachinko machine 1 and the player can be more entertained by providing a presentation device in this space. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 5a in front of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) on the gaming board 5, the winning opening unit 2030 that is open to accept the gaming ball B is provided. When the game ball B enters the prize opening 2015 of the upstream passage section 2031, the game ball B rolls on the rolling surface (upper end surface) of the guide piece section 2035 that protrudes upward in a rib shape, and passes through the rear downstream. It is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 via the downstream passage section 2032 connected to the side. The guide piece 2035 has a steep piece 2035a and a loose piece 2035b having different inclination angles, and each of the steep piece 2035a and the loose piece 2035b slopes downwardly toward the rear. Therefore, when a force is applied from above, including from the front, to the game ball B that is in contact with the steep piece 2035a and the loose piece 2035b, the strength of the force and the angle of the loose piece 2035b on the downstream side Depending on the situation, the game ball B can be stopped as it is, and the specific position is the position where the game ball B contacts the two sharp pieces 2035a and the loose pieces 2035b. At this time, the two steep pieces 2035a and Since the loose piece part 2035b (guiding piece part 2035) is formed, the game ball B at a specific position is in contact with the rear end of the winning opening 2015 (the front surface of the game panel 1100) from above. When the game ball B) makes contact, the point of contact is in front of the center of the game ball B at the specific position (lower side), so the upper game ball B makes contact with the lower game ball B. As a result, a force including a backward vector is applied, and the lower game ball B is pressed backward, pushing the game ball B backward, and the game is played at the prize opening 2015 (upstream passage section 2031). Ball jamming (ball jamming) in which the ball B gets stuck does not occur, and the game ball B can be discharged well backwards, and ball jamming at the prize opening 2015 can be prevented, so the game It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain players and prevent them from losing interest without causing discomfort to players.

In addition, since the guiding piece part 2035 is composed of a steep piece part 2035a and a gentle piece part 2035b with different slopes, the slope part becomes gentler (closer to horizontal) toward the rear end, so the winning opening 2015 can be suppressed from increasing the circulation speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B, and the momentum of the game ball B discharged (released) to the rear downstream passage section 2032 can be reduced. . Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball B from forcefully contacting the downstream passage section 2032 provided at the rear (downstream side) of the upstream passage section 2031, thereby making it difficult to damage the downstream passage section 2032. This makes it possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage to the downstream passage section 2032 (winning port unit 2030).

In addition, the guiding piece 2035 is composed of a steep piece 2035a and a gentle piece 2035b with different inclinations, and as described above, the momentum of the game ball B is suppressed by the steep piece 2035a and the loose piece 2035b. Since it is possible to flow the game balls B to the rear downstream passage section 2032 side in a stable state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and stagnation on the downstream passage section 2032 side. , the game ball B can be smoothly ejected from the winning opening unit 2030.

Furthermore, since the guide piece 2035 in the upstream passage section 2031 is made to protrude upward in a rib shape, it is likely that the rear end of the guide piece 2035 is located on the downstream side of the downstream passage section 2032. Since it is higher than the bottom part, a step 2033 can be formed between the upper end surface of the conductive piece part 2035 and the bottom part of the downstream passage part 2032, where the downstream side is lower. Therefore, when the game ball B tries to flow backward from the downstream passage section 2032 side to the upstream passage section 2031 side, it has to overcome the step 2033 formed by the guide piece part 2035, and the end face of the guide piece part 2035 facing the downstream side By bringing the game ball B into contact with the game ball B, backflow of the game ball B can be prevented. Therefore, even though the game ball B has once entered the prize opening 2015 of the upstream passage section 2031, it flows backward and returns to the prize opening 2015 of the upstream passage section 2031, and the game ball B is visible, giving the player a sense of distrust. It is possible to avoid giving discomfort to the player due to the stagnation of the circulation of the game balls B in the prize opening unit 2030, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upstream end of the upstream passage section 2031 of the winning opening unit 2030 (winning opening 2015 ), when the game ball B is received, it rolls on the upper end surface of the guide piece part 2035 in the upstream passage part 2031, and then is delivered to the downstream passage part 2032 and distributed downstream. At this time, a boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 is formed by making the inner circumference of the upstream end of the downstream passage section 2032 larger than the inner circumference of the downstream end of the upstream passage section 2031. Since a backflow prevention part consisting of a step 2033 is provided, when a later (following) game ball B comes into contact with a leading game ball B in the downstream passage part 2032, the following game ball B bounces back to the upstream side. , even if the game ball B rebounds to the upstream side by contacting a rear wall (not shown) provided at the rear of the upstream end of the downstream passage section 2032, the rebounded game ball B By coming into contact with the step 2033 serving as a backflow prevention part, it can be bounced back to the downstream side, preventing backflow to the upstream passage part 2031 side and reaching the upstream end of the upstream passage part 2031 (winning port 2015). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning, and the subsequent game ball B comes into contact with the rebounding game ball B, thereby causing the game ball B to stagnate within the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032. This can be avoided. Therefore, even if a prize is won in the winning hole 2015, it flows backwards and returns to the winning hole 2015 at the upstream end of the upstream passage section 2031, causing the player to feel distrust as the game ball B becomes visible. It is possible to avoid causing discomfort to the player due to stagnation in the distribution of the game balls B in the distribution passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. can.

In other words, when the game ball B is received at the upstream end (winning port 2015) of the upstream passage section 2031, as described above, the backflow prevention provided at the boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 Since the backflow of the game ball B is prevented by the step 2033 as a part, even though the game ball B is once accepted (won a prize), it flows backwards and returns to the winning hole 2015, and the game ball B is thrown from the winning hole 2015. This reduces the possibility of giving players a sense of distrust due to being visible, or giving players discomfort due to stagnation of the distribution of game balls B in the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that can surely make a player enjoy receiving a game ball B into a winning opening 2015 and suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Can be done.

In addition, since the upstream passage section 2031 is provided with a guiding piece section 2035 that protrudes in a rib shape that can guide the game ball B, it is likely that the boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 , the guide piece 2035 of the upstream passage 2031 is higher than the bottom of the downstream passage 2032, and there is a level difference between the upper end surface of the guide piece 2035 and the bottom of the downstream passage 2032, which is lower on the downstream passage 2032 side. 2033 can be formed. Therefore, when the game ball B tries to flow backward from the downstream passage part 2032 side to the upstream passage part 2031 side, it has to overcome the step 2033 formed by the guide piece part 2035 of the upstream passage part 2031, and the downstream side of the guide piece part 2035 By bringing the game ball B into contact with the end face facing the side, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing backwards, so that the backflow of the game ball B can be further prevented, and the above-mentioned effects can be further enhanced. A pachinko machine 1 that is easy to play can be provided.

Furthermore, since a step 2033 is provided as a backflow prevention section at the boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, the dimension in the front-back direction from the upstream end (inlet) of the downstream passage section 2032 to the rear wall can be adjusted. The space behind the downstream passage section 2032 can be made relatively large. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a production device behind the downstream passage section 2032 that can perform a predetermined production (for example, a light emission production, a movable production, an image production including a moving image, etc.) according to the progress of the game. The performance device makes it possible to further entertain the players and prevent the players from losing interest, and the performance device also makes the pachinko machine 1 more conspicuous, thereby strongly attracting the attention of the players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can be attached to the machine.

Furthermore, since the backflow prevention part is a step 2033 formed by making the inner periphery of the downstream passage part 2032 larger than the inner periphery of the upstream passage part 2031, the backflow prevention part can be used as a one-way opening/closing piece. In comparison, the configuration of the backflow prevention section can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the game ball B is guided by the upper end surface of the guiding piece part 2035 protruding like a rib in the upstream passage part 2031, and the thickness in the vertical direction is thicker by the amount of the guiding piece part 2035 than the bottom part. Therefore, even if the game ball B enters the upstream passage section 2031 with force, the impact can be absorbed by the guiding piece section 2035, making it possible to make the upstream passage section 2031 difficult to damage. . Therefore, the upstream passage section 2031 is a part where the game ball B enters with force or circulates frequently (for example, the first starting opening 2004, the first grand winning opening 2006, the second grand winning opening 2007, etc.).

Further, the inner circumference of the upstream end of the downstream passage section 2032 is made larger than the inner circumference of the downstream end of the upstream passage section 2031 to intentionally form a step 2033 as a backflow prevention section that is lower on the downstream passage section 2302 side. Therefore, by making the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 separate, even if there are manufacturing errors, assembly errors, etc., it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reverse level difference where the downstream passage section 2032 side is higher. This makes it possible to prevent problems such as the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B due to the reverse level difference, and a feeling of distrust among the players due to the backflow of the game balls B.

In addition, by chamfering the downstream edge of the upper end surface of the guide piece 2035 of the upstream passage section 2031, for example, when a plating layer is provided (plated) on the surface of the upstream passage section 2031, , it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging due to plating build-up. Specifically, when plating is applied to the upstream passage section 2031 for decoration etc., a plating pool is likely to be formed on the edge thereof, and the downstream edge of the rolling surface (the upper end surface of the guide piece section 2035) is plated. When a puddle is formed, the plating puddle bulges upward, so there is a risk that the game balls B will get caught in the plating puddle, resulting in ball clogging. On the other hand, by chamfering the downstream edge of the upper end surface of the guide piece 2035 in the upstream passage 2031, plating (plating solution) is released downward during plating processing, and a plating pool is formed. In addition, even if a plating pool is formed, it is possible to suppress the plating pool from bulging out above the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035, thereby preventing the occurrence of ball clogging due to the plating pool. can do.

From here to the following paragraph [2016], the functions and effects will be described using the center accessory 2500 as an example, but the same functions and effects will be achieved in the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the gate member 2600. . According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the center accessory 2500 attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, a plurality of In addition, since the plurality of mounting parts attached to the game panel 1100 have positioning pins 2505 inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100, the plurality of positioning pins are provided. 2505, the center accessory 2500 can be positioned at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100, and the center accessory can be accurately positioned at a desired position within the game area 5a. Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error in the center accessory 2500 or an assembly error in the pachinko machine 1, the center accessory 2500 can be mounted at a desired position within the gaming area 5a with high accuracy. In the center accessory 2500, two sets of attachment parts are provided symmetrically with respect to the center line CL of the advantageous part (here, the first starting port 2004) where the player in the gaming area 5a has an advantage. Therefore, even if the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 expand and contract and deform due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the centers of the two sets of attachment parts are maintained on the center line CL of the first starting port 2004. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the central discharge part 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 from being misaligned with respect to the first starting port 2004, and also to prevent the intended Changes in the game can be avoided, the player can enjoy the game without feeling uncomfortable, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In other words, since the central discharge part 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 can be accurately positioned directly above the first starting opening 2004, the game ball B discharged from the central discharge part 2513a of the stage 2513 is The probability of acceptance into the starting port 2004 can be within the intended range, and variations among pachinko machines 1 (gaming boards 5) can be reduced as much as possible. The game ball B released from the ball B can be received into the first starting port 2004 with the intended acceptance probability, and the player can be entertained as intended and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since a plurality of mounting portions consisting of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided on the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 along the game panel 1100, when attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, By pressing the front surface of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 is provided toward the game panel 1100 side, the positioning pin 2505 can be easily inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100. At this time, since the positioning pin 2505 is provided so as to avoid the rear of the front plate part (for example, center left front plate 2527) that is spaced forward from the flange part 2502, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, , when inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the operator can press the front side of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward from the front. , the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, and strong force will not be applied to the front plate, so damage to the front plate can be avoided. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed. Then, by inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from moving or rising with respect to the game panel 1100. This makes it possible to simplify the assembly process and suppress increases in costs, and even when the mounting screws are screwed in and tightened, the center accessory 2500 does not move slightly. , the center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to a predetermined position on the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

Furthermore, since the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the root of the positioning pin 2505 in the center accessory 2500, the root of the positioning pin 2505 is located at the bottom of the groove portion 2506 in front of the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 (flange portion 2502). Therefore, even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 is rounded, the part of the positioning pin 2505 on the rear side of the center accessory 2500 will not become thicker, and the thickness of the effective range of the positioning pin 2505 ( The positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 until the front surface of the game panel 1100 comes into contact with the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. Furthermore, even if a burr is formed on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the burr is accommodated in the groove 2506, so that the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 (flange portion 2502) It is possible to prevent burrs from being caught between the positions, and the positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117. For this reason, the positioning effect of the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably exerted, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, as described above, even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 is rounded, the thickened part due to the radius is moved forward from the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 (flange part 2502) due to the presence of the groove part 2506. Therefore, the thick part at the base of the positioning pin 2505 may cause the insertion into the positioning hole 1117 to be incomplete, resulting in a gap between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500. There isn't. In addition, since the burr occurring on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100 can be accommodated in the groove 2506, the burr can There is no gap between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the center accessory 2500 will not be attached to the game panel 1100 with a gap created between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1100 will not be attached to the center accessory 2500. is not rattling.

Furthermore, since the groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the locating pin 2505, when the center accessory 2500 is injection molded, the locating pin 2505 can Due to the difference in plate thickness due to the presence of , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks in which the front side of the flange portion 2502 in front of the positioning pin 2505 is depressed when the molten resin hardens.

In addition, since a plurality of mounting portions consisting of a set of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided on the seat portion 2507 that protrudes stepwise rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502, the center accessory 2500 can be used for games. When attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, the seat portion 2507 comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, so that a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 excluding the seat surface portion 2507. Therefore, when the center accessory 2500 is injection molded, even if the rear surface (flange portion 2502) of the center accessory 2500 is wavy, the unevenness due to the waving can be absorbed by the gap, and the seat surface portion 2507 The center accessory 2500 can be attached in good condition to the front of the game panel 1100 via the center accessory 2500.

Furthermore, since the seat portion 2507 is provided with a mounting hole 2504 and a positioning pin 2505, even if the expansion/contraction rate of the center accessory 2500 differs from the game panel 1100 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the seat portion 2507 between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 can absorb (accommodate) the distortion of the center accessory 2500 due to the difference in expansion and contraction between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the center accessory 2500 can be The accessory 2500 can be reliably attached.

In addition, since the seat portion 2507 is provided with a mounting portion consisting of a mounting hole 2504 and a positioning pin 2505, if the center accessory 2500 is made transparent, the teardrop-shaped external shape of the seat portion 2507 can be viewed from the front side. Therefore, when attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, the position of the attachment hole 2504 can be easily grasped by the seat portion 2507, and the effort required for attachment can be made easier.

In addition, since the flange part 2502 of the center accessory 2500 has mounting holes 2504, etc., by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel 1100 (screw hole 1116) through the mounting hole 2504 and tightening it, the rear surface of the flange part 2502 can be tightened. can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, the frictional resistance between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 becomes higher, and the center accessory 2500 is moved in the direction along the surface of the game panel 1100. It can be made difficult to move, and the center accessory 2500 can be more firmly attached to the game panel 1100. In addition, since the flange portion 2502 is provided along the game panel 1100, the strength and rigidity of the center accessory 2500 is increased by the peripheral wall portion 2501 extending in the direction intersecting the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500. can be increased. For this reason, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the center accessory 2500 provided in the gaming area 5a, it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from moving or deforming. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably perform an intended game using a center accessory 2500, entertain players, and suppress a decline in interest.

[17. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 203 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 195, and FIG. 197 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be explained.

[17-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a random number for reach determination used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on a symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol or small win symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the hit type), a symbol initial value determination random number, etc. used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number, etc. Provided. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2005 to accept game balls, and this normal symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used to determine the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers and the like for variable display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and then performs a random number circuit at high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

Note that in this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at power-on, or when the main control side power-on process described later, various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU are The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the information as numerical values and calculating the sum is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, for example, when the main control MPU retrieves the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM and clears the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. The initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. There is. In other words, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure is that once the ID code is memorized, it cannot be rewritten even with an external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the data, and the second security measure is to prevent the data from being analyzed.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally acquire game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous power outage is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate 2002 at each predetermined interval, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2005 by opening and closing the movable piece. Unable to generate gaming state.

[17-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 195 and 196. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, we will use the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register (described as "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU can be performed normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S12, the main control MPU performs a power outage clearing process (step S14). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done.

Following step S14, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S16). In this determination, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is to be cleared and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated.

In the determination of step S16, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S20). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, including game information related to games such as unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase various types of information, including information indicating the value of a counter, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when various types of information are to be erased, and to a value of 0 when various types of information are not to be erased. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is an input of the power outage warning signal, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that no power outage warning signal is input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not to be erased. In step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not to be deleted, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM during main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

In the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU stores the main control built-in RAM at the time of power restoration. A work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device) and then returned to normal state.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) is successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU determines that when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, it is determined that various information is to be deleted, or in the determination of step S30, the main control MPU When the control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0). That is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU performs this by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Note that the main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU uses the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch to instruct RAM clear, and when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply When the timeout process has not been completed normally, a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU and updates a random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Perform initial value derivation processing to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of Set to random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value of 0.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, at a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware, so the random number is input to the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU. Settings such as latching and acquisition are performed, and settings such as activation of the built-in hardware random number circuit for the main control are set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical value range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values one after another without duplication. Note that when the main control MPU obtains a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hardware The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. A status command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are created and sent as transmission information to the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out various information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this various information. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as mentioned above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. Ru. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, a random number that is not related to winning/losing determination (hit determination) is updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an input of a power outage warning signal. If the power outage warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including gaming information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S14 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals being output to the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the second attacker solenoid 2652, etc. Step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing, and then executes the main control side power-on processing again. . In other words, since the main control side power off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum value calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset and restarts. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will definitely occur, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on process is performed.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2. DC +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V, so that the power supply to the island of the game hall is cut off. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main processing on the main control side or timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. When the power from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time waiting process of step S22, the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted) is 2.5 seconds), and if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the electric charge charged in is applied as DC +5V, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side, which will be described later, Even if the timer interrupt process is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process may not be completed. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall, and the RAM is forcibly stored in the built-in RAM of the main control even if the staff such as the staff member at the game hall does not express their intention to clear the RAM. There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information that is currently available must be erased (cleared).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is being input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. When this becomes impossible, the main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed. It is possible to prevent various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) from being updated, and checksum calculation results can be prevented from being updated. It is designed so that no fluctuation occurs. As a result, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when the main control board 1310 is restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine Even if the power to the main control MPU is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. The main control board performs the main control side power-off process, which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can complete the calculation, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is never initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby updating the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the processing immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal is being input. If the power outage warning signal is being input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is made. By repeating the steps above, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and time measurement is started again. By not being able to start, the main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

By forcibly resetting the main control MPU by the main control built-in WDT using software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls A mechanism has been adopted that can avoid updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.). In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment The contents of the main controller built-in RAM (gaming information, By configuring the system by dividing it into two parts: a part covered by hardware, and a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) will not be changed at all. , to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this information, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output at power-on are created and sent to the main control as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2632 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. . Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2632 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. The problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on is not set to reserve the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen in a jackpot game state (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 controls the display of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and When the second attacker solenoid 2652 is driven and the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 are opened by the opening/closing member, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and when the power is restored afterwards, the main control board 131 is restored to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. As a result, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is started, and the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 shift from the state where they are closed by the opening/closing member to the state where they are opened. It happens.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the gaming state (such as whether or not it is a time saving state) indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. . However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the gaming state indicated by the power-on state command received from Either there is or cannot be displayed at all. That is, for example, a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 and is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 or the second big winning hole sensor 2602, and the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole sensor 2602 detects the ball. Even if the main control board 1310 sends the big winning hole 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control Even though the board 1510 can display the number of game balls that entered the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 on the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the gaming state, It is not possible to display which round (in other words, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state, and restarts the first jackpot. The fact that the winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 shift from the open state to the closed state by the opening and closing member (that is, the round of the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 of the attacker unit When the main control board 1310 sends a jackpot opening 1 closing display command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) in the jackpot gaming state, , that the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 are started to be driven, and the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 shift from the state where they are closed by the opening/closing member to the state where they are opened. (In other words, the main control board 1310 sends a command to display the fifth opening of the big winning hole to instruct the opening of the fifth round of the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 to start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned gaming state to display the screen indicating the start of the 5th round in the jackpot gaming state in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Also, for example, a screen may be displayed to notify the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2005, which is advantageous to the player. While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2632 to open the movable piece and open the second starting port. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the 2005 is in a state where it is open, and the power is restored afterwards, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred, and the start port solenoid 2632 is started to close the movable piece. A transition will be made to a state in which the secondary start port 2005 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2005, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen in the jackpot gaming state on the production display device 1600 based on the gaming state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the game ball can be returned to the display area of The control board 1510 cannot be displayed at all in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine are surprised by the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls are received into the second starting port 2005 immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the game is in a gaming state where the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2005. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game to be played (in other words, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2005) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game cannot be played. There was also the problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 starts driving the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 to restore the first prize opening 2006 and the second prize opening. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the prize opening 2007 is transitioning from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member, the peripheral control board 1510 can notify that this is the fourth round of the jackpot game state. Although the specified screen (that is, the screen indicating what round it is) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is a jackpot game state and the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 starts to drive, and a screen informs you that the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 are opened by the opening/closing member (for example, ``It's a jackpot. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big prize opening. After the power is restored, it is possible to instruct a game in which a game ball is placed in the first grand prize opening 2006 or the second grand prize opening 2007, and for example, in the example described above, a game ball is placed in the second starting hole 2005. When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored after a momentary power outage occurs while the game state is such that the player can accept the game state and the game state is advantageous to the player, the start port solenoid A screen informing you that the second starting port 2005 has been opened by starting to drive the movable piece 2632 and opening the second starting port 2005 (for example, ``The movable piece is open. There is no game ball in the second starting port. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2005 after the power is turned off.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the process is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command categorized as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball at power-on are generated. Only three commands, namely the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands first send a power-on status command, then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on. A counter notification command for information output determination is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device for the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on status command is used when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is Information that instructs when clearing is to be performed, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage), the time-saving information described above is provided. The pachinko machine consists of information indicating which gaming state to return to, out of the state and the non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

When creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is determined based on which work's copyright it corresponds to. What kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a game specification in which the number of changes of special symbols is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) )), it is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as a so-called ST machine) are such that a probability change occurs in a state where

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line.

Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached to the game board 5 a main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine.

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[17-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 195 and 196.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 197 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks, each consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to a variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU receives, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, a detection signal from the general winning a prize hole sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2401. Signal, detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2525 and second big winning hole sensor 2602, detection signal from the V winning hole sensor 2603, detection signal from the losing hole sensor 2604, detection signal from the out sensor 664, magnetism A detection signal from the sensor 1030, an operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are received from the payout control board 633, which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the command. The payer ACK signals are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting port winning command classified as others is sent as transmission information and is sent to the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2401, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when this switch input processing is started, the state in which input is being input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is , are each read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if the game ball did not enter.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is checked from the first to the third time. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the two readings and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to avoid false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to Detection signals from the big winning hole sensor 2525 and the second big winning hole sensor 2602, detection signals from the V winning hole sensor 2603, detection signals from the losing hole sensor 2604, detection signals from the out sensor 664, and detection signals from the magnetic sensor 1030. Payer ACK from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the detection signal, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. Signal reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone vacant terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, so that the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which vacant terminal processing has been applied is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that is being processed as an empty terminal is not LOW, it displays a notification indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuits of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the symbol random number mentioned above is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the initial value determination random number for the symbol and the small The random number for determining the initial value for the winning symbol is also updated. These symbol initial value determination random numbers and small hit symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, thereby further enhancing randomness. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to winning/losing determination (hit/losing determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for hit determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are the non-winning random number in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The update process and the win/fail random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process that is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven, and the next interrupt If the number of executions of the non-winning random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the timer is generated, the initial value determining random number for the symbol and the small winning A mechanism may be adopted in which the random number for determining the initial value for symbols is updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first grand prize opening 2006 or the second grand prize opening 2007, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the game ball scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is created. Since the number of balls has reached 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to output to convey that fact, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board. 633, or if the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the payout control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A self-check command for checking the connection state is created and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In order to convey this fact, a main prize pitch number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read from the input information storage area mentioned above, that is, the general prize opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2004 provided on the game board 5. , the second starting hole 2005, and various winning holes such as the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5"). The number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted based on the number of balls, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. It has become. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of , and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. (In other words, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), create a main prize ball number information output command to convey that fact, and send it as the transmission information. In addition to storing the value in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of pitches is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave emission (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave emission") is being carried out, the value of the radio wave emission counter is incremented by 1. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio waves have been emitted during the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display notifying that the radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the state is not a jackpot game state, a detection signal from the first jackpot sensor 2525 or the second jackpot sensor 2602 is detected. is input (when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007), create a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, It is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. The random number is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery") and updates the symbol random number.The value of the counter is taken out and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance according to the jackpot type or small win type. It is determined whether or not the winning type matches any of the winning type determination values (determining the winning type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect are created, while the judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the second starting port sensor 2401. , create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and determine the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for the fluctuation display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is changed so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display command, jackpot opening 1 closing display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2642 or the second Set the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2652, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times the first grand prize opening 2006 and the second grand prize opening 2007 change from the closed state to the open state (round) is twice, sets the output of a lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp so that the 2nd round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 lights up, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information, When there are 15 rounds, the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp is set so that the 15th round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is lit, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area. , the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to indicate whether or not time saving has occurred in a predetermined color, and the output is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment mentioned above is extracted and is stored in the main control as normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

This normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is arranged in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning slot winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. Shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening winning information. The regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage is shifted to the 0th compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage, and the regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the first compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage. The second section and the third section for storing the winning information of the normal winning opening are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is held and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. In order to light up the hold display, the output of the lighting signal for the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the normal winning hole winning process, the normal winning hole winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read normal winning hole winning information, and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece is to be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the movable piece is in the open operation state, resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received into the variable prize opening 2003, and a gaming state advantageous to the player. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization performance are created, and the transmission information described above is stored as the transmission information. At the same time, the output information is set to output a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and sent. In addition to storing the information in the transmission information storage area, the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2632 is set to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, while the extracted normal When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. , creates various commands related to the common pattern synchronization performance, stores them in the above-mentioned sending information storage area as sending information, and lights up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause the function display unit 1400 to do so, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, the main control MPU sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633. or outputs a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2642 and second attacker solenoid 2652 that open and close the opening and closing members of the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 when in the jackpot game state. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2632 that opens and closes the movable piece, it also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, Various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal, are output to the payout control board 633.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, detection signals from the first big winning hole sensor 2525 and the second big winning hole sensor 2602 when a game ball entering the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 is detected) (Based on the big winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the big winning opening counting command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization performance, and classified as related to ordinary electric role performance. Various commands, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test-related, and various other commands classified as others (for example, when the main control board 1310 Every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes provided in A main prize ball count information output command, etc. that instructs to transmit the number of balls to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 is stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V DC to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. is now possible. When powering on the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs after the power is turned on, the data is sent at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 196. In order to notify that the power has been restored, a power-on state command categorized as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are set to notify that the power has been restored. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial data consists of the status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on, are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main prize ball count information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various information is read out from the game backup information and the data is stored according to this various information. In some cases, various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among the various information, the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on are sent. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, by restarting time measurement by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU does not have to be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command instructs the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, and the second attacker solenoid 2652, which are the electrical drive sources, by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. can be output to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 196, the main control board 1310 uses the main control internal RAM Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area of A main control return destination command when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine is performed. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main serial data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which constitute the main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be displayed in effect. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage is restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the destination of the return of the game progress by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, which prevents the system of the pachinko machine 1 from being in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from seeing something and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50 of the same process shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when the power is turned on. A state in which only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process as main serial data in the order of Then, when the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is sent to the inspection equipment of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information is output. A determination counter notification command is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[18. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 201. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 198, and FIG. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained.

[18-1. Payout control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 198 to 200. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power outage notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is determined that it is not an instruction to clear the RAM. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in , and the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs settings to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, it is possible to access the payout control built-in RAM, and, for example, write (storage) or read payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not to be deleted, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value has been stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU uses the payout control built-in RAM as the power restoration. A work area is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 0, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and when the power is restored, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas, etc. (for example, the prize information stored in the prize ball information storage area, Ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area; Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (inconsistency counter reset judgment time, etc.) stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match. When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the dispensing control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2ms, which will be described later.When 2ms has passed, the value is 1, and when 2ms has not passed, the value is 0. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU receives the input power failure notice signal. Determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2ms have elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544 ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this various information, various signals are outputted from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area includes, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received from the main control board 1310, and drive control for the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the number of balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558). Each time the ball is put out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is provided to determine whether or not to output the prize ball number information. The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, a counter for outputting prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The memory is updated by adding to the value the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the read value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, the CR connection signal, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands sent in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jamming state has occurred due to the dispensing blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing time such as the ball outage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and put out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the discrepancy between the number of balls detected and the number of balls detected in Performs time management of the conditions and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball jam judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jam judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is the value By setting it to 0, the ball jam judgment time is accurately measured. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, various information stored in the various information storage areas. etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc.) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

Through this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power outage or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. to the values immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. As a result, even if you are unable to continue the putting-out operation due to a momentary power outage or power outage while the putting-out device 580 is performing the putting-out operation of game balls, the putting-out operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. will be maintained when the power is restored. The values are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage can be continued from the time power is restored, and game balls can continue to be paid out. ing.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit exchange various signals, even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, when the power is restored, the exchange will be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or stoppage. This prevents various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the influence of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is used for payout control. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as a part of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. Based on this, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is an abnormal operation. It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gag operation determination setting process, As a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power restoration, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. output to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state will be restored when the power is restored, so it can be done very quickly after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal can be outputted to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, and the payout device 580 is sent to the CR unit. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a wasteful ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the PRDY While the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to convey that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible. output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the CR unit. The logic state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and is communicated with the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball checking process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is stored in the game ball based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full or not, and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. to determine whether or not the For example, to determine whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls or not by using the current fullness and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns OFF in the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the full tank sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and out of bulb check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating the fact is stored in the status information storage area.

The current full and out of ball check process also uses the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is OFF during the previous full charge and out-of-bulb check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, measurement of the above-mentioned ball outage determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the out-of-ball judgment time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball judgment time is reached, check whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and a ball cut to that effect is sent. While the information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. Ball-out information that conveys this fact is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information that conveys the fact is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, there is a connection error that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area mentioned above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, rental ball, ball removal, and ball holding are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and is stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned ball outage information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball outage information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the corresponding Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command sending process, various types of information are read from the status information storage area mentioned above, and various commands classified into status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created based on this various information. and transmits it to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 It creates a command and sends it to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, in step S546 the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, in step S548 port output processing is performed, in step S550 port input processing is performed, and in step S552 performs timer update processing in step S554, performs CR communication processing in step S556, performs full tank and bulb out check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control section main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. There is. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures enough processing time to perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned payout information from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. Note that the processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and subsequently, in step S528, it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[18-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 198 to 200.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saved) the register, as shown in FIG. 201 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described main processing of the payout control unit is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control section timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2ms, and the value is 1 when 2ms have passed, and the value is 0 when 2ms have not passed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). In this return, the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is switched to a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control section main processing, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control section timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[19. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, we will explain the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and then we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the priority of interrupt processing is set to the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The order is set as V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[19-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 202. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 202. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, the process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing described later, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs commands related to control of game effects, which are output from the main control board 1310. The pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 and the status of the pachinko machine 1.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that it is ready to accept screen data (information that defines the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the above. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), it returns to step S1006 and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the performance operation unit 300, Touch and press the touch operation section 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 373 and the elevation detection sensor 374 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). 303, etc. (for example, contact history information on the touch operation section 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and operation history information on the press operation section 303) etc.) is set, monitors the presence or absence of contact with the touch operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the state of the operation in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the production operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the production operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of an LED used as direct light, the brightness of an LED used as indirect light, and Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 to change the 31st brightness from the 1st specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. When you set a specified brightness value that extends up to the specified value, you can now update the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the specified brightness value is set. ing.

Here, the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table will be briefly explained. The specified brightness value can be set to one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out) to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, respectively. The player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 to set one specified brightness value ranging from the first specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. Can be done.

For example, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228, the current brightness is set to the 0th (zero) brightness, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). When the brightness is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the specified value, a predetermined numerical formula (for example, linear or a spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher. When operating on the "-" side and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a straight line or a spline curve-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 to select the desired brightness, the selected desired brightness is confirmed (after selecting the desired brightness, press the press operation section 303) ). In addition, in this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress. , etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 (and operating the press operation section 303). In addition, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates a light amount adjustment button 228 at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness value is displayed. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image the desired brightness level of the player (or the staff such as a clerk at the game hall). It is now possible to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normally, the palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. be. Normally, the palette value is selected from 17 stages in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%), and the brightness described above is selected. The pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation among the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designation values mentioned above. (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the brightness specified value mentioned above. This is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are irradiated with direct light, the palette The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in a light guide plate that is irradiated with indirect light. The special palette value differs from the normal palette value in that there is only one level, and it is one of the 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values mentioned above. Palette values corresponding to the brightness designation are set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value that is set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light using indirect light at the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one specified brightness value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. When setting the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) controls the brightness of the LED used as direct light by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 (and press operation section 303). While the brightness is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified brightness value, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) using the light amount adjustment button 228 (and pressing operation). The brightness is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value operated by the unit 303). As a result, when a player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and operates the light amount adjustment button 228 (and press operation section 303) to reduce the brightness, the direct light Set the brightness of the LED used as the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)), and Then, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). , the lowest brightness that allows the light guide plate to visually recognize the state in which it emits light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, in contrast to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the lighting mode that follows the flow of the performance, and the flow of the performance depending on the lighting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After looking at this, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative board that is too bright (or the effect would be better achieved with a slightly darker brightness), and set the other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative board, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (light amount adjustment button 228 (and press operation section 303)) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one brightness specified value is set up to the 31st brightness specified value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the first brightness specified value will be set for a specific decorative board. On the other hand, for other decorative boards, one brightness specification value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set respectively, so the relationship between the mutually set lighting modes (bright, The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without disturbing the relationship (or dark).

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (in other words, independent from the normal palette values) are required for LEDs used as indirect light. You can now set the brightness. As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by special palette values, and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by normal palette values. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. (one frame worth) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This can prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames will occur, the vibration speaker, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main frame speaker 622 and the like (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to performances using sound effects such as music and sound effects that match various performances.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, it is necessary to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is used to indicate which light emitting data is to be output from the first light emitting data among the light emitting data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode. Update.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used instructs other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that was originally supposed to be used.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the various received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the performance. Random numbers (for example, random numbers used for effects related to pending prefetching) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM. (Extract) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as part of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emitting modes from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 (and the press operation section 303) to change the 31st brightness specification from the first brightness specification value to the maximum brightness as described above. If you set a specified brightness value that extends up to the specified brightness value, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the specified brightness value is set. ing.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation display such as a variation display of decorative symbols on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. command, a symbol memory command that is output when the starting pending number changes, or a grand prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted into the first major winning opening 2006 or the second major winning opening 2007. The system analyzes the current state of the game and recognizes the current gaming state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the received command analysis processing. Analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands related to jackpot, various commands classified to power on, and general commands. Various commands classified as figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as normal electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, etc. There are various other types of commands. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process regarding notices etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery results, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Note that the peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, and the like. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data for generating light emission modes for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating production sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for instructing in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification display, the abnormality display mode is set to execute various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update process, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date will be updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is transferred to the peripheral control ROM. It is read out from (extracted from) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. (one frame worth) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is adjusted based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and outputs the output set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Output sound data from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the voltage is changed from 0 to 0. It is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the sound source is output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from here. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It looks like this.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values.

Specifically, for the performance sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined during a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable pattern command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the peripheral control unit received the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern has elapsed. ) can be adjusted by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example operates for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command and the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, or after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative pattern. By operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch can be applied to the board during the sound data creation process. The volume is converted into 7 levels of values from 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume and setting the board volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC are Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is In fact, the volume is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, and this amplified performance sound is serialized. and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is amplified to the master volume value. The volume of the sound coming from the top side speaker 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually adjusted to the top center of the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4 amplify the volume up to the master volume value, and serialize this amplified performance sound and output it as audio data, and use it as notification sound. For this, the volume is adjusted based on the sound data of the notification sound built into the track being used and the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track being used. The maximum volume without depending on The amplified notification sound is amplified to a master volume value corresponding to the volume of the sound coming from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, if the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, a problem may occur in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control that plays a notification sound to notify the hall staff of the fraudulent activity against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is installed is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is Combines the sound data of the incorporated track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track embedded with the notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound. , the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared to the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. The amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. At this time, the performance sound is muted, so it does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, but the performance sound is as described above. The process is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute will be changed to the sub-board volume that was adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch. The volume value is set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub volume of the adjusted effect sound is The sound is set to a volume value), and is output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the pachinko machine 1 or When a notification sound is played to notify the hall staff of fraudulent activity on the machine 1, the volume of the performance sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame. 4, but this muted production sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound is output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. 462, when the sound stops flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, the performance sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but after the notification sound starts playing, it continues for a predetermined period of time. The flow starts again from the point at which the sound generation schedule data has progressed up to the elapsed point.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral control by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. It is now possible to control and adjust the sound source of the IC. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an employee such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers will be reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when a player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff such as clerks at the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or a fraudulent act by a player.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Copy it to the backup area for regular processing and back it up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to the value 1, and in step S1010, 1ms interrupt timer activation processing is started. , performs each process in steps S1014, . Become. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is sent from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, and which is executed upon input to the CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[19-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the peripheral control IC is ready to accept screen data from the CPU. I will explain about it. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, as shown in FIG. 203 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 202 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC continues to perform the normal processing. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB - Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing that is currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 202. In order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing in this routine is informed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 0 in step S1038 in the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine By transmitting the information to the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing. It is determined whether the execution has been completed or not. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes approximately 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 202. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[19-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 202. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. 204 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 202. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before it is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is smaller than 33, it adds a value of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (increments step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various presentation units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a moving body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Understand the movable position by setting or obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, contact operation unit 302, operation history information of the press operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It is possible to obtain whether or not the touch operation section 302 has been touched or whether the press operation section 303 has been operated from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation section 301, the volume of the performance sound output from the vibration speaker, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted. It is also possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the performance from step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 202, various processes related to the effect from step S1014 to step S1032 are executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the state of progress of the performance by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the state of progress of the performance by the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[19-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send the main circuit serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 205 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives information of 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, one byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the mode, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC selects a mode when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the status is still the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. , and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is the value 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, have been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data among the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a favorable environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the sum value (sum value), and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main frequency serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to different from normal main frequency serial data due to the influence of noise. can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status is assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period in which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is immediately terminated.

[19-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input. If it is determined, this routine is immediately terminated, while if it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control section power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is this routine, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the power saving process. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off the lights of various LEDs. By suppressing this, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control section command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clearing process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. Determine whether In other words, it continues to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been inputted indefinitely. By continuing to make the determination indefinitely in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312, it will no longer be able to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if it is determined in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and clears the peripheral control IC. The CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 202 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage notice signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power outage occurs. It is designed so that it does not take too long. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is now possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first detects the detection by the first starting port sensor 3002, as shown in FIG. 207. Under the condition that the signal is in the ON state (ball has entered the first starting port 2004) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the first RAM. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in the special symbol retention storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2005) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", 15R A process for controlling opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2006 is executed according to the jackpot game state. In addition, when the mode suggests a "5R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2006 according to the 5R jackpot gaming state, and when the mode suggests a "2R jackpot" Then, a process is executed to control opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2006 according to the 2R jackpot game state.

In the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the first jackpot 2006, each setting process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect, and the 2R jackpot game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops changing during the time-saving state becomes a mode that suggests a "2R jackpot". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot gaming state based on a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and non-time saving state. . Then, the time saving flag is activated when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter reaches "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 218 (described later) or the second special symbol stop (not shown) is activated. Reset during processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time saving state continues, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of times the time saving state continues is set. The time saving counter counts down every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the counter value reaches 0, but the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches 0. Sometimes, it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 218, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

In addition, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, it is determined whether the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S236), and the small hit execution flag is set. If set, a small win control process (step S236A) for controlling the small win gaming state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests a "small win", A process is executed to control the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2007 according to the small winning game state, and the game balls accepted into the second big winning opening 2007 are distributed to the V winning opening 2008 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603. When this happens, the game is controlled to shift to a 15R jackpot game state.

In addition, if neither the jackpot execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set, the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the reservation storage area is not "0" (step S237), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is changed. A second special symbol process process including this lottery process is executed (step S239). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. 208, In step S241, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as the type of variation pattern is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first hold memory. At the same time, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command for instructing the first pending memory number (first pending number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance advance determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S241 described above or the random number acquired in step S251 described later, specifically, the special random number (first By comparing the special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second special random number), reach random number, and fluctuating random number, it is determined whether there is a jackpot or not, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot. If there is no jackpot, the player specifies whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, or specify the mode type of the game effect to be executed (step S261).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting gate passing process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the 1), and a first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the value of the special reservation number counter), and in the performance pre-judgment process regarding the second special symbol executed in step S255 of the second starting opening passage process, which will be described later, A second special symbol preliminary determination command is set in accordance with the specified preliminary determination information, the acquisition of the second special random number, and the second pending storage number (value of the second special pending number counter) (step S262 ).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 where the starting prize has occurred In addition to the number of reserved memories stored correspondingly, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the starting winning that has occurred is considered a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and the type of jackpot if it is not a jackpot. The peripheral control board 1510 displays preliminary determination information such as whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600 or the mode type of the game effect to be executed before starting variable display according to the starting prize. You will be able to understand the peripheral control ICs installed in the.

Note that when the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

In addition, the reserved storage area (first reserved storage area, second reserved storage area) has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC The determination information is stored in order from the first (earliest) storage area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When a fluctuation pattern command (first fluctuation pattern command, second fluctuation pattern command) that notifies the start of the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is received, the received fluctuation pattern command (first 1st variation pattern command, 2nd variation pattern command), discard the preliminary determination information stored in the 1st storage area of the pending storage area (1st pending storage area, 2nd pending storage area), and Move the preliminary determination information stored in the storage area (N=2 to 4) to the N-1st (N=2 to 4) storage area (move the preliminary determination information stored in the pending storage area shift). Thereby, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of variable display is suspended can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in response to the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2005, then as shown in FIG. 210, In step S251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "4" (step S252). In the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S251. If it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the display device 851, or the mode type (variation) of the game effect to be executed. After executing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as pattern type) is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S255), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory. At the same time, the command for instructing the second pending memory number (second pending number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 2004 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the number of game balls entering the second starting port 2005 is set to "4". The upper limit of the second pending memory number based on the ball being entered is set to "4". In addition, the second starting port 2005 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, the number of second pending memories is reduced. Even if the upper limit is set to "4", if the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed fluctuating continues for a long time, or if the period in which the number of second pending memories is at the upper limit continues for a long time, the second starting port 2005 This prevents the player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to get a chance to win a jackpot even if the game ball enters the ball.

FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). It should be noted that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used for determination are the same. Since only the table and table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode of the first special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process for
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol is displayed as shown in FIG.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed when the power is turned on.

FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 212, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the step As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process of step S302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning or losing the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process ends.

FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table shown in FIG. If the second special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special random number (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 214(A) shows the game state for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)) and when the gaming state is The system includes a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game is in a low probability time saving state) and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability time saving state). . In the low probability hit judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the setting value is 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value is 3. The first special random number wins the jackpot with a probability of 1/299 if the set value is 4, 1/289 if the set value is 5, 1/279 if the set value is 6, and 1/269 if the set value is 6. The first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned losers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is a loss determination value. In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process, in the low probability hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/319, and when the setting value is 2. 1/309 if the setting value is 3, 1/299 if the setting value is 4, 1/289 if the setting value is 5, 1/279 if the setting value is 6, and 1/269 if the setting value is 6. The second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number won the jackpot with a jackpot probability of The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the other second special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are a loss. That is, the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of determining a small hit is higher than that of the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number. and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2005 than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2004. This is considered to be a more advantageous situation for the player. Furthermore, the hit determination table at high probability is configured such that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased ten times as compared to the hit determination table at low probability. In addition, for set values 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities, the hall manager can change the settings by using the setting key to change the settings when the power is turned on. It has become.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of the comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a jackpot (step S312), a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a jackpot is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is ended.

In addition, as a result of comparing the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing), If it is determined that the fluctuation is a small win (step S314), a small win flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a small win is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when neither the jackpot nor the small hit has been won, that is, when it is determined that the winning is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, and a reach determination table that is used when the gaming state is in the non-time-saving state. It is equipped with a reach determination table in the state. In the reach judgment table in the time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach judgment value indicating reaching, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating not reaching. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach judgment table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach judgment table in the time saving state match the reach judgment value indicating reach, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost (step S317) as a result of comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag indicating that the game is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 215, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S321) and whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214(B). The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol (stop symbol of the first special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

in particular,
1. The first big prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol (first special symbol , second special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and the control is controlled to a high probability time saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R surefire jackpot 2. The first big prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol , 2nd special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual 3. The first big prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2006, and it is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, if the jackpot does not occur, the time-saving state is ended, and the 2R If the jackpot game state is controlled to a non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is determined to be one of three types of 2R jackpots which are controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state.

Also, if the jackpot flag is set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, compare the second symbol random number read out in the second special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214(B). The type of jackpot is determined by, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the second special symbol (the stop symbol of the second special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined.

in particular,
1. The first big prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol (first special symbol , second special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and the control is controlled to a high probability time saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R surefire jackpot 2. The first big prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol , 2nd special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual 3. The first big prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2006, and it is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, if the jackpot does not occur, the time-saving state is ended, and the 2R If the jackpot game state is controlled to a non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is determined to be one of three types of 2R jackpots which are controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R jackpot. 92 judgment values are distributed in the case where . That is, when a jackpot lottery result is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability that it will be a 15R jackpot, a 50% probability that it will be a 5R jackpot, and a 46% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 92 judgment values are distributed for a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed for a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R In the case of a jackpot, eight judgment values are distributed. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number yields a jackpot, there is a 46% probability that it will be a 15R variable jackpot, a 50% probability that it will be a 5R jackpot, and a 4% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. . In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of determining a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2005 is executed more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2004. This creates an advantageous situation for the player.

Moreover, when the type of jackpot is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a 2R jackpot, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, if it is determined to be a 5R jackpot, the 5R jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be a 15R jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol. The 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the jackpot flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 reads it in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214(C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

in particular,
1. The opening/closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2007 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the small winning game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2007. , after opening the first grand prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) when the game ball accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 is distributed to the V winning hole 2008 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603. Or, by repeating the opening/closing pattern 14 times to close the first big winning hole sensor 2525 when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning hole 2006, the game balls enter the first big winning hole 2006. It is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible to enter the ball (easy), and after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. 1. First small win that shortens the execution period than usual and controls to a high probability time saving state in which special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual 2. The opening/closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2007 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the small winning game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2007. , after opening the first grand prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) when the game ball accepted into the second grand prize opening 2007 is distributed to the V winning hole 2008 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603. Or, by repeating the opening/closing pattern 14 times to close the first big winning hole sensor 2525 when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning hole 2006, the game balls enter the first big winning hole 2006. If the control is made to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible to enter the ball (easily), and the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be displayed after the jackpot game state ends. ) is controlled to a time-saving state that ends if a jackpot does not occur until the variable display is executed 77 times, and if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state ends. One of the two types of small wins is determined as the second small win, which is later controlled to the normal state.

In addition, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed in the case of the first small win. That is, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 100% probability that the first small win will be won and the second small win will not be won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% probability that it will be a first small win, and a 90% probability that it will be a second small win.

Furthermore, when the type of small hit is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small winning is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a first small hit, the first small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol, and if it is determined to be a second small winning symbol, the second small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol. .

If neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines a losing symbol (step S327). Then, after the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, in which the lottery results (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, out of reach) are selected. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also be an instruction for the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328 ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changes the display from left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol to middle). The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative patterns (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same pattern, are synchronously displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R jackpot from the received judgment result notification command as the mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing, is determined to be a small hit symbol ("Final Battle"), and if a 5R time-saving jackpot is specified, the 5R time-saving jackpot symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same among the symbols "0" to "9") If the combination is determined to be an even numbered symbol), and a 15R probability-variable jackpot is specified, the 15R probability-variable jackpot symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right will be the same odd-numbered symbol among the symbols ``0'' to ``9''). combination). In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the pattern is determined and a miss is identified, it is determined to be a miss symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols), and the variation is determined. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance), the determined stop symbols are controlled to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time-saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times after the jackpot game state. The time saving state may be ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of jackpots have occurred after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if the jackpot game state is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state, and then a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, twice) occurs, the time-saving state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state for the predetermined number of times. , it may be controlled to a normal state. Further, even if the number of jackpot occurrences is less than a predetermined number, the control may be made to be in a non-time saving state during the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 216, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. If it is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit corresponding to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal If it is a loss (a loss without performing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S348), and the surroundings for starting the determined variation pattern are determined. A variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variable time determined in this way.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by comparing the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the fluctuation random number with the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute. . For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state increases.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol variable display control is started, then in step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter where the number of continuations of the time saving state is set is "0". do. If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state control (time saving control) is to be ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point Then, the process moves to step S355. Then, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a miss, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol, which is set to about 1 second in the time shortening state, is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), The special symbol fluctuation pattern is set in such a way that the special symbol fluctuation time information, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . In other words, the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the time saving state is such that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the non-time saving state. Fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, a variable timer in which a variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S282) is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process ends at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the display control is performed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is ended and the non-time-saving control is performed. (normal state control) starts.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game (step S387), and starts the jackpot game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed in which the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to a jackpot number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter reaches "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a specified number of rounds have been executed. Then, the jackpot game is controlled to end. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described later, the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) and the jackpot opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0", and the jackpot opening process (step S402) is repeatedly executed. When the round is ended in the opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1, and based on the fact that it becomes "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process (step S403) and the jackpot game ends. Execute control to

Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time-saving jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time-saving jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. Also, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, jackpot start commands (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time saving jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time saving jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set.

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set when the jackpot game is finished, specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A). Opening/closing control of the first grand prize opening 2006 according to the type (for example, after opening the first grand prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have entered the first grand prize opening 2006 It is reset when the opening/closing control (which repeats the opening/closing pattern that closes when detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2525 2, 5, or 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game) . By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), and the first It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (step S386), and if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates to start a small win game. A small winning start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the small winning game starts (a time for displaying, etc. that the small winning game is to be started) is set in an interval timer (step S392). Then, a small winning execution flag indicating that a small winning game is being executed is set (step S393). Note that the small winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of small winning. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process, similarly, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) 2 small winning start command) is set.

In addition, when the small winning game is finished, the small winning flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is set in the small winning process (step S411) of the small winning control process (step S236A), which will be described later. ), the opening/closing control of the second big prize opening 2007 according to the type of small win (for example, the opening/closing control of repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the second big winning opening 2007 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it twice) is completed. sometimes reset. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in the function display unit 1400. It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if you lose, set the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next variable display of the special symbol starts to be displayed in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process moves to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the state will shift to the jackpot game state based on the state in which the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop varying and display becomes a jackpot symbol. 1510 or the start of the next round (step S401)
2. The first big winning hole 2006 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the state when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a jackpot symbol, or the first big winning hole 2006 is controlled to be open based on the start of the next round. is controlled to be in an open state, and the first grand prize opening 2006 is left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or the first grand prize opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first grand prize opening 2006. Big winning opening opening process to close when detected (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for jackpot opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state ends when all rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, in the above-mentioned big winning hole opening process (step S402), at the start of the round that controls the first big winning hole 2006 to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big winning hole is set. At the end of the round in which the mouth 2006 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game performance according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is performed using a device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker, and the like.

[20. Pachinko machine with small hit rush 1]
[20-1. Specifications of Pachinko machine 1 in this chapter]
The specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be explained below. Hereinafter, the first special symbol will also be referred to as special symbol 1, and the second special symbol will also be referred to as special symbol 2. In addition, the first special symbol variation is also called the variation of the special symbol 1, the second special symbol variation is also referred to as the variation of the special symbol 2, and the variations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are collectively referred to as simply variations.

FIGS. 220 and 221 are examples of tables showing the winning probability of the pachinko machine 1 and the distribution of the winning symbols of the special symbols 1 and 2 in this chapter. All of these tables are stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example.

FIG. 220(a) is a table showing the probability of winning in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. According to FIG. 220(a), in both the variations of special drawings 1 and 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 2048/65536, and the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1600/65536. In addition, in both the variations of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the small hit probability in the high probability state and low probability state is 63488/65536. In addition, in both the variations of special drawings 1 and 2, the winning probability in the high probability state is 0/65536 (that is, no winning is possible in the high probability state), and the winning probability in the low probability state is 448/ It is 65536.

FIG. 220(b) is an example of the jackpot random number pattern table of special drawing 1, and FIG. 221(c) is an example of the jackpot random number pattern table of special drawing 2. When the normal symbols in FIGS. 220(b) and 221(c) are won, a jackpot game starts, and when the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a low probability state. Furthermore, when a specific symbol is won and the jackpot game ends, the system is controlled to a high probability state. Hereinafter, a jackpot due to winning a regular symbol will also be referred to as a normal jackpot, and a jackpot due to winning a specific symbol will also be referred to as a variable jackpot. According to FIGS. 220(b) and 221(c), in both special symbols 1 and 2, 40% of the jackpots won are regular symbols and 60% are specific symbols.

Also, according to FIG. 220(b) and FIG. 221(c), all the jackpots of special drawings 1 and 2 are two-round jackpots, and in pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, even if a jackpot is won, a small amount of You can only get balls. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the high probability non-time-saving game state is a so-called small win rush state, and the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter can mainly increase the number of balls put out in this state. In other words, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (details will be described later, but if you play the game with the right hand), the frequency of occurrence of the small winning game of special drawing 2 per unit time is higher than in other gaming states. This is an advantageous state in which it is easy to obtain the game ball B by increasing the price (the expected number of balls to be obtained per fluctuation is the highest).

FIG. 221(d) is an example of the small hit random number pattern table of the special drawing 1, and FIG. 221(e) is an example of the small winning random number pattern table of the special drawing 2. When you win the small winning symbols of special drawings 1 and 2, a small winning game starts, and even if the small winning game ends, the gaming state before the start of the small winning game is maintained (that is, in a low probability state) If a small win is won, the small win game is controlled to be in a low probability state even after the small win game ends, and if a small win is won in a high probability state, the small win game is controlled to be in a high probability state even after the small win game ends). According to FIGS. 221(d) and 221(e), there is only one type of small winning symbol in both special drawing 1 and special drawing 2.

FIG. 222 is a transition diagram showing an example of the game state transition of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter. FIG. 222 shows an example of state transitions when playing a game using a normal gaming method, and detailed state transitions are omitted.

In the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the game ball is entered into the first starting slot 2004 by hitting to the left, and the game is played by receiving a special lottery based on special drawing 1 (hereinafter also referred to as the first special lottery). conduct. In a low probability non-time-saving game state, if a probability variable jackpot (no ceiling) that is part of a probability variable jackpot is won, the game shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state without a ceiling after the jackpot game ends. The high probability time-saving gaming state without a ceiling is a state in which the time-saving gaming state continues unless a jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, if a probability-variable jackpot (ceiling set) that is part of the probability-variable jackpot is won, the game shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state with a ceiling after the end of the jackpot game. A high-probability time-saving gaming state with a ceiling means that even if you do not win the jackpot, the time-saving gaming state ends when a predetermined number of fluctuations end or a predetermined number of small winning games end, and you can play a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. It is a state of transition from state to state. Although not shown, even if you win a normal jackpot (no time saving) that is part of the normal jackpot in the first special symbol variation in a low probability non-time saving game state, after the end of the jackpot game. A low probability non-time saving gaming state is maintained.

In addition, in the small winning game and the jackpot game of special drawing 1, since the first big prize opening 2006 is opened, the game is played by hitting the so-called left hand. However, although there is an extremely high probability of winning the small hit of special drawing 1, the details will be described later, but in the small winning game of special drawing 1, the opening time of the first big prize opening 2006 is extremely short and it is difficult to enter the game ball B. Since it is extremely difficult to make the ball hit, it is virtually impossible to get the ball out.

In the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the game ball is entered into the first starting hole 2004 by hitting the left hand, and the game is played after receiving the first special lottery. I do. In the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), even if the game ball B enters the gate 2002 by hitting to the left, the same result as in the low-probability non-time-saving game state In the normal symbol lottery, there is only an extremely low probability of winning (for example, 1/256), and furthermore, the opening time of the variable prize opening door 2521 is short (for example, 0.076 seconds) as in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. , compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, the difficulty level (ball entry rate) of entering the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 does not decrease significantly and is almost the same.

When a normal jackpot (no time saving) is won in a high probability time saving game state (no ceiling), the game shifts to a low probability non time saving gaming state after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if a variable probability jackpot (ceiling set) is won in the high probability time saving game state (no ceiling), the game shifts to the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling) after the end of the jackpot game. Although not shown in the figure, even if you win a variable jackpot (no ceiling) in the high probability time saving game state (no ceiling), the high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling) will continue after the end of the jackpot game. maintained.

When a normal jackpot (no time saving) is won in a high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), the game shifts to a low probability non time saving gaming state. Furthermore, if a variable probability jackpot (no ceiling) is won in the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling), the game shifts to the high probability time saving gaming state (without ceiling) after the end of the jackpot game. Although not shown, even if a variable probability jackpot (ceiling set) is won in the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling) is maintained.

In addition, in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), if a probability variable jackpot (ceiling set) is won, the ceiling number of times according to the winning symbol of the probability variable jackpot is reset. In addition, in the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), if you win a variable jackpot (ceiling set) and the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling) starts again, the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling and the remaining number of small winning fluctuations. The state immediately before the probability variable jackpot (ceiling set) game starts may be inherited.

In the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), when the predetermined number of fluctuations or the predetermined number of small winning fluctuations end (hereinafter also referred to as reaching the ceiling), the time saving gaming state ends and the high probability non Transition to time-saving gaming state. As mentioned above, the high probability non-time-saving gaming state is a so-called small winning rush state, and the player can obtain a large number of balls.

In addition, if you win a probability variable jackpot (direct rush) that is part of the probability variable jackpot in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling), and the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), After the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, but the percentage of jackpots that are variable jackpots (direct rush) is extremely low (for example, 0.5% of jackpots in the low-probability state, 5% of the jackpots in the probability state).

Although the details will be described later, a variable probability jackpot (direct rush) means that even if you win in a low probability non-time saving gaming state, a high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling), and a high probability time saving gaming state (with a ceiling), there is a high probability. This is a jackpot symbol that transitions to a probability non-time saving gaming state. For example, even if you win in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, you cannot move to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, but if you win in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), you will not be able to move to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. There are also jackpot symbols that transition to a probability non-time-saving gaming state (that is, the jackpot symbol is a variable-probability jackpot that is not a direct rush in a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, but in a high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling) and a high probability In the time-saving gaming state (with a ceiling), it is a surefire jackpot (direct rush).

Therefore, in order to move to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state and get a lot of balls, it is necessary to move to a high-probability time-saving gaming state (with a ceiling) and reach the ceiling without hitting the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state. This is the main migration route.

Further, as mentioned above, since all jackpot games have two rounds, the player can only get a small amount of balls depending on the jackpot game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), the player expects to win a variable jackpot (with ceiling), and in the high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling), it is possible to provide a new game experience in which the player expects not to win the jackpot.

If you win a regular jackpot (with time savings) that is part of the regular jackpot in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling), and the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), you will win the corresponding jackpot game. After the end of the game, the game enters a low probability time-saving game state, but the percentage is extremely low (for example, 1% of jackpots), so illustration is omitted.

In a high probability non-time-saving gaming state (small hit rush state), a game ball is entered into the second starting hole 2005 which is always open by hitting the ball to the right, and a special lottery with special drawing 2 (hereinafter referred to as the second (also called a special lottery) and play the game. As explained in FIG. 220(a), in a high probability state, a small win is won with an extremely high probability (63488/655536), and in a small win game where the win is won due to the fluctuation of special drawing 2, the second big prize opening 2007 is entered. Since it is said that it is easy to enter the game ball B, in the high probability non-time saving game state, the player can increase the number of balls put out by playing the small winning game that enters with this extremely high probability.

In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, if a probability variable jackpot is won, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state is maintained even after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if a normal jackpot is won in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, a transition is made to the low-probability time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the game is such that the player expects not to win the jackpot, and even if he does win, he usually does not win the jackpot.

In the low-probability time-saving game state, if you hit the game ball B to the left and enter the gate 2002, there will be an extremely high probability (for example, 255/256, 100% like 256/256) in the normal symbol lottery. ), the variable prize opening door 2521 is opened for a long time (for example, 5.5 seconds), and the game ball B can be easily entered into the first starting opening 2004 compared to the non-time-saving gaming state. It can be made into a ball.

The low-probability time-saving game state is a so-called pull-back mode, and when a probability-variable jackpot is won in the low-probability time-saving game state, the state shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the type of the jackpot. When a normal jackpot (no time saving) is won in the low probability time saving game state, the state shifts to a low probability non time saving gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the low probability time saving game state, if a normal jackpot (with time saving) is won, the ceiling number of times is reset. In addition, in the low-high probability time-saving gaming state, if you win a normal jackpot (with time-saving) and the low-high probability time-saving gaming state starts again, the remaining number of fluctuations up to the ceiling and the remaining number of small winning fluctuations will be the normal jackpot (time-saving). Yes) The state immediately before the game starts may be inherited.

In addition, in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, when the predetermined number of fluctuations are completed or the predetermined number of small winning fluctuations are completed, the time saving gaming state ends and the state shifts to the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Although not shown, even if a normal jackpot (with time saving) is won in the low probability time saving gaming state, the low probability time saving gaming state is maintained.

Hereinafter, control for realizing the small hit rush state will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the fluctuation display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is started individually according to the extraction of special random numbers, and the variation of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is can be executed simultaneously (simultaneous variation of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (on hold), the held special random numbers are individually digested according to the degree of progress of the fluctuation display of each special random number.

That is, when the first special symbol being fluctuating stops, the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol memory display starts to fluctuate, and when the second special symbol being fluctuating stops, the second special symbol The second special symbol stored in the storage display starts to change. In addition, since the special symbols 1 and 2 can be changed simultaneously, the effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbols so as to change simultaneously in response to the changes in each special symbol.

In addition, if either special figure 1 or special figure 2 stops in a display mode indicating a jackpot, one of the following processes will be performed as a process for the other special figure that is changing at the same time. be exposed. As a first example of processing, a jackpot game based on one special symbol is controlled, and fluctuations in the other special symbol are deleted (forced to stop when the game misses). In this case, even after the jackpot game ends, the variation of the other deleted special figure is not restarted, but starts from the variation of the next special figure in the other.

As a second processing example, while controlling a jackpot game using one special figure, the elapse of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is temporarily stopped while the jackpot game is being executed. During the execution of the jackpot game, the special symbols whose fluctuations are stopped are displayed, for example, by flashing on the special symbol display (displayed in a manner different from when they are not paused (the player can recognize that they are paused)). be done. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the variable display of the other special symbol, which has been temporarily stopped, is restarted from the remaining variable time. As a third processing example, while controlling the jackpot game using one of the special symbols, the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is reset, and after the end of the jackpot game, the variation of the other special symbol is started again.

As mentioned above, in this chapter, the high probability non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which it is easy to obtain small winning balls (so-called small winning rush). Hereinafter, an example of specifications for realizing a rush of small wins only in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state will be explained.

Since the second starting port 2005 is not provided with an opening/closing member, etc., the second starting port 2005 is always open, and if a so-called right-handed hit is performed in all gaming conditions, the game ball B is inserted into the second starting port 2005. You can enter the ball and receive the second special lottery. In addition, in all gaming states, the probability of winning a small hit due to the fluctuation of special figure 2 is extremely high.

However, in game states other than the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of special symbol 2 is very long compared to the fluctuation time of special symbol 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest variation time of special figure 2 (for example, about 5 minutes) is longer than the longest variation time of special figure 1 (for example, about 3 minutes). Therefore, in the small winning game of special figure 2, the second big prize opening 2007 opens, but after entering the game ball B into the second starting opening 2005, in the small winning game corresponding to the entering ball, the second big prize opening 2007 opens. The time it takes for the prize opening 2007 to open is also very long. Furthermore, since the opening/closing time of the second big prize opening 2007 in the small winning game is short (for example, 0.1 seconds, which is shorter than the opening time of the first big winning opening 2006 in the jackpot game), and the number of openings and closings is small (for example, one round), Even if the variation of the special figure 2 is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball B into the second big prize opening 2007 at a good timing during the small winning game.

Even if you were able to enter the game ball B into the second big prize opening 2007 at the right time during the small winning game of special drawing 2, the variation time of special drawing 2 is very long, so In addition to the number of balls that can be obtained, the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, the player basically plays the game with the left hand and causes the game ball B to enter the first starting hole 2004.

On the other hand, in the high probability non-time saving game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set short. Specifically, for example, the variation time (for example, about 1 second) of the shortened small hit variation (variation in which the reach effect is not executed) of special figure 2 is shorter than the shortest variation time (for example, about 4 seconds) of special figure 1. This is set, and when the small hit fluctuation starts in a state where the special drawing 2 is on hold in the high probability non-time saving gaming state, the shortened small hit fluctuation is selected at a high rate (for example, about 90%). Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the player executes what is called a right-handed hit and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, without reducing the number of balls put out. Moreover, the game can proceed smoothly.

In this way, in the high-probability non-time saving game state, the player enters the game ball B into the second starting port 2005, frequently wins small wins, and obtains balls from the small win game. be able to. On the other hand, in a gaming state other than the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, even if the player enters the game ball B into the second starting port 2005, the player cannot efficiently obtain a ball. As a result, it is possible to realize a small win rush state in which it is easy to obtain small winning balls only in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 223 is an example of a table (time saving number table) of the number of time saving times awarded when any winning (including jackpot and small win) is won in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. FIG. 224 is an example of the time saving number table in the high probability time saving game state. FIG. 225 is an example of the time saving number table in the low probability time saving game state. FIG. 226 is an example of a time saving number table in a high probability non-time saving gaming state.

The time reduction number table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The time-saving number table defines the number of times of the time-saving gaming state for each combination of the gaming state when winning a jackpot in the special lottery and the type of winning symbol. In addition, the time saving number table defines the type of variation pattern for each combination of the gaming state when a jackpot is won in the special lottery and the type of winning symbol.

For example, row 2231 of the time saving number table in FIG. 223 shows that when the jackpot variation of "Special symbol 1_2R normal symbol 2" is performed in a low probability non-time saving gaming state, after the jackpot game that is performed after the jackpot variation is completed. The time-saving game state of the low-probability time-saving game state that enters indicates an end opportunity to end (if even one of the end opportunities is satisfied, the time-saving game state ends).

As line 2231 shows, the termination trigger is the start of the 31st variation of special figure 1 after the time-saving gaming state starts, the start of the 6th variation of special figure 2, and the start of the 6th variation of special figure 2 after the time-saving gaming state starts. The 100th special symbol fluctuation after the start (that is, the total number of fluctuations of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 is the 100th), and the 31st small hit fluctuation ends (small hit fluctuation The time-saving game state may end at the end of the time saving game state, or the time-saving game state may end at the start of the small winning game corresponding to the small winning fluctuation). In other words, "Special pattern 1_2R normal pattern 2" is a normal pattern (with time saving).

In the end trigger indicated by row 2231, the total number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 is defined as 100 times, but if you play in the normal way in the low probability time-saving gaming state, special drawing 1 In order to prevent the time-saving gaming state from being extended due to the variation of special figure 2, it is necessary to play by executing the variation of special figure 1 and the variation of special figure 2. The termination trigger may be 31 times or more, which is the termination trigger based on the number of fluctuations of the special drawing 1.

However, in order to provide a margin, it is desirable that the number of times is, for example, 31 plus a predetermined number (for example, 35 times). In addition, in the end trigger indicated by row 2231, since the number of fluctuations of special chart 2 is set as 6, the end trigger based on the total number of fluctuations of the fluctuation of special chart 1 and the fluctuation of special chart 2 is The value may be smaller than the sum of 31 times, which is the end trigger due to the number of fluctuations in , and 6 times, which is the end trigger due to the number of fluctuations in special drawing 2.

In addition, row 2232 is a high probability time saving game state that enters after the end of the jackpot game performed after the jackpot change when the jackpot change of "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 13" is performed in the low probability non-time saving game state. The time-saving gaming state indicates an end opportunity to end. After the end of the jackpot game with a specific symbol, the high probability time-saving game state is set, but as line 2232 shows, the 100th special symbol 1 fluctuation starts after the time-saving game state starts, and the 100th time If any of the following is achieved: the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, the start of the 100th special symbol fluctuation after the start of the time-saving game state, or the completion of the 48th small hit fluctuation, the time-saving game will begin. When the state ends, a transition is made to a high probability non-time saving gaming state (that is, a small winning rush state).

Therefore, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 13" is a symbol of probability variable jackpot (ceiling set). Similarly, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 2" to "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 12" are also probability-variable jackpot (ceiling set) symbols.

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high-probability time-saving game state, "Special figure 1_2R specific symbol 18" and "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 19" are symbols of probability variable jackpot (ceiling set). According to Figure 2220(b), the distribution of "Special Figure 1_2R Specific Symbol 18" and "Special Figure 1_2R Specific Symbol 19" is only 8/200 in total, so it is a probability variable jackpot (ceiling set) in the high probability time saving game state. The probability of winning is low.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the fluctuations of the high probability gaming state, there is no chance of winning, and all of the fluctuations other than the jackpot fluctuations are small winning fluctuations, so of the termination triggers indicated by row 2232, those that are actually achievable are small winnings. There is only a termination trigger due to winning (the number of fluctuations of special map 1, the number of fluctuations of special map 2, and the termination trigger due to the total number of fluctuations of special map 1 and special map 2 are all greater than the number of termination triggers due to a small hit. For). Therefore, if the 48th fluctuation starts without winning the jackpot, it will actually mean that the 48th small hit fluctuation has started, and the time-saving gaming state indicated by row 2231 will end, so "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 13 It can be said that the ceiling of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) that is entered by winning "" is 48 times.

As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state, although the probability is low, the time-saving game is triggered by the number of fluctuations of special drawing 1, the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2, or the total number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2. Since there is a possibility that the state will end, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 checks the number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2 since the start of the time-saving gaming state to check the number of remaining time-savings. need to be counted. On the other hand, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), the time-saving gaming state is terminated by the termination trigger due to the number of fluctuations of special drawing 1, the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2, or the total number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 counts the number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and the number of fluctuations of special drawing 2 after the start of the time saving gaming state in order to check the remaining number of time saving. It's okay and you don't have to.

Further, referring to FIGS. 223 and 224, it can be seen that there are multiple types of ceiling lengths in the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) that is entered upon winning the variable probability jackpot (ceiling set) symbol. The details will be explained later, but immediately after transitioning to the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), there are cases where the performance that does not announce the remaining number of small winning fluctuations until the ceiling is executed, and this allows the player to know when the ceiling will be reached. You can watch with a sense of excitement as to what will happen.

In addition, in the high probability time-saving game state, it may be possible to win by changing the special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in this case, the number of changes of the special figure 1, the number of changes of the special figure 2, and the number of changes of the special figure 1. There is also a possibility that the time-saving gaming state ends due to the ending trigger caused by the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 2.

In addition, row 2233 is a high probability time saving game state that enters after the end of the jackpot game performed after the jackpot change when the jackpot change of "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 20" is performed in the low probability non-time saving game state. The time-saving gaming state indicates an end opportunity to end. After the end of the jackpot game with the specific symbol, a high probability time saving game state is set, and the "next time" indicated by the line 2233 indicates that the next jackpot game will end.

Therefore, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 20" is a variable probability jackpot (no ceiling) symbol. Similarly, in the low probability non-time saving game state, "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 14" to "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 19" are also symbols with variable probability jackpot (no ceiling). Similarly, “Special pattern 2_2R specific pattern 1” to “Special pattern 2_2R specific pattern 2” are also symbols with a probability of a variable jackpot (no ceiling).

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high-probability time-saving game state, "Special figure 1_2R specific symbol 18" and "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 19" are symbols of probability variable jackpot (ceiling set). According to Figure 2220(b), the distribution of "Special Figure 1_2R Specific Symbol 18" and "Special Figure 1_2R Specific Symbol 19" is only 8/200 in total, so it is a probability variable jackpot (ceiling set) in the high probability time saving game state. The probability of winning is lower than the probability of winning a variable jackpot (no ceiling), which will be described later.

Also, according to FIG. 223, the jackpot symbols of special pattern 2 are "special pattern 2_2R specific pattern 1" to "special pattern 2_2R specific pattern 2," which are the patterns of guaranteed variable jackpot (no ceiling), and normal jackpot (no time saving). ), there is only the symbol ``Special pattern 2_2R normal pattern 1'', so even if you play the so-called right-handed game in a low-probability non-time saving game state (a lottery will be held with special pattern 2 and you will win the jackpot) Even if the player does so), it is not possible to shift to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state that is most advantageous for the player, so in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the player cannot play the so-called left-handed game (a gaming method in which a lottery is performed using special drawings 1). It is recommended that you do so. Similarly, according to FIGS. 224 and 225, even if you play the so-called right-handed game in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state, it is not possible to shift to the most advantageous high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is recommended to play the game by playing left-handed even in the high-probability time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state.

In addition, row 2234 indicates that when the jackpot variation of "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 1" is performed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the state is changed to the high probability non-time saving gaming state after the jackpot game that is performed after the jackpot variation is completed. Indicates transition. “0” indicated by row 2234 means that the variation of special figure 1, the variation of special figure 2, the total variation of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and the small hit variation are non-existent even if they are not executed even once (high probability). Indicates that the time saving game state starts.

In other words, in the low probability non-time saving game state, "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 1" is a symbol with a probability variable jackpot (direct rush). According to FIG. 220, the distribution of "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 1" is only 1/200, so the probability of winning a variable jackpot (direct rush) in a low probability non-time saving gaming state is lower than that of a variable jackpot (no ceiling) or a probability variable jackpot (no ceiling). It is low compared to the probability of winning a definite jackpot (ceiling set).

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high probability time-saving game state, "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 1" and "Special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 16" are symbols of probability variable jackpot (direct rush). According to FIG. 220, the ratio of being allocated to "Special pattern 1_2R specific pattern 1" or "Special pattern 1_2R special pattern 16" is 10/200, and the probability of winning a variable jackpot (direct rush) in the high probability time-saving gaming state is , is higher than the probability of winning a variable jackpot (direct rush) in a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, but lower than the probability of winning a variable jackpot (no ceiling) in a high-probability time-saving gaming state.

In addition, as shown in row 2231, in the low probability non-time saving game state, when the jackpot variation of "Special symbol 1_2R normal symbol 2" is performed, it enters after the end of the jackpot game performed after the jackpot variation (low probability Probability) In the time-saving gaming state, in the fluctuations of special figure 1 up to the 29th time, the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of table A indicated by the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table described later is executed, and the next one of special figure 1 (i.e. 30 In the 1st variation of the variation pattern auxiliary table, the variation of the variation pattern of table B indicated by the variation pattern auxiliary table is executed, and in the 1st variation of the next special figure 1 (i.e. 31st variation), the variation of the variation pattern of table B indicated by the variation pattern auxiliary table is executed. The variation of the variation pattern of C is executed, and in all subsequent variations of special figure 1 (i.e. all after the 32nd time) (∞ means all subsequent variations), the variation pattern auxiliary table shows A variation of the variation pattern of table A is executed.

In addition, as shown in row 2231, in the low probability non-time saving game state, when the jackpot variation of "Special symbol 1_2R normal symbol 2" is performed, it enters after the end of the jackpot game performed after the jackpot variation (low probability Probability) In the time-saving gaming state, regarding the fluctuation of the special figure 2, in the first and subsequent fluctuations (that is, all fluctuations), the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of table A indicated by the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table is executed. Although details will be described later, the variable pattern auxiliary table is defined for each combination of gaming status and whether or not the time-saving function is activated.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the game state does not change due to the winning of the small winning game, the number of time saving times and the type of fluctuation pattern after winning the small winning game are not defined in the time saving number table.

According to FIG. 225, in the low-probability time-saving game state, no matter which jackpot symbol is won, the state shifts to the non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (because the values in the time-saving number column are all 0). . Therefore, if you win a normal symbol in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, you will transition to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and if you win a specific symbol, you will enter the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game ends. transition to.

According to FIG. 226, if a specific symbol is won in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if a normal symbol is won in the high probability non-time saving game state, the state shifts to the low probability time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. In the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, the jackpot probability and the distribution between normal symbols and specific symbols do not change regardless of whether there is a change in special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, but as mentioned above, the so-called right-handed hit does not change. For example, since the game ball B can be easily entered into the second starting port 2005 which is always open, and the ball can be won in the small winning game of special drawing 2, it is possible to execute right-handed hitting. Recommended.

In addition, in gaming states other than the high probability non-time saving gaming state, it is an advantageous gaming method for the player to play the game by hitting left-handed, but the second starting port 2005 is always open and the gaming board 5 There is no gate on the right side for receiving the regular lottery. Therefore, performance gates are provided in the first right guide passage 2541 and the second right guide passage 2542, respectively. In a game state other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state, if the player executes a game by hitting right-handed and the game ball B passes through the production gate, a left-handed warning is issued to alert the player to execute the game by hitting left-handed. The performance is executed.

If the performance gate is not provided, the sensor that can most easily detect the game ball B provided on the right side of the game board 5 is the sensor provided in the second starting port 2005. In this case, for example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state, if the player accidentally hits the right ball and plays the game, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, a left-handed player warning effect is executed. However, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, the next game ball B has already been hit with such force that it reaches the right side of the game board 5, so the left side Even if the rotation angle of the handle 192 is adjusted after the appearance of the hitting attention calling effect, there is a risk that a plurality of game balls B may enter the second starting port 2005.

Also, according to FIG. 224, in the high probability time saving gaming state, if you win the regular jackpot on special drawing 2, you will transition to the low probability non-time saving gaming state, and if you win the probability variable jackpot on special drawing 2, you will enter the high probability time saving gaming state ( (No ceiling), the jackpot of special drawing 2 is the jackpot of special drawing 1 that can also be transferred to a low probability time saving gaming state, a high probability non time saving gaming state, and a high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling). This is disadvantageous for players compared to Also, since the jackpot of special drawing 2 is won with 2048/65536, if multiple game balls B enter the second starting hole 2005, there is a good possibility of winning the jackpot of special drawing 2. .

Therefore, if a warning performance is performed when the sensor of the second starting port 2005 detects the game ball B, there is a high possibility that it will be disadvantageous for the player, so the game board 5 is provided with a performance gate. The installation position of the presentation gate is determined until the game ball B is fired next time when the right-handed game ball B passes through the presentation gate (if the handle 192 is kept twisted, It is desirable that the game ball B be placed in such a position that the rotation angle of the handle 192 can be adjusted when the game ball B is fired 0.6 seconds after it is fired. Specifically, for example, if the performance gate is installed at a position such that the game ball B passes through the performance gate 0.2 seconds after the game ball B is launched, the left-handed hitting caution performance will be executed. Since there is a period of 0.4 seconds from when the display starts until the next game ball B is launched, the player can adjust the rotation angle of the handle 192.

227 and 228 are examples of variation pattern auxiliary tables. FIG. 272(a) is an example of a variable pattern auxiliary table used in the low probability non-time saving game state, and FIG. 227(b) is an example of a variable pattern auxiliary table used in the low probability time saving gaming state. FIG. 228(a) is an example of a variable pattern auxiliary table used in the high probability non-time saving game state, and FIG. 228(b) is an example of a variable pattern auxiliary table used in the high probability time saving gaming state. The variation pattern auxiliary table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example.

Hereinafter, the types of each variation pattern shown in the variation time auxiliary tables of FIGS. 227 and 228 will be explained. First, the types of fluctuation patterns in the low probability non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 227(a) will be explained. “Normal time” is a normal fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in a low probability non-time saving gaming state.

"Normal time (only at irregular time)" is used in the 30th and 31st variations of special symbol 1 after transitioning to the low probability time-saving gaming state, according to FIGS. 223, 224, and 226. It is a fluctuating pattern. However, in order for the 30th and 31st fluctuations after transitioning to the low probability time saving gaming state to be low probability non time saving gaming states, it is necessary to shift to the low probability time saving gaming state before reaching these fluctuations. It is necessary that the sixth special figure 2 fluctuation starts and the time-saving gaming state ends.

“Strategy countermeasure length variation” is a variation pattern of the special figure 2 in a low probability non-time saving gaming state. As mentioned above, since the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter is provided with a small winning rush, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is long except in the high probability non-time saving game state. The variation time of the deviation variation and the small hit variation of the variation pattern of the "strategy measure length variation" is, for example, about 4 minutes, and no production is performed on the production display device 1600. The variation time of the jackpot variation of the variation pattern of "strategy length variation" is, for example, about 3 minutes, and in order to prevent the player from leaving the seat without noticing the jackpot variation, the effect display device 1600 displays the jackpot variation at the start of the variation. It is desirable that an effect indicating that a jackpot change will occur is performed. Furthermore, for the same reason, an effect may be performed to indicate that a jackpot variation will occur at the time of winning a prize corresponding to the jackpot variation of the variation pattern of "strategy length variation".

The types of fluctuation patterns in the low probability time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 227(b) will be explained. “Time-saving fluctuation” is a normal fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. According to FIGS. 223, 224, and 226, the "forced showdown" is a time-saving game triggered by the 30th variation of special symbol 1 (i.e., the termination event caused by the variation of special symbol 2) after transitioning to the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Unless the state is ended, this is the variation pattern used in the variation of the special figure 1 immediately before the variation of the special figure 1 immediately before the end of the low probability time saving game state. In the "forced confrontation" variation, the confrontation performance described below is forcibly executed.

According to FIGS. 223, 224, and 226, "low probability time-saving result" means the 31st variation of special symbol 1 (i.e., variation of special symbol 2) after transitioning to the low probability time-saving gaming state. This is the variation pattern used in the special figure 1 variation immediately before the end of the low probability time saving gaming state, unless the time saving gaming state is ended. In the variation of "low probability time saving result", it shifts to high probability non time saving gaming state, then to low probability non time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), and high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling). Without doing so, an effect is executed to display a result screen showing the obtained balls. In addition, if the "low probability time saving result" is changed without going through the high probability non-time saving gaming state, the result screen does not need to be displayed, and instead, for example, the "time saving result" in table A is changed. It would be good if the effects used in "Fluctuation" were displayed.

If the fluctuation of "low probability time saving result" is a fluctuation of probability variable jackpot, in order to shift to the high probability non time saving gaming state again, a revival performance may be performed after displaying the result screen, or a result screen may be displayed. The screen may not be displayed, but an effect may be performed to show that the player will win a variable jackpot (transition to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state). In addition, in order to prevent players from misunderstanding the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, we created an effect that indicates that they will normally win the jackpot (shifting to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state) without displaying the result screen. You may also do so.

"Strategy length variation (for time saving)" is a variation pattern of the special figure 2 in the low probability time saving gaming state, and is the same variation pattern as "Strategic counter length variation" in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. In addition, if you win a regular jackpot in the high probability non-time saving gaming state and move to the low probability time saving gaming state, the hold on special drawing 2 will be the maximum because you were hitting right in the high probability non time saving gaming state. There may be four left. In this case, when transitioning to the low probability time-saving game state, for example, if the small winning game of special drawing 1 is executed, the losing fluctuation and small winning fluctuation of special drawing 2 are forced (for example, in an extremely short period of about 1 second). The pattern may be determined as a variation (with variation time). However, even in such a case, if the hold on special drawing 2 is a jackpot fluctuation, it is important not to forcibly confirm the hold on special drawing 2 as a winning fluctuation so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. Desirable (If the holding of this special drawing 2 is a normal jackpot fluctuation, it will move to a low probability non-time saving gaming state (the most disadvantageous state for the player), so it should be forcibly confirmed as a winning fluctuation. ).

The types of fluctuation patterns in the high probability non-time saving gaming state (small win rush state) shown in FIG. 228(a) will be explained. “RUSH medium special figure 1 variation” is a variation pattern selected by variation of special figure 1 in a high probability non-time saving gaming state. As mentioned above, in the high probability non-time saving game state, the game is progressed by hitting right, so it is an irregular state that the variation of the special figure 1 is executed. If the "RUSH Medium Special Figure 1 Variation" is a small winning variation (no winning is possible during high probability), the variation time is long (for example, executed in a gaming state other than a high probability non-time saving gaming state). It is desirable that the time is about 4 minutes, which is longer than all the fluctuation times of special figure 1.

In addition, if the "RUSH medium special figure 1 variation" is a small hit variation, the player will be made aware that an advantageous result will not be obtained even if the special figure 1 variation is executed in a high probability non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, it is desirable that the effect is not executed on the effect display device 1600.

The variation time when the "RUSH Medium Special Figure 1 Variation" is a jackpot variation is shorter than the variation time when it is a small hit variation, for example, about 30 seconds. For example, if the "RUSH medium special figure 1 variation" is a jackpot variation, the variation of the winning special figure 2 while this jackpot variation is being executed may be forced to be a small hit variation, In this case, even during the fluctuation of the jackpot of special drawing 1, it is possible to obtain balls due to the rush of small winnings.

``For RUSH'' is a normal variation of the special figure 2 in a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a performance exclusively for the small hit rush state is executed. The variation time of the variation "for RUSH" is selected from, for example, 1 second, 4 seconds, and 10 seconds. Particularly, in the case of a small winning variation in which the special drawing 2 is reserved, a variation time of 1 second is selected, and as a result of this, the small winning is quickly won, and the speed of increase in the number of balls in the small winning gaming state is increased.

The types of variation patterns of the high probability time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 228(b) will be explained. “Normal time” is a variation pattern selected by normal variation of special figure 1 in a high probability time saving gaming state. According to FIGS. 223 and 224, "counter in operation (next training)" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the predetermined number of variations in special drawing 1 after the high probability time-saving gaming state starts. In the variation of "Counter is activated (next training)", the next variation will be a preparatory production for the confrontation production (in the variation of reaching the ceiling in the time-saving high probability game state (with ceiling), the confrontation production will be performed, for example, the next variation will be If the game is executed in a high probability non-time saving game state, the player wins in the showdown effect, and if the next variation is carried out in a game state other than the high probability non-time saver game state, he loses in the showdown effect). There will be a performance that suggests.

The counter here is a counter that indicates the remaining number of small winning fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling of the high probability time-saving gaming state, and is displayed on the effect display device 1600, although the details will be described later. . However, the counter may display the true number of remaining small winning fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling in the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), or the counter may display the true number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations) remaining until reaching the ceiling in the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling). You may display a false number of remaining small winning fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling (for example, a value greater or less than the number of remaining small winning fluctuations until reaching the ceiling), or a high probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling). ) may display a false number of remaining small winning fluctuations (number of fluctuations) even though the ceiling will not be reached. In other words, when the counter is displayed, the player expects the counter value to become zero.

According to FIGS. 223 and 224, "counter in operation (next reach ceiling)" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the predetermined number of variations in special drawing 1 after the high probability time-saving gaming state starts. In the variation of "counter in operation (next reach ceiling)", a production suggesting that a reach production will be performed in the next variation is performed. According to FIGS. 223 and 224, "counter in operation (next reach ceiling)" means a change in special drawing 1 for a predetermined number of times in a high probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling) (i.e., an announcement of a miss in a reach effect) is carried out, and even if the small winning variation ends, there is no transition to the high probability non-time saving gaming state).

According to FIGS. 223 and 224, "Training transition" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the next (and subsequent) variation of special figure 1 of the variation of "Counter in operation (next training)" in the high probability time-saving game state. It is. In the "Training Transition" variation, a performance indicating that a training performance is to be started is executed. In addition, the variation of the "training transition" can also be executed by the variation of the special figure 1 from the beginning of transition to the high probability state to the predetermined number of times.

According to FIGS. 223 and 224, "Training" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of special symbol 1 after the next variation of "Training transition" in the high probability time-saving game state. When the change is "in training", a training performance is executed. Incidentally, the variation of "under training" can also be executed in the variation of the special figure 1 from the beginning to the predetermined number of times after shifting to the high probability state.

According to FIGS. 223 and 224, the "reach ceiling during training" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of special symbol 1 after the next variation of "under training" in the high probability time-saving game state. In the variation of the "reach ceiling during training", a reach is formed in the training performance. Incidentally, the variation of the "reach ceiling during training" can also be executed with the variation of the first special figure 1 that has transitioned to the high probability state.

According to FIGS. 223 and 224, the "normal background reach ceiling" is a variation pattern that can be executed with the next variation of special drawing 1 of the "counter activation (next reach ceiling)" variation in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It is. In the variation of the "normal background reach ceiling", the normal background (different from the training performance) in the high probability time saving game state is displayed and then the reach performance is executed.

"Strategic measure length variation" is a variation pattern that is executed in all special drawing 2 variations in the high probability time-saving gaming state, and is the same variation pattern as "strategic countermeasure length variation" in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. .

The basic changes in the variation pattern of the special figure 1 in the above-described high probability time-saving gaming state will be summarized. In the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), the "normal" variation pattern is executed first, and then the counter is displayed "Counter in action (next training)" or "Counter in action (next reach ceiling)" A variation pattern is executed.

Like the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) that is entered by winning "Special symbol 1_Specific symbol 7" in the low-probability non-time-saving game state in Figure 223, after the "normal time" fluctuation pattern, the "counter If the "Activating (Next Training)" variation pattern is executed, the "Training Transition" variation pattern will be executed and the training effect will start, and then the "Training" variation pattern will be executed and then the high In the final variation of the probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the reach effect is executed according to the variation pattern of "reach ceiling during training". When this "reach ceiling during training" changes, it is announced that the ceiling has been reached in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), and the state shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

Like the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) that is entered by winning "Special symbol 1_Specific symbol 4" in the low-probability non-time-saving game state shown in FIG. When the variation pattern of ``Activating (Next Reach Ceiling)'' is executed, the reach effect is then executed according to the variation pattern of ``Normal Background Reach Ceiling'' in the final variation of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling). When this "normal background reach ceiling" changes, it is announced that the ceiling in the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling) has been reached, and the state shifts to the high probability non time saving gaming state.

Regarding the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), the change in the fluctuation pattern until reaching the "reach ceiling during training" or "normal background reach ceiling" is the same as above, but the high-probability time-saving game state ( (No ceiling), the ceiling will not be reached, so it will be announced that it will not be possible to transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in the fluctuations of "Reach ceiling during training" or "Normal background reach ceiling", and in subsequent fluctuations The "normal" fluctuation pattern is selected.

In addition, as in the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling) that was entered by winning "Special symbol 1_Specific symbol 2" in the low probability non-time saving game state in Figure 223, the "reach ceiling during training" is the first change. Like the pattern selected as a pattern or the high probability time saving game state (no ceiling) that is entered by winning "Special symbol 1_Specific symbol 3" in the low probability non-time saving game state of FIG. 223, "Training" There are also patterns in which the first fluctuation pattern is selected.

In addition, as in the high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling) which is entered by winning "Special symbol 1_Specific symbol 16" in the low probability non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. There are also patterns in which "time" is selected.

As mentioned above, in both the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving gaming state (without ceiling), by executing the fluctuation pattern in which the counter appears, the player can wait until the counter reaches zero. Since it is not possible to recognize which gaming state the player is staying in, the high probability time saving gaming state (with a ceiling) or the high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling), the player can feel nervous.

In addition, in order to increase the expectation of transition to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state when a counter appears, a variation pattern in which a counter appears can be executed in a high-probability time-saving gaming state (with a ceiling); In the probability time saving game state (no ceiling), a variation pattern in which a counter appears may not be executed.

Also, for example, when the number of remaining small hit fluctuations up to the ceiling is large, it is difficult to start the counter display, and the smaller the number of remaining small hit fluctuations is (for example, the number of remaining small hit fluctuations up to the ceiling is 10 or less, or less than half of the ceiling set at the time of transition to the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), etc.) It is preferable that the counter display is easy to start. This is because even if the counter is displayed too early, the probability of reaching the ceiling is not high, which will make the player's expectations high and then discourage him.

Also, for example, the counter may be erased after being displayed, and then when the remaining number of small hit fluctuations up to the ceiling becomes small (for example, the number of remaining small hit fluctuations up to the ceiling is 10 or less, or the high probability time saving It may be redisplayed at less than half of the ceiling set at the time of transition to the gaming state (with ceiling). As a result, once the counter is displayed, the player feels a sense of anticipation, and after the counter is cleared, the player feels nervous because it is difficult to know the number of fluctuations in the remaining small wins until the ceiling, and when the counter is redisplayed, the player feels nervous. Since the number of small winning fluctuations is small, you can have a stronger sense of expectation. Furthermore, in order to give the player a stronger sense of tension, the counter does not need to be displayed, then erased, and then redisplayed.

Also, for example, when the counter is first displayed, it may be displayed in such a way that the exact number of fluctuations in small winnings remaining up to the ceiling is not known (for example, "Remaining?" or "Less than 30 remaining" is displayed). After that, when the remaining number of small winning fluctuations until the ceiling becomes small (for example, the remaining number of small winning fluctuations until the ceiling is 10 or less, or less than half of the ceiling set when transitioning to the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) etc.) may display the accurate number of remaining small wins. As a result, although the player does not know the number of remaining small hit fluctuations, the counter is displayed, which gives him a sense of anticipation, and when the accurate remaining small winning fluctuation number is displayed, the number of remaining small winning fluctuations is small. You can have a stronger sense of expectation. Further, in order to give the player a sense of surprise, it is not necessary to display the exact number of remaining small winning fluctuations until the ceiling is reached.

In addition, in both the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling) and the high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling), due to the change in the fluctuation pattern when the counter appears and goes through training, the player can quickly reduce the value of the counter. The player can feel a sense of tension while wishing that the player will win, and the player can feel a sense of exhilaration due to the change in the fluctuation pattern where the counter appears and immediately reaches the reach ceiling.

FIG. 229 is an example of a winning time table. The winning time table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The winning time table in FIG. 229(a) shows the period from the start of the small winning game and the jackpot game until the first opening of the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 (opening in the first round starts). Define the winning performance time j, which is the time until The winning time table in FIG. 229(b) is shown after the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 is closed for the last time in the small winning game and the jackpot game (after the closing in the last round is completed). The final winning performance time y, which is the time until the jackpot game ends, is defined.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 229, the winning start performance time j and the final winning performance time y differ depending on the game state when the winning is won, even if they are the same pattern, but in the case of a jackpot game, the winning start performance time j and the final winning performance time y differ depending on the game state when the winning is won. The immediately preceding gaming state is referenced, and for small winning games, the gaming state immediately after the small winning game ends is referenced. In other words, for example, if you win a small hit in the final variation (variation that reaches the ceiling) in a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the winning start performance time j and final winning performance time y of the small winning game are Those in a high probability non-time saving game state are referred to.

FIG. 230 is an example of the grand prize opening opening time table. The big winning opening opening time table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The big winning opening opening time table is a table for defining opening times in rounds of small winning games and jackpot games. Patterns A and B are open times that are mainly used in rounds during jackpot games, and patterns C and D are open times that are mainly used in rounds during small win games.

FIG. 231, FIG. 232, and FIG. 233 are examples of the big winning opening opening pattern table. The big prize opening pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The big winning hole opening pattern table of FIG. The big winning hole opening pattern table No. 232 is the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 (the value "right" in the table indicates the second big winning hole 2007) in the special drawing 2 jackpot game. The opening pattern is shown, and the big winning hole opening pattern table in FIG. 233 shows the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 in the small winning game.

In the start j column of the big winning opening opening pattern table, one of the patterns in the winning time table of FIG. 229(a) is stored, and in the round column, one of the patterns of the big winning opening opening time table of FIG. 230 is stored The final y column stores one of the patterns in the winning time table shown in FIG. 229(b).

First, the schedule of the small winning game will be explained. According to FIG. 233, pattern e is selected as the winning presentation time j of the small winning game of special drawing 1, and pattern f is selected as the winning presentation time j of the small winning game of special drawing 2. Pattern e and pattern f are 0.992 seconds in pattern e of the high probability non-time saving gaming state, but are 0.3 seconds in all other gaming states. In other words, for the small hit of special figure 1 in the high probability non-time saving gaming state (small hit rush state), by taking a longer time until the start of the round, and in the small winning rush state, by hitting right, it will be smoother and more convenient for the player. It can be suggested that the game will progress in an advantageous manner.

In addition, in the small winning game of special figure 1, pattern C is selected as the opening time of the big winning opening, and in the small winning game of special drawing 2, pattern D is selected as the opening time of the big winning opening. The opening time of pattern D is 0.1 seconds. Since the opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds, it may seem difficult to enter the grand prize opening, but since the game ball is structured so that it rolls on the opening/closing member of the second grand prize opening, the opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds. It is not difficult to enter the two major prize openings.

Therefore, by playing the game with the right hit during the small winning rush, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 2007 and a prize ball can be obtained. On the other hand, the opening time of pattern D is 0.06 seconds. Therefore, although you will win a small hit with an extremely high probability in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the low probability time saving gaming state, and the high probability time saving gaming state, even if you hit left-handed, the game ball will not reach the first big prize opening 2006. It is difficult to get a prize by letting a ball enter the ball (for example, only about 0.2 balls come in per minute).

In addition, the pattern "ki" is selected as the final winning performance time y of the small winning game of special figure 1, and the pattern "ku" is selected as the final winning performance time y of the small winning game of special drawing 2. In the pattern "Ki", by selecting an extremely short time (0.008 seconds) in the game state other than the high probability non-time saving game state, there is an extremely high probability of winning a small winning game in the variation of special drawing 1. This allows the game to proceed smoothly. In the pattern "Ki", in the high probability non-time saving game state, a longer time (17 seconds) is selected than in other game states, so that in the small hit rush state, by hitting right, it is smoother and more convenient for the player. It can be suggested that the game will progress in an advantageous manner. On the other hand, in the pattern "K", even in the high probability non-time saving game state, by selecting a short time (0.008 seconds), it is possible to end the small winning game quickly in the small winning rush state, and Ball speed increases.

The schedule of the jackpot game will be explained below. According to FIG. 229(a), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning start performance time j is a long time (33 seconds) in patterns a and pattern c, and a short time (0.5 seconds) in pattern b and pattern d. 2 seconds) (Pattern e and pattern f are used only for small winning games). Similarly, in the high probability time-saving game state, the winning start performance time j is long (33 seconds) in pattern a, and short (0.2 seconds) in patterns b, c, and d.

According to FIGS. 231 and 232, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, for a variable probability jackpot (direct rush) or a normal jackpot (with time saving), the winning start performance time j is short (0.2 seconds). ) pattern is assigned, and for other jackpots, patterns with a long winning start performance time j (33 seconds) are assigned. As mentioned above, the probability of winning the variable jackpot (direct rush) and the normal jackpot (with time saving) is low compared to other jackpots, and since they are advantageous for the player, we decided to make the presentation mode different. The winning start performance time j is different. For example, at the start of the variation between a guaranteed variable jackpot (straight rush) and a normal jackpot (with time reduction), the screen of the effect display device 1600 suddenly goes black, and immediately after the blackout (for example, 1 second later), a guaranteed variable jackpot (direct rush) occurs. If you notify whether you have won the regular jackpot or the regular jackpot (with time saving), it will be confirmed that you have won either of the jackpots as soon as the fluctuation starts, so it will be a fixed jackpot (direct rush). The winning start performance time j for the normal jackpot (with time reduction) may be shorter than for other jackpots.

Although the details will be described later, in the jackpot games of normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot (no ceiling), and probability variable jackpot (ceiling set) won in the low probability non-time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state, among these jackpots The winning performance start time j is set long in order to execute a performance that suggests whether the player has won the jackpot (which of these jackpots has been won is not reported when the jackpot variation ends).

According to FIG. 229(a), in the low probability time saving game state, the hit start performance time j in all patterns is a short time (0.2 seconds) less than the jackpot start performance time j in other game states.

In addition, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (small winning rush state), the winning start performance time j is a long time (11 seconds) in pattern a, pattern b, and pattern c, and a short time (0 seconds) in pattern d. .2 seconds). According to FIGS. 231 and 232, pattern a, pattern b, and pattern c are selected by the jackpot of special chart 1, and pattern d is selected by the jackpot of special chart 2. In the high-probability non-time saving game state, the normal game method is to execute the right hit and execute the variation of special figure 2, so the game can proceed smoothly due to the short hit start performance time j in pattern d. This increases the ball output speed.

According to FIGS. 231 and 232, pattern A is selected as the big winning hole opening time in all the rounds of the special jackpot 1 and the normal jackpot of the special drawing 2, and the first big winning hole 2006 is opened. In all rounds of the variable probability jackpot shown in FIG. 2, pattern B is selected as the big winning hole opening time and the second big winning hole 2007 is opened. Both pattern A and pattern B have a longer opening time (about 20 seconds) than the round of the small winning game.

According to FIG. 231, regarding the jackpot of special drawing 1, as the final winning performance time y, the pattern "a" for "special drawing 1_2R normal pattern 2" (normal jackpot (with time saving)) is "special drawing 1_2R specific pattern 1". ” (probability variable jackpot (straight rush)), the pattern “U” is “special pattern 1_2R specific symbol 16” (probability variable jackpot (no ceiling) in low probability state, but probability variable jackpot (direct rush) in high probability state) For other jackpot symbols, pattern "E" is selected, and for other jackpot symbols, pattern "A" is selected. ” is used only for small winning games).

According to FIG. 229(b), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the times of pattern "A" and pattern "E" (that is, jackpots other than normal jackpot (with time-saving) and variable jackpot (direct rush)) are different. The longest pattern (22.5 seconds) compared to the pattern of special figure 1 is the second longest (10.5 seconds) for pattern "A" (normal jackpot (with time saving)), followed by pattern "U" ( The time for a certain hit (direct rush) is the shortest (4 seconds). In this way, the higher the degree of advantage for the player, the shorter the final winning effect time y becomes, allowing the player to quickly transition to a gaming state that is directly linked to the ball being released, increasing the player's sense of elation. can be done.

For the same reason, in the high probability time saving gaming state, the time of pattern "A" (i.e. jackpots other than normal jackpot (with time saving) and probability variable jackpot (direct rush)) is longer than that of other special pattern 1 patterns. The longest time (22.5 seconds) is followed by pattern "A" (normal jackpot (with time saving)), followed by pattern "U" and pattern "E" (probable strange jackpot (direct rush)). )) has the shortest time (4 seconds).

In the low-probability time-saving game state, the time for pattern "A" and pattern "B" is shorter (0.5 seconds) compared to the other special pattern 1 patterns, and the time for pattern "U" and pattern "E" is shorter than that for pattern "U" and pattern "E". is longer (4 seconds) compared to other special map 1 patterns. In addition, in the low probability time saving game state, the time for patterns "A" to "E" may all be the same time (for example, 4 seconds).

In the high probability non-time saving game state, the normal game method is to hit right and execute the special pattern 2 variation, so if you hit the jackpot with the special pattern 1 variation, it is better to execute the special pattern 2 variation. In order to make the player aware of this, a longer time (41.5 seconds) than the final winning performance time y of Special Figure 2 is adopted for all the jackpots of Special Figure 1.

According to FIG. 232, regarding the jackpot of special drawing 2, the pattern "O" is selected for the normal symbol and the pattern "ka" is selected for the specific symbol as the final winning presentation time y. According to FIG. 229(b), in the low probability non-time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, the pattern “O” and the pattern “Ka” both have the same length of time (3 seconds); The time is shorter than all patterns of special map 1.

In the low probability time saving game state, the time (4 seconds) of the pattern "Ka" (specific symbol) is longer than the time (0.5 seconds) of the pattern "O" (normal symbol). In the low-probability time-saving gaming state, if a specific symbol is won, the state shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (i.e., a state advantageous to the player), and if a normal symbol is won, the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (i.e., a state disadvantageous to the player). By allowing the pattern "ka" to take a long time to transition to a state (state), it is possible to spend time on the effect to transition to a state advantageous to the player, which in turn gives the player a sense of elation. You can hold it.

In the high probability non-time saving game state, the time (2 seconds) of the pattern "Ka" (specific symbol) is shorter than the time (7.5 seconds) of the pattern "O" (normal symbol). In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, if a specific symbol is won, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (i.e., a state advantageous to the player) continues; if a normal symbol is won, the low-probability time-saving gaming state (i.e., a state disadvantageous to the player) continues. By setting the time of the pattern "ka" to be short in order to shift to the state), it is possible to continue the game in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state without slowing down the ball payout speed.

234 and 235 are examples of simultaneous variation rule tables. The simultaneous fluctuation rule table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310. The simultaneous variation rule table defines the rules when the variation of special figure 1 and the variation of special figure 2 are executed at the same time. The simultaneous fluctuation rule table in Figure 234 defines the rules for when the fluctuation in Special Figure 2 starts while the fluctuation in Special Figure 1 is being executed, and the simultaneous fluctuation rule table in Figure 235 defines the rules for when the fluctuation in Special Figure 2 starts. Define the rules when the special figure 2 starts changing while it is being executed.

According to FIG. 234, if the variation of special figure 2 starts while the variation of special figure 1 is being executed, in principle, the variation of special figure 1 continues as it is, and the variation of special figure 2 fluctuations also start at the same time. Additionally, if the fluctuation of special drawing 2 stops while the fluctuation of special drawing 1 is being executed, in principle, the fluctuation of special drawing 1 will continue as it is, and the fluctuation of special drawing 2 will stop. . The exceptions will be explained below.

If the small winning variation of special drawing 2 stops while the winning variation of special drawing 1 is being executed, the missing variation of special drawing 1 will be interrupted and the small winning game of special drawing 2 will be executed, and the small winning variation of special drawing 2 will be executed. When the small winning game ends, the interrupted fluctuation of the special figure 1 is resumed (that is, the time from when the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 starts until it ends is equal to the time of the small winning game of the special drawing 2) will be extended).

Similarly, if the small winning variation of special drawing 2 stops while the small winning variation of special drawing 1 is being executed, the small winning variation of special drawing 1 will be interrupted and the small winning game of special drawing 2 will be executed. , When the small winning game of special drawing 2 ends, the small winning fluctuation of special drawing 1 that has been interrupted restarts (that is, the small winning fluctuation of special drawing 1 starts for the time of the small winning game of special drawing 2). (The time from start to finish will be extended). Similarly, if the small hit fluctuation of special drawing 2 stops while the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 1 is being executed, the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 1 is interrupted and the small winning game of special drawing 2 is executed. When the small winning game of special drawing 2 ends, the interrupted jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 1 resumes (that is, the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 1 starts for the time of the small winning game of special drawing 2 and then ends. (The time it takes to do so will be extended)

When the jackpot variation of the special figure 2 is stopped while the losing variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the variation of the special figure 1 is also determined and stopped, and the jackpot game of the special figure 2 is executed. As a result, after the jackpot game of special drawing 2 ends, the determined fluctuation of special drawing 1 will not be executed. Similarly, if the jackpot variation of special drawing 2 stops while the small winning variation of special drawing 1 is being executed, the small winning variation of special drawing 1 will be rewritten as a losing variation, fixed and stopped, and the special The jackpot game shown in FIG. 2 is executed. As a result, after the jackpot game of special drawing 2 ends, the determined fluctuation of special drawing 1 will not be executed.

While the jackpot variation of special figure 1 is being executed, the jackpot variation of special figure 2 will not start. However, if the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 1 and the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 2 start at the same time, the jackpot fluctuation of one (for example, special drawing 2) will start, and the jackpot fluctuation of the other (for example, special drawing 1) will be missed. Start after being rewritten to fluctuation.

According to FIG. 235, when the variation of special figure 1 starts while the variation of special figure 2 is being executed, in principle, the variation of special figure 2 continues as it is, and the variation of special figure 1 fluctuations also start at the same time. In addition, if the variation of special figure 1 stops while the variation of special figure 2 is being executed, in principle, the variation of special figure 2 will continue as it is, and the variation of special figure 1 will stop. . The exceptions will be explained below.

When the small hit variation of special figure 1 stops while the deviation variation of special figure 2 is being executed, the deviation variation of special figure 2 is also forcibly fixed and stopped. For example, in a high probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling), if the fluctuation of special symbol 2 starts just before reaching the ceiling due to the fluctuation of special symbol 1 (small hit), the fluctuation time of special symbol 2 will be extremely long. is selected, and if the fluctuation of special symbol 2 is not forcibly fixed and stopped, the ceiling will be reached even after the high probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the player hits right and executes the fluctuation of special symbol 2 and plays the game starts. Since it becomes impossible to proceed with the game until the long-time variation of the special figure 2 that started immediately before reaching 2 ends, the off variation of the special figure 2 is forcibly fixed and stopped.

For the same reason, if the small hit fluctuation of special drawing 1 stops while the small winning fluctuation of special drawing 2 is being executed, the small winning fluctuation of special drawing 2 will be rewritten to a losing fluctuation and will be forcibly changed. Definitely stop. Also, for the same reason, if the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 1 stops while the losing fluctuation of special drawing 2 is being executed (it is possible that the jackpot of special drawing 1 is a jackpot that moves to a high probability non-time saving gaming state) (because of this), the deviation fluctuation of special map 2 will also be forcibly fixed and stopped. Also, for the same reason, if the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 1 stops while the small winning fluctuation of special drawing 2 is being executed (the jackpot of special drawing 1 is a jackpot that moves to a high probability non-time saving gaming state) (because there is a possibility), the small hit variation of special drawing 2 is rewritten to a miss variation and then it is forcibly fixed and stopped.

If the small winning variation of special drawing 1 stops while the jackpot variation of special drawing 2 is being executed, the jackpot variation of special drawing 2 will be interrupted, the small winning game of special drawing 1 will be executed, and the small winning variation of special drawing 1 will be executed. When the small winning game ends, the interrupted jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 2 will resume (that is, the time from the start of the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 2 to the end will be equal to the time of the small winning game of special drawing 1) will be extended).

The jackpot variation of the special drawing 1 will not start while the jackpot variation of the special drawing 2 is being executed. However, if the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 1 and the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 2 start at the same time, the jackpot fluctuation of one (for example, special drawing 2) will start, and the jackpot fluctuation of the other (for example, special drawing 1) will be missed. Start after being rewritten to fluctuation.

The signals (external information 1 to 8) output from the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter to the hall equipment connected to the pachinko machine 1 will be explained below. Note that although the following description will be made using signals in the on and off states, the states may be distinguishable by outputting signals of different values, such as "1" and "0", for example. First, external information 1 to 3 and external information 7 to 8 will be explained.

External information 1 is a signal indicating that the fluctuation of special chart 1 and the fluctuation of special chart 2 have stopped. External information 1 is in the on state for 0.128 seconds from the stop of the special figure 1 or the fluctuation of the special figure, and is in the off state at other timings. However, since Pachinko machine 1 in this chapter makes simultaneous fluctuations, if the fluctuations of special chart 1 and special chart 2 stop within an interval of 0.128 seconds, the hall equipment will handle the two fluctuations. In a manner that can be detected, the external information 1 is changed from the on state to the off state in response to the variation that stopped first, and then the external information 1 is changed from the on state to the off state in response to the variation that stopped after an interval of 0.128 seconds. changes to the on state.

External information 2 is a signal indicating that game ball B enters first starting port 2004. The external information 2 is in an on state for 0.128 seconds when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2004, and is in an off state at other timings. However, if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2004 within an interval of 0.128 seconds, the ball will be adjusted in response to the previous entry so that the hall equipment can detect the two entries. After the external information 2 is changed from the on state to the off state, the external information 2 is changed to the on state in response to the subsequent ball entry at an interval of 0.128 seconds.

External information 3 is a signal indicating that a jackpot game has been executed. The external information 3 is turned on when the jackpot game starts, and turned off when the jackpot game ends. Note that the external information 3 does not have to be on during the entire period during the jackpot game, and may be on only during a part of the period.

External information 7 is a signal indicating the number of prize balls. The payout control MPU adds up the prize balls in all the recognized winning holes, and each time the number of prize balls becomes 10 or more, it sends a command to the external terminal board 558 to subtract 10 from the added number of prize balls. The external information 7 is turned on for 0.128 seconds each time the external terminal board 558 receives the command, and is turned off at other times. However, if the external terminal board 558 receives the command within an interval of 0.128 seconds, the external terminal board 558 will respond to the previous command so that the hall equipment can detect the prize ball corresponding to the two commands. After changing the information 7 from the on state to the off state, the external information 7 is changed to the on state in response to a subsequent command at an interval of 0.128 seconds.

External information 8 is a signal indicating a security abnormality. External information 8 includes the abnormality in winning the grand prize opening (game ball B enters the grand prize opening at a time other than the timing when the grand prize opening is opened (during a winning game)), RAM clearing, after setting change is completed, after setting confirmation is completed, Either the power is restored or the variable winning slot door winning abnormality (game ball B enters the variable winning slot door 2521 at a timing other than the timing when the variable winning slot door 2521 opens (after winning the normal lottery)) It will be on for 30 seconds from the moment this happens. However, if the above-mentioned cause additionally occurs while the external information 8 is in the ON state due to the above-mentioned cause, the external information 8 will remain ON for another 30 seconds from the timing when the additional cause occurs. maintain.

In addition, when an error occurs such as safe switch abnormality, RWM error, magnetic abnormality, setting confirmation, or setting change, the external information 8 remains on until the error is cleared. do. The external signal 8 is in an off state at timings other than those described above.

FIG. 236 is a timing chart showing the state transition of external information 4. The external information 4 is a signal indicating that the player is staying in the high probability non-time saving gaming state and that a jackpot game won during the high probability non time saving gaming state is being executed.

At timing 2361, when the ceiling of the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling) was reached, the time saving function stopped while the variable probability function was in the ON state, and the external information 4 was turned on as the state shifted to the high probability non time saving gaming state. change into a state. Timing 2362 is the timing when a normal jackpot is won and the normal jackpot ends in the high probability non-time saving gaming state, and is also the timing at which the state shifts to the low probability time saving gaming state. Therefore, at timing 2362, external information 4 changes to the off state.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the low probability time saving gaming state is a state where the transition rate to the high probability non time saving gaming state is higher (pullback zone) compared to the low probability non time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling). Therefore, at timing 2362 when the state shifts to the low probability time saving gaming state, the external information 4 is kept on, and when the state shifts from the low probability time saving gaming state to the low probability non time saving gaming state, the external information 4 is turned off. It may also be possible to change the state. In this case, if a variable probability jackpot (that is, a jackpot that transitions to a high probability non-time saving gaming state) is won in the low probability time saving gaming state, the external information 4 may be turned off or turned on during the jackpot playing. may continue.

Timing 2363 is the timing when a variable probability jackpot is won in the low probability time saving gaming state and the variable probability jackpot ends, and is also the timing at which the state shifts to the high probability non time saving gaming state again. Therefore, at timing 2363, external information 4 changes to the on state.

The period 2364 is a period during which the player wins the variable probability jackpot during the high probability non-time saving gaming state and is playing the variable probability jackpot game. In the period 2364, the external information 4 is turned off, and after the probability variable jackpot ends, the external information 4 is turned on again.

The hall equipment determines, based on external information 4, that the player is staying in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state where it is most likely to get the ball, and the number of transitions (because the player has won a variable jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state). , including the number of times the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state has continued).

Furthermore, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state that continues due to winning a variable jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state are recognized by the hall equipment as one high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In order to do so, the external information 4 may be kept on during the period 2364. This also applies to external information 6, which will be described later.

In addition, when the on-off state of the external information 4 changes due to the gaming state transition after the jackpot game, the on-off state of the external information 4 changes at the end of the jackpot game, but the on-off state of the external information 4 changes. The change timing can be any timing during the jackpot game (However, in order to make it possible to count the balls rolled out during the jackpot game as balls put out during the high probability non-time saving game state or the low probability non time saving game state, the change timing can be set at any timing after the jackpot game ending. (preferably timing). This also applies to other external information.

FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing the state transition of external information 5. External information 5 is a signal indicating that the state has shifted to a high probability non-time saving gaming state and that the state has shifted to a low probability time saving gaming state.

At timing 2371, the probability variable function changes to the OFF state and the operation of the time saving function continues, that is, the external information 5 becomes the ON state for 0.128 seconds and then returns to the OFF state because the time saving function moves to the low probability time saving game state. At timing 2372, the probability variable function changes to the ON state and the time saving function stops operating, that is, the state shifts to the high probability non-time saving gaming state, so the external information 5 becomes the ON state for 0.128 seconds, and then returns to the OFF state. .

As in period 2373, if the transition to the high probability non-time saving gaming state and the transition to the low probability time saving gaming state are performed within an interval of 0.128 seconds, the hall equipment can detect the two transitions. As shown above, after the external information 5 changes from the on state to the off state in response to the previous transition, the external information 5 is changed to the on state in response to the subsequent transition with an interval of 0.128 seconds. change.

The hall equipment uses the external information 5 to determine the number of transitions to the high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the player is most likely to get a ball, and the number of transitions to the low probability time saving gaming state in which the probability of transitioning to the high probability non-time saving gaming state is high. The number of transitions can be recognized.

FIG. 238 is a timing chart showing the state transition of external information 6. The external information 6 stays in either the high probability non-time saving gaming state, the low probability time saving gaming state, the normal jackpot game won during the high probability non time saving gaming state, or the jackpot winning game winning in the low probability time saving gaming state. This is a signal indicating that the

At timing 2381, the ceiling of the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling) is reached, the time saving function stops while the variable probability function remains on, and the transition to the high probability non time saving gaming state occurs, so the external information 6 Changes to on state.

The period 2382 is a period during which a variable probability jackpot won during a high probability non-time-saving gaming state (that is, the high probability non-time-saving gaming state continues after the completion of the variable probability jackpot game), and the external information 6 is in an off state. After the variable probability jackpot game of period 2382 ends, the external information 6 changes to the ON state again in order to shift to the high probability non-time saving gaming state again.

The period 2383 is a period during which a normal jackpot is won during a high probability non-time-saving gaming state (that is, the normal jackpot game shifts to a low-probability time-saving gaming state after the end of the normal jackpot game), and the external information 6 continues to be in the ON state. . The external information 6 continues to be on even during the low probability time saving game state.

Timing 2384 is a state where the final variation of the low probability time saving gaming state has ended, and in order to transition to the low probability non time saving gaming state, the external information 6 changes to the OFF state. In addition, when the final fluctuation of the low probability time saving game state is a small winning fluctuation, the external information 6 changes to the OFF state after the small winning game ends.

External information 6 indicates that the hall equipment is staying in a high probability non-time saving gaming state where the player is most likely to get a ball, and a low probability time saving gaming state where the transition rate to the high probability non time saving gaming state is high. You can recognize that you are staying in Furthermore, the external information 6 includes a series of gaming state transitions from the high probability non-time saving gaming state to the low probability time saving gaming state (however, in the high probability non-time saving gaming state, the probability of a variable jackpot is If the player wins and shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state again, the number of times this shift is also counted as one time can be recognized.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, simultaneous fluctuations are performed, so the low probability time saving gaming state ends when the number of fluctuations triggers the end (as mentioned above, the high probability time saving gaming state cannot end when the end triggering occurs due to the number of fluctuations). ), the time-saving gaming state ends at the start of the number of fluctuations that satisfy the termination trigger (also referred to as the final time-saving fluctuation), but the external information 6 changes from the on state to the off state when the final time-saving fluctuation stops. It is desirable to do so. If the external information 6 is turned off at the start of the time-saving final variation in the low-probability time-saving game state, the hall equipment will detect that the transition to the time-saving game state has been made before the performance on the performance display device 1600. This is because the player will be able to see it.

However, if the time saving final variation of the low probability time saving game state is the variation of special figure 2, it is the variation pattern of "strategy countermeasure length variation", so the variation time is very long, so external information 6 is It takes a long time to enter the off state, and even if the first variation of the special figure 1 starts after transitioning to the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the external information 6 is output. However, in low-probability, non-time-saving gaming states, it is an advantageous gaming method for the player to execute the variation of special symbol 1 by hitting left-handed, so if you hit left-handed, this situation will not occur. do not have. Also, according to FIG. 235, even if the variation of special drawing 2 is a small hit variation or a jackpot variation (a losing variation is not executed in a low probability time saving gaming state) as the time saving final variation, it is in a low probability non time saving gaming state. When the fluctuation of the started special drawing 1 (losing fluctuation or small winning fluctuation) is determined, the fluctuation of the special drawing 2 is determined as a losing fluctuation, so the external information 6 is long after the low probability time-saving gaming state ends. The probability of a situation where the device remains on for an extended period of time is low.

[20-2. Performance of Pachinko machine 1 in this chapter]
FIGS. 239, 240, and 241 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a performance from a low probability non-time saving gaming state to a high probability non-time saving gaming state via a high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling). It is. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, fluctuations in special figure 1 will be explained in gaming states other than high probability non-time saving gaming states, and fluctuations in special drawing 2 in high probability non-time saving gaming states.

In addition, unless otherwise specified, in game states other than the high probability non-time saving game state, the holding on the pedestal displayed on the effect display device 1600 indicates the holding of the variation of special symbol 1, and in the high probability non time saving gaming state, It is assumed that the hold on the pedestal displayed on the effect display device 1600 indicates the hold of the variation of the special figure 2. Furthermore, among the pedestals displayed on the effect display device 1600, a hold display corresponding to the fluctuation being executed is displayed on the rightmost pedestal, and a pending display corresponding to the fluctuation being executed is displayed on the second pedestal from the right. The hold corresponding to the change that will be executed next is displayed on the third pedestal from the right, and the hold that corresponds to the change that will be executed next is displayed on the fourth pedestal from the right. It is assumed that a suspension corresponding to the variation to be executed is displayed, and a suspension corresponding to the fourth variation to be executed is displayed on the fifth pedestal from the right.

In addition, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with a ceiling), the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state occurs when a predetermined number of fluctuations ends or a predetermined number of small winning fluctuations end, but this predetermined number of fluctuations is also called a variable ceiling, and this predetermined number of small hit fluctuations is also called a small hit ceiling.

FIG. 239(A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 probability variable jackpot is selected and the ready-to-win effect is executed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, and the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state. FIG. 239(B) shows a state where a reach effect is being performed, and a display prompting the user to operate the press operation section 303 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. 239(C) shows a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in FIG. 239(B), and it is suggested that a jackpot has been won by the combination of decorative symbols "7, chance, 7". In addition, since Pachinko machine 1 in this chapter is a machine that increases the payout only by small hits, the combination of the same decorative symbols (for example, 7, 7, 7 ) is never displayed.

FIG. 239(D) shows a state in which the player wins in FIG. 239(C) and is in the variable probability jackpot game state. In the jackpot game of special figure 1, since the first jackpot 2006 is opened, the effect display device 1600 suggests that the player should play the game aiming at the first jackpot 2006. In addition, an aura is displayed during the jackpot game, and by winning the game ball B in the first jackpot 2006, you can receive a promotion lottery for the aura color, and the final aura color after promotion will determine the jackpot being executed. It may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether it is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, or the degree of expectation as to the number of small winning ceilings in a high probability time-saving gaming state that occurs due to a variable probability jackpot (ceiling set).

Specifically, for example, if the final aura color is promoted to rainbow color, a guaranteed variable jackpot (direct rush) is guaranteed; if the final aura color is promoted to red, a guaranteed variable jackpot (direct rush) or a fixed variable jackpot (with ceiling) where the number of small hits is 10 times or less. ) is confirmed, if you advance to green, you will get a guaranteed variable jackpot (straight rush) or a fixed variable jackpot (ceiling set), and if you advance to blue, you will get a fixed variable jackpot (straight rush), a fixed variable jackpot (with ceiling), or a regular jackpot (with time saving). ) It is preferable that the final aura color at the end of the jackpot game is determined so that the final aura color is determined.

FIG. 239(E) shows the ending of the jackpot game, the aura is displayed in the final aura color, and a display prompting the user to operate the press operation section 303 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. 239(F) shows a state in which the press operation unit 303 is operated in FIG. 239(E), and shows that the chance mode is entered. The chance mode is a state in which the player stays in either a high probability time saving gaming state (with a ceiling) or a high probability time saving gaming state (without a ceiling). In other words, it is shown that the player has won a certain variable jackpot (ceiling set) or a certain variable jackpot (no ceiling). In this way, players are unable to recognize whether to shift to the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) or the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), which creates a sense of tension in the player during performance in the high probability state. You can hold it.

In addition, if you have won the normal jackpot (no time saving), a message (for example, "Unfortunate...", etc.) indicating the transition to the low probability non-time saving gaming state will be displayed in Fig. 239 (F). If you have won the regular jackpot (with time savings), a message indicating that you will move to the low probability time saving gaming state (for example, ``Probable variable jackpot is hot mode'' (with low probability) will be displayed. In the probability time-saving gaming state, if you win a probability-variable jackpot, you will move to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state).If you have won a probability-variable jackpot (direct rush), a high probability A message (for example, "Small win rush has begun!") indicating the transition to the probability non-time saving gaming state is displayed.

In addition, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, if you have won a normal jackpot (with time-saving) or a variable probability jackpot (direct rush), the state shifts to a state more advantageous than the high-probability time-saving gaming state. A dedicated SP reach effect may be performed that is different from the effects shown in (A) to (C).

Hereinafter, it is assumed that the symbol determined in FIG. 239(C) is "special symbol 1_2R specific symbol 9". According to FIGS. 223 and 228, the ceiling of small hits in the high probability time saving game state (no ceiling) starting from FIG. The fluctuation pattern of special map 1 is "normal", the 8th fluctuation pattern of special map 1 is "transition to training", and the fluctuation pattern of special map 1 from 9th to 14th is "during training". ", and the fluctuation pattern of special figure 1 for the 15th time (that is, the small hit ceiling) is "reach ceiling during training." In the variation of "reach ceiling during training", the details will be described later, but a battle between the main character and the enemy character is performed.

In addition, below, in the high probability time-saving gaming state (with a ceiling), all the fluctuations of special drawing 1 are small hit fluctuations (as mentioned above, in the high probability state, the fluctuations of special drawing 1 and the fluctuation of special drawing 2 are always jackpot fluctuations or An example will be explained in which a small hit fluctuation occurs and reaches a ceiling.

FIG. 239(G) shows a state in which the first variation (variation pattern is "normal time") of the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling) is being executed. In FIG. 239(G), a counter is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the examples shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the counter indicates the number of small winning fluctuations of the special drawing 1 remaining until the small winning fluctuation one before the small winning ceiling ends, but until the small winning ceiling is reached. It may also indicate the number of small hit fluctuations of the remaining special drawings 1.

In addition, in FIG. 239 (G), the counter is displayed from the first change in the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling), but the counter is displayed from the predetermined number of changes after transitioning to the high probability time saving game state. It is also possible to do so. The predetermined number of times may vary depending on the ceiling number of small hits in the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling), for example (for example, the larger the ceiling number of small hits, the greater the predetermined number of times, etc.). When a counter is displayed from a predetermined number of fluctuations after transitioning to the high probability time-saving gaming state, it is preferable that an effect is performed indicating that the counter is displayed at the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, (e.g., displaying a message saying "Next time the counter will be activated!").

Further, the counter may be displayed even in the high probability time saving game state (no ceiling). However, in order to increase the rate of entry into the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state when the counter is displayed compared to when the counter is not displayed, the rate at which the counter is displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) has been increased. It is desirable that the rate at which the counter is displayed is higher than the rate at which the counter is displayed in the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling). Further, in order to give the player a sense of anticipation when the counter is displayed, the game may be moved to a special production stage when the counter is displayed.

FIG. 239(H) shows a state in which the eighth variation (variation pattern is "training transition") of the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed. In FIG. 239(H), a message indicating that a training performance will start with the next change is displayed on the performance display device 1600. FIG. 239(I) shows a state in which the ninth variation (variation pattern is "in training") of the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed. In FIG. 239(I), a message indicating that the training performance has started is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

FIG. 240(J) shows a state in which the 10th variation (variation pattern is "in training") of the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed. In the training performance, a performance in which the main character (white character) is training is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 240 (K) shows a state in which the 11th variation (variation pattern is "in training") of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed, and two pending special drawings 1 have been accumulated. . An effect is occurring on the pedestal corresponding to the fourth hold (that is, the hold indicating the 15th variation) of special figure 1. In the example of FIG. 240, the 15th fluctuation in the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling) is the fluctuation in which a battle effect is performed (in the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling), the 15th small hit fluctuation is the small winning ceiling) Therefore, the effect of the pedestal can suggest the possibility that the small hit fluctuation, which is the fourth-order fluctuation, is the small hit ceiling. In addition, in order to make the player recognize the small winning ceiling more clearly, instead of or in addition to displaying the effect on the pedestal, a translucent display of the battle pending displayed in FIG. It may be displayed above.

Figure 240 (L) shows a state in which the 12th variation (variation pattern is "in training") of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed, and one hold of special drawing 1 has been accumulated. . In the state where the fluctuation in Figure 240 (L) is being executed, the small hit fluctuation which is the third fluctuation of special drawing 1 is the small hit ceiling, so an effect is generated on the third pending pedestal. There is.

FIG. 240(M) is a continuation state where the 12th variation of the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed, and three reserved special drawings 1 are accumulated. When a hold corresponding to a pedestal on which an effect is displayed wins, the effect is erased and a battle hold (a cylinder labeled "Battle") is displayed on the pedestal.

Figure 240 (N) shows a state in which the 15th variation (variation pattern is "training reach ceiling") of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed, and corresponds to the variation in which battle suspension is being executed. displayed on the pedestal. In the variation of "Reach ceiling during training", a battle performance, which is an example of a reach performance, is executed. In FIG. 240(N), it is notified that the battle performance will start.

FIG. 240(O) is a continuation of the 15th variation of the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling), and a battle performance between the main character and the enemy character (black character) has started. FIG. 240(P) shows the state at the end of the 15th variation of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), where the main character wins in the battle performance. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols ``7, fate, 7'' suggests that the jackpot has been reached.

Since the small winning ceiling has been reached, the state shifts to the high probability non-time saving gaming state, but if the first fluctuation in the high probability non time saving gaming state is a normal jackpot fluctuation, the small winning game in the small winning rush state will result in an exit. Shift to a low probability time saving game state without increasing the number of balls. Suppose that this kind of situation occurs if a direct indication is made that the small winning rush state (high probability non-time saving gaming state) will occur when the small winning fluctuation of the small winning ceiling ends. If this happens, the player will be deeply discouraged, so the combination of decorative symbols "7, fate, 7" will suggest that the jackpot has been reached, but the player will not be able to enter the jackpot rush state. is not shown directly.

FIG. 240(Q) shows a state in which the ending effect of the small winning game that has been transferred from the small winning variation that ended in FIG. 240(P) is being performed. As described in the explanations of FIGS. 229 and 231, the performance time of the small winning game corresponding to the small winning fluctuation that has reached the small winning ceiling is selected in a high probability non-time saving game state, so the small winning As the ending time of the game (final winning performance time y), 17 seconds (pattern "ki"), which is a sufficient length to perform the performance, is selected.

FIG. 240(Q) shows a state where the ending of the small winning game has started, and a display indicating that there is a possibility of shifting to a small winning rush state is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the small hit ceiling has been reached, technically the transition to the small win rush state (high probability non-time saving gaming state) is guaranteed, but as mentioned above, the first time in the small winning rush state (high probability non time saving gaming state) When the fluctuation is a normal jackpot fluctuation, such a performance is performed in order to shift to a low probability time-saving game state without increasing the number of balls put out by the small winning game of special figure 2.

FIG. 240 (R) shows a continuation of the ending of the small hit game, where the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into two, and one display area shows the small hit of special figure 2 in the high probability non-time saving game state. A display (``Rush!'') is displayed indicating that the number of balls that can be increased by hitting the special symbol number 2 is displayed in the other display area. A display indicating the transition to a low-probability time-saving gaming state (that is, the first fluctuation of special figure 2 is usually a jackpot fluctuation) ("chance mode" (the low-probability time-saving gaming state is a so-called pullback mode, but a high probability In the non-time-saving game state, since no balls have been won in the small winning game of special drawing 2, here, it is called a chance mode instead of a pull-back mode)) is displayed.

In FIG. 241(S), an instruction to prompt the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2005 by hitting the ball to the right is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition to the display in FIG. 240(R), FIG. 241(T) shows the message displayed in FIG. 241(S) and an arrow prompting to operate the handle 192 aiming at the second starting port 2005. is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

At the ending of the small winning game, the CPU of the peripheral control IC refers to the advance determination command regarding suspension of the fluctuation of the first special drawing 2 after the small winning game ends, and changes the first special drawing 2. It is determined whether the fluctuation is a normal jackpot (that is, a transition to a low probability time-saving gaming state). For example, in FIG. 241(S), an aura may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at this time, the aura color may indicate the degree of expectation that the first variation of special symbol 2 is not usually a jackpot. .

It is assumed that the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 after the end of the small winning game is the small winning fluctuation. In this case, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, it is possible to obtain balls by playing the small winning game of special drawing 2.

FIG. 241(R) shows a state where the ending of the small winning game has ended and a high probability non-time saving game state has started, and a display indicating that the small winning rush state has entered is displayed on the effect display device 1600. ing. An image imitating the pseudo big winning hole 2402 and a message indicating that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 can be opened are displayed on the effect display device 1600. The pseudo big prize opening 2402 may be openable in all states, or may be openable only in a high probability non-time saving game state in which the game ball B can be easily acquired in the small winning game of special drawing 2. It may be possible to open it only during the small winning game in all states, or only during the small winning game of special figure 2 in the high probability non-time saving gaming state where the game ball B can be easily obtained. It may be openable to Further, a display indicating that the game is to be played by hitting right (right hitting display) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is assumed that the right-handed display is always displayed during the high probability non-time saving game state.

If the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 after the end of the small winning game is a normal jackpot fluctuation, it is not possible to obtain balls by playing the small winning game of the special drawing 2 in the high probability non-time saving game state. In this case, even if the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state starts, a display like that shown in FIG. 241(R) is not performed, and a display indicating that the transition to the chance mode (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is to be started is displayed on the production display device 1600. be done. However, even if the fluctuation of the first special figure 2 after the end of the small winning game is a normal jackpot fluctuation, in order to make the player feel a sense of accomplishment of reaching the ceiling of the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling). , the effect shown in FIG. 241(R) may be executed.

For example, in Fig. 240 (S), the second, third, or fourth fluctuation of special figure 2 after the end of the small hit game is a normal jackpot, and all the fluctuations before the normal jackpot fluctuation are certain changes. Even when the jackpot fluctuates, the ball cannot be obtained by the small hit of the special drawing 2 in a high probability non-time-saving game state. In this case, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state of special drawing 2, it is not possible to obtain a ball from the small hit of special drawing 2, so in order to prevent the player from having excessive expectations, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state starts. Even if the display shown in FIG. 241(R) is not performed, it is preferable that a display indicating the transition to the chance mode (low probability non-time saving gaming state) is displayed on the production display device 1600, and a probability variable jackpot is displayed. The display shown in FIG. 241(R) may be performed because the ball can be obtained by the following.

In addition, if the small winning game shown in FIG. 241 (T) ends without pending the fluctuation of the special figure 2, for example, the display of FIG. 241 (T) continues and the game ball B is placed in the second starting port 2005 If you win a prize and the fluctuation of the special drawing 2 corresponding to the winning is other than the normal jackpot fluctuation, the display in Figure 241 (R) will be displayed, and even if the fluctuation of the special drawing 2 corresponding to the winning is a normal jackpot fluctuation. For example, it is preferable that a display indicating a transition to a chance mode (low probability non-time saving gaming state) be made.

In addition, when the small winning game in FIG. 241 (T) ends without the change of the special drawing 2 being suspended, for example, the performance during the high probability non-time saving game state which will be described later may be performed. , the display of FIG. 241(R) continues or a display indicating transition to the chance mode (low probability non-time saving gaming state) is made, and when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, the high probability non-time saving mode described later is displayed. The performance may be performed during the time saving game state.

Control for displaying the effect of the pedestal will be described below with reference to FIGS. 240(K) and 240(L). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when transitioning to the high probability time saving gaming state (with ceiling), refers to the time saving number table, for example, and sets the number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling and the number of small winning fluctuations, Each time the fluctuation or small hit fluctuation is completed, the set number of fluctuations or the number of small winning fluctuations is subtracted by one.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the small hit ceiling will be reached due to the small hit variation that is the variation of the special figure 1 after 4 times, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 Information indicating that the small hit ceiling will be reached is included in the preliminary determination command in step S245. Thereby, the CPU of the peripheral control IC can refer to the preliminary determination command and display the effect of the pedestal in FIG. 240(K). Similar control is performed for displaying the effect of the pedestal in FIG. 240(L).

In addition, even if the remaining number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is within 4 times, the fluctuation of special drawing 1 before reaching the small winning ceiling (including the fluctuation during execution) If a jackpot fluctuation is included, the small hit ceiling cannot be reached (the jackpot fluctuation is a probability variable jackpot (with time saving), and after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling) again. , excluding the case where the variation of special chart 1 corresponding to the small hit ceiling in the previous high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) happens to be the "training reach ceiling"). In such a case, if the effect of the pedestal is displayed, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that a battle performance will be performed after the jackpot game with variations corresponding to the effect of the pedestal. Therefore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC refers to the advance judgment command and, even if the remaining number of fluctuations of special chart 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is within 4, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the process before reaching the small hit ceiling. If it is determined that the fluctuations (including the fluctuations during execution) of the special drawing 1 include jackpot fluctuations, the pedestal effect may not be displayed.

In addition, if the fluctuation of special drawing 1 that won after the effect of the pedestal is displayed and before the hold corresponding to the pedestal is a jackpot fluctuation, the fluctuation of special drawing 1 corresponding to the effect of the pedestal The battle performance is not performed (the jackpot fluctuation is a probability variable jackpot (with time saving), and after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability time saving game state (no ceiling), and the fluctuation of special figure 1 corresponding to the effect of the pedestal is coincidental. (Excluding cases such as "training reach ceiling").

In such a case, it is preferable to erase the pedestal effect after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot variation of special drawing 1 ends (if the change to battle suspension occurs, the battle suspension is deleted). In addition, after the effect of the pedestal is displayed, if the variation of special drawing 1 that won before the hold corresponding to the pedestal is a jackpot variation, if the pedestal effect remains displayed, the jackpot If a battle effect is performed after the game with changes corresponding to the effects of the pedestal, the player may misunderstand it. Therefore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC displays the effect of the pedestal, but refers to the advance judgment command and determines that the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 that won before the hold corresponding to the pedestal is a jackpot fluctuation. You may also delete the displayed pedestal effect.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC displays the effect of the pedestal, but refers to the advance judgment command and determines that the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 that won before the hold corresponding to the pedestal is a jackpot fluctuation. For example, a battle performance is performed based on the jackpot variation, and the effect of the displayed pedestal is erased, or the effect of the pedestal is displayed on the pedestal of the variation (sudden display, moving display, etc.), and the jackpot is displayed. The suspension corresponding to the fluctuation may be changed to the battle suspension. At this time, it is preferable that the value of the counter is also subtracted so that a battle performance is performed according to the jackpot fluctuation. Then, if the jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation of a certain variable jackpot (direct rush), it is sufficient to perform a battle performance in which the main character wins, and if the said jackpot fluctuation is other than a fluctuation of a certain variable jackpot (direct rush), It is sufficient to perform a battle performance in which the main character is defeated.

For example, if an effect is displayed on the pedestal corresponding to the small winning ceiling, and the fluctuation corresponding to the small winning ceiling is a jackpot fluctuation, the battle pending is displayed as in FIG. 240(M). You may. In this case, for example, if the jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation of a certain variable jackpot (direct rush), the main character may win in the battle performance, and if the said jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation of a variable jackpot (direct rush), then If so, it is sufficient to perform a battle performance in which the main character is defeated.

In addition, after changing the pedestal effect in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations of special drawing 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small winning ceiling is 4 or less, there is a prize corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 2, and the small winning ceiling is reached. If the jackpot fluctuation of this special drawing 2 ends before the end of the fluctuation corresponding to , for example, a special effect (a presentation showing that the jackpot of special drawing 2 has been won) is performed in the jackpot fluctuation of this special drawing 2. , After the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation of this special drawing 2, the game state (if the jackpot of special drawing 2 is a normal jackpot, the low probability non-time saving game state, if the jackpot of special drawing 2 is a probability variable jackpot, the high probability The stage is moved to a stage corresponding to the time-saving game state (no ceiling), the pedestal effect is erased, and special drawing 1 is displayed in a normal manner.

In addition, after changing the pedestal effect in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations of special drawing 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small winning ceiling is 4 or less, there is a prize corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 2, and the small winning ceiling is reached. If the jackpot fluctuation of this special drawing 2 ends before the end of the fluctuation corresponding to After the game ends, a stage corresponding to the game state (low probability non-time saving gaming state if the jackpot of special drawing 2 is a normal jackpot, high probability time saving gaming state (no ceiling) if the jackpot of special drawing 2 is a probability variable jackpot) , the pedestal effect may be erased, and the hold of the special drawing 1 may be displayed in a normal manner.

In addition, although the fluctuation of special map 1 and the fluctuation of special map 2 are executed at the same time, the variation time of one time of the "strategy countermeasure length fluctuation" of special map 2 is the remaining 4 to the small hit ceiling of special map 1. It may be set longer than the total fluctuation time of the number of times, and if this is done, the remaining number of fluctuations of special chart 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is within 4 times, and the number of fluctuations of special chart 2 is within 4 times. Even if there is a prize that corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling of special drawing 1 will end before the jackpot fluctuation of special drawing 2 ends, so even if the pedestal effect is displayed, there will be no special effect. There is no need to do this.

In the example shown in Fig. 240, the display of the pedestal effect was started during the variation that was being executed when the variation four moves ahead was the ceiling of the small hit, but the number of remaining variations until the ceiling of the small hit was The display of the pedestal effect may be started during a variation that is being executed three times or less. However, in this case, if the suspension of the variation corresponding to the small winning ceiling has been won by the time the pedestal effect starts displaying, for example, at that timing, the pending display of the variation corresponding to the small winning ceiling will be put on hold in battle. A pending change effect may be executed that causes the change to change to .

In addition, even when changing the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), an effect may be displayed on the pedestal that corresponds to the change in "reach ceiling during training" (in this case, the change in "reach ceiling during training" will change with certainty). If it is not a jackpot (direct rush), the main character will be defeated in the battle performance described later). In addition, in both the high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving game state (without a ceiling), a variation pattern that is not selected by a variation corresponding to a small hit ceiling such as "in training" (battle production is executed) An effect may be displayed on the pedestal that corresponds to the fluctuation (variation pattern that does not win) (in this case, if the hold corresponding to the pedestal wins, the normal hold will be displayed instead of the battle hold) ). With these effects, even if an effect is displayed on the pedestal, the player does not know whether the state will transition to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state after the fluctuation corresponding to the pedestal ends, so it is possible to maintain a sense of tension. .

According to the hit determination table in FIG. 220(a), in the high-probability gaming state, no winning fluctuations are executed, and the fluctuations other than the jackpot fluctuations are small winning fluctuations. The value (indicating the remaining number of times until the variation of the battle performance that can be executed on the ceiling) is subtracted by 1 each time the variation of special drawing 1 is executed, unless the variation is a jackpot variation.

Here, for example, even in a high-probability gaming state, a winning variation may be won. In this case, even if the variation of special figure 1 is executed, if the variation is a deviation variation, the value of the counter will not be subtracted. Furthermore, even if the variation of special figure 1 is executed while the effect of the pedestal is being displayed, the effect of the pedestal does not move to one pedestal on the right, but is displayed on the same pedestal.

If you win a winning variation even in a high probability gaming state, there is a possibility that the variation ceiling will be reached and you will move to a high probability non-time saving gaming state. Then, a counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations expected to reach the fluctuation ceiling may be displayed. Also, if you win a winning variation even in a high probability gaming state, in addition to or in place of the effect on the pedestal shown in Figure 240, an effect will be displayed on the pedestal at the pending position where it is expected that the variation ceiling will be reached. may be done.

Furthermore, there may be an effect stage, a background image, etc. that makes the player expect that the number of fluctuations in the remaining small winnings until the ceiling of the small winnings is small. For example, it is assumed that the background image is in the order of daytime < evening < night, and the degree of expectation is high that the number of fluctuations in the remaining small winnings until the ceiling of the small winnings is small. For example, it is assumed that a daytime background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and then changes to an evening background image when the small winning variation ends. When a winning variation is won even in a high probability game state, if the winning variation is won in this state, the background image of the evening is maintained because the remaining number of small winning variations until the ceiling of the small winning is not reduced.

In addition, if the power of Pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the pedestal effect is displayed, or if the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display is displayed, the winning corresponding to the pedestal effect will not occur and the game will be terminated. If the effect of the pedestal becomes invisible (or is not displayed in the first place), such as when canceling and moving to the demo screen, the effect of the pedestal will be changed when returning from such a state. It is desirable that the effect of the pedestal be displayed because the player feels uneasy if the pedestal is erased.

Specifically, for example, the effect information of the pedestal may be stored as game backup information, and the effect of the pedestal may be displayed at the same time as the game returns from the state. In addition, even if the effect information of the pedestal is not stored in the game backup information, when returning from the state, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can generate the above-mentioned advance judgment command and send it again to the peripheral control IC. , the effect of the pedestal may be redisplayed.

In addition, some players do not want other players to know that the pedestal effect is displayed and there is a high expectation of transition to the high probability non-time saving gaming state, so the pedestal effect as described above is displayed. In the case where the pedestal becomes invisible (or is not displayed in the first place), the effect of the pedestal does not need to be redisplayed when the pedestal returns from such a state.

FIG. 242 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance in a high probability non-time saving gaming state. The high probability non-time saving game state is a small win rush state, and is a state in which the player can easily obtain balls by playing the small win game of special drawing 2. In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right-handed, so in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is displayed (“Right-handed hitting!!” is displayed inside) A right-pointing arrow) is always displayed at the upper right of the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 242(A) shows a state in which the small winning variation of the special drawing 2 has ended in the high probability non-time saving game state. At the end of the small winning fluctuation of special figure 2 (that is, immediately before the start of the small winning game), an effect is displayed. In addition, during the small winning game in the high probability non-time saving game state and the high probability non time saving gaming state, while the press operation part 303 is pressed down, the pseudo big winning opening provided inside the second big winning opening 2007 2402 opens (that is, when the press operation part 303 is pressed, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 opens, but when the press is stopped, it closes again). When the game ball B enters the pseudo big prize opening 2402, a new prize ball is not obtained, but the presentation mode changes.

In FIG. 242(A), an image of the main character uttering the line "Erase me!" (which urges erasing the character image) and a display prompting to operate the press operation unit 303 (combined) are shown. (also referred to as a first instruction display) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the number displayed at the lower left of the effect display device 1600 indicates that one high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (if you win a probability variable jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state continues) is treated as one high-probability non-time-saving gaming state that has not yet ended.In addition, even if you win a normal jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state and transition to the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state Even if you win a fixed variable jackpot and return to the high probability non-time saving gaming state, it may be treated as if the one high probability gaming state has not ended. This is an acquired ball display indicating the total number of prize balls obtained when the game ball B that entered the winning hole 2402 entered the second large winning hole 2007 before that. In addition, in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state (even in a small winning game in which a prize is won in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state), "Rush!!" indicates a small winning rush state, which is an advantageous state for the player. is displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, although the details will be described later, it is desirable that the display "Rush!!" be erased from the middle of the jackpot fluctuation in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, and not be displayed even in the jackpot game.

FIG. 242(B) shows the state during the small winning game where the player won in FIG. 242(A). In FIG. 242(B), the player does not follow the instructions on the first instruction display and does not press the press operation section 303 (that is, the sensor provided on the press operation section 303 does not detect the operation), that is, the pseudo The big prize opening 2402 is not open. Since the player does not follow the instructions on the first instruction display, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is closed. Therefore, although the game ball B is won into the second big winning hole 2007 during the small winning game, the game ball B does not enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402. In this case, although a prize ball is obtained by winning into the second grand prize opening 2007, the value of the acquired ball display does not increase.

FIG. 242(C) shows a state where small winning fluctuations are performed in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state. In FIG. 242(C), the player presses down the pressing operation section 303 according to the instructions on the first instruction display (that is, the sensor provided on the pressing operation section 303 detects the operation), that is, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is pressed down. It is in an open state. While the press operation section 303 is pressed down, the first instruction display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, as soon as the press operation part 303 is pressed (that is, as soon as the sensor provided in the press operation part 303 detects the operation), the first instruction display is erased and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is opened. Alternatively, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the press operation section 303 was pressed (that is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sensor provided in the press operation section 303 detected the operation) (this predetermined time has a plurality of values). (In this case, one value is selected from a plurality of values according to a predetermined distribution)), the first instruction display may be deleted and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 may be opened.

Similarly, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the pressing of the press operation section 303 was stopped (that is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sensor provided in the press operation section 303 stopped detecting the operation) (there are multiple values for this predetermined period of time). In this case, one value is selected from a plurality of values according to a predetermined distribution), and the first instruction display may be displayed.

FIG. 242(D) shows a state where the small winning game is being executed while the pressing operation section 303 is being pressed down. Since the player follows the instructions on the first instruction display, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is open. Therefore, when game balls B are won into the second big winning hole 2007 during a small winning game, most of them (for example, 95%) also enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402. Every time the game ball B enters the pseudo big winning hole 2402 (that is, when the sensor installed in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 detects the game ball B), "+15" is displayed (that is, when the game ball B enters the pseudo big winning hole 2402). The prize ball obtained when the played game ball B previously entered the second grand prize opening 2007 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the value of the acquired ball display is also increased by 15.

In this way, by operating the pressing operation section 303 to open the pseudo big prize opening 2402, the display indicating the acquired and put out balls is performed for the first time. It is possible to provide a game with high operability that allows constant operation.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the exact number of balls won (that is, the value that includes the balls won by the game ball B that entered the second big prize opening 2007 but did not enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402) is displayed, for example, on the result screen at the end of the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, but if the player does not dare to operate the press operation unit 303, the accurate acquired and paid balls may not be displayed until the result screen is displayed. It is possible to make the numbers unknown, and it can also increase the sense of tension. In this way, once the correct number of balls won and the value displayed on the display of balls won, this difference cannot be corrected by the player's intention (operation), and the player waits until the result screen is displayed. There must be. However, it is possible that the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state continues for a long time and the result screen is not displayed easily, so this discrepancy can be corrected by the player operating a predetermined operation section (i.e., changing the display of acquired balls). The value may match the exact number of balls obtained.

The position and size of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is such that if the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is open, most (for example, 95% or more) or all of the game balls B that entered the second big winning hole 2007 will be pseudo big winning holes 2402. It is desirable that the ball be set to enter the grand prize opening 2402. Even though the pseudo-big winning hole 2402 is opened because the player wants to know the number of balls he has won, out of the game balls B that entered the second big winning hole 2007, the game ball enters the pseudo-big winning hole 2402. This is because if the rate of hitting balls is low, the player may feel stressed.

In addition, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, the first instruction display may not be displayed even if the press operation section 303 is not pressed. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of thinking about how to increase the value of the acquired balls display (in the first place, it is not known that it is the acquired balls displayed, but what value it is).

In addition, contrary to the above example, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 opens when the pressing operation section 303 is not pressed, and closes when the pressing operation section 303 is pressed down. You can also do this. In other words, the game feature is such that a player who does not want to know the number of acquired balls until the result screen is displayed presses the press operation section 303.

FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the performance of the high probability non-time saving gaming state. In FIG. 243(A), the special figure 2 is being changed, and the first instruction display is displayed because the press operation section 303 is not operated. In addition, in the example of FIG. 243, even if the press operation part 303 is operated according to the first instruction display to open the pseudo big prize opening 2402, the second opening angle (hereinafter also referred to as the first angle) is shallow. The game ball B that entered the grand prize opening 2007 cannot enter the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 (or only a portion (approximately 10% of the game balls B that entered the second grand prize opening 2007) enters the pseudo grand prize opening 2402. ).

In Figure 243(B), the fluctuation of special map 2 in Figure 243(A) continues, and in addition to the main character's line, "Erase me!!" (the main character's "Erase me! A chance character (a character displayed larger than the main character) that emits a message (displayed larger than the line that prompts deletion of the character image), and a display that prompts to press the press operation section 303 twice (this The three displays are also called a double instruction display).

When the press operation unit 303 is pressed twice according to the two-instruction display in FIG. 243(B), the state described in FIGS. 243(C1) to (C4) is entered (for example, according to a predetermined distribution). 243 (C1) to (C4) are states in which a small winning game is being played after the press operation section 303 is pressed twice according to the 2-instruction display, and the user is prompted to press the press operation section 303. The image has been deleted.

In FIG. 243 (C1), the main character and the chance character have been deleted. In this case, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 opens at an angle (hereinafter also referred to as a second angle) deep enough to allow the game ball B to enter, and the game ball B enters the pseudo big winning hole 2402. Therefore, a display similar to that shown in FIG. 243 (D1) is performed.

In FIG. 243 (C2), the main character has been deleted, but the chance character is displayed. In this case, although the pseudo big winning hole 2402 opens, the opening angle (hereinafter also referred to as the third angle) is deeper than according to the first instruction display, but the game ball B that entered the second big winning hole 2007 won the pseudo big prize. The hole 2402 is so shallow that it cannot be entered (or only some (approximately 30% of the game balls B that entered the second big winning hole 2007) enter). Therefore, the value of the acquired balls display does not increase, and "+15!" is not displayed.

In FIG. 243 (C3), the main character is displayed although the chance character has been deleted. In this case, since the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is open at the first angle, the game ball B does not enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402. Therefore, the value of the acquired balls display does not increase, and "+15!" is not displayed.

In FIG. 243 (C4), both the main character and the chance character remain displayed without being erased. In this case, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is not opened, and the game ball B does not enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402. Therefore, the value of the acquired balls display does not increase, and "+15!" is not displayed.

Note that only the chance character and a display prompting the user to press the touch operation section 302 different from the press operation section 303 (these two displays are also collectively referred to as a second instruction display) may be displayed. In this case, when the contact operation unit 302 is operated according to the second instruction display, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 opens at the third angle.

Further, the double instruction display in FIG. 243(B) may be in a state where both the first instruction display and the second instruction display are displayed. In this case, for example, if you first operate the pressing operation part 303 according to the first instruction display, the first instruction display will be erased and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 will open at the first angle, and then you will first operate the touch operation section according to the second instruction display. When the portion 302 is operated, the second instruction display is erased and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is opened at the third angle. Then, when the operations of both the press operation section 303 and the contact operation section 302 are completed, both the first instruction display and the second instruction display are erased, and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 opens at the third angle.

In addition, in the double instruction display, the display area of the main character or the lines of the main character and the lines of the chance character or the chance character may overlap, but the pseudo big prize opening 2402 will be larger if the chance character is deleted. Since the opening angle is large, in the overlapping display area, the chance character and the lines of the chance character are displayed with priority over the main character and the lines of the main character.

In addition, there is a transition from the state where the first instruction display is displayed to the state where the double instruction display is displayed, but the state where the second instruction display is displayed and the double instruction display is displayed. It is desirable not to transition to the state. This is because if, after the chance character is displayed, the main character, which has a lower display priority than the chance character and is also smaller in display size, is displayed, the player's expectations may be diminished. Further, the state in which the first instruction display is displayed may be changed to a state in which only the second instruction display is displayed instead of the double instruction display. In this case, when the contact operation section 302 is operated according to the second instruction display, the second instruction display may be erased and the first instruction display may be displayed.

When a first instruction display, a second instruction display, or a double instruction display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, sounds corresponding to these instruction displays (for example, the lines of each instruction, "Press the button!", etc.) are played. May be output. However, if the sound corresponding to the first instruction display shifts to one of the second instruction display or double instruction display while the sound corresponding to the first instruction display is being displayed, the output of the sound corresponding to the first instruction display will be stopped and the output of the sound corresponding to the first instruction display will be interrupted. It is preferable that the sound corresponding to the above is outputted preferentially. Additionally, if the sound corresponding to the double instruction display or the second instruction display is output and the transition is made to the first instruction display, the output of the sound corresponding to the one is stopped and the sound corresponding to the first instruction display is output. It would be nice if sound was output.

Further, when a first instruction display, a second instruction display, or a double instruction display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lamp may emit light in a manner corresponding to these instruction displays. However, if the lamp shifts to either the second instruction display or double instruction display while the lamp is emitting light in the manner corresponding to the first instruction display, the lamp sound will emit light in the manner corresponding to the first instruction display. It is preferable that the lamps emit light preferentially in a mode corresponding to the one by discontinuing the above. In addition, if the lamp is emitting light in the mode corresponding to the second instruction display or double instruction display and the transition is made to the first instruction display, the lamp in the mode corresponding to the one will stop emitting light and the first instruction display will be displayed. It is preferable that the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the above.

Further, the timing of paying out the game balls B may also be matched with the timing of increase in the display of acquired balls. That is, when the first instruction display, the second instruction display, or the double instruction display is displayed, the number of acquired balls displayed does not increase, so the game ball B is not paid out at that timing. In this case, the number of game balls B that entered the second grand prize opening 2007 but did not enter the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 is stored, and for example, when the result screen is displayed (i.e., the first instruction display or the It is preferable that the balls corresponding to the stored number of game balls B be paid out when the display or the double instruction display is finished.

Note that the chance character may be a character that appears only in the high probability non-time saving game state, and in this case there are few opportunities for the player to see the chance character. is always displayed (in this mode, even if the player operates the push operation section 303 or the effect operation section 304, the display of the chance character is not erased and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is not opened). (remains closed) may exist. This mode in which the chance character is always displayed is a very special mode, so the transition between the normal mode and the mode in which the chance character is always displayed depends on the operation of the player's control panel. It is desirable that this is impossible, and that it can only be performed, for example, by operating an operating section that can be operated by a hall clerk with the door frame 5 open.

Furthermore, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial state may be set to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state so that the player can easily obtain the balls. good. As a result, for example, even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the first instruction display, second instruction display, or double instruction display is displayed, the game can be executed. The first instruction display, the second instruction display, and the double instruction display are displayed at the same time as the state is reached or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

FIG. 244 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a performance performed when transitioning from a high probability non-time saving gaming state to a low probability time saving gaming state. As mentioned above, if you win the normal jackpot of special drawing 2 in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, you will move to the low-probability time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and if you win the probability variable jackpot of special drawing 2, even after the jackpot playing ends. The high probability non-time saving gaming state continues.

FIG. 244(A) shows a state in which a normal jackpot variation (that is, a jackpot variation that transitions to a low probability time-saving gaming state) is performed in a high probability non-time saving gaming state. Hereinafter, up to FIG. 244(F) is a state in which the normal jackpot fluctuation is performed. In FIG. 244(B), the effect display device 1600 goes black, suggesting that a jackpot has been won. Since it is suggested that the player has won the jackpot and there is a possibility that the high probability non-time-saving gaming state will end, the display "Rush in progress!!" is erased. In FIG. 244(C), the result screen is displayed, and in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the acquired balls are displayed (i.e., only the balls that are counted when the ball enters the pseudo big prize opening 2402) are counted. The number of balls released is displayed.

FIG. 244(D) is a continuation of the result screen, and the value of the acquired balls display is the number of balls actually won in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (i.e., all the balls due to winning in the second big prize opening 2007). The ball has changed to an out ball (including a ball that did not enter the pseudo big prize opening 2420). This allows the player to check the number of balls actually won. In addition, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, if all the game balls B that won in the second big winning hole 2007 are entered into the pseudo big winning hole 2420, the display of the number of balls put out does not change.

In FIG. 244(E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into two, and one display area has a display indicating that the small hit rush continues (that is, the winning jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot). , In the other display area, there is a display indicating that the game is moving to the pullback mode (that is, the jackpot that has been won is a normal jackpot). Further, a display prompting the user to operate the press operation section 303 is displayed.

FIG. 244(F) shows a state in which the press operation unit 303 has been operated in FIG. 244(E), and in the example of FIG. 244, since the jackpot has been won, a display indicating that the mode will shift to the pullback mode is shown. The transition to the pullback mode is indicated by continuing to display the display area in which the display area is displayed, and blacking out the other display area.

FIG. 244(G) shows a state where a normal jackpot game has started. In the jackpot game of special figure 2, since the second big prize opening 2007 is opened, it is suggested in the effect display device 1600 that the player should play the game aiming at the second big winning opening 2007. FIG. 244(H) shows a state in which the state has shifted to a low probability time saving game state. A display indicating the number of time-saving games in the low-probability time-saving game state is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is different from the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the player was staying until just before, and since playing the game with the left hand is an advantageous gaming method for the player, the left-handed playing state is displayed ( A left-pointing arrow written as ``Hit left!!'' is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, in the above example, the number of newly acquired balls in the small winning game during the high probability non-time saving gaming state is always greater than or equal to the acquired ball display displayed during the high probability non time saving gaming state. Conversely, for example, before the small winning game of special figure 2 starts, the maximum number of balls that can be won in one small winning game (for example, the second large number in one small winning game) The number of balls that are put out when one game ball B enters the winning hole 2007) may be added to the value of the acquired and put out ball display. Also, for example, the number of prize balls obtained when one game ball B enters the second big prize opening 2007 or the maximum number of balls that can be obtained in one small winning game (for example, The number of balls put out when two game balls B enter the second big prize opening 2007 in one small winning game) may be added to the value of the acquired balls display.

Specifically, for example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, the peripheral control IC sends a preliminary determination command to the main control board 1310 indicating that the variation corresponding to the winning is a small winning variation. If received from the main control MPU 1310a of Add the number to the value displayed on the acquired balls display. Therefore, the number of newly acquired balls in the small winning game during the high probability non-time saving game state will always be less than the value of the acquired ball display. However, for the change in special figure 2 after the normal jackpot change, it is not necessary to add the value of the acquired ball display before starting the small hit game (shifting to the low probability time-saving game state and changing the special figure 2 small (This is because you cannot receive balls from winning games).

Then, when the result screen is displayed, the value of the acquired ball display displayed on the result screen is changed to the number of balls actually acquired in the high probability non-time saving gaming state (i.e. during the small winning game of special drawing 2). The number of balls that could not be won because the player could not enter the second grand prize opening 2007 is subtracted. As a result, players can check their own gaming skills by knowing the difference between the maximum number of balls that can be obtained and the number of balls that have actually been obtained in small winning games during the high probability non-time-saving gaming state. can do.

Also, instead of adjusting the value displayed in the acquired balls display on the result screen to the actual number of balls actually acquired at once, it may be adjusted every time a small winning game starts or ends. . Specifically, for example, if the value of the acquired ball display is increased before the small winning game starts, but the game ball B does not enter the second big prize opening 2007 in the small winning game. decreases the value of the acquired balls display at the end of the small winning game, or increases the value of the acquired balls display at the next small winning game.

The comment selection effect will be explained below. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter is provided with a cross key consisting of an upper button, a lower button, a left button, and a right button that can be operated by a player. The comment selection performance is a performance that can appear in any of the following game states: low probability non-time saving gaming state, high probability non-time saving gaming state, high probability non-time saving gaming state, and low probability time saving gaming state. It is assumed that this is a performance that can appear even during a jackpot game. Hereinafter, an example in which a comment selection performance is executed in a low probability non-time saving gaming state will be explained.

FIG. 245 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of comment selection performance. FIG. 245(A) shows a state in which the variation of special figure 1 is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display prompting the user to press the press operation section 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the comment selection effect has started. When a plurality of comments are displayed in the comment box and the user operates the upper or lower button, a black arrow for selecting a comment moves up and down. In FIG. 245(A), the comment "Uma" is selected. Note that the display prompting the user to press the press operation section 303 may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 245(B) shows the state of FIG. 245(A) with the lower button pressed. Since the down button was operated, the black arrow for selecting a comment moves down, and the comment "What is this lol" is selected.

FIG. 245(C) is an example of a state when the press operation unit 303 is operated in the state of FIG. 245(B). The image prompting the user to operate the press operation section 303 has been erased, and the comment indicated by the black arrow in FIG. 245(B) is displayed moving within the effect display device 1600 from the right end. Hereinafter, comments that are displayed while moving in a flowing manner will also be referred to as flowing comments. The flow comments are erased in order from the characters that reach the left end of the effect display device 1600.

Note that if all comments from different categories are displayed in one box, it will take time for the player to find the comment he or she wants to select from all the comments by simply operating the upper or lower button. If the left or right button is operated while is displayed, a comment whose category is different from the comment currently displayed in the comment box will be displayed.

By displaying the flow comment selected by the player in the comment selection performance, the player himself can select what kind of performance will appear, so that he can enjoy the performance even more. Although the details will be described later, the comment selection effect may be executable while the fluctuation is stopped.

FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection performance. FIG. 246(A) shows a state in which the variation of special figure 1 is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display prompting the user to press the press operation section 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the comment selection effect has started. One comment is displayed in the comment box. Note that the display prompting the user to press the press operation section 303 may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In the state shown in Figure 246(A), if the left or right button is operated, a comment with a different category from the comment currently displayed in the comment box will be displayed, and if the upper button is operated, it will be displayed in the comment box. (However, there is an upper limit to the number of comments that can be displayed in the comment box, and even if the up button is operated with the upper limit number of comments displayed, the number of comments displayed in the comment box will increase.) The number of comments displayed in the comment box decreases when the bottom button is operated (however, as in the example in Figure 246(A), when only one comment is displayed, (The display inside the comment box does not change even if the button is operated.)

FIG. 246(B1) is an example of a state when the press operation unit 303 is operated in the state of FIG. 246(A). The image prompting the user to operate the press operation section 303 has been erased, and the comment displayed in the comment box in FIG. 246(A) is displayed moving within the effect display device 1600 from the right end.

FIG. 246(B2) is an example of a state when the press operation unit 303 is operated in the state of FIG. 246(A). The image prompting the operation of the press operation unit 303 is erased, the comment displayed in the comment box in FIG. 1600 is displayed. In this way, when the comment selection performance and the dialogue performance can be executed with the same variation, both performances can proceed with a single operation of the press operation section 303, thereby saving the player's effort in operation. I can do it.

FIG. 246(B3) is an example of a state when the upper button is operated in the state of FIG. 246(A). One comment has been added above the comment displayed in FIG. 246(A). FIG. 246 (C3) is an example of a state when the upper button is further operated in the state of FIG. 246 (B3). One more comment has been added above the comment displayed in FIG. 246 (B3).

By adding one comment to the top row each time the upper button is operated in this way, the player can look forward to seeing what comments are available as options. However, since a comment in the comment box is added each time the upper button is operated, other effects are hidden by the added comments, reducing the visibility of the other effects. Therefore, for players who want to restore the visibility of other performances, when the bottom button is operated, the number of comments displayed in the comment box will decrease (the comments displayed at the top will be deleted). ).

In other words, in the example of FIG. 245, all comments are always displayed in the comment box in the comment selection effect, so there is an advantage that the player can recognize selectable comments at once, but in the example of FIG. Since the number of comments displayed in the comment box can be adjusted by the player by operating the upper and lower buttons, there is an advantage that the player himself can adjust the visibility of other effects.

FIG. 246 (D3) is an example of a state when the press operation unit 303 is operated in the state of FIG. 246 (C3). The image prompting the operation of the press operation section 303 is deleted, and the comment displayed at the top in the comment box in FIG. 246 (B3) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a flow comment.

In this way, when the press operation unit 303 is operated while a plurality of comments are displayed in the comment box, the comment displayed at the top of the comment box is displayed on the production display device 1600 as a flow comment. Is displayed. That is, a comment reflecting the results of the operation of the upper button and the lower button before operating the press operation section 303 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a flow comment. Note that when the display of the flow comment starts, a sound in a mode corresponding to the selected flow comment (for example, the sound of the wording of the flow comment itself) may be output. Thereby, the player can enjoy operating the press operation section 303 more in the comment selection performance. Furthermore, each time the number of comments in the comment box increases or decreases by operating the upper and lower buttons, a sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the flow comment displayed at the top. As a result, even if the player is concentrating on other effects that are changing and is not looking at the comment box, they can grasp what kind of comments there are by simply operating the up and down buttons. can.

Also, when a flow comment of a certain category is displayed, a sound of the mode corresponding to the flow comment is output, and when a flow comment of another category is displayed, which can be selected by operating the left or right button. In this case, the display of the effect display device 1600 may be changed to a display mode corresponding to the flow comment. For example, if the other category includes comments such as "Day!", "Evening!", and "Night!", and "Day!" is displayed as a flowing comment, the background image on the effect display device 1600 is changed to a daytime background, and when "Evening!" is displayed as a running comment, the background image on the effect display device 1600 is changed to an evening background, and when "Night!" is displayed as a running comment. The background image on the effect display device 1600 is changed to a night background. Note that a plurality of comment boxes may be displayed at the same time, and comments of different categories may be displayed in each comment box (in this case, for example, a comment box can be selected by operating the left or right button. ).

In this way, by changing the display of the effect display device 1600 along with the display of the flow comment, the player can enjoy the display of the flow comment and the change of the background image at the same time. Note that each time the number of comments in the other category in the comment box increases or decreases by operating the upper and lower buttons, the display mode may change to correspond to the flow comment displayed at the top.

In addition, in FIG. 246(A), one comment in the category in the comment box is displayed first, but all comments in the category may be displayed first (by operating the bottom button). (This can reduce the number of comments displayed.) Further, in the comment selection presentation, all comments in the category may be always displayed, and when the upper and lower buttons are operated, the cursor moves, and a comment may be selected by moving the cursor. In this way, by being able to recognize all comments from the beginning, it becomes easier for the player to select from the beginning which comments to display as flowing comments.

In addition, in the comment selection performance, the comment selected by the player by operating the up button, down button, left button, or right button, and the press operation section 303 is displayed as a flowing comment on the performance display device 1600, so the selection The contents of the flow comments displayed and the number of flow comments displayed do not indicate the expected level of jackpot or small hit of the fluctuation being executed.

In addition, in the comment selection effect, in order to make it easier for the player to read the comment, the display priority of the effect display device 1600 for the comment when at least a part of the display area of the comment box and another effect image overlaps It is desirable that the display priority is higher than that of the effect image. In other words, if at least part of the display area of another performance image and a comment box overlap, the comment box is visible in the overlapping display area, and the other performance image is not visible. good.

Further, when an error display and a comment box are displayed at the same time, it is desirable that the display priority of the comment in the comment box in the effect display device 1600 is lower than that of the error display. Further, when the movable body provided in the pachinko machine 1 moves onto the effect display device 1600 and covers at least a part of the comment box, the at least part of the area becomes invisible. Needless to say.

In this manner, in the comment selection performance, the comment selected by the player can be displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a running comment, so the player can enjoy the performance selected by himself. Further, a comment box may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the comment selection effect may be constantly executed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the flowing comments at any time.

FIG. 247 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection performance. FIG. 247(A) shows a state in which the variation of special figure 1 is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display prompting repeated hits on the press operation section 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the comment selection effect has started. One comment is displayed in the comment box. Note that the display prompting repeated hits of the press operation section 303 may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 247(B) shows a state in which the pressing operation part 303 is pressed repeatedly in FIG. 247(A). Flow comments corresponding to the number of times the press operation section 303 has been operated are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the press operation section 303 is further operated while the flow comment is being displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of flow comments can be simultaneously displayed on the effect display device 1600. By repeatedly tapping the operation unit 303 at high speed, it is possible to execute an effect that displays a large number of flow comments on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 248 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection performance. In the example of FIG. 248, similarly to the example of FIG. 246, the player can adjust the number of comments displayed in the comment box by operating the upper and lower buttons. FIG. 248(A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 has started to fluctuate. FIG. 248(B) shows a continuation of the variation of special figure 1 in FIG. 248(A), where one comment is displayed in the comment box and comment selection performance has started. Note that the display of the comment box may be started at the same time as the fluctuation starts, or the display of the comment box may be started by operating a predetermined operation section (for example, the press operation section 303) during the fluctuation.

In the example of FIG. 248, an image prompting the user to operate the press operation section 303 is not displayed, but as in FIG. 246, if the press operation section 303 is operated with the comment box displayed, The comments displayed at the top are displayed as flowing comments. Further, the comment box may be displayed at the same time as the fluctuation starts, or the comment box may be displayed when the press operation unit 303 is operated once during the fluctuation.

FIG. 248(C) shows a state in which the upper button in FIG. 248(B) has been operated and one comment has been added. FIG. 248(D) shows a state in which the press operation unit 303 in FIG. 248(C) is operated and the comment at the top of the comment box is displayed as a flowing comment. FIG. 248(E) shows that when the upper button is operated in FIG. 248(D) and one comment is added, and before the flow comment that started to be displayed in FIG. 248(D) is deleted, the press operation section 303 is operated, and the comment at the top of the comment box is also displayed as a running comment.

FIG. 248(F) shows a state in which the fluctuations performed from FIGS. 248(A) to 248(E) have been completed. At the same time as the variation ends, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the variation (for example, 5 seconds later), the comment box is deleted. In a state where the comment box is not displayed, no flow comment is displayed even if the press operation unit 303 is operated.

Figure 248 (G) shows a state in which the fluctuation remains stopped, and the comment box is redisplayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the comment box was deleted in Figure 248 (F). . As a result, it is possible to display the flowing comment even when the fluctuation is stopped, and even if the player wants to concentrate on performances other than the flowing comment during the fluctuation, the flowing comment performance can be displayed after the fluctuation has ended. It can be confirmed.

For example, a player who likes a certain comment displays the comment as a running comment, so the comment box is deleted while the comment is displayed at the top of the comment box. When the comment box is redisplayed after the variation ends, the comments that the player liked are displayed as shown in FIG. 248 (G) so that they can be immediately displayed as flowing comments (that is, they are redisplayed after the variation has stopped). It is desirable that the comment in the comment box be the same as the comment in the comment box displayed in FIG. 248(E) (that is, immediately before being deleted at the end of the variation or after a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the variation).

FIG. 248(H) shows a state in which the press operation unit 303 is operated in FIG. 248(G), and the comment displayed at the top of the comment box is displayed as a flowing comment on the effect display device 1600. Note that if the state where the fluctuations are stopped is maintained, for example, a comment box continues to be displayed so that the player can enjoy the flowing comments at any time. Furthermore, if the state in which the fluctuation is stopped is maintained, a loop may be repeated in which the comment box is deleted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the comment box is redisplayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Note that even in this deletion and redisplay loop, it is desirable that the contents of the redisplayed comment box be the same as the contents of the comment box immediately before deletion.

Note that in FIG. 248(F), the comment box is temporarily deleted after the fluctuation is stopped, but since some players may want to enjoy the flowing comments immediately after the fluctuation is stopped, the comment box may remain displayed. In addition, after the comment box was temporarily deleted after the fluctuation stopped, the comment box was automatically redisplayed after a predetermined time elapsed, but since some players do not like the comment selection effect, The comment box may be redisplayed when the operation unit (for example, the press operation unit 303) is operated.

Note that the display size and display position of the comment box displayed during fluctuation and the comment box displayed while fluctuation is stopped may be the same or may be different. The display size of the comment box displayed while the fluctuation is stopped may be the same or different. For example, while the fluctuation is stopped, only the comment selection effect is executed, and while the fluctuation is in progress, effects other than the comment selection effect are also executed. It is better to display it larger near the center of 1600.

As in the example in FIG. 248, by making the comment selection effect that can be executed during fluctuation even after the fluctuation has stopped, even though the player is playing the game by operating the handle 195, The performance can be enjoyed even when the game ball B does not enter the starting hole and the variation does not start.

FIG. 249 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection performance. FIG. 249(A) shows that an SP reach performance (a reach performance with higher jackpot expectation than normal reach) is executed in the variation of special figure 1 in a low probability non-time saving gaming state, and a white character is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Displayed. In the SP reach of FIG. 249, a white character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and whether or not characters are subsequently displayed on the character's face and the characters themselves indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

FIG. 249(B) shows a continuation of the SP reach effect, in which the word "meat" is displayed on the character's face, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot. FIG. 249(C) shows a continuation of the SP reach effect. The character with the word "meat" still displayed is displayed, and multiple flow comments are automatically displayed without any operation by the player.

The flow comments that can be automatically displayed in the SP reach effect may suggest the degree of jackpot expectation, for example, by the number of flow comments displayed and the comment content. Further, it is desirable that the flow comments that can be automatically displayed in the SP reach effect do not overlap with the flow comments that can be displayed by the player's operation. If these flow comments overlap, the flow comments that can be displayed by the player's operations can be displayed even when the expectation of jackpot is not high, so if this flow comment is automatically displayed during the SP reach effect, the game This is because there is a risk of reducing people's expectations.

On the other hand, some players may want to check the flow comments displayed during the SP reach effect later, so the flow comments that can be displayed during the SP reach effect are included in the flow comments that can be displayed by the player's operation. Good too.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game machine may be a pachislot machine or a game that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. The present invention may also be applied to other machines, and even in this case, the same effects as described above can be achieved. Furthermore, it can be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which the player does not touch the game balls B, and to game machines called managed game machines.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5A Game board 5B Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1310 Main control board 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Effect display device 2002 gate 2002,
2004 First starting port 2004
2005 Second starting opening 2006 First big winning opening 2007 Second big winning opening 2402 Pseudo big winning opening 3000 Back unit (rear unit)
3010 Back box (holding body)
3010a Opening 3011 Functional surface section (specific surface section)
3012 Functional hole portion 3015 Predetermined member 3016 Intermediate member 3017 Intermediate member 3200 Back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3201 Back front peripheral edge decoration body (decoration body)

Claims (1)

a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions;
A benefit granting means capable of granting any one of a plurality of benefits including at least a first benefit and a second benefit, based on the result of the winning lottery by the lottery means;
performance execution means for performing a performance based on the result of the winning/losing lottery;
a performance display means for displaying a performance executed by the performance execution means;
A gaming machine comprising an operation section that can be operated by a player,
The expected number of game media that can be awarded to the player when the second benefit is awarded is configured to be smaller than when the first benefit is awarded,
The blessing image is not displayed on the performance display means when the first benefit is awarded, and the blessing image can be displayed on the performance display means when the second benefit is awarded,
As a precursor to the display of the blessing image, it is possible to execute a sense of anticipation effect, and when the anticipation effect is executed and a specific effect result is obtained instead of a predetermined effect result, the blessing image is always displayed. is configured to display
After the blessing image is displayed, a blessing continuation image different from the blessing image can be displayed, and when the second benefit is granted again, both the anticipation effect and the blessing image are displayed. He made sure that nothing happened;
In a situation where the blessing continuation image is displayed, when a performance suggesting the granting of the first benefit is performed, the blessing continuation image is hidden in the progress of the performance based on the result of the winning lottery. is possible,
Before the performance result is shown in the expectation performance, the degree of expectation for the specific performance result can be suggested by a predetermined performance image,
In a situation where the blessing continuation image is displayed, it is possible to display a prompting image that prompts an operation on the operation section and a predetermined effect display that can be hidden based on the operation on the operation section,
In a situation where the blessing continuation image is displayed, when a production suggesting the granting of the first benefit is performed, the production based on the result of the winning/losing lottery may be performed even if no operation is performed on the operation section. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effect display is hidden together with the prompting image during the progress process .

Images